DCS-Mirror
/
BSA_en_tn
mirror of https://git.door43.org/BSA/en_tn
2
0
Fork 0
Files Issues Releases Wiki Activity See in Reader

Updating to v54

This commit is contained in:
Robert Hunt 2021-10-29 14:32:49 +13:00
parent 21b5990089
commit b24b644a54
28 changed files with 3220 additions and 2877 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

98
tn_1CO.tsv
View File

@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
1:5 jw1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ ἐπλουτίσθητε 1 Paul is speaking in general terms. Alternate translation: “made you rich with all kinds of spiritual blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:5 j48t ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ 1 God has enabled you to tell others about God’s message in many ways.
1:5 qy8c πάσῃ γνώσει 1 God has enabled you to understand God’s message in many ways.
1:6 h9zk τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) They had seen for themselves that what Paul had said about Christ was true. (2) Other people learned from seeing how they now live that what Paul and the Corinthians say about Christ is true.
1:6 h9zk τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) they had seen for themselves that what Paul had said about Christ was true. (2) other people learned from seeing how they now live that what Paul and the Corinthians say about Christ is true.
1:7 t2hd ὥστε 1 “Because what I have just said is true”
1:7 p5y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1:7 fe4q τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the time when God will reveal the Lord Jesus Christ. (2) This refers to the time when our Lord Jesus Christ will reveal himself.
1:7 fe4q τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the time when God will reveal the Lord Jesus Christ. (2) the time when our Lord Jesus Christ will reveal himself.
1:8 pif5 ἀνεγκλήτους 1 There will be no reason for God to condemn you.
1:9 u6w6 πιστὸς ὁ Θεὸς 1 “God will do everything he has said he will do”
1:9 kx3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
1:20 rkf9 γραμματεύς 1 a person who is recognized as someone who has studied a great deal
1:20 u5j5 συνζητητὴς 1 a person who argues about what he knows or who is skilled in such arguments
1:20 a7zl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize what God has done to the wisdom of this world. Alternate translation: “God has shown that everything they call wisdom is really foolishness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1:21 d7xw τοὺς πιστεύοντας 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to all who believe the message. (2) This refers to all who believe in Christ.
1:21 d7xw τοὺς πιστεύοντας 1 This could refer to: (1) all who believe the message. (2) all who believe in Christ.
1:22 v9fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the word **we** refers to Paul and other Bible teachers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:23 ntu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον 1 “about Christ, who died on a cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:23 krw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον 1 Just as a person can stumble over a block on a road, so the message of salvation through the crucifixion of the Christ keeps Jews from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “not acceptable” or “very offensive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:24 h7iw αὐτοῖς & τοῖς κλητοῖς 1 “to the people God calls”
1:24 hu1s Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν 1 This could mean: (1) God acted powerfully and wisely by sending Christ to die for us. (2) Through Christ, God has shown how strong and wise he is.
1:24 hu1s Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν 1 This could mean: (1) God acted powerfully and wisely by sending Christ to die for us. (2) through Christ, God has shown how strong and wise he is.
1:24 w9vm Θεοῦ δύναμιν 1 Another possible meaning is that Christ is powerful and it is through Christ that God saves us.
1:24 p1hu Θεοῦ σοφίαν 1 Another possible meaning is that God shows the content of his wisdom through Christ.
1:25 h9hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν, καὶ τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is speaking ironically about God’s foolishness and weakness. Paul knows God is not foolish or weak. Alternate translation: “what seems to be the foolishness of God is wiser than people’s wisdom, and what seems to be the weakness of God is stronger than the people’s strength” (2) Paul is speaking from the point of view of the Greek people who may think God is foolish or weak. Alternate translation: “what people call God’s foolishness is really wiser than what people call wisdom, and what people call God’s weakness is really stronger than people’s strength” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@ -75,14 +75,14 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
1:28 f11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ μὴ ὄντα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “things that people think are worth money” or “things that people think are worth respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:30 fmr3 ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 This refers to the work of Christ on the cross.
1:30 a7bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:30 f1at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is. (2) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:30 f1at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is. (2) Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 “If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is”
2:intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Wisdom\n\nPaul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
2:1 kjc7 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God.
2:1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
2:2 a2g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι & εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 When Paul said that he “decided to know nothing” he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “I decided to teach nothing … except Jesus Christ” or “I decided not to teach anything … except Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:3 s9lp κἀγὼ & ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 “I was visiting with you”
2:3 e8li ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “physically weak” (2) “feeling like I could not do what I needed to do.”
2:3 e8li ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 1 This could mean: (1) “physically weak.” (2) “feeling like I could not do what I needed to do.”
2:4 z81a πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις 1 words that sound wise and with which the speaker hopes to cause people to do or believe something
2:6 sg76 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul interrupts his main argument to explain what he means by “wisdom” and to whom he desires to speak.
2:6 azm7 δὲ λαλοῦμεν 1 The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Paul begins to explain that true wisdom is God’s wisdom.
@ -127,12 +127,12 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
3:7 dl3z οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι & ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός 1 Paul stresses that neither he nor Apollos is responsible for the believers’ spiritual growth, but it is God’s doing.
3:7 c68g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός 1 Here to give growth means to cause growth. The abstract noun **growth** can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it is God who causes you to grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:8 s16b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ φυτεύων & καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν 1 Paul speaks of telling people the good news and teaching those who have accepted it as if they were planting and watering plants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:8 za43 ἕν εἰσιν 1 Here, **one** could mean: (1) This means “united in purpose.” (2) This means “equal in importance.”
3:8 za43 ἕν εἰσιν 1 Here, **one** could mean: (1) “united in purpose.” (2) “equal in importance.”
3:8 zd36 μισθὸν 1 an amount of money that a worker receives for his work
3:9 gj26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 This refers to Paul and Apollos but not the Corinthian church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:9 r9sn Θεοῦ & συνεργοί 1 Paul considers himself and Apollos as working together.
3:9 lqg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ γεώργιον 1 This could mean: (1) Being God’s garden represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that belongs to God” (2) Being God’s garden represents God causing us to grow. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that God makes grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 l2fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή 1 This could mean: (1) Being God’s building represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that belongs to God” (2) Being God’s building represents God causing us to become what he wants. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that God is constructing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 lqg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ γεώργιον 1 Being God's garden could represent: (1) belonging to God. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that belongs to God” (2) God causing us to grow. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that God makes grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 l2fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή 1 Being God's building could represent: (1) belonging to God. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that belongs to God” (2) God causing us to become what he wants. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that God is constructing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:10 iln9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “According to the task that God freely gave me to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:10 a69q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θεμέλιον ἔθηκα 1 Paul equates his teaching of faith and salvation in Jesus Christ to laying a foundation for a building. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:10 pwi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄλλος & ἐποικοδομεῖ 1 Paul is referring to the person or people who are teaching the Corinthians at that time as if they are carpenters who are constructing the building above the foundation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
4:9 bb41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ Θεὸς ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους & ἀπέδειξεν 1 Paul expresses two ways how God has put his apostles on display for the world to see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
4:9 vfq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους & ἀπέδειξεν 1 God has displayed the apostles just like prisoners at the end of a Roman military parade, who are humiliated before their execution. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:9 cs4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπιθανατίους 1 God put the apostles on display like men who are about to be executed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:9 cqh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 This could mean: (1) The **world** consists of both supernatural (“angels”) and natural (“human beings”). (2) The list consists of three items: “to the world, to angels, and to human beings.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:9 cqh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 This could mean: (1) the **world** consists of both supernatural (“angels”) and natural (“human beings”). (2) the list consists of three items: “to the world, to angels, and to human beings.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:10 fkw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἡμεῖς μωροὶ & ἄτιμοι 1 Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians so they will think about what he is saying. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4:10 wqh7 ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι 1 “People treat you Corinthians as though you are important people”
4:10 z22c ἡμεῖς & ἄτιμοι 1 “people shame us apostles”
@ -209,9 +209,9 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
5:3 xm4e παρὼν & τῷ πνεύματι 1 “I am with you in spirit.” Being with them in spirit represents caring about them or wanting to be with them. Alternate translation: “I care about you” or “I want to be with you”
5:3 ax3u ἤδη κέκρικα & τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has decided what they should do with the one who did this. (2) Paul has found the person who did this guilty.
5:4 m9yz συναχθέντων ὑμῶν 1 “When you are together” or “When you meet together”
5:4 t83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) The name of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) Being assembled in the Lord’s name implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:4 t83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) the **name** of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) being assembled in the Lord’s **name** implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:5 xcf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 Handing the man over to Satan represents not allowing the man to be part of their group so that Satan would be allowed to harm him. Alternate translation: “make this man leave your group so that Satan can harm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:5 nq4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **flesh** refers to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) Here, **flesh** is a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:5 nq4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός 1 Here, **flesh** could be: (1) a reference to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:5 z2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God may save his spirit on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:6 h2hk οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 “Your boasting is bad”
5:6 ng4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ? 1 Just as a little yeast spreads throughout a whole loaf of bread, so can a little sin impact the entire fellowship of believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -236,9 +236,9 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
6:3 us55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν 1 Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: “You know that we will judge the angels.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:3 v5r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive κρινοῦμεν 1 Paul includes himself and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:3 x6h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι γε βιωτικά? 1 Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:4 vw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 This could mean: (1) This is a rhetorical question. (2) This is a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) This is a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:4 vw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 This could be: (1) a rhetorical question. (2) a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:4 xn32 βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 “If you are called upon to make decisions about daily life” or “If you must settle matters that are important in this life”
6:4 e791 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) They should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) They should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:4 e791 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) they should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) they should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:5 b2vy πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν 1 “to your dishonor” or “to show how you have failed in this matter”
6:5 fue4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ? 1 Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You should be ashamed that you cannot find a wise believer to settle arguments between believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:5 l1hd τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
6:9 h17l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι 1 Paul emphasizes that they should already know this truth. Alternate translation: “You already know that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:9 t1rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομήσουσιν 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:9 vqx4 Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν 1 God will not judge them as righteous at the judgment, and they will not enter eternal life.
6:9 h2na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could mean: (1) This is a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) Paul is naming two different activities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
6:9 blc7 μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) This refers to men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) This refers to men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity.
6:9 h2na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could be: (1) a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) two different activities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
6:9 blc7 μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could refer to: (1) men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity.
6:9 qja8 ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 men who sleep with other men
6:10 f7gp κλέπται 1 people who steal from others
6:10 bgj9 πλεονέκται 1 people who are willing to use evil means to take others’ property
@ -287,8 +287,8 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
7:1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
7:1 erl5 καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: “my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman.”
7:1 ui5c καλὸν 1 “It is most helpful”
7:1 cm7y ἀνθρώπῳ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **a man** refers to a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) Here, **a man** refers to any man.
7:1 mx7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sexual relations. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (2) Here, **touch a woman** is a metonym for marry. Alternate translation: “not to marry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:1 cm7y ἀνθρώπῳ 1 Here, **a man** could refer to: (1) a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) any man.
7:1 mx7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι 1 Here, **touch a woman** could be: (1) a euphemism for having sexual relations. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (2) a metonym for marriage. Alternate translation: “not to marry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:2 c3uq διὰ δὲ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “That is true, but because” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
7:2 fys4 διὰ δὲ τὰς πορνείας, ἕκαστος 1 “But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin, each” or “But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature, so each”
7:3 mj8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὀφειλὴν 1 Both husbands and wives are obligated to regularly sleep with their spouses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@ -349,8 +349,8 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
7:35 rp3w βρόχον 1 restriction
7:35 ffx4 εὐπάρεδρον 1 “can concentrate on”
7:36 jn8j ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ 1 “not being kind to” or “not honoring”
7:36 crb8 τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) This refers to his virgin daughter.
7:36 wdj5 γαμείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) He should marry his fiancée. (2) He should let his daughter get married.
7:36 crb8 τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) his virgin daughter.
7:36 wdj5 γαμείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) he should marry his fiancée. (2) he should let his daughter get married.
7:37 nm99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς δὲ ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος 1 Here, **standing firm** is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Here, **heart** is metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “But if he has decided firmly in his own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:39 d413 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γυνὴ δέδεται ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς 1 Here, **bound** is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: “A woman is married to her husband” or “A woman is united with her husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:39 ms7z ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ 1 “until he dies”
@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
9:1 re1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν ἑόρακα 1 Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: “I have seen Jesus our Lord.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:1 zd7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: “You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:2 j6qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ & σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 **Proof** here is a metonym for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: “you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:3 b17x ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία & ἐμὲ & αὕτη: 1 This could mean: (1) The words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) The words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense. Alternate translation: “This is my defense … me.”
9:3 b17x ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία & ἐμὲ & αὕτη: 1 This could mean: (1) the words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense. Alternate translation: “This is my defense … me.”
9:4 mr4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We have the absolute right to receive food and drink from the churches.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:4 p4vq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
9:5 s9k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν, γυναῖκα περιάγειν, ὡς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ Κηφᾶς? 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “If we have believing wives, we have a right to take them with us just as the other apostles take them, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
9:12 vt6t μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν 1 “be a burden to” or “stop the spread of”
9:13 slf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν 1 Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve in the temple get their food from the temple.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:13 wwj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται? 1 Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve at the altar get some of the foods and meat that people offer on the altar.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
9:14 rj38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν 1 The words **the gospel** here are a metonym: (1) It refers to the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) It refers to the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:14 rj38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν 1 The words **the gospel** here are a metonym that refers to: (1) the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 fs7a τούτων 1 “these things that I deserve”
9:15 sy42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so you will do something for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:15 fd69 τὸ καύχημά μου & κενώσει 1 “take away this opportunity I have to boast”
@ -508,21 +508,21 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
11:2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
11:3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.”
11:3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ & ἐστιν 1 has authority over
11:3 en95 κεφαλὴ & γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 1 This could mean: (1) Men are to have authority over women. (2) The husband is to have authority over the wife.
11:3 en95 κεφαλὴ & γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 1 This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife.
11:4 uuv2 κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων 1 “and does so after placing a cloth or veil over his head”
11:4 lit3 καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying this brings disgrace on the man. (2) Paul is saying this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
11:5 b7ku γυνὴ προσευχομένη & καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) Paul is saying that a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
11:4 lit3 καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) this brings disgrace on the man. (2) this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
11:5 b7ku γυνὴ προσευχομένη & καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς 1 This could mean: (1) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
11:5 k5yl ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 That is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders.
11:5 e1pz τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
11:6 s4r5 εἰ & αἰσχρὸν γυναικὶ 1 It was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
11:6 i624 κατακαλύπτεται 1 place on her head the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders
11:7 aa4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) A man must not cover his head. (2) A man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:7 aa4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) a man must not cover his head. (2) a man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:7 t5jn δόξα ἀνδρός 1 Just as man reflects God’s greatness, the woman reflects the man’s character.
11:8 s5ns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός. 1 God made the woman by taking a bone from the man and making the woman from that bone. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:9 w8jm γὰρ οὐκ & διὰ τὸν ἄνδρα 1 These words and all of [1 Corinthians 11:8](../11/08.md) could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that the word **this** in **this is why … the angels** clearly refers back to the words “the woman is the glory of the man” in [1 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md).
11:10 wh4c ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This symbolizes that she has man as her head.” (2) This symbolizes that she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
11:10 wh4c ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς 1 This could symbolize that: (1) she has man as her head.” (2) she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
11:11 pir4 πλὴν & ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 “While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord”
11:11 h9t4 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This means “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) This means “in the world as created by God.”
11:11 h9t4 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) “in the world as created by God.”
11:11 hqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὔτε γυνὴ χωρὶς ἀνδρὸς, οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς γυναικὸς ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
11:12 i8qu τὰ & πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “God created everything”
11:13 eex3 ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε 1 “Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know”
@ -537,10 +537,10 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
11:17 du1a οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον 1 “you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other”
11:18 iu3q ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 “as believers.” Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
11:18 l9vx σχίσματα ἐν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν 1 “you divide yourselves into opposing groups”
11:19 s9sy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony δεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι 1 This could mean: (1) The word **must** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
11:19 s9sy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony δεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι 1 This could mean: (1) the word **must** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
11:19 kcr7 αἱρέσεις 1 opposing groups of people
11:19 vfv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) As a result, people will know the most highly regarded believers among them. (2) As a result, people can display this approval to the others among them. Paul may have been using irony, saying the opposite of what he wanted the Corinthians to understand, to shame them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
11:19 j7db δόκιμοι 1 This could mean: (1) This may refer to the one whom God approves” (2) This may refer to the one whom the church approves.
11:19 vfv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) as a result, people will know the most highly regarded believers among them. (2) as a result, people can display this approval to the others among them. Paul may have been using irony, saying the opposite of what he wanted the Corinthians to understand, to shame them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
11:19 j7db δόκιμοι 1 This could refer to: (1) the one whom God approves” (2) the one whom the church approves.
11:20 x9h5 συνερχομένων 1 “gather together”
11:20 dse7 οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 “you may believe you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you do not treat it with respect”
11:22 zl1h ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν 1 “in which to gather for a meal”
@ -551,13 +551,13 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
11:23 c197 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:24 e19d ἔκλασεν 1 “he pulled pieces from it”
11:24 f6hn τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα 1 “The bread I am holding is my body”
11:25 gr2k τὸ ποτήριον 1 It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could mean: (1) This refers to the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) This refers to the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
11:25 gr2k τὸ ποτήριον 1 It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could refer to: (1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
11:25 z54e τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 “Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it”
11:26 sj1l τὸν θάνατον τοῦ Κυρίου καταγγέλλετε 1 teach about the crucifixion and resurrection
11:26 m89f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄχρι οὗ ἔλθῃ 1 Where Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back to the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:27 as6y ἂν ἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 “eats the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord”
11:28 nhx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοκιμαζέτω 1 Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how “test the quality” is translated in [1 Corinthians 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:29 gqd2 μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα 1 This could mean: (1) That person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) That person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body.
11:29 gqd2 μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα 1 This could mean: (1) that person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) that person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body.
11:30 kbi6 ἀσθενεῖς καὶ ἄρρωστοι 1 These words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UST.
11:30 vx5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism κοιμῶνται ἱκανοί 1 **Sleep** here is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “and some of you have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]).
11:30 bh6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱκανοί 1 If this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: “some of the members of your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:1 da2e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
12:1 i3k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
12:2 hbt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. You can state the phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” in active form. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” or “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:3 zg4j οὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει 1 This could mean: (1) This means “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) This means “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
12:3 zg4j οὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει 1 This could mean: (1) “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
12:3 jak6 ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς 1 “God will punish Jesus” or “God will make Jesus suffer”
12:6 eth3 ὁ ἐνεργῶν τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 “causes everyone to have them”
12:7 x7mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἑκάστῳ & δίδοται 1 You can state this in active form. God is the one who does the giving ([1 Corinthians 12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “God gives to each one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -591,7 +591,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:10 c14y ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν 1 This is the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: “the ability to interpret what is said in other languages”
12:11 z383 τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα 1 God gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy Spirit. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md).
12:12 j3xl 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers, God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
12:13 g8uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γὰρ ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες & ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 This could mean: (1) The Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “For one Spirit baptized us” (2) The Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “For in one Spirit we were all baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:13 g8uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γὰρ ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες & ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 This could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “For one Spirit baptized us” (2) the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “For in one Spirit we were all baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:13 r9hm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴτε & δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι 1 **Bound** here is a metonym for “slaves.” Alternate translation: “whether slave-people or free-people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:13 r5kw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave all of us the same Spirit, and we share the Spirit as people might share a drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:17 rsl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? & ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις? 1 This can be made a statement. Alternate translation: “you could not hear anything … you could not smell anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:25 z4kk μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ 1 “the body may be unified, and”
12:26 da97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοξάζεται μέλος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone gives honor to one member” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:27 z2ct ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε 1 Here the word **now** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
12:28 ll3s πρῶτον ἀποστόλους 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that the first gift he will mention is apostles. (2) Paul is saying that the most important gift is apostles.
12:28 ll3s πρῶτον ἀποστόλους 1 This could mean: (1) the first gift Paul will mention is apostles. (2) the most important gift Paul will mention is apostles.
12:28 unh1 ἀντιλήμψεις 1 “those who provide help to other believers”
12:28 l6p1 κυβερνήσεις 1 “those who govern the church”
12:28 w726 κυβερνήσεις 1 an individual who can speak in one or more foreign languages without having studied that language
@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:30 q8ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ πάντες γλώσσαις λαλοῦσιν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “Not all of them speak with tongues.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
12:30 d3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “Not all of them interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
12:30 ab9e διερμηνεύουσιν 1 This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
12:31 vb1m ζηλοῦτε & τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα 1 This could mean: (1) They must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) They are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
12:31 vb1m ζηλοῦτε & τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα 1 This could mean: (1) they must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) they are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
13:intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Love\n\nLove is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nPaul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:1 n8lm 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
13:1 cm2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ταῖς γλώσσαις & τῶν ἀγγέλων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use. (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
13:6 tpz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
13:7 vf6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
13:12 bn3h βλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι 1 Mirrors in Paul’s day were made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
13:12 w2eu βλέπομεν & ἄρτι 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean they now see Christ. (2) This may mean they now see God.
13:12 w2eu βλέπομεν & ἄρτι 1 This could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
13:12 xx1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον 1 “but then we will see Christ face to face” This means that we will be physically present with Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
13:12 qp7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
13:12 i28w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην 1 You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
14:15 fi2f τῷ νοΐ 1 “with words that I understand”
14:16 niu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you εὐλογῇς & τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ & λέγεις 1 Though **you** is singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
14:16 r4w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν & οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “the outsider will never be able to say ‘Amen’ … saying.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:16 j3e3 τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to another person. (2) This refers to people who are new to their group.
14:16 j3e3 τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 This could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group.
14:16 ev63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν 1 “be able to agree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
14:17 a7wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σὺ μὲν & εὐχαριστεῖς 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
14:17 w25k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. You can state this in active form. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” or “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -674,13 +674,13 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
14:27 wc1z καὶ ἀνὰ μέρος 1 “and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time”
14:27 zh9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διερμηνευέτω 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “interpret what they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:27 ari2 διερμηνευέτω 1 This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
14:29 a9iz προφῆται & δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) Only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) Only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
14:29 a9iz προφῆται & δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
14:29 m5l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προφῆται δὲ δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:30 sl1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐὰν & ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives someone insight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:31 xr69 καθ’ ἕνα & προφητεύειν 1 Only one person should prophesy at a time.
14:31 nrq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες & παρακαλῶνται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:33 my65 οὐ & ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς 1 God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
14:34 gjv2 σιγάτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) They should stop speaking. (2) They should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. or (3) They should be absolutely silent during the church service.
14:34 gjv2 σιγάτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service.
14:36 h8lp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν? 1 Paul emphasizes that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God’s will.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:36 mj6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Word of God** here is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:37 ab6u ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul’s writings as coming from the Lord.
@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
15:1 xv53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ & ἑστήκατε 1 Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 xh29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σῴζεσθε 1 You can state this in active form. “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:2 le2k τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν 1 “the message I preached to you”
15:3 sp4p ἐν πρώτοις 1 This could mean: (1) This is the most important of many things. (2) This is the first in time.
15:3 sp4p ἐν πρώτοις 1 This could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time.
15:3 azw6 ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 “to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins”
15:3 inj2 κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς 1 Paul is referring to the writings of the Old Testament.
15:4 wa7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
15:8 vg7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῷ ἐκτρώματι 1 This is an idiom by which Paul may mean that he became a Christian much later than the other apostles. Or perhaps he means that, unlike the other apostles, he did not witness Jesus’ three-year-long ministry. Alternate translation: “someone who missed the experiences of the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:10 xiq6 χάριτι & Θεοῦ, εἰμι ὅ εἰμι 1 God’s grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
15:10 n45h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη 1 Paul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: “because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
15:10 xh95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί 1 Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if that grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) This is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:10 xh95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί 1 Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if that grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:12 ub2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν? 1 Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: “you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:12 jbi8 ἐγήγερται 1 made alive again
15:13 cn2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ & ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται 1 Paul is using a hypothetical case to argue that there is a resurrection of the dead. He knows that Christ has been raised and so infers that there is a resurrection. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ ([1 Corinthians 15:8](../15/08.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
15:33 q7uc φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 If you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
15:34 gr3v ἐκνήψατε 1 “You must think seriously about this”
15:35 w4hk 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers’ bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ.
15:35 hw4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται? 1 This could mean: (1) The person is asking sincerely. (2) The person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:35 hw4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται? 1 This could mean: (1) the person is asking sincerely. (2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:35 ty4t ἐρεῖ τις 1 “someone will ask”
15:35 e5lv ποίῳ & σώματι ἔρχονται 1 That is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
15:36 ha84 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἄφρων! σὺ ὃ σπείρεις 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of **you** here are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -759,7 +759,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
15:37 h6zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὃ σπείρεις 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
15:38 dmx1 ὁ & Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν 1 “God will decide what kind of body it will have”
15:39 qi8y σὰρξ 1 In the context of animals, “flesh” may be translated as “body,” “skin,” or “meat.”
15:40 d9k2 σώματα ἐπουράνια 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) This refers to heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
15:40 d9k2 σώματα ἐπουράνια 1 This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
15:40 k9pg σώματα ἐπίγεια 1 This refers to humans.
15:40 qg3p ἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων 1 “the glory that heavenly bodies have is different from the glory of human bodies”
15:40 j1kb δόξα 1 Here, **glory** refers to the relative brightness to the human eye of objects in the sky.
@ -776,7 +776,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
15:48 s9pn οἱ & ἐπουράνιοι 1 “those who belong to God”
15:49 mq8z ἐφορέσαμεν τὴν εἰκόνα & φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα 1 “have been just like … will also be just like”
15:50 jub2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul wants them to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christ’s victory.
15:50 mwy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 This could mean: (1) The two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) The second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:50 mwy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 This could mean: (1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
15:50 nz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 Those who inhabit a body that is doomed to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:50 e4gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:50 b9hc ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 “can rot … cannot rot.” See how these words are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
@ -803,10 +803,10 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
16:1 zh6u 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
16:1 yer5 εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
16:1 kh6h ὥσπερ διέταξα 1 “as I gave specific instructions”
16:2 h8n9 θησαυρίζων 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “keep it at home” (2) “leave it with the church”
16:2 h8n9 θησαυρίζων 1 This could mean: (1) “keep it at home.” (2) “leave it with the church.”
16:2 wc3w ἵνα μὴ ὅταν ἔλθω, τότε λογεῖαι γίνωνται 1 “so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you”
16:3 yj6c οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε 1 Paul is telling the church to choose some of their own people to take their offering to Jerusalem. “whomever you choose” or “the people you appoint”
16:3 j612 δι’ ἐπιστολῶν & πέμψω 1 This could mean: (1) This mean Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) This means Paul will send with letters that they will write.
16:3 j612 δι’ ἐπιστολῶν & πέμψω 1 This could mean: (1) Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) Paul will send with letters that they will write.
16:6 w94k ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε, οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι 1 This means they might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
16:7 xr88 οὐ θέλω & ὑμᾶς ἄρτι & ἰδεῖν 1 Paul is stating that he wants to visit for a long time later, not just for a short time soon.
16:8 qkw9 τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 Paul would stay in Ephesus until this festival, which came in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started in November.
@ -816,7 +816,7 @@ front:intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
16:12 is6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here the word **our** refers to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16:13 p2la rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism γρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε 1 Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
16:13 ng8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:13 uys8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) They should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) They should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:13 uys8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) they should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) they should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:13 a3fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνδρίζεσθε 1 In the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “be responsible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:14 rij5 πάντα ὑμῶν ἐν ἀγάπῃ γινέσθω 1 “Everything you do should show people that you love them”
16:15 fy4e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
16 1:5 jw1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ ἐπλουτίσθητε 1 Paul is speaking in general terms. Alternate translation: “made you rich with all kinds of spiritual blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
17 1:5 j48t ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ 1 God has enabled you to tell others about God’s message in many ways.
18 1:5 qy8c πάσῃ γνώσει 1 God has enabled you to understand God’s message in many ways.
19 1:6 h9zk τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) They had seen for themselves that what Paul had said about Christ was true. (2) Other people learned from seeing how they now live that what Paul and the Corinthians say about Christ is true. This could mean: (1) they had seen for themselves that what Paul had said about Christ was true. (2) other people learned from seeing how they now live that what Paul and the Corinthians say about Christ is true.
20 1:7 t2hd ὥστε 1 “Because what I have just said is true”
21 1:7 p5y6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
22 1:7 fe4q τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the time when God will reveal the Lord Jesus Christ. (2) This refers to the time when our Lord Jesus Christ will reveal himself. This could refer to: (1) the time when God will reveal the Lord Jesus Christ. (2) the time when our Lord Jesus Christ will reveal himself.
23 1:8 pif5 ἀνεγκλήτους 1 There will be no reason for God to condemn you.
24 1:9 u6w6 πιστὸς ὁ Θεὸς 1 “God will do everything he has said he will do”
25 1:9 kx3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
53 1:20 rkf9 γραμματεύς 1 a person who is recognized as someone who has studied a great deal
54 1:20 u5j5 συνζητητὴς 1 a person who argues about what he knows or who is skilled in such arguments
55 1:20 a7zl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize what God has done to the wisdom of this world. Alternate translation: “God has shown that everything they call wisdom is really foolishness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
56 1:21 d7xw τοὺς πιστεύοντας 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to all who believe the message. (2) This refers to all who believe in Christ. This could refer to: (1) all who believe the message. (2) all who believe in Christ.
57 1:22 v9fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the word **we** refers to Paul and other Bible teachers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
58 1:23 ntu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον 1 “about Christ, who died on a cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
59 1:23 krw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον 1 Just as a person can stumble over a block on a road, so the message of salvation through the crucifixion of the Christ keeps Jews from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “not acceptable” or “very offensive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
60 1:24 h7iw αὐτοῖς & τοῖς κλητοῖς 1 “to the people God calls”
61 1:24 hu1s Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν 1 This could mean: (1) God acted powerfully and wisely by sending Christ to die for us. (2) Through Christ, God has shown how strong and wise he is. This could mean: (1) God acted powerfully and wisely by sending Christ to die for us. (2) through Christ, God has shown how strong and wise he is.
62 1:24 w9vm Θεοῦ δύναμιν 1 Another possible meaning is that Christ is powerful and it is through Christ that God saves us.
63 1:24 p1hu Θεοῦ σοφίαν 1 Another possible meaning is that God shows the content of his wisdom through Christ.
64 1:25 h9hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν, καὶ τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is speaking ironically about God’s foolishness and weakness. Paul knows God is not foolish or weak. Alternate translation: “what seems to be the foolishness of God is wiser than people’s wisdom, and what seems to be the weakness of God is stronger than the people’s strength” (2) Paul is speaking from the point of view of the Greek people who may think God is foolish or weak. Alternate translation: “what people call God’s foolishness is really wiser than what people call wisdom, and what people call God’s weakness is really stronger than people’s strength” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
75 1:28 f11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ μὴ ὄντα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “things that people think are worth money” or “things that people think are worth respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
76 1:30 fmr3 ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 This refers to the work of Christ on the cross.
77 1:30 a7bs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
78 1:30 f1at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is. (2) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) This could refer to: (1) Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is. (2) Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
79 1:31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 “If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is”
80 2:intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Wisdom\n\nPaul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
81 2:1 kjc7 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God.
82 2:1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
83 2:2 a2g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι & εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 When Paul said that he “decided to know nothing” he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “I decided to teach nothing … except Jesus Christ” or “I decided not to teach anything … except Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
84 2:3 s9lp κἀγὼ & ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 “I was visiting with you”
85 2:3 e8li ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “physically weak” (2) “feeling like I could not do what I needed to do.” This could mean: (1) “physically weak.” (2) “feeling like I could not do what I needed to do.”
86 2:4 z81a πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις 1 words that sound wise and with which the speaker hopes to cause people to do or believe something
87 2:6 sg76 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul interrupts his main argument to explain what he means by “wisdom” and to whom he desires to speak.
88 2:6 azm7 δὲ λαλοῦμεν 1 The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Paul begins to explain that true wisdom is God’s wisdom.
127 3:7 dl3z οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι & ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός 1 Paul stresses that neither he nor Apollos is responsible for the believers’ spiritual growth, but it is God’s doing.
128 3:7 c68g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός 1 Here to give growth means to cause growth. The abstract noun **growth** can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it is God who causes you to grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
129 3:8 s16b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ φυτεύων & καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν 1 Paul speaks of telling people the good news and teaching those who have accepted it as if they were planting and watering plants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
130 3:8 za43 ἕν εἰσιν 1 Here, **one** could mean: (1) This means “united in purpose.” (2) This means “equal in importance.” Here, **one** could mean: (1) “united in purpose.” (2) “equal in importance.”
131 3:8 zd36 μισθὸν 1 an amount of money that a worker receives for his work
132 3:9 gj26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 This refers to Paul and Apollos but not the Corinthian church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
133 3:9 r9sn Θεοῦ & συνεργοί 1 Paul considers himself and Apollos as working together.
134 3:9 lqg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ γεώργιον 1 This could mean: (1) Being God’s garden represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that belongs to God” (2) Being God’s garden represents God causing us to grow. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that God makes grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Being God's garden could represent: (1) belonging to God. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that belongs to God” (2) God causing us to grow. Alternate translation: “You are like a garden that God makes grow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
135 3:9 l2fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή 1 This could mean: (1) Being God’s building represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that belongs to God” (2) Being God’s building represents God causing us to become what he wants. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that God is constructing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Being God's building could represent: (1) belonging to God. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that belongs to God” (2) God causing us to become what he wants. Alternate translation: “and you are like a building that God is constructing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
136 3:10 iln9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “According to the task that God freely gave me to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
137 3:10 a69q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θεμέλιον ἔθηκα 1 Paul equates his teaching of faith and salvation in Jesus Christ to laying a foundation for a building. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
138 3:10 pwi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄλλος & ἐποικοδομεῖ 1 Paul is referring to the person or people who are teaching the Corinthians at that time as if they are carpenters who are constructing the building above the foundation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
176 4:9 bb41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ Θεὸς ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους & ἀπέδειξεν 1 Paul expresses two ways how God has put his apostles on display for the world to see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
177 4:9 vfq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους & ἀπέδειξεν 1 God has displayed the apostles just like prisoners at the end of a Roman military parade, who are humiliated before their execution. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178 4:9 cs4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπιθανατίους 1 God put the apostles on display like men who are about to be executed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
179 4:9 cqh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 This could mean: (1) The **world** consists of both supernatural (“angels”) and natural (“human beings”). (2) The list consists of three items: “to the world, to angels, and to human beings.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) This could mean: (1) the **world** consists of both supernatural (“angels”) and natural (“human beings”). (2) the list consists of three items: “to the world, to angels, and to human beings.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
180 4:10 fkw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἡμεῖς μωροὶ & ἄτιμοι 1 Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians so they will think about what he is saying. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
181 4:10 wqh7 ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι 1 “People treat you Corinthians as though you are important people”
182 4:10 z22c ἡμεῖς & ἄτιμοι 1 “people shame us apostles”
209 5:3 xm4e παρὼν & τῷ πνεύματι 1 “I am with you in spirit.” Being with them in spirit represents caring about them or wanting to be with them. Alternate translation: “I care about you” or “I want to be with you”
210 5:3 ax3u ἤδη κέκρικα & τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has decided what they should do with the one who did this. (2) Paul has found the person who did this guilty.
211 5:4 m9yz συναχθέντων ὑμῶν 1 “When you are together” or “When you meet together”
212 5:4 t83d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) The name of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) Being assembled in the Lord’s name implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean: (1) the **name** of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus” (2) being assembled in the Lord’s **name** implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: “to worship our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
213 5:5 xcf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 Handing the man over to Satan represents not allowing the man to be part of their group so that Satan would be allowed to harm him. Alternate translation: “make this man leave your group so that Satan can harm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
214 5:5 nq4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **flesh** refers to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) Here, **flesh** is a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, **flesh** could be: (1) a reference to his physical body. Alternate translation: “so that Satan may harm his body” (2) a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “so that his sinful nature will be destroyed” or “so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
215 5:5 z2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that God may save his spirit on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
216 5:6 h2hk οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 “Your boasting is bad”
217 5:6 ng4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ? 1 Just as a little yeast spreads throughout a whole loaf of bread, so can a little sin impact the entire fellowship of believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
236 6:3 us55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν 1 Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: “You know that we will judge the angels.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
237 6:3 v5r5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive κρινοῦμεν 1 Paul includes himself and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
238 6:3 x6h3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι γε βιωτικά? 1 Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: “Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
239 6:4 vw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 This could mean: (1) This is a rhetorical question. (2) This is a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) This is a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) This could be: (1) a rhetorical question. (2) a statement, “When in the past you have settled matters that are important in this life, you have not handed off disputes between Christians to be settled by unbelievers.” (3) a command, “When you settle matters that are important in this life, it is even to those who have no standing in the church that you should hand off disputes to be settled!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
240 6:4 xn32 βιωτικὰ μὲν οὖν κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε, τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 “If you are called upon to make decisions about daily life” or “If you must settle matters that are important in this life”
241 6:4 e791 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε? 1 Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) They should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) They should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for how they are handling these cases. This could mean: (1) they should stop giving such cases to people who are outside the church. (2) they should give such cases even to members of the church who are not well regarded by other believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
242 6:5 b2vy πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν 1 “to your dishonor” or “to show how you have failed in this matter”
243 6:5 fue4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ? 1 Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “You should be ashamed that you cannot find a wise believer to settle arguments between believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
244 6:5 l1hd τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
250 6:9 h17l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι 1 Paul emphasizes that they should already know this truth. Alternate translation: “You already know that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
251 6:9 t1rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομήσουσιν 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
252 6:9 vqx4 Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν 1 God will not judge them as righteous at the judgment, and they will not enter eternal life.
253 6:9 h2na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could mean: (1) This is a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) Paul is naming two different activities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) This could be: (1) a merism for all homosexual activity. (2) two different activities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
254 6:9 blc7 μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) This refers to men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) This refers to men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity. This could refer to: (1) men who allow other men to sleep with them. (2) men who allow men who pay them to sleep with them. (3) men who allow other men to sleep with them as part of a religious activity.
255 6:9 qja8 ἀρσενοκοῖται 1 men who sleep with other men
256 6:10 f7gp κλέπται 1 people who steal from others
257 6:10 bgj9 πλεονέκται 1 people who are willing to use evil means to take others’ property
287 7:1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
288 7:1 erl5 καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “you wrote, ‘It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: “my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman.”
289 7:1 ui5c καλὸν 1 “It is most helpful”
290 7:1 cm7y ἀνθρώπῳ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **a man** refers to a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) Here, **a man** refers to any man. Here, **a man** could refer to: (1) a married man. Alternate translation: “a husband” (2) any man.
291 7:1 mx7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sexual relations. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (2) Here, **touch a woman** is a metonym for marry. Alternate translation: “not to marry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **touch a woman** could be: (1) a euphemism for having sexual relations. Alternate translation: “not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while” (2) a metonym for marriage. Alternate translation: “not to marry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
292 7:2 c3uq διὰ δὲ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: “That is true, but because” (2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
293 7:2 fys4 διὰ δὲ τὰς πορνείας, ἕκαστος 1 “But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin, each” or “But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature, so each”
294 7:3 mj8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὀφειλὴν 1 Both husbands and wives are obligated to regularly sleep with their spouses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
349 7:35 rp3w βρόχον 1 restriction
350 7:35 ffx4 εὐπάρεδρον 1 “can concentrate on”
351 7:36 jn8j ἀσχημονεῖν ἐπὶ 1 “not being kind to” or “not honoring”
352 7:36 crb8 τὴν παρθένον αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) This refers to his virgin daughter. This could refer to: (1) the woman whom he promised to marry. (2) his virgin daughter.
353 7:36 wdj5 γαμείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) He should marry his fiancée. (2) He should let his daughter get married. This could mean: (1) he should marry his fiancée. (2) he should let his daughter get married.
354 7:37 nm99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς δὲ ἕστηκεν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ ἑδραῖος 1 Here, **standing firm** is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Here, **heart** is metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “But if he has decided firmly in his own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
355 7:39 d413 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γυνὴ δέδεται ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς 1 Here, **bound** is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: “A woman is married to her husband” or “A woman is united with her husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
356 7:39 ms7z ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ 1 “until he dies”
394 9:1 re1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐχὶ Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν ἑόρακα 1 Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: “I have seen Jesus our Lord.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
395 9:1 zd7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: “You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
396 9:2 j6qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ & σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς, ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 **Proof** here is a metonym for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: “you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
397 9:3 b17x ἡ ἐμὴ ἀπολογία & ἐμὲ & αὕτη: 1 This could mean: (1) The words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) The words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense. Alternate translation: “This is my defense … me.” This could mean: (1) the words that follow are Paul’s defense. (2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul’s defense. Alternate translation: “This is my defense … me.”
398 9:4 mr4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν φαγεῖν καὶ πεῖν 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “We have the absolute right to receive food and drink from the churches.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
399 9:4 p4vq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
400 9:5 s9k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν ἀδελφὴν, γυναῖκα περιάγειν, ὡς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπόστολοι, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ Κηφᾶς? 1 Paul uses a question to emphasize that he knows the Corinthians agree with what he is saying. Alternate translation: “If we have believing wives, we have a right to take them with us just as the other apostles take them, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
416 9:12 vt6t μή τινα ἐνκοπὴν δῶμεν 1 “be a burden to” or “stop the spread of”
417 9:13 slf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ τὰ ἱερὰ ἐργαζόμενοι, τὰ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐσθίουσιν 1 Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve in the temple get their food from the temple.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
418 9:13 wwj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οἱ τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ παρεδρεύοντες, τῷ θυσιαστηρίῳ συνμερίζονται? 1 Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: “I want to remind you that those who serve at the altar get some of the foods and meat that people offer on the altar.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
419 9:14 rj38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ζῆν 1 The words **the gospel** here are a metonym: (1) It refers to the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) It refers to the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) The words **the gospel** here are a metonym that refers to: (1) the people to whom they tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news” (2) the result of working to tell the gospel. Alternate translation: “receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
420 9:15 fs7a τούτων 1 “these things that I deserve”
421 9:15 sy42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so you will do something for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
422 9:15 fd69 τὸ καύχημά μου & κενώσει 1 “take away this opportunity I have to boast”
508 11:2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 “you think of me at all times” or “you always try act as I would want you to act” The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
509 11:3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying, “Because of this, I want.” (2) Paul is saying, “However, I want.”
510 11:3 hbt7 ἡ κεφαλὴ & ἐστιν 1 has authority over
511 11:3 en95 κεφαλὴ & γυναικὸς ὁ ἀνήρ 1 This could mean: (1) Men are to have authority over women. (2) The husband is to have authority over the wife. This could mean: (1) men are to have authority over women. (2) the husband is to have authority over the wife.
512 11:4 uuv2 κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων 1 “and does so after placing a cloth or veil over his head”
513 11:4 lit3 καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying this brings disgrace on the man. (2) Paul is saying this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man. This could mean: (1) this brings disgrace on the man. (2) this brings disgrace on Christ, who is the head of the man.
514 11:5 b7ku γυνὴ προσευχομένη & καταισχύνει τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτῆς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) Paul is saying that a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband. This could mean: (1) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on herself. (2) a woman who prays with her head uncovered brings disgrace on her husband.
515 11:5 k5yl ἀκατακαλύπτῳ τῇ κεφαλῇ 1 That is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders.
516 11:5 e1pz τῇ ἐξυρημένῃ 1 as if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
517 11:6 s4r5 εἰ & αἰσχρὸν γυναικὶ 1 It was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
518 11:6 i624 κατακαλύπτεται 1 place on her head the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders
519 11:7 aa4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ ὀφείλει κατακαλύπτεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) A man must not cover his head. (2) A man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) a man must not cover his head. (2) a man does not need to cover his head. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
520 11:7 t5jn δόξα ἀνδρός 1 Just as man reflects God’s greatness, the woman reflects the man’s character.
521 11:8 s5ns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ἐκ γυναικός, ἀλλὰ γυνὴ ἐξ ἀνδρός. 1 God made the woman by taking a bone from the man and making the woman from that bone. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
522 11:9 w8jm γὰρ οὐκ & διὰ τὸν ἄνδρα 1 These words and all of [1 Corinthians 11:8](../11/08.md) could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that the word **this** in **this is why … the angels** clearly refers back to the words “the woman is the glory of the man” in [1 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md).
523 11:10 wh4c ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This symbolizes that she has man as her head.” (2) This symbolizes that she has the authority to pray or prophesy. This could symbolize that: (1) she has man as her head.” (2) she has the authority to pray or prophesy.
524 11:11 pir4 πλὴν & ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 “While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord”
525 11:11 h9t4 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This means “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) This means “in the world as created by God.” This could mean: (1) “among Christians, who belong to the Lord.” (2) “in the world as created by God.”
526 11:11 hqy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὔτε γυνὴ χωρὶς ἀνδρὸς, οὔτε ἀνὴρ χωρὶς γυναικὸς ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
527 11:12 i8qu τὰ & πάντα ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “God created everything”
528 11:13 eex3 ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε 1 “Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know”
537 11:17 du1a οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον 1 “you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other”
538 11:18 iu3q ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 “as believers.” Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
539 11:18 l9vx σχίσματα ἐν ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν 1 “you divide yourselves into opposing groups”
540 11:19 s9sy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony δεῖ γὰρ καὶ αἱρέσεις ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι 1 This could mean: (1) The word **must** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) This could mean: (1) the word **must** indicates that this situation is likely to happen. Alternate translation: “For there will probably be factions among you” (2) Paul was using irony to shame them for having factions. Alternate translation: “For you seem to think that there must be factions among you” or “For you seem to think that you must divide yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
541 11:19 kcr7 αἱρέσεις 1 opposing groups of people
542 11:19 vfv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα καὶ οἱ δόκιμοι φανεροὶ γένωνται ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This could mean: (1) As a result, people will know the most highly regarded believers among them. (2) As a result, people can display this approval to the others among them. Paul may have been using irony, saying the opposite of what he wanted the Corinthians to understand, to shame them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) This could mean: (1) as a result, people will know the most highly regarded believers among them. (2) as a result, people can display this approval to the others among them. Paul may have been using irony, saying the opposite of what he wanted the Corinthians to understand, to shame them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
543 11:19 j7db δόκιμοι 1 This could mean: (1) This may refer to the one whom God approves” (2) This may refer to the one whom the church approves. This could refer to: (1) the one whom God approves” (2) the one whom the church approves.
544 11:20 x9h5 συνερχομένων 1 “gather together”
545 11:20 dse7 οὐκ ἔστιν Κυριακὸν δεῖπνον φαγεῖν 1 “you may believe you are eating the Lord’s Supper, but you do not treat it with respect”
546 11:22 zl1h ἐσθίειν καὶ πίνειν 1 “in which to gather for a meal”
551 11:23 c197 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
552 11:24 e19d ἔκλασεν 1 “he pulled pieces from it”
553 11:24 f6hn τοῦτό μού ἐστιν τὸ σῶμα 1 “The bread I am holding is my body”
554 11:25 gr2k τὸ ποτήριον 1 It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could mean: (1) This refers to the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) This refers to the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal. It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply “a cup” or “some cup” or “any cup.” This could refer to: (1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use. (2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
555 11:25 z54e τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἐὰν πίνητε 1 “Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it”
556 11:26 sj1l τὸν θάνατον τοῦ Κυρίου καταγγέλλετε 1 teach about the crucifixion and resurrection
557 11:26 m89f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄχρι οὗ ἔλθῃ 1 Where Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “until Jesus comes back to the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
558 11:27 as6y ἂν ἐσθίῃ τὸν ἄρτον ἢ πίνῃ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 “eats the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord”
559 11:28 nhx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοκιμαζέτω 1 Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how “test the quality” is translated in [1 Corinthians 3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
560 11:29 gqd2 μὴ διακρίνων τὸ σῶμα 1 This could mean: (1) That person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) That person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body. This could mean: (1) that person does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord. (2) that person does not consider that he is handling the Lord’s body.
561 11:30 kbi6 ἀσθενεῖς καὶ ἄρρωστοι 1 These words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UST.
562 11:30 vx5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism κοιμῶνται ἱκανοί 1 **Sleep** here is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: “and some of you have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]).
563 11:30 bh6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱκανοί 1 If this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: “some of the members of your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
572 12:1 da2e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
573 12:1 i3k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 You can state this as a positive. Alternate translation: “I want you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
574 12:2 hbt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἦτε, πρὸς τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ ἄφωνα ὡς ἂν ἤγεσθε, ἀπαγόμενοι 1 Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. You can state the phrases “were led astray” and “you were led by them” in active form. Alternate translation: “you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak” or “you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
575 12:3 zg4j οὐδεὶς ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ λαλῶν, λέγει 1 This could mean: (1) This means “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) This means “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.” This could mean: (1) “no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say.” (2) “no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say.”
576 12:3 jak6 ἀνάθεμα Ἰησοῦς 1 “God will punish Jesus” or “God will make Jesus suffer”
577 12:6 eth3 ὁ ἐνεργῶν τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 “causes everyone to have them”
578 12:7 x7mv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἑκάστῳ & δίδοται 1 You can state this in active form. God is the one who does the giving ([1 Corinthians 12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “God gives to each one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
591 12:10 c14y ἑρμηνία γλωσσῶν 1 This is the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: “the ability to interpret what is said in other languages”
592 12:11 z383 τὸ ἓν καὶ τὸ αὐτὸ Πνεῦμα 1 God gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy Spirit. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8](../12/08.md).
593 12:12 j3xl 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers, God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
594 12:13 g8uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γὰρ ἐν ἑνὶ Πνεύματι ἡμεῖς πάντες & ἐβαπτίσθημεν 1 This could mean: (1) The Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “For one Spirit baptized us” (2) The Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “For in one Spirit we were all baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us. Alternate translation: “For one Spirit baptized us” (2) the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body. Alternate translation: “For in one Spirit we were all baptized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
595 12:13 r9hm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴτε & δοῦλοι, εἴτε ἐλεύθεροι 1 **Bound** here is a metonym for “slaves.” Alternate translation: “whether slave-people or free-people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
596 12:13 r5kw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες ἓν Πνεῦμα ἐποτίσθημεν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave all of us the same Spirit, and we share the Spirit as people might share a drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
597 12:17 rsl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῦ ἡ ἀκοή? & ποῦ ἡ ὄσφρησις? 1 This can be made a statement. Alternate translation: “you could not hear anything … you could not smell anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
603 12:25 z4kk μὴ ᾖ σχίσμα ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἀλλὰ 1 “the body may be unified, and”
604 12:26 da97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοξάζεται μέλος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone gives honor to one member” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
605 12:27 z2ct ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε 1 Here the word **now** is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
606 12:28 ll3s πρῶτον ἀποστόλους 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that the first gift he will mention is apostles. (2) Paul is saying that the most important gift is apostles. This could mean: (1) the first gift Paul will mention is apostles. (2) the most important gift Paul will mention is apostles.
607 12:28 unh1 ἀντιλήμψεις 1 “those who provide help to other believers”
608 12:28 l6p1 κυβερνήσεις 1 “those who govern the church”
609 12:28 w726 κυβερνήσεις 1 an individual who can speak in one or more foreign languages without having studied that language
612 12:30 q8ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ πάντες γλώσσαις λαλοῦσιν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “Not all of them speak with tongues.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
613 12:30 d3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ πάντες διερμηνεύουσιν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “Not all of them interpret tongues.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
614 12:30 ab9e διερμηνεύουσιν 1 This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
615 12:31 vb1m ζηλοῦτε & τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα 1 This could mean: (1) They must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) They are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have. This could mean: (1) they must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church. (2) they are eagerly looking for gifts that they think are greater because they think those are more exciting to have.
616 13:intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Love\n\nLove is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nPaul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
617 13:1 n8lm 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
618 13:1 cm2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ταῖς γλώσσαις & τῶν ἀγγέλων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use. (2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
627 13:6 tpz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ χαίρει ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ, συνχαίρει δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “It rejoices only in righteousness and truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
628 13:7 vf6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues speaking about love as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
629 13:12 bn3h βλέπομεν γὰρ ἄρτι δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι 1 Mirrors in Paul’s day were made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
630 13:12 w2eu βλέπομεν & ἄρτι 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean they now see Christ. (2) This may mean they now see God. This could mean: (1) they now see Christ. (2) they now see God.
631 13:12 xx1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τότε δὲ πρόσωπον πρὸς πρόσωπον 1 “but then we will see Christ face to face” This means that we will be physically present with Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
632 13:12 qp7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 The word “Christ” is understood. Alternate translation: “I will know Christ fully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
633 13:12 i28w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς καὶ ἐπεγνώσθην 1 You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “just as Christ has known me fully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
654 14:15 fi2f τῷ νοΐ 1 “with words that I understand”
655 14:16 niu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you εὐλογῇς & τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ & λέγεις 1 Though **you** is singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
656 14:16 r4w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν & οὐκ οἶδεν? 1 This can be a statement. Alternate translation: “the outsider will never be able to say ‘Amen’ … saying.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
657 14:16 j3e3 τοῦ ἰδιώτου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to another person. (2) This refers to people who are new to their group. This could refer to: (1) another person. (2) people who are new to their group.
658 14:16 ev63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐρεῖ, τὸ ἀμήν 1 “be able to agree” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
659 14:17 a7wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σὺ μὲν & εὐχαριστεῖς 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
660 14:17 w25k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. You can state this in active form. See how you translated “builds up” in [1 Corinthians 8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the other person is not strengthened” or “what you say does not strengthen any outsider who might hear you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
674 14:27 wc1z καὶ ἀνὰ μέρος 1 “and they should speak one after another” or “and they should speak one at a time”
675 14:27 zh9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διερμηνευέτω 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “interpret what they said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
676 14:27 ari2 διερμηνευέτω 1 This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how “interpret” is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md).
677 14:29 a9iz προφῆται & δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) Only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) Only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time. This could mean: (1) only two or three prophets should speak at any one meeting. (2) only two or three prophets should take turns speaking at any one time.
678 14:29 m5l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προφῆται δὲ δύο ἢ τρεῖς λαλείτωσαν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to what they say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
679 14:30 sl1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐὰν & ἄλλῳ ἀποκαλυφθῇ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God gives someone insight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
680 14:31 xr69 καθ’ ἕνα & προφητεύειν 1 Only one person should prophesy at a time.
681 14:31 nrq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντες & παρακαλῶνται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you may encourage all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
682 14:33 my65 οὐ & ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ Θεὸς 1 God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
683 14:34 gjv2 σιγάτωσαν 1 This could mean: (1) They should stop speaking. (2) They should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. or (3) They should be absolutely silent during the church service. This could mean: (1) they should stop speaking. (2) they should stop speaking when someone is prophesying. (3) they should be absolutely silent during the church service.
684 14:36 h8lp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν? 1 Paul emphasizes that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: “The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God’s will.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
685 14:36 mj6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Word of God** here is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
686 14:37 ab6u ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul’s writings as coming from the Lord.
693 15:1 xv53 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ & ἑστήκατε 1 Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
694 15:2 xh29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σῴζεσθε 1 You can state this in active form. “God will save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
695 15:2 le2k τίνι λόγῳ εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν 1 “the message I preached to you”
696 15:3 sp4p ἐν πρώτοις 1 This could mean: (1) This is the most important of many things. (2) This is the first in time. This could mean: (1) this is the most important of many things. (2) this is the first in time.
697 15:3 azw6 ὑπὲρ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 “to pay for our sins” or “so that God could forgive our sins”
698 15:3 inj2 κατὰ τὰς Γραφάς 1 Paul is referring to the writings of the Old Testament.
699 15:4 wa7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they buried him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
707 15:8 vg7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῷ ἐκτρώματι 1 This is an idiom by which Paul may mean that he became a Christian much later than the other apostles. Or perhaps he means that, unlike the other apostles, he did not witness Jesus’ three-year-long ministry. Alternate translation: “someone who missed the experiences of the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
708 15:10 xiq6 χάριτι & Θεοῦ, εἰμι ὅ εἰμι 1 God’s grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
709 15:10 n45h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes ἡ χάρις αὐτοῦ ἡ εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ κενὴ ἐγενήθη 1 Paul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: “because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
710 15:10 xh95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί 1 Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if that grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) This is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if that grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: This could mean: (1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool. (2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul’s work have good results. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
711 15:12 ub2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν ἐν ὑμῖν τινες, ὅτι ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν? 1 Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: “you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
712 15:12 jbi8 ἐγήγερται 1 made alive again
713 15:13 cn2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ & ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν, οὐδὲ Χριστὸς ἐγήγερται 1 Paul is using a hypothetical case to argue that there is a resurrection of the dead. He knows that Christ has been raised and so infers that there is a resurrection. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ ([1 Corinthians 15:8](../15/08.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
749 15:33 q7uc φθείρουσιν ἤθη χρηστὰ ὁμιλίαι κακαί 1 If you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
750 15:34 gr3v ἐκνήψατε 1 “You must think seriously about this”
751 15:35 w4hk 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers’ bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ.
752 15:35 hw4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, πῶς ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροί? ποίῳ δὲ σώματι ἔρχονται? 1 This could mean: (1) The person is asking sincerely. (2) The person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) This could mean: (1) the person is asking sincerely. (2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: “But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
753 15:35 ty4t ἐρεῖ τις 1 “someone will ask”
754 15:35 e5lv ποίῳ & σώματι ἔρχονται 1 That is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
755 15:36 ha84 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἄφρων! σὺ ὃ σπείρεις 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of **you** here are singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
759 15:37 h6zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὃ σπείρεις 1 Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word **you** here is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
760 15:38 dmx1 ὁ & Θεὸς δίδωσιν αὐτῷ σῶμα, καθὼς ἠθέλησεν 1 “God will decide what kind of body it will have”
761 15:39 qi8y σὰρξ 1 In the context of animals, “flesh” may be translated as “body,” “skin,” or “meat.”
762 15:40 d9k2 σώματα ἐπουράνια 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) This refers to heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings. This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, stars, and other visible lights in the sky. (2) heavenly beings, such as angels and other supernatural beings.
763 15:40 k9pg σώματα ἐπίγεια 1 This refers to humans.
764 15:40 qg3p ἑτέρα μὲν ἡ τῶν ἐπουρανίων δόξα, ἑτέρα δὲ ἡ τῶν ἐπιγείων 1 “the glory that heavenly bodies have is different from the glory of human bodies”
765 15:40 j1kb δόξα 1 Here, **glory** refers to the relative brightness to the human eye of objects in the sky.
776 15:48 s9pn οἱ & ἐπουράνιοι 1 “those who belong to God”
777 15:49 mq8z ἐφορέσαμεν τὴν εἰκόνα & φορέσωμεν καὶ τὴν εἰκόνα 1 “have been just like … will also be just like”
778 15:50 jub2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul wants them to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christ’s victory.
779 15:50 mwy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 This could mean: (1) The two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) The second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) This could mean: (1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: “human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God” (2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: “weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither do those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
780 15:50 nz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 Those who inhabit a body that is doomed to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
781 15:50 e4gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
782 15:50 b9hc ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 “can rot … cannot rot.” See how these words are translated in [1 Corinthians 15:42](../15/42.md).
803 16:1 zh6u 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul.
804 16:1 yer5 εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
805 16:1 kh6h ὥσπερ διέταξα 1 “as I gave specific instructions”
806 16:2 h8n9 θησαυρίζων 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “keep it at home” (2) “leave it with the church” This could mean: (1) “keep it at home.” (2) “leave it with the church.”
807 16:2 wc3w ἵνα μὴ ὅταν ἔλθω, τότε λογεῖαι γίνωνται 1 “so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you”
808 16:3 yj6c οὓς ἐὰν δοκιμάσητε 1 Paul is telling the church to choose some of their own people to take their offering to Jerusalem. “whomever you choose” or “the people you appoint”
809 16:3 j612 δι’ ἐπιστολῶν & πέμψω 1 This could mean: (1) This mean Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) This means Paul will send with letters that they will write. This could mean: (1) Paul will send with letters that he will write. (2) Paul will send with letters that they will write.
810 16:6 w94k ὑμεῖς με προπέμψητε, οὗ ἐὰν πορεύωμαι 1 This means they might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
811 16:7 xr88 οὐ θέλω & ὑμᾶς ἄρτι & ἰδεῖν 1 Paul is stating that he wants to visit for a long time later, not just for a short time soon.
812 16:8 qkw9 τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 Paul would stay in Ephesus until this festival, which came in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started in November.
816 16:12 is6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Ἀπολλῶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here the word **our** refers to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
817 16:13 p2la rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism γρηγορεῖτε, στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει, ἀνδρίζεσθε, κραταιοῦσθε 1 Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he was giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
818 16:13 ng8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “Be careful whom you trust” or “Watch out for danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
819 16:13 uys8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) They should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) They should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. This could mean: (1) they should keep strongly believing what Paul and his companions have taught them. (2) they should keep strongly trusting in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
820 16:13 a3fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνδρίζεσθε 1 In the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. You can state this more clearly. Alternate translation: “be responsible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
821 16:14 rij5 πάντα ὑμῶν ἐν ἀγάπῃ γινέσθω 1 “Everything you do should show people that you love them”
822 16:15 fy4e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.

644
tn_1JN.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

6
tn_1TH.tsv
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)\n1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)\n1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth\n - Like a mother (2:7)\n - Like a father (2:11)\n1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)\n1. Practical instructions\n - Live to please God (4:1-12)\n - Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)\n - Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)\n1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)\n1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)\n1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth\n * Like a mother (2:7)\n * Like a father (2:11)\n1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)\n1. Practical instructions\n * Live to please God (4:1-12)\n * Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)\n * Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)\n1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Hardship\n\nOther people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 dp37 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica.
1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
1:4 xky4 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues to give thanks for the believers at Thessalonica and praises them for their faith in God.
1:4 erb6 ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
1:5 ude4 οὐκ & ἐν λόγῳ μόνον 1 “not only in what we said”
1:5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** gave Paul and his companions the ability to preach the gospel powerfully. (2) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** made the preaching of the gospel have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian believers. (3) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the gospel preaching by means of miracles, signs, and wonders.
1:5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) the **Holy Spirit** gave Paul and his companions the ability to preach the gospel powerfully. (2) the **Holy Spirit** made the preaching of the gospel have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian believers. (3) the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the gospel preaching by means of miracles, signs, and wonders.
1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 The abstract noun **assurance** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “God made you sure that it was true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 e889 οἷοι 1 “how we conducted ourselves when”
1:6 cs49 ὑμεῖς μιμηταὶ & ἐγενήθητε 1 To “imitate” means to act like or to copy the behavior of another.
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General In
4:1 p4db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Here, **walk** is an expression for the way one is to live. Alternate translation: “you ought to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:2 vg16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of his instructions as if they were given by **Jesus** himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:3 mw4j ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 “for you to stay away from sexually immoral acts”
4:4 f4ux εἰδέναι & τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) This refers to knowing how to control his own body.
4:4 f4ux εἰδέναι & τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 This could refer to: (1) knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) knowing how to control his own body.
4:5 x2t7 ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 “with wrongful sexual desire”
4:6 a9st rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 This is a doublet stating the same idea in two ways to reinforce the concept. Alternate translation: “do wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:6 q7bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔκδικος Κύριος 1 This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish the one who transgressed and will defend the one who was wronged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)\n1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)\n1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth\n - Like a mother (2:7)\n - Like a father (2:11)\n1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)\n1. Practical instructions\n - Live to please God (4:1-12)\n - Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)\n - Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)\n1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greeting (1:1)\n1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)\n1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)\n1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth\n * Like a mother (2:7)\n * Like a father (2:11)\n1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)\n1. Practical instructions\n * Live to please God (4:1-12)\n * Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)\n * Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)\n1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)\n\n### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.\n\n### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.\n\nPaul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.\n\n### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?\n\nPaul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”\n* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”\n* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Hardship\n\nOther people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4 1:1 dp37 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica.
5 1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13 1:4 xky4 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues to give thanks for the believers at Thessalonica and praises them for their faith in God.
14 1:4 erb6 ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
15 1:5 ude4 οὐκ & ἐν λόγῳ μόνον 1 “not only in what we said”
16 1:5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** gave Paul and his companions the ability to preach the gospel powerfully. (2) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** made the preaching of the gospel have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian believers. (3) This refers to the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the gospel preaching by means of miracles, signs, and wonders. This could mean: (1) the **Holy Spirit** gave Paul and his companions the ability to preach the gospel powerfully. (2) the **Holy Spirit** made the preaching of the gospel have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian believers. (3) the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the gospel preaching by means of miracles, signs, and wonders.
17 1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 The abstract noun **assurance** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “God made you sure that it was true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 1:5 e889 οἷοι 1 “how we conducted ourselves when”
19 1:6 cs49 ὑμεῖς μιμηταὶ & ἐγενήθητε 1 To “imitate” means to act like or to copy the behavior of another.
120 4:1 p4db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 Here, **walk** is an expression for the way one is to live. Alternate translation: “you ought to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
121 4:2 vg16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of his instructions as if they were given by **Jesus** himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
122 4:3 mw4j ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 “for you to stay away from sexually immoral acts”
123 4:4 f4ux εἰδέναι & τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) This refers to knowing how to control his own body. This could refer to: (1) knowing how to live with his own wife. (2) knowing how to control his own body.
124 4:5 x2t7 ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 “with wrongful sexual desire”
125 4:6 a9st rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 This is a doublet stating the same idea in two ways to reinforce the concept. Alternate translation: “do wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
126 4:6 q7bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔκδικος Κύριος 1 This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish the one who transgressed and will defend the one who was wronged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

56
tn_1TI.tsv
View File

@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:5 mbe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Here, **pure** figuratively indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:5 ar8t συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς 1 Your translation should make it clear that love is the one goal of the command and is followed by three things that lead to this love. This is the second thing, after “a pure heart.” Alternate translation: “and from a conscience that leads a person to choose right instead of wrong”
1:5 m53g πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 This is the third thing that leads to love, which is the one goal of the command. It is not a third goal of the command. Alternate translations: “and from faith that is genuine” or “and from faith that is without hypocrisy”
1:5 zziu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to trust in God. (2) This refers to belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 zziu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God. (2) belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 j4z3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινες ἀστοχήσαντες 1 Paul speaks figuratively of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Paul means that some people are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith, which is to love, as he has just explained. Alternate translation: “some people, who are not fulfilling the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 se38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν εἰς 1 Here, **turned away** figuratively means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:7 v28u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νομοδιδάσκαλοι 1 Here, **law** refers specifically to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:13 nv6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠλεήθην 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus had mercy on me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:14 t158 δὲ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce an expanded description of the way Jesus treated him mercifully even though he persecuted the followers of Jesus. This description will help Timothy and the other believers in Ephesus to understand how great the mercy of Jesus is. Alternate translation: “in fact”
1:14 c1lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπερεπλεόνασεν & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the grace of Jesus as if it were a liquid that fills a container until it flows over the top. Alternate translation: “Jesus showed me unlimited grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 z5lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) Paul could be referring to faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean figuratively “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) Paul could be referring to the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:14 z5lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean figuratively “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:15 z48s πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 In this context, the term **word** refers to an entire statement. Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
1:15 rh2r καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who does this action. Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
1:15 t163 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἁμαρτωλοὺς σῶσαι 1 Paul uses this phrase as a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow, “Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners,” with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@ -75,10 +75,10 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:18 b6uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and son. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ, and that would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child. Alternate translation: “you who are like my very own child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:18 y6jg κατὰ τὰς προαγούσας ἐπὶ σὲ προφητείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who did this action. Alternate translation: “in agreement with what other believers prophesied about you”
1:18 w2ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στρατεύῃ & τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν 1 Paul speaks figuratively about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 jj6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχων πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could mean: (1) It refers to a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) It refers to a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 jj6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχων πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 ly6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθὴν συνείδησιν 1 See how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “continuing to choose to do what is right instead of what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 h2wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινες & περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could say as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 dyr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) This refers to the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 dyr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:20 pv7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὑμέναιος & Ἀλέξανδρος 1 These are names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:20 ty7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:20 az10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:7 qa8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:7 hb97 ἐν Χριστῷ 1 “as a follower of Christ”
2:7 yllf ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 In order to emphasize what he is saying, Paul says the same thing twice, first positively and then negatively. If this is confusing in your language, you can say this once. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth as a follower of Christ”
2:7 h18q διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 This could mean either of two things: (1) **faith and truth** could be describing the content of what Paul teaches. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles the message of faith and truth” (2) **faith and truth** could also be describing Paul’s character as a teacher. Alternate translation: “a true and faithful teacher of the Gentiles”
2:7 h18q διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **faith and truth** could mean: (1) the content of what Paul teaches. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles the message of faith and truth” (2) Paul’s character as a teacher. Alternate translation: “a true and faithful teacher of the Gentiles”
2:7 t201 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If this phrase has the second meaning that the previous note discusses, Paul may be using the two terms **faith** and **truth** together to express one idea. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles about the true faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2:7 t202 ἐθνῶν 1 This term refers to members of other people groups who are not Jewish. Alternate translations: “the Gentiles” or “non-Jewish people groups”
2:8 a841 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here the word **men** refers specifically to males. The term is not generic, since Paul addresses women next. Alternate translations: “the males in all places” or “men everywhere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@ -129,12 +129,12 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:14 t221 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν παραβάσει γέγονεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **transgression** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “began to sin” or “began to disobey God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:15 krx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Use a natural way in your language to indicate that this sentence provides a contrast to the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:15 t222 σωθήσεται 1 Here, **she** likely refers to Eve, mentioned in the preceding verse, and whom Paul describes as “the woman.” “They,” later in the sentence, refers to women in general. To show how Paul shifts the topic from Eve, a representative woman, to all women, the word **she** could be translated here as “women.”
2:15 u8iv σωθήσεται & διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 This could mean one of three things: (1) It may be that people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. (2) It may be that the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). (3) **Childbearing** could also be a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translations: (1) “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) “God will save women as they attend to their families” or (3) “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child”
2:15 u8iv σωθήσεται & διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 This could mean: (1) people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). Alternate translation: “God will save women as they attend to their families” (3) a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translation: “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child”
2:15 i0ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 If option number 2 from the previous note is correct, then Paul is figuratively referring to all of the aspects of motherhood by mentioning the beginning part of it: childbearing. Alternate translation: “as they attend to their families” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:15 n818 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God will save women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living”
2:15 sl57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:15 dcf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:15 dcf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 This could mean: (1) with good judgment. (2) with modesty. (3) with clear thinking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.\n\n### Overseers and deacons\n\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.\n\n### Character qualities\n\nThis chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:1 t227 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
3:1 t228 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:3 c2c7 μὴ πάροινον, μὴ πλήκτην, ἀλλὰ ἐπιεικῆ, ἄμαχον 1 Alternate translation: “he must not drink alcohol to excess, and he must not fight and argue, but instead, he must be gentle and peaceful”
3:3 pc2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφιλάργυρον 1 If the expression **loving** money would not convey the idea of something inappropriate in your language, it might be helpful to use a term that expresses the idea of “greed.” Alternate translation: “not greedy for money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:4 a8gu προϊστάμενον 1 Alternate translations: “he should lead” or “he should take care of”
3:4 w3un ἐν ὑποταγῇ, μετὰ πάσης σεμνότητος 1 This could mean one of several things: (1) The overseer’s children should obey their father and show respect to him. Alternate translation: “who obey him completely respectfully” (2) The overseer’s children should show respect to everyone. Alternate translation: “who obey him and show respect to everyone” or (3) The overseer should show respect to those in his household as he leads them. Alternate translation: “who obey him as he treats them with respect”
3:4 w3un ἐν ὑποταγῇ, μετὰ πάσης σεμνότητος 1 This could mean: (1) the overseer’s children should obey their father and show respect to him. Alternate translation: “who obey him completely respectfully” (2) the overseer’s children should show respect to everyone. Alternate translation: “who obey him and show respect to everyone” or (3) the overseer should show respect to those in his household as he leads them. Alternate translation: “who obey him as he treats them with respect”
3:5 n5lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ δέ τις τοῦ ἰδίου οἴκου προστῆναι οὐκ οἶδεν, πῶς ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ ἐπιμελήσεται? 1 Paul is making a statement, not actually asking a question. He does not expect Timothy to explain how a man who could not manage his own household could take care of God’s church. Instead, Paul is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for an overseer to demonstrate faithfulness in his personal life before assuming a leadership role in the church. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I say this because a man who is not able to manage his own household will certainly not be able to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:5 c814 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to a local group of God’s people, not to a building. Alternate translations: “a group of God’s people” or “a local gathering of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 q7hu μὴ νεόφυτον 1 Alternate translations: “he should not be still just learning the faith” or “he must be mature from a long, steady growth in the faith”
@ -163,20 +163,20 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:9 rfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **faith** refers to the content of the **mystery**, that is, the specific things that God has revealed and that followers of Jesus must believe. Alternate translation: “the teachings that God has revealed to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:9 y91f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person’s sense of right and wrong being **clean**, which means that it assures that person that he has done nothing wrong. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are not doing anything wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:10 hl1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ οὗτοι & δοκιμαζέσθωσαν πρῶτον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would the action. Alternate translations: “the leaders should observe and approve of them first” or “they should first prove themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:11 xyc9 γυναῖκας 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) Alternate translation: “deacons’ wives” (2) Alternate translation: “female deacons”
3:11 xyc9 γυναῖκας 1 This could mean: (1) deacons’ wives. (2) female deacons.
3:11 q5qx σεμνάς 1 Alternate translations: “people who act properly” or “people who are worthy of respect”
3:11 a12k μὴ διαβόλους 1 Alternate translation: “they must not say malicious things about other people”
3:11 akm5 νηφαλίους 1 See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “not doing anything to excess.”
3:12 wji2 μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἄνδρες 1 See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translations: (1) “not married to more than one woman” (2) “faithful to their wives”
3:12 wji2 μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἄνδρες 1 See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translations: “not married to more than one woman” or “faithful to their wives”
3:12 dv31 τέκνων καλῶς προϊστάμενοι καὶ τῶν ἰδίων οἴκων 1 Alternate translation: “taking proper care of their children and their personal affairs”
3:13 rfq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce what the results will be if people with the qualifications he has just described are chosen as church leaders. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:13 t259 οἱ & καλῶς διακονήσαντες 1 This could refer either to deacons, whom Paul has just discussed, or to overseers as well, as a conclusion to Paul’s entire discussion of church leaders. Alternate translations: “deacons who serve well” or “church leaders who serve well”
3:13 cv34 βαθμὸν & καλὸν 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translations: (1) “an honorable position” (2) “a good reputation”
3:13 m684 καὶ πολλὴν παρρησίαν ἐν πίστει τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translations: (1) “and they will speak more confidently to other people about believing in Jesus” (2) “and they will trust in Jesus with even more confidence”
3:13 cv34 βαθμὸν & καλὸν 1 This could mean: (1) an honorable position. (2) a good reputation.
3:13 m684 καὶ πολλὴν παρρησίαν ἐν πίστει τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) they will speak more confidently to other people about believing in Jesus. (2) they will trust in Jesus with even more confidence.
3:14 t262 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τάχει 1 This expression describes Paul’s haste and urgency. Alternate translation: “as soon as I can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:14 zzzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 In some languages it is more natural to say “go” here, rather than **come**. Alternate translation: “to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
3:15 z9z8 ἐὰν δὲ βραδύνω 1 This does not imply that Paul might choose to take his time rather than hurrying. Alternate translations: “but in case I cannot get there soon” or “but if something prevents me from getting there soon”
3:15 p9u4 ἵνα εἰδῇς πῶς δεῖ ἐν οἴκῳ Θεοῦ ἀναστρέφεσθαι 1 Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. Possible meanings here are: (1) Paul is referring to the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Paul is referring specifically to Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family”
3:15 p9u4 ἵνα εἰδῇς πῶς δεῖ ἐν οἴκῳ Θεοῦ ἀναστρέφεσθαι 1 Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. This could refer to: (1) the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family”
3:15 wzk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἴκῳ Θεοῦ & ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 This phrase gives us further information about **the household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
3:15 cd5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul speaks of the truth as if it were a building and of the community of believers as if they were helping to hold up that building. Alternate translation: “which helps to proclaim God’s truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:15 t267 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα 1 The terms **pillar** and **support** mean basically the same thing. They are architectural features that hold up parts of buildings. Paul uses the terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “which helps promote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:1 jzr9 δὲ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce background information that will help Timothy and the believers in Ephesus understand the next part of his letter. The false teachings that Timothy must oppose are something that the Spirit has already predicted. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance.
4:1 b739 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὑστέροις καιροῖς 1 This expression refers to the time period when God’s purposes in history are approaching their culmination and so the evil opposition to them increases. Paul is probably referring to the time period between Jesus’ resurrection and his second coming. Alternate translation: “in these days as God’s purposes advance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:1 b931 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 Paul speaks of people ceasing to trust in Christ as if they were physically leaving a place. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:1 hw98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: (1) “some people will stop believing the teachings about Jesus” (2) This refers to trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:1 hw98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop believing the teachings about Jesus” (2) trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:1 q13m προσέχοντες 1 Alternate translations: “and turn their attention to” or “because they are paying attention to”
4:1 ae5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πνεύμασι πλάνοις καὶ διδασκαλίαις δαιμονίων 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If you think having both phrases in your translation might be confusing for your readers, you could combine them into a single expression. Alternate translation: “the things that evil spirits say to trick people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:2 pw29 ἐν ὑποκρίσει ψευδολόγων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could start a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “The people who teach these things are hypocrites, and they tell lies”
@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:7 sea5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γύμναζε & σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν 1 Paul tells Timothy figuratively to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 t311 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks γὰρ 1 What follows after this word is a direct quotation of a saying that Paul uses for teaching. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
4:8 i6rh σωματικὴ γυμνασία 1 Alternate translation: “physical exercise”
4:8 t313 πρὸς ὀλίγον ἐστὶν ὠφέλιμος 1 This could mean one of three things. Alternate translations: (1) “has some small value” (2) “has value for a little while” or (3) “does not have very much value”
4:8 t313 πρὸς ὀλίγον ἐστὶν ὠφέλιμος 1 This could mean: (1) it has some small value. (2) it has value for a little while. (3) it does not have very much value.
4:8 df19 ἐπαγγελίαν ἔχουσα 1 Alternate translation: “will bring benefits”
4:9 t315 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 As in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [3:1](../03/01.md), in this context, the term **word** means “statement” or “saying.” (Paul is referring to the entire saying that he quoted in the previous verse.) Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
4:9 hc1t καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος 1 See how you translated this in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:15 merc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σου ἡ προκοπὴ 1 If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit in what way Timothy is to make **progress**. Alternate translation: “your increasing ability to live the way that Jesus wants you to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach”
4:16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “continue to do these things”
4:16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
4:16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 This could mean: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
5:intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Honor and respect\n\nPaul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.\n\n### Widows\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.\n\n### Variation in names\n\nIn this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
5:1 wt5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Alternate translation: “do not reprimand an older man”
@ -262,9 +262,9 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:3 smp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom χήρας τίμα 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “provide for widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:3 qc6s τὰς ὄντως χήρας 1 Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
5:4 vv64 τέκνα ἢ ἔκγονα 1 Here these **children** and **grandchildren** are adults who are able to care for others, not young children.
5:4 w38h πρῶτον 1 This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) It could mean that, of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) It could mean that these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support”
5:4 w38h πρῶτον 1 This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support”
5:4 fnab μανθανέτωσαν & εὐσεβεῖν 1 Here, **learn** means to practice, that is, to learn by doing. Alternate translation: “let them become proficient in honoring”
5:4 t344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μανθανέτωσαν & τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 There are two possible meanings here: (1) These two phrases may mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be clearer in your language. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) However, there may be a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
5:4 t344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μανθανέτωσαν & τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 These two phrases may: (1) mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be clearer in your language. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) have a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
5:4 g5mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον 1 Paul uses this phrase figuratively to refer to family members, by association to the way they live in the same house. Alternate translations: “their own family members” or “those living in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:4 q5c8 ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 Alternate translation: “let them do good to their mother or grandmother in return for the good things their parents and grandparents gave them”
5:4 t347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Paul uses this term to introduce an additional reason why family members should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:9 s8ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χήρα καταλεγέσθω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have the church put a widow on the register” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:9 khe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χήρα καταλεγέσθω 1 There seems to have been a list of widows who had no family to help them. The church members met these women’s needs for food, clothing, and shelter, and these women then devoted their lives to serving the Christian community. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have the church put a woman on the list of widows who truly need help” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:9 i27x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἔλαττον ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα γεγονυῖα 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “if she is at least sixty years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
5:9 q9dj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς γυνή 1 Like the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md), this means that she has only one husband, and may also means that she was only married once. (If it means the second possibility, it is not clear whether Paul means to exclude women who were married more than once and widowed each time, or more specifically women who divorced their husbands and married other men.) Alternate translations: (1) “she was always faithful to her husband” (2) “she had one husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:9 q9dj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς γυνή 1 Like the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md), this could mean: (1) she has only one husband. Alternate translation: “she was always faithful to her husband” (2) she was only married once. If it means this second possibility, it is not clear whether Paul means to exclude women who were married more than once and widowed each time, or more specifically women who divorced their husbands and married other men. Alternate translation: “she had one husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:10 l8nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς μαρτυρουμένη 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “people must be able to attest to her good deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:10 mik7 ἐξενοδόχησεν 1 Alternate translations: “has welcomed strangers into her home” or “practiced hospitality”
5:10 ygl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἁγίων πόδας ἔνιψεν 1 In this culture, people walked barefoot or in sandals on roads that were dusty or muddy, so washing their feet once they entered a home was a way of helping them be comfortable and clean. If the people of your culture would not be familiar with this practice, you could use a general expression instead. Alternate translation: “has cared for believers who visited her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:13 t376 περιερχόμεναι τὰς οἰκίας 1 Alternate translation: “going from house to house”
5:13 nll4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φλύαροι καὶ περίεργοι, λαλοῦσαι τὰ μὴ δέοντα 1 These three phrases may be ways of speaking about the same activity. Paul may be using repetition to emphasize that these women should not be looking into the private lives of people and telling about them to others who would be no better off after hearing this gossip. If you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases into a single one. Alternate translation: “people who interfere openly in other people’s business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) (A doublet can consist of more than two terms.)
5:13 cym5 φλύαροι 1 Alternate translation: “people who talk nonsense”
5:14 u94k τῷ ἀντικειμένῳ 1 This expression could refer by implication to: (1) This refers to Satan (that is the reading of UST). Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) This refers collectively to unbelievers who are opposing the followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “unbelievers who are opposing you”
5:14 u94k τῷ ἀντικειμένῳ 1 This expression could refer by implication to: (1) This could refer to: (1) Satan. This is the reading of UST. Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) unbelievers who are opposing the followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “unbelievers who are opposing you”
5:15 fy54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν ὀπίσω τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Paul speaks of living in faithfulness to Christ as if it were a path that one can either follow or turn aside from. He means that some younger widows have stopped obeying Jesus and have started to do what Satan would want them to do instead. Alternate translation: “have stopped living in obedience to Jesus and have decided to obey Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:16 g8k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τις πιστὴ 1 Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “any woman who believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:16 mf4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔχει χήρας 1 The implication is that she has widows within her extended family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has relatives who are widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:16 t384 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:16 d35m ὄντως χήραις 1 Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
5:17 u93q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι & ἀξιούσθωσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:17 wp9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διπλῆς τιμῆς 1 Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) The congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) They should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:17 wp9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διπλῆς τιμῆς 1 Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) the congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) they should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:17 r8ew rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ κοπιῶντες 1 Paul is using the participle **toiling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to members of a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “elders who labor diligently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:17 t389 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in the word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
5:17 t390 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Paul may be using the term **word** here figuratively to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:19 af68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions κατηγορίαν μὴ παραδέχου, ἐκτὸς εἰ 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this statement to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only believe that an accusation is true if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
5:19 t399 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπὶ δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων 1 Here, **on** stands for the concept of “relying on.” You may need to use a more complete phrase in your language. Alternate translations: “you are relying on the testimony of two or three people” or “at least two people give evidence for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
5:19 kmy5 δύο ἢ τριῶν 1 Alternate translations: “at least two” or “two or more”
5:20 m4uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας 1 Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. There are two possibilities here: (1) This could refer to any believers who are sinning. (2) Paul could still be talking about elders. Alternate translations: (1) “believers who are sinning” (2) “elders who are doing wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:20 m4uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας 1 Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. This could refer to: (1) any believers who are sinning. Alternate translation: “believers who are sinning” (2) elders. Alternate translation: “elders who are doing wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
5:20 db63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον & πάντων 1 Paul uses the expression **before** to mean “in front of.” Alternate translations: “where everyone can see” or “in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:20 ql4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say what, by implication, people will be afraid of doing. Alternate translation: “so that other people will be afraid to sin themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:20 t404 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will be afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -336,8 +336,8 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:22 pyl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲ κοινώνει ἁμαρτίαις ἀλλοτρίαις 1 The implication in context may be that if Timothy appoints a person to leadership before they are ready or without ensuring that their character is exemplary, then Timothy will bear some responsibility for that person’s ultimate failure as a leader, or he will appear to have approved of the person’s sins, once they are uncovered. Alternate translation: “so that you do not become responsible for the moral and leadership failures of others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:23 xl32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἴνῳ ὀλίγῳ χρῶ 1 Paul is telling Timothy to use wine specifically as medicine. The water in that area was impure and often caused sickness. Alternate translation: “in addition, you should drink some wine from time to time as medicine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:24 uk56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τινῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
5:24 ug1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification πρόδηλοί εἰσιν, προάγουσαι εἰς κρίσιν 1 Paul speaks of sins as if they could move on their own ahead of a person to the place where that person will be judged for committing them. Here, **judgment** could mean: (1) This refers to the judgment when the sinner stands before God on the last day. Alternate translation: “are so obvious that everyone knows they are guilty long before God declares them guilty” (2) This refers to judgment before the church. Alternate translation: “are clear to everyone, even before the church leaders confront them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:24 i1c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τισὶν δὲ καὶ ἐπακολουθοῦσιν 1 Paul speaks once again of sins as if they could move on their own. As in the previous clause, this could mean: (1) This refers to judgment by God. Alternate translation: “but the sins of other people do not become evident until God judges them” (2) This refers to judgment by the church. Alternate translation: “but the sins of some people remain hidden for a long time” This latter alternative also allows the possibility that Paul is referring to judgment by God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:24 ug1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification πρόδηλοί εἰσιν, προάγουσαι εἰς κρίσιν 1 Paul speaks of sins as if they could move on their own ahead of a person to the place where that person will be judged for committing them. Here, **judgment** could refer to: (1) the judgment when the sinner stands before God on the last day. Alternate translation: “are so obvious that everyone knows they are guilty long before God declares them guilty” (2) judgment before the church. Alternate translation: “are clear to everyone, even before the church leaders confront them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:24 i1c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τισὶν δὲ καὶ ἐπακολουθοῦσιν 1 Paul speaks once again of sins as if they could move on their own. As in the previous clause, this could refer to: (1) judgment by God. Alternate translation: “but the sins of other people do not become evident until God judges them” (2) judgment by the church. Alternate translation: “but the sins of some people remain hidden for a long time” This latter alternative also allows the possibility that Paul is referring to judgment by God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:25 pd8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ πρόδηλα 1 Implicitly, here Paul does not mean all good works, since in the rest of the sentence he speaks of some good works that are not evident. Alternate translation: “most good works are also obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:25 qlu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ 1 The implication is that these works are considered **good** because they are consistent with God’s character, purposes, and will. Alternate translation: “actions that God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:25 bl51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 Paul speaks of good works as if they were objects that someone could hide. Alternate translation: “and people will find out later about even those good deeds that are not obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -351,10 +351,10 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
6:1 xb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translations: “God’s character” or “God’s reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:1 f5pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διδασκαλία 1 Implicitly Paul means the teaching about Jesus and about how his followers should live. Alternate translation: “our teaching about how believers should live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:2 fvv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί εἰσιν 1 Here, **brothers** figuratively means fellow believers in Jesus, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “they are fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
6:2 nmh9 καὶ ἀγαπητοὶ 1 This could mean: (1) God loves these people. Alternate translation: “whom God loves” (2) Other believers love these people, or both. Alternate translation: “and so their believing slaves should love them”
6:2 nmh9 καὶ ἀγαπητοὶ 1 This could have either, or both, meanings: (1) God loves these people. Alternate translation: “whom God loves” (2) other believers love these people. Alternate translation: “and so their believing slaves should love them”
6:3 t430 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 See how you translated the term **healthy** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Here, as well, it is a figurative way to say that the teaching is good and reliable in every way and has no defect or corruption. A person with a healthy mind would recognize this teaching as correct. Alternate translations: “to the correct words” or “to the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:3 t431 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the verbal expression of what followers of Jesus genuinely believe. Alternate translation: “the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:3 sshf τοῖς τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the message about the Lord Jesus. (2) This refers to words spoken by the Lord Jesus.
6:3 sshf τοῖς τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the message about the Lord Jesus. (2) words spoken by the Lord Jesus.
6:4 pn8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τετύφωται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person who is excessively proud as if they were inflated with air. See how you translated this in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:4 t433 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τετύφωται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:4 t434 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τετύφωται 1 Here, **he** refers to anyone in general who teaches what is not correct. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
6:10 a1fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς περιέπειραν ὀδύναις πολλαῖς 1 Paul speaks about grief as if it were a sword that people use to stab themselves. Alternate translation: “have experienced great sorrows in their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:11 tp97 ὦ ἄνθρωπε Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translations: “you servant of God” or “you person who belongs to God”
6:11 h9c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks of these temptations and sins as if they were things a person could physically run away from. Alternate translation: “make sure that you do not do these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:11 a88g ταῦτα 1 This phrase could mean: (1) This refers to everything Paul has been talking about in this section of the letter (false teachings, pride, arguments, and the love of money). (2) This refers to what Paul has been talking about most recently (the love of money). If possible, it is best to leave it as a general reference.
6:11 a88g ταῦτα 1 This phrase could refer to: (1) everything Paul has been talking about in this section of the letter (false teachings, pride, arguments, and the love of money). (2) what Paul has been talking about most recently (the love of money). If possible, it is best to leave it as a general reference.
6:11 zjl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δίωκε 1 Paul speaks of righteousness and other good qualities as if they were things that a person could run after and catch. This metaphor is the opposite of “flee from.” It means to try your best to obtain something. Alternate translation: “seek to acquire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:12 w21p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγωνίζου τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively about a person persevering in following Jesus as if he were a warrior fighting at his best, or an athlete doing his best to win an event. Alternate translation: “do your best to obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:12 y6m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιλαβοῦ τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 Paul speaks figuratively about people wanting eternal life so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. He may be continuing the metaphor of an athlete who worked hard to win an event and now holds the trophy in his hands. Alternate translations: “eagerly desire to live with God forever” or “do whatever is necessary to pursue life with God forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ front:intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
6:20 u9wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν παραθήκην 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “what Jesus has put in your care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:20 dd1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 The implication is that Jesus has entrusted Timothy with the message to proclaim about him. Alternate translation: “protect the message about Jesus that he has put in your care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:20 vgr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκτρεπόμενος τὰς βεβήλους κενοφωνίας 1 In order to avoid **profane chatter**, Timothy must avoid the people who do the chattering. Alternate translation: “do not pay attention to the talk of people for whom nothing is sacred” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:20 t498 καὶ ἀντιθέσεις 1 This could mean: (1) The false teachers are saying things that are contrary to true Christian belief. (2) The false teachers are saying things that cannot all be true at the same time. Alternate translations: “and teachings that contradict us” or “and the opposing statements”
6:20 t498 καὶ ἀντιθέσεις 1 This could mean: (1) the false teachers are saying things that are contrary to true Christian belief. Alternate translations: “and teachings that contradict us” or “and the opposing statements” (2) the false teachers are saying things that cannot all be true at the same time.
6:20 y2u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς ψευδωνύμου γνώσεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “of what some people falsely call knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:21 e6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἠστόχησαν 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:6](../01/06.md). Paul speaks of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Alternate translation: “have not fulfilled the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:21 t501 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who Paul is thinking will make this happen. Alternate translation: “may God give grace to all of you”

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
29 1:5 mbe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Here, **pure** figuratively indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
30 1:5 ar8t συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς 1 Your translation should make it clear that love is the one goal of the command and is followed by three things that lead to this love. This is the second thing, after “a pure heart.” Alternate translation: “and from a conscience that leads a person to choose right instead of wrong”
31 1:5 m53g πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 This is the third thing that leads to love, which is the one goal of the command. It is not a third goal of the command. Alternate translations: “and from faith that is genuine” or “and from faith that is without hypocrisy”
32 1:5 zziu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to trust in God. (2) This refers to belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God. (2) belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
33 1:6 j4z3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινες ἀστοχήσαντες 1 Paul speaks figuratively of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Paul means that some people are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith, which is to love, as he has just explained. Alternate translation: “some people, who are not fulfilling the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34 1:6 se38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν εἰς 1 Here, **turned away** figuratively means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
35 1:7 v28u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νομοδιδάσκαλοι 1 Here, **law** refers specifically to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
62 1:13 nv6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠλεήθην 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus had mercy on me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
63 1:14 t158 δὲ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce an expanded description of the way Jesus treated him mercifully even though he persecuted the followers of Jesus. This description will help Timothy and the other believers in Ephesus to understand how great the mercy of Jesus is. Alternate translation: “in fact”
64 1:14 c1lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπερεπλεόνασεν & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the grace of Jesus as if it were a liquid that fills a container until it flows over the top. Alternate translation: “Jesus showed me unlimited grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
65 1:14 z5lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) Paul could be referring to faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean figuratively “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) Paul could be referring to the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) This could refer to: (1) faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean figuratively “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
66 1:15 z48s πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 In this context, the term **word** refers to an entire statement. Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
67 1:15 rh2r καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who does this action. Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
68 1:15 t163 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἁμαρτωλοὺς σῶσαι 1 Paul uses this phrase as a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow, “Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners,” with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
75 1:18 b6uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and son. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ, and that would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child. Alternate translation: “you who are like my very own child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
76 1:18 y6jg κατὰ τὰς προαγούσας ἐπὶ σὲ προφητείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who did this action. Alternate translation: “in agreement with what other believers prophesied about you”
77 1:18 w2ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στρατεύῃ & τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν 1 Paul speaks figuratively about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
78 1:19 jj6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχων πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could mean: (1) It refers to a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) It refers to a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
79 1:19 ly6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθὴν συνείδησιν 1 See how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “continuing to choose to do what is right instead of what is wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
80 1:19 h2wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινες & περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could say as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
81 1:19 dyr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) This refers to the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
82 1:20 pv7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὑμέναιος & Ἀλέξανδρος 1 These are names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
83 1:20 ty7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
84 1:20 az10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
107 2:7 qa8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
108 2:7 hb97 ἐν Χριστῷ 1 “as a follower of Christ”
109 2:7 yllf ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 In order to emphasize what he is saying, Paul says the same thing twice, first positively and then negatively. If this is confusing in your language, you can say this once. Alternate translation: “I am telling you the truth as a follower of Christ”
110 2:7 h18q διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 This could mean either of two things: (1) **faith and truth** could be describing the content of what Paul teaches. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles the message of faith and truth” (2) **faith and truth** could also be describing Paul’s character as a teacher. Alternate translation: “a true and faithful teacher of the Gentiles” Here, **faith and truth** could mean: (1) the content of what Paul teaches. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles the message of faith and truth” (2) Paul’s character as a teacher. Alternate translation: “a true and faithful teacher of the Gentiles”
111 2:7 t201 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If this phrase has the second meaning that the previous note discusses, Paul may be using the two terms **faith** and **truth** together to express one idea. Alternate translation: “I teach the Gentiles about the true faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
112 2:7 t202 ἐθνῶν 1 This term refers to members of other people groups who are not Jewish. Alternate translations: “the Gentiles” or “non-Jewish people groups”
113 2:8 a841 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here the word **men** refers specifically to males. The term is not generic, since Paul addresses women next. Alternate translations: “the males in all places” or “men everywhere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
129 2:14 t221 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν παραβάσει γέγονεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **transgression** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “began to sin” or “began to disobey God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
130 2:15 krx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Use a natural way in your language to indicate that this sentence provides a contrast to the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
131 2:15 t222 σωθήσεται 1 Here, **she** likely refers to Eve, mentioned in the preceding verse, and whom Paul describes as “the woman.” “They,” later in the sentence, refers to women in general. To show how Paul shifts the topic from Eve, a representative woman, to all women, the word **she** could be translated here as “women.”
132 2:15 u8iv σωθήσεται & διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 This could mean one of three things: (1) It may be that people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. (2) It may be that the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). (3) **Childbearing** could also be a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translations: (1) “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) “God will save women as they attend to their families” or (3) “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child” This could mean: (1) people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). Alternate translation: “God will save women as they attend to their families” (3) a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translation: “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child”
133 2:15 i0ap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 If option number 2 from the previous note is correct, then Paul is figuratively referring to all of the aspects of motherhood by mentioning the beginning part of it: childbearing. Alternate translation: “as they attend to their families” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
134 2:15 n818 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God will save women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
135 2:15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living”
136 2:15 sl57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
137 2:15 dcf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) This could mean: (1) with good judgment. (2) with modesty. (3) with clear thinking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
138 3:intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.\n\n### Overseers and deacons\n\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.\n\n### Character qualities\n\nThis chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
139 3:1 t227 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
140 3:1 t228 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
145 3:3 c2c7 μὴ πάροινον, μὴ πλήκτην, ἀλλὰ ἐπιεικῆ, ἄμαχον 1 Alternate translation: “he must not drink alcohol to excess, and he must not fight and argue, but instead, he must be gentle and peaceful”
146 3:3 pc2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφιλάργυρον 1 If the expression **loving** money would not convey the idea of something inappropriate in your language, it might be helpful to use a term that expresses the idea of “greed.” Alternate translation: “not greedy for money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
147 3:4 a8gu προϊστάμενον 1 Alternate translations: “he should lead” or “he should take care of”
148 3:4 w3un ἐν ὑποταγῇ, μετὰ πάσης σεμνότητος 1 This could mean one of several things: (1) The overseer’s children should obey their father and show respect to him. Alternate translation: “who obey him completely respectfully” (2) The overseer’s children should show respect to everyone. Alternate translation: “who obey him and show respect to everyone” or (3) The overseer should show respect to those in his household as he leads them. Alternate translation: “who obey him as he treats them with respect” This could mean: (1) the overseer’s children should obey their father and show respect to him. Alternate translation: “who obey him completely respectfully” (2) the overseer’s children should show respect to everyone. Alternate translation: “who obey him and show respect to everyone” or (3) the overseer should show respect to those in his household as he leads them. Alternate translation: “who obey him as he treats them with respect”
149 3:5 n5lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ δέ τις τοῦ ἰδίου οἴκου προστῆναι οὐκ οἶδεν, πῶς ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ ἐπιμελήσεται? 1 Paul is making a statement, not actually asking a question. He does not expect Timothy to explain how a man who could not manage his own household could take care of God’s church. Instead, Paul is using the question form to emphasize how important it is for an overseer to demonstrate faithfulness in his personal life before assuming a leadership role in the church. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I say this because a man who is not able to manage his own household will certainly not be able to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
150 3:5 c814 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to a local group of God’s people, not to a building. Alternate translations: “a group of God’s people” or “a local gathering of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
151 3:6 q7hu μὴ νεόφυτον 1 Alternate translations: “he should not be still just learning the faith” or “he must be mature from a long, steady growth in the faith”
163 3:9 rfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **faith** refers to the content of the **mystery**, that is, the specific things that God has revealed and that followers of Jesus must believe. Alternate translation: “the teachings that God has revealed to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
164 3:9 y91f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person’s sense of right and wrong being **clean**, which means that it assures that person that he has done nothing wrong. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are not doing anything wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
165 3:10 hl1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ οὗτοι & δοκιμαζέσθωσαν πρῶτον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would the action. Alternate translations: “the leaders should observe and approve of them first” or “they should first prove themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
166 3:11 xyc9 γυναῖκας 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) Alternate translation: “deacons’ wives” (2) Alternate translation: “female deacons” This could mean: (1) deacons’ wives. (2) female deacons.
167 3:11 q5qx σεμνάς 1 Alternate translations: “people who act properly” or “people who are worthy of respect”
168 3:11 a12k μὴ διαβόλους 1 Alternate translation: “they must not say malicious things about other people”
169 3:11 akm5 νηφαλίους 1 See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “not doing anything to excess.”
170 3:12 wji2 μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἄνδρες 1 See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translations: (1) “not married to more than one woman” (2) “faithful to their wives” See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translations: “not married to more than one woman” or “faithful to their wives”
171 3:12 dv31 τέκνων καλῶς προϊστάμενοι καὶ τῶν ἰδίων οἴκων 1 Alternate translation: “taking proper care of their children and their personal affairs”
172 3:13 rfq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce what the results will be if people with the qualifications he has just described are chosen as church leaders. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
173 3:13 t259 οἱ & καλῶς διακονήσαντες 1 This could refer either to deacons, whom Paul has just discussed, or to overseers as well, as a conclusion to Paul’s entire discussion of church leaders. Alternate translations: “deacons who serve well” or “church leaders who serve well”
174 3:13 cv34 βαθμὸν & καλὸν 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translations: (1) “an honorable position” (2) “a good reputation” This could mean: (1) an honorable position. (2) a good reputation.
175 3:13 m684 καὶ πολλὴν παρρησίαν ἐν πίστει τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translations: (1) “and they will speak more confidently to other people about believing in Jesus” (2) “and they will trust in Jesus with even more confidence” This could mean: (1) they will speak more confidently to other people about believing in Jesus. (2) they will trust in Jesus with even more confidence.
176 3:14 t262 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τάχει 1 This expression describes Paul’s haste and urgency. Alternate translation: “as soon as I can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
177 3:14 zzzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 In some languages it is more natural to say “go” here, rather than **come**. Alternate translation: “to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
178 3:15 z9z8 ἐὰν δὲ βραδύνω 1 This does not imply that Paul might choose to take his time rather than hurrying. Alternate translations: “but in case I cannot get there soon” or “but if something prevents me from getting there soon”
179 3:15 p9u4 ἵνα εἰδῇς πῶς δεῖ ἐν οἴκῳ Θεοῦ ἀναστρέφεσθαι 1 Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. Possible meanings here are: (1) Paul is referring to the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Paul is referring specifically to Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family” Paul speaks of the group of believers as a family because God adopts each believer as a son or daughter through Christ. This could refer to: (1) the believers in general. Alternate translation: “so that you all may know how to conduct yourselves as members of God’s family” (2) Timothy’s behavior in the church. Alternate translation: “so that you may know how to conduct yourself as a member of God’s family”
180 3:15 wzk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἴκῳ Θεοῦ & ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐκκλησία Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 This phrase gives us further information about **the household of God**. It is not making a distinction between a household of God that is the church and one that is not the church. Alternate translation: “household of God, by which I mean the community of people who believe in the living God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
181 3:15 cd5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul speaks of the truth as if it were a building and of the community of believers as if they were helping to hold up that building. Alternate translation: “which helps to proclaim God’s truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182 3:15 t267 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στῦλος καὶ ἑδραίωμα 1 The terms **pillar** and **support** mean basically the same thing. They are architectural features that hold up parts of buildings. Paul uses the terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them into an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “which helps promote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
196 4:1 jzr9 δὲ 1 Paul uses this word to introduce background information that will help Timothy and the believers in Ephesus understand the next part of his letter. The false teachings that Timothy must oppose are something that the Spirit has already predicted. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance.
197 4:1 b739 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὑστέροις καιροῖς 1 This expression refers to the time period when God’s purposes in history are approaching their culmination and so the evil opposition to them increases. Paul is probably referring to the time period between Jesus’ resurrection and his second coming. Alternate translation: “in these days as God’s purposes advance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
198 4:1 b931 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 Paul speaks of people ceasing to trust in Christ as if they were physically leaving a place. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
199 4:1 hw98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, **faith** could mean: (1) This refers to the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: (1) “some people will stop believing the teachings about Jesus” (2) This refers to trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop believing the teachings about Jesus” (2) trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
200 4:1 q13m προσέχοντες 1 Alternate translations: “and turn their attention to” or “because they are paying attention to”
201 4:1 ae5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πνεύμασι πλάνοις καὶ διδασκαλίαις δαιμονίων 1 These two phrases mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If you think having both phrases in your translation might be confusing for your readers, you could combine them into a single expression. Alternate translation: “the things that evil spirits say to trick people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
202 4:2 pw29 ἐν ὑποκρίσει ψευδολόγων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could start a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “The people who teach these things are hypocrites, and they tell lies”
228 4:7 sea5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γύμναζε & σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν 1 Paul tells Timothy figuratively to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
229 4:8 t311 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks γὰρ 1 What follows after this word is a direct quotation of a saying that Paul uses for teaching. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
230 4:8 i6rh σωματικὴ γυμνασία 1 Alternate translation: “physical exercise”
231 4:8 t313 πρὸς ὀλίγον ἐστὶν ὠφέλιμος 1 This could mean one of three things. Alternate translations: (1) “has some small value” (2) “has value for a little while” or (3) “does not have very much value” This could mean: (1) it has some small value. (2) it has value for a little while. (3) it does not have very much value.
232 4:8 df19 ἐπαγγελίαν ἔχουσα 1 Alternate translation: “will bring benefits”
233 4:9 t315 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 As in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [3:1](../03/01.md), in this context, the term **word** means “statement” or “saying.” (Paul is referring to the entire saying that he quoted in the previous verse.) Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable”
234 4:9 hc1t καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος 1 See how you translated this in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it”
251 4:15 merc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σου ἡ προκοπὴ 1 If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit in what way Timothy is to make **progress**. Alternate translation: “your increasing ability to live the way that Jesus wants you to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
252 4:16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach”
253 4:16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “continue to do these things”
254 4:16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things” This could mean: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things”
255 5:intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Honor and respect\n\nPaul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.\n\n### Widows\n\nIn the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.\n\n### Variation in names\n\nIn this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3.
256 5:1 wt5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
257 5:1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Alternate translation: “do not reprimand an older man”
262 5:3 smp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom χήρας τίμα 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “provide for widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
263 5:3 qc6s τὰς ὄντως χήρας 1 Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
264 5:4 vv64 τέκνα ἢ ἔκγονα 1 Here these **children** and **grandchildren** are adults who are able to care for others, not young children.
265 5:4 w38h πρῶτον 1 This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) It could mean that, of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) It could mean that these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support” This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support”
266 5:4 fnab μανθανέτωσαν & εὐσεβεῖν 1 Here, **learn** means to practice, that is, to learn by doing. Alternate translation: “let them become proficient in honoring”
267 5:4 t344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μανθανέτωσαν & τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 There are two possible meanings here: (1) These two phrases may mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be clearer in your language. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) However, there may be a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) These two phrases may: (1) mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be clearer in your language. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) have a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
268 5:4 g5mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον 1 Paul uses this phrase figuratively to refer to family members, by association to the way they live in the same house. Alternate translations: “their own family members” or “those living in their homes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
269 5:4 q5c8 ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 Alternate translation: “let them do good to their mother or grandmother in return for the good things their parents and grandparents gave them”
270 5:4 t347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Paul uses this term to introduce an additional reason why family members should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
283 5:9 s8ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χήρα καταλεγέσθω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “have the church put a widow on the register” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
284 5:9 khe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χήρα καταλεγέσθω 1 There seems to have been a list of widows who had no family to help them. The church members met these women’s needs for food, clothing, and shelter, and these women then devoted their lives to serving the Christian community. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “have the church put a woman on the list of widows who truly need help” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
285 5:9 i27x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἔλαττον ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα γεγονυῖα 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “if she is at least sixty years old” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
286 5:9 q9dj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς γυνή 1 Like the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md), this means that she has only one husband, and may also means that she was only married once. (If it means the second possibility, it is not clear whether Paul means to exclude women who were married more than once and widowed each time, or more specifically women who divorced their husbands and married other men.) Alternate translations: (1) “she was always faithful to her husband” (2) “she had one husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) Like the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md), this could mean: (1) she has only one husband. Alternate translation: “she was always faithful to her husband” (2) she was only married once. If it means this second possibility, it is not clear whether Paul means to exclude women who were married more than once and widowed each time, or more specifically women who divorced their husbands and married other men. Alternate translation: “she had one husband” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
287 5:10 l8nm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς μαρτυρουμένη 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “people must be able to attest to her good deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
288 5:10 mik7 ἐξενοδόχησεν 1 Alternate translations: “has welcomed strangers into her home” or “practiced hospitality”
289 5:10 ygl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἁγίων πόδας ἔνιψεν 1 In this culture, people walked barefoot or in sandals on roads that were dusty or muddy, so washing their feet once they entered a home was a way of helping them be comfortable and clean. If the people of your culture would not be familiar with this practice, you could use a general expression instead. Alternate translation: “has cared for believers who visited her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
300 5:13 t376 περιερχόμεναι τὰς οἰκίας 1 Alternate translation: “going from house to house”
301 5:13 nll4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φλύαροι καὶ περίεργοι, λαλοῦσαι τὰ μὴ δέοντα 1 These three phrases may be ways of speaking about the same activity. Paul may be using repetition to emphasize that these women should not be looking into the private lives of people and telling about them to others who would be no better off after hearing this gossip. If you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases into a single one. Alternate translation: “people who interfere openly in other people’s business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) (A doublet can consist of more than two terms.)
302 5:13 cym5 φλύαροι 1 Alternate translation: “people who talk nonsense”
303 5:14 u94k τῷ ἀντικειμένῳ 1 This expression could refer by implication to: (1) This refers to Satan (that is the reading of UST). Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) This refers collectively to unbelievers who are opposing the followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “unbelievers who are opposing you” This expression could refer by implication to: (1) This could refer to: (1) Satan. This is the reading of UST. Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) unbelievers who are opposing the followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “unbelievers who are opposing you”
304 5:15 fy54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν ὀπίσω τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Paul speaks of living in faithfulness to Christ as if it were a path that one can either follow or turn aside from. He means that some younger widows have stopped obeying Jesus and have started to do what Satan would want them to do instead. Alternate translation: “have stopped living in obedience to Jesus and have decided to obey Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
305 5:16 g8k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τις πιστὴ 1 Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “any woman who believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
306 5:16 mf4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔχει χήρας 1 The implication is that she has widows within her extended family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has relatives who are widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
308 5:16 t384 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
309 5:16 d35m ὄντως χήραις 1 Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them”
310 5:17 u93q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι & ἀξιούσθωσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
311 5:17 wp9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διπλῆς τιμῆς 1 Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) The congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) They should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) the congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) they should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
312 5:17 r8ew rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ κοπιῶντες 1 Paul is using the participle **toiling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to members of a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “elders who labor diligently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
313 5:17 t389 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in the word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
314 5:17 t390 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Paul may be using the term **word** here figuratively to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
321 5:19 af68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions κατηγορίαν μὴ παραδέχου, ἐκτὸς εἰ 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement and then contradicting it, you could reword this statement to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only believe that an accusation is true if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
322 5:19 t399 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐπὶ δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων 1 Here, **on** stands for the concept of “relying on.” You may need to use a more complete phrase in your language. Alternate translations: “you are relying on the testimony of two or three people” or “at least two people give evidence for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
323 5:19 kmy5 δύο ἢ τριῶν 1 Alternate translations: “at least two” or “two or more”
324 5:20 m4uh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἁμαρτάνοντας 1 Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. There are two possibilities here: (1) This could refer to any believers who are sinning. (2) Paul could still be talking about elders. Alternate translations: (1) “believers who are sinning” (2) “elders who are doing wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) Paul is using this participle, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. This could refer to: (1) any believers who are sinning. Alternate translation: “believers who are sinning” (2) elders. Alternate translation: “elders who are doing wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
325 5:20 db63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον & πάντων 1 Paul uses the expression **before** to mean “in front of.” Alternate translations: “where everyone can see” or “in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
326 5:20 ql4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say what, by implication, people will be afraid of doing. Alternate translation: “so that other people will be afraid to sin themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
327 5:20 t404 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will be afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
336 5:22 pyl8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδὲ κοινώνει ἁμαρτίαις ἀλλοτρίαις 1 The implication in context may be that if Timothy appoints a person to leadership before they are ready or without ensuring that their character is exemplary, then Timothy will bear some responsibility for that person’s ultimate failure as a leader, or he will appear to have approved of the person’s sins, once they are uncovered. Alternate translation: “so that you do not become responsible for the moral and leadership failures of others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
337 5:23 xl32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἴνῳ ὀλίγῳ χρῶ 1 Paul is telling Timothy to use wine specifically as medicine. The water in that area was impure and often caused sickness. Alternate translation: “in addition, you should drink some wine from time to time as medicine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
338 5:24 uk56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τινῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
339 5:24 ug1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification πρόδηλοί εἰσιν, προάγουσαι εἰς κρίσιν 1 Paul speaks of sins as if they could move on their own ahead of a person to the place where that person will be judged for committing them. Here, **judgment** could mean: (1) This refers to the judgment when the sinner stands before God on the last day. Alternate translation: “are so obvious that everyone knows they are guilty long before God declares them guilty” (2) This refers to judgment before the church. Alternate translation: “are clear to everyone, even before the church leaders confront them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) Paul speaks of sins as if they could move on their own ahead of a person to the place where that person will be judged for committing them. Here, **judgment** could refer to: (1) the judgment when the sinner stands before God on the last day. Alternate translation: “are so obvious that everyone knows they are guilty long before God declares them guilty” (2) judgment before the church. Alternate translation: “are clear to everyone, even before the church leaders confront them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
340 5:24 i1c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τισὶν δὲ καὶ ἐπακολουθοῦσιν 1 Paul speaks once again of sins as if they could move on their own. As in the previous clause, this could mean: (1) This refers to judgment by God. Alternate translation: “but the sins of other people do not become evident until God judges them” (2) This refers to judgment by the church. Alternate translation: “but the sins of some people remain hidden for a long time” This latter alternative also allows the possibility that Paul is referring to judgment by God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) Paul speaks once again of sins as if they could move on their own. As in the previous clause, this could refer to: (1) judgment by God. Alternate translation: “but the sins of other people do not become evident until God judges them” (2) judgment by the church. Alternate translation: “but the sins of some people remain hidden for a long time” This latter alternative also allows the possibility that Paul is referring to judgment by God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
341 5:25 pd8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ πρόδηλα 1 Implicitly, here Paul does not mean all good works, since in the rest of the sentence he speaks of some good works that are not evident. Alternate translation: “most good works are also obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
342 5:25 qlu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ 1 The implication is that these works are considered **good** because they are consistent with God’s character, purposes, and will. Alternate translation: “actions that God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
343 5:25 bl51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 Paul speaks of good works as if they were objects that someone could hide. Alternate translation: “and people will find out later about even those good deeds that are not obvious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
351 6:1 xb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translations: “God’s character” or “God’s reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
352 6:1 f5pc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διδασκαλία 1 Implicitly Paul means the teaching about Jesus and about how his followers should live. Alternate translation: “our teaching about how believers should live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
353 6:2 fvv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί εἰσιν 1 Here, **brothers** figuratively means fellow believers in Jesus, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “they are fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
354 6:2 nmh9 καὶ ἀγαπητοὶ 1 This could mean: (1) God loves these people. Alternate translation: “whom God loves” (2) Other believers love these people, or both. Alternate translation: “and so their believing slaves should love them” This could have either, or both, meanings: (1) God loves these people. Alternate translation: “whom God loves” (2) other believers love these people. Alternate translation: “and so their believing slaves should love them”
355 6:3 t430 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 See how you translated the term **healthy** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Here, as well, it is a figurative way to say that the teaching is good and reliable in every way and has no defect or corruption. A person with a healthy mind would recognize this teaching as correct. Alternate translations: “to the correct words” or “to the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
356 6:3 t431 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the verbal expression of what followers of Jesus genuinely believe. Alternate translation: “the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
357 6:3 sshf τοῖς τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the message about the Lord Jesus. (2) This refers to words spoken by the Lord Jesus. This could refer to: (1) the message about the Lord Jesus. (2) words spoken by the Lord Jesus.
358 6:4 pn8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τετύφωται 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person who is excessively proud as if they were inflated with air. See how you translated this in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
359 6:4 t433 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τετύφωται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
360 6:4 t434 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τετύφωται 1 Here, **he** refers to anyone in general who teaches what is not correct. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
394 6:10 a1fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς περιέπειραν ὀδύναις πολλαῖς 1 Paul speaks about grief as if it were a sword that people use to stab themselves. Alternate translation: “have experienced great sorrows in their lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
395 6:11 tp97 ὦ ἄνθρωπε Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translations: “you servant of God” or “you person who belongs to God”
396 6:11 h9c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks of these temptations and sins as if they were things a person could physically run away from. Alternate translation: “make sure that you do not do these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
397 6:11 a88g ταῦτα 1 This phrase could mean: (1) This refers to everything Paul has been talking about in this section of the letter (false teachings, pride, arguments, and the love of money). (2) This refers to what Paul has been talking about most recently (the love of money). If possible, it is best to leave it as a general reference. This phrase could refer to: (1) everything Paul has been talking about in this section of the letter (false teachings, pride, arguments, and the love of money). (2) what Paul has been talking about most recently (the love of money). If possible, it is best to leave it as a general reference.
398 6:11 zjl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δίωκε 1 Paul speaks of righteousness and other good qualities as if they were things that a person could run after and catch. This metaphor is the opposite of “flee from.” It means to try your best to obtain something. Alternate translation: “seek to acquire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
399 6:12 w21p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγωνίζου τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively about a person persevering in following Jesus as if he were a warrior fighting at his best, or an athlete doing his best to win an event. Alternate translation: “do your best to obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
400 6:12 y6m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιλαβοῦ τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 Paul speaks figuratively about people wanting eternal life so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. He may be continuing the metaphor of an athlete who worked hard to win an event and now holds the trophy in his hands. Alternate translations: “eagerly desire to live with God forever” or “do whatever is necessary to pursue life with God forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
426 6:20 u9wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν παραθήκην 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “what Jesus has put in your care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
427 6:20 dd1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 The implication is that Jesus has entrusted Timothy with the message to proclaim about him. Alternate translation: “protect the message about Jesus that he has put in your care” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
428 6:20 vgr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκτρεπόμενος τὰς βεβήλους κενοφωνίας 1 In order to avoid **profane chatter**, Timothy must avoid the people who do the chattering. Alternate translation: “do not pay attention to the talk of people for whom nothing is sacred” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
429 6:20 t498 καὶ ἀντιθέσεις 1 This could mean: (1) The false teachers are saying things that are contrary to true Christian belief. (2) The false teachers are saying things that cannot all be true at the same time. Alternate translations: “and teachings that contradict us” or “and the opposing statements” This could mean: (1) the false teachers are saying things that are contrary to true Christian belief. Alternate translations: “and teachings that contradict us” or “and the opposing statements” (2) the false teachers are saying things that cannot all be true at the same time.
430 6:20 y2u7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς ψευδωνύμου γνώσεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “of what some people falsely call knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
431 6:21 e6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἠστόχησαν 1 See how you translated this expression in [1:6](../01/06.md). Paul speaks of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Alternate translation: “have not fulfilled the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
432 6:21 t501 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who Paul is thinking will make this happen. Alternate translation: “may God give grace to all of you”

50
tn_2CO.tsv
View File

@ -9,10 +9,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
1:3 px2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:3 k7dl ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ 1 “God, who is the Father”
1:3 pg4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 These two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1:3 blv4 ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 This could mean: (1) The words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) The words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**.
1:3 blv4 ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 This could mean: (1) the words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) the words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**.
1:4 n2lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** and **our** include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of Christ’s sufferings as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:5 i254 τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the suffering that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) This refers to the suffering that Christ experienced on their behalf.
1:5 i254 τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the suffering that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) the suffering that Christ experienced on their behalf.
1:5 tg9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks of comfort as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 y9bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:6 wyj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
1:20 h2xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί 1 This means that Jesus guarantees all of God’s promises. Alternate translation: “all the promises of God are guaranteed in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 h4uv ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί & δι’ αὐτοῦ & δι’ ἡμῶν 1 The word **him** refers to Jesus Christ.
1:21 d3s3 ὁ δὲ βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς σὺν ὑμῖν εἰς Χριστὸν καὶ χρίσας ἡμᾶς Θεός 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that God confirms the relationship of him and his team with each other because they are in Christ. (2) Paul is saying that God confirms the relationship of him and his team, and the Corinthians, with Christ.
1:21 tjc6 χρίσας ἡμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) He sent us to preach the gospel. (2) He chose us to be his people.
1:21 tjc6 χρίσας ἡμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) he sent us to preach the gospel. (2) he chose us to be his people.
1:22 z43l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ καὶ σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a mark on us as a sign that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “he has put his mark of ownership on us” or “he has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:22 xe98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δοὺς τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Alternate translation: “gave us the Spirit to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:22 jcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 The Spirit is spoken of as if he was a partial downpayment toward eternal life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
2:7 vpx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μή & τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ 1 This means to have a strong emotional response of too much sorrow. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “too much sorrow does not overwhelm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 r916 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the church in Corinth to show love and to forgive the person they have punished. He writes that he, also, has forgiven him.
2:8 yi2z κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην 1 This means that they are to confirm their love for this man in the presence of all of the believers.
2:9 xw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς πάντα ὑπήκοοί ἐστε 1 This could mean: (1) The Corinthians are obedient to God in everything. (2) The Corinthians are obedient in everything that Paul has taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:9 xw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς πάντα ὑπήκοοί ἐστε 1 This could mean: (1) the Corinthians are obedient to God in everything. (2) the Corinthians are obedient in everything that Paul has taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:10 lzp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven it for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:10 cbm6 δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean they are forgiven out of Paul's love for them. (2) This may mean they are forgiven for their benefit.
2:10 cbm6 δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) they are forgiven out of Paul's love for them. (2) they are forgiven for their benefit.
2:11 m46t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν 1 Paul uses a negative expression to emphasize the opposite. Alternate translation: “For we know his plans well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2:12 l6vd 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the believers in Corinth by telling them of the opportunities he has had to preach the gospel in Troas and Macedonia.
2:12 a1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul speaks of his opportunity to preach the gospel as if it were a door through which he was allowed to walk. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord opened a door to me … to preach the gospel” or “The Lord gave me the opportunity … to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
2:14 l1nr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Paul speaks of the knowledge of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. Alternate translation: “He causes the knowledge of Christ to spread to everyone who hears us, just as the sweet smell of burning incense spreads to everyone near it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 eq21 φανεροῦντι & ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 “he spreads … everywhere we go”
2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of his ministry as if it were a burnt offering that someone offers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 b1k1 Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the sweet aroma which is the knowledge of Christ. (2) This refers to the sweet aroma that Christ offers.
2:15 b1k1 Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could refer to: (1) the sweet aroma which is the knowledge of Christ. (2) the sweet aroma that Christ offers.
2:15 itc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς σῳζομένοις 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God has saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀσμὴ 1 “the knowledge of Christ is an aroma.” This refers back to [2 Corinthians 2:14](../02/14.md), where Paul speaks of the knowledge of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον 1 This could mean: (1) The word **death** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that causes death.” (2) This refers to an aroma of death that causes people to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον 1 This could mean: (1) the word **death** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that causes death.” (2) this refers to an aroma of death that causes people to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:16 v2n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **life** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that gives life.” (2) This refers to an aroma of life that gives people live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 This could mean: (1) the word **life** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that gives life.” (2) this refers to an aroma of life that gives people live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is worthy to do the ministry that God has called them to do. Alternate translation: “No one is worthy of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καπηλεύοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Word** here is a metonym for “message.” Alternate translation: “who sell God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 “pure motives”
@ -183,10 +183,10 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People strike us down but do not destroy us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:9 z8np καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 “We are hurt badly”
4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντοτε τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Paul speaks of his sufferings as if they are an experience of the death of Jesus. Alternate translation: “We are often in danger of dying, as Jesus died” or “We always suffer in such a way that we experience the death of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:10 l6f6 ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) Our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) The spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies.
4:10 l6f6 ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) the spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies.
4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “other people may see the life of Jesus in our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες, εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Carrying the death of Jesus represents being in danger of dying because of being loyal to Jesus. Alternate translation: “For those of us who are alive, God is always leading us to face death because we are joined to Jesus” or “People are always causing us who are alive to be in danger of dying because we are joined to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 God wants Jesus’ life be shown in us. This could mean: (1) Our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) The spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md).
4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 God wants Jesus’ life be shown in us. This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) the spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md).
4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 You can state this in active form. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “so other people may see the life of Jesus in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul speaks of death and life as if they are persons who can work. This means that they are always in danger of physical death so that the Corinthians can have spiritual life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
4:13 ret6 τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 “the same attitude of faith.” Here the word **spirit** refers a person’s attitude and temperament.
@ -235,16 +235,16 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things he has done in the physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:10 lsh8 εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 “whether those things were good or bad”
5:11 dzh5 εἰδότες & τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 “knowing what it means to fear the Lord”
5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 This could mean: (1) We persuade people of the truth of the gospel. (2) We persuade people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 This could mean: (1) we persuade people of the truth of the gospel. (2) we persuade people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God clearly sees what kind of people we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:11 y5l1 καὶ ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 “that you are also convinced of it”
5:12 mza1 ἵνα ἔχητε 1 “so you may have something to say to”
5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 Here the word **appearances** refers to outward expressions of things like ability and status. The word **heart** refers to the inward character of a person. Alternate translation: “those who praise their own actions, but do not care about what they really are in their inner being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἴτε & ἐξέστημεν & εἴτε σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Paul is speaking about the way others think of him and his coworkers. Alternate translation: “if people think we are crazy … if people think we are sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:14 azi9 ἡ γὰρ ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to our love for Christ. (2) This refers to Christ’s love for us.
5:14 azi9 ἡ γὰρ ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) our love for Christ. (2) Christ’s love for us.
5:14 nd9g ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν 1 “died for all people”
5:15 h831 τῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 “him who for their sake died and whom God caused to live again” or “Christ, who died for their sake and whom God raised”
5:15 ri6f ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) These words refer only to “died.” (2) These words refer to both “died” and “was raised.”
5:15 ri6f ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 This could refer: (1) only to “died.” (2) to both “died” and “was raised.”
5:16 f2ww 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of Christ’s love and death, we are not to judge by human standards. We are appointed to teach others how to be united with and have peace with God through Christ’s death and receive God’s righteousness through Christ.
5:16 ic21 ὥστε 1 This refers to what Paul has just said about living for Christ instead of living for self.
5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καινὴ κτίσις 1 Paul speaks of the person who believes in Christ as if God had created a new person. Alternate translation: “he is a new person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
6:7 p5l5 ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 “by showing God’s power to people”
6:7 ven8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Paul speaks of their righteousness as if it is weapons that they use to fight spiritual battles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:7 ef5b τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 “righteousness as our armor” or “righteousness as our weapons”
6:7 ijr2 τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 This could mean: (1) There is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) They are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction.
6:7 ijr2 τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 This could mean: (1) there is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) they are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction.
6:8 zi7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul lists several extremes of how people think about him and his ministry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς πλάνοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People accuse us of being deceitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as if people did not know us and yet people still know us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
7:5 f3c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Corinthians or Titus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7:5 c8ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **bodies** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “we had no rest” or “we were very tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
7:5 h3cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we experienced trouble in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, **outside** could mean: (1) This means “outside of our bodies.” (2) This means “outside of the church.” The word **inside** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, **outside** could mean: (1) “outside of our bodies.” (2) “outside of the church.” The word **inside** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:7 w7td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Paul received comfort from knowing that the Corinthians had comforted Titus. Alternate translation: “by learning about the comfort that Titus had received from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:8 b2xj 0 # General Information:\n\nThis refers to Paul’s previous letter to these Corinthian believers where he rebuked them for their acceptance of a believer’s sexual immorality with his father’s wife.
7:8 jic5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul praises them for their godly sorrow, their zeal to do right, and the joy that it brought him and Titus.
@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
7:9 kn5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not because what I said in my letter distressed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:9 l6d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 “you suffered no loss because we rebuked you.” This means that although the letter caused them sorrow, they eventually benefited from the letter because it led them to repentance. Alternate translation: “so that we did not harm you in any way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:10 dtm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ γὰρ κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 The word **repentance** may be repeated to clarify its relationship to what precedes it and what follows it. Alternate translation: “For godly sorrow produces repentance, and repentance leads to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
7:10 lc4m ἀμεταμέλητον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has no regret that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) The Corinthians will not regret experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation.
7:10 lc4m ἀμεταμέλητον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has no regret that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) the Corinthians will not regret experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation.
7:10 lc1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη, θάνατον κατεργάζεται 1 This kind of sorrow leads to death instead of salvation because it does not produce repentance. Alternate translation: “Worldly sorrow, however, leads to spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:11 l24s ἰδοὺ γὰρ αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 “Look and see for yourselves what great determination”
7:11 gpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations σπουδήν: ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν 1 Here the word **How** makes this statement an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your determination to prove you were innocent was very great!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
7:14 q5hg ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη 1 “you proved that our boasting about you to Titus was true”
7:15 d87j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 You can state this noun “obedience” with a verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:15 g9bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
7:15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to great reverence for God. (2) This refers to great reverence for Titus.
7:15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 This could refer to: (1) great reverence for God. (2) great reverence for Titus.
8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Gift to the church in Jerusalem\n\nThe church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md))
8:1 mm8g 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving.
8:1 d1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
9:12 esk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers’ act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:13 plj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:13 ze14 δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Paul says that the Corinthians will glorify God both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need.
9:15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” This could mean: (1) This gift refers to “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) This gift refers to Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
9:15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” This **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.\n\nIn this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\n“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
10:1 yc1g 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does.
10:1 gq7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The word **humility** and **gentleness** are abstract nouns, and can be expressed in another way. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -434,15 +434,15 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
10:2 ik1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 1 The word **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. “we are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:3 cvd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες 1 Here, **walk** is an metaphor for “live” and “flesh” is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Paul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical war. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα 1 This could mean: (1) The word **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) The word **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα 1 The word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν & λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Paul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ σαρκικὰ 1 This could mean: (1) The word **fleshly** is a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) The word **fleshly** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ σαρκικὰ 1 The word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:5 xuz9 πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον 1 Paul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and “every high thing” were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves”
10:5 b74d πᾶν ὕψωμα 1 “everything that proud people do”
10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The words **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:5 r2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of people’s thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “We show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:6 m4ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν 1 The words **act of disobedience** are a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:7 y2yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This could mean: (1) This is a command. (2) This is a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:7 y2yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
10:7 z1t5 λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 “he needs to remember”
10:7 f3i9 καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 “that we belong to Christ just as much as he does”
10:8 d4zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -547,9 +547,9 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:2 fth2 εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Paul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body”
12:2 k4aw τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 This refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe).
12:3 cju3 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul continues to speak of himself as though he were speaking of someone else.
12:4 qv5h ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This continues Paul’s account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into paradise. (2) An angel took this man into paradise. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took … paradise” or “they took … paradise.”
12:4 qv5h ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This continues Paul’s account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into paradise. (2) an angel took this man into paradise. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took … paradise” or “they took … paradise.”
12:4 wm7y ἡρπάγη 1 suddenly and forcefully held and taken
12:4 ic45 τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to heaven. (2) This refers to the third heaven. (3) This refers to a special place in heaven.
12:4 ic45 τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven.
12:5 hpq6 τοῦ τοιούτου 1 “of that person”
12:5 i12f οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses”
12:6 vg13 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nAs Paul defends his apostleship from God, he tells of the weakness that God gave him to keep him humble.
@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:8 wc7r ὑπὲρ τούτου & τὸν Κύριον 1 “Lord about this thorn in the flesh,” or “Lord about this affliction”
12:9 nr2j ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου 1 “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need”
12:9 cs63 ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 “for my power works best when you are weak”
12:9 g8mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of Christ’s power as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) People might see that Paul has the power of Christ” (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:9 g8mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of Christ’s power as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ” (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:10 pxf1 εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is content in weakness, insults, troubles, persecutions, and distressing situations if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ.
12:10 s5sx ἐν ἀσθενείαις 1 “when I am weak”
12:10 xl8q ἐν ὕβρεσιν 1 “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person”
@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Intr
12:19 vg3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς 1 “to strengthen you.” Paul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:20 cu6s οὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς 1 “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing”
12:20 zy6g κἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε 1 “you might not like what you see in me”
12:20 rh1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι 1 The abstract nouns “quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder” can be translated using verbs. This could mean: (1) Some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) Some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:20 rh1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι 1 The abstract nouns “quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder” can be translated using verbs. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:21 ddw3 πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων, 1 “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins”
12:21 hq1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
12:21 rh22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 The abstract noun impurity can be translated as “things that do not please God.” Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
9 1:3 px2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10 1:3 k7dl ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ 1 “God, who is the Father”
11 1:3 pg4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 These two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
12 1:3 blv4 ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 This could mean: (1) The words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) The words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**. This could mean: (1) the words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) the words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**.
13 1:4 n2lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** and **our** include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
14 1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of Christ’s sufferings as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15 1:5 i254 τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the suffering that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) This refers to the suffering that Christ experienced on their behalf. This could refer to: (1) the suffering that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) the suffering that Christ experienced on their behalf.
16 1:5 tg9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks of comfort as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17 1:6 y9bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18 1:6 wyj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
46 1:20 h2xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί 1 This means that Jesus guarantees all of God’s promises. Alternate translation: “all the promises of God are guaranteed in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
47 1:20 h4uv ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί & δι’ αὐτοῦ & δι’ ἡμῶν 1 The word **him** refers to Jesus Christ.
48 1:21 d3s3 ὁ δὲ βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς σὺν ὑμῖν εἰς Χριστὸν καὶ χρίσας ἡμᾶς Θεός 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that God confirms the relationship of him and his team with each other because they are in Christ. (2) Paul is saying that God confirms the relationship of him and his team, and the Corinthians, with Christ.
49 1:21 tjc6 χρίσας ἡμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) He sent us to preach the gospel. (2) He chose us to be his people. This could mean: (1) he sent us to preach the gospel. (2) he chose us to be his people.
50 1:22 z43l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ καὶ σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a mark on us as a sign that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “he has put his mark of ownership on us” or “he has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
51 1:22 xe98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δοὺς τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Alternate translation: “gave us the Spirit to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
52 1:22 jcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 The Spirit is spoken of as if he was a partial downpayment toward eternal life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
71 2:7 vpx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μή & τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ 1 This means to have a strong emotional response of too much sorrow. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “too much sorrow does not overwhelm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
72 2:8 r916 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the church in Corinth to show love and to forgive the person they have punished. He writes that he, also, has forgiven him.
73 2:8 yi2z κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην 1 This means that they are to confirm their love for this man in the presence of all of the believers.
74 2:9 xw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς πάντα ὑπήκοοί ἐστε 1 This could mean: (1) The Corinthians are obedient to God in everything. (2) The Corinthians are obedient in everything that Paul has taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean: (1) the Corinthians are obedient to God in everything. (2) the Corinthians are obedient in everything that Paul has taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
75 2:10 lzp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven it for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
76 2:10 cbm6 δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean they are forgiven out of Paul's love for them. (2) This may mean they are forgiven for their benefit. This could mean: (1) they are forgiven out of Paul's love for them. (2) they are forgiven for their benefit.
77 2:11 m46t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν 1 Paul uses a negative expression to emphasize the opposite. Alternate translation: “For we know his plans well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
78 2:12 l6vd 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the believers in Corinth by telling them of the opportunities he has had to preach the gospel in Troas and Macedonia.
79 2:12 a1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul speaks of his opportunity to preach the gospel as if it were a door through which he was allowed to walk. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord opened a door to me … to preach the gospel” or “The Lord gave me the opportunity … to preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
84 2:14 l1nr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Paul speaks of the knowledge of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. Alternate translation: “He causes the knowledge of Christ to spread to everyone who hears us, just as the sweet smell of burning incense spreads to everyone near it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
85 2:14 eq21 φανεροῦντι & ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 “he spreads … everywhere we go”
86 2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of his ministry as if it were a burnt offering that someone offers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
87 2:15 b1k1 Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the sweet aroma which is the knowledge of Christ. (2) This refers to the sweet aroma that Christ offers. This could refer to: (1) the sweet aroma which is the knowledge of Christ. (2) the sweet aroma that Christ offers.
88 2:15 itc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς σῳζομένοις 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God has saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
89 2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀσμὴ 1 “the knowledge of Christ is an aroma.” This refers back to [2 Corinthians 2:14](../02/14.md), where Paul speaks of the knowledge of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
90 2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον 1 This could mean: (1) The word **death** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that causes death.” (2) This refers to an aroma of death that causes people to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) This could mean: (1) the word **death** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that causes death.” (2) this refers to an aroma of death that causes people to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
91 2:16 v2n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
92 2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **life** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that gives life.” (2) This refers to an aroma of life that gives people live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) This could mean: (1) the word **life** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that gives life.” (2) this refers to an aroma of life that gives people live. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
93 2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is worthy to do the ministry that God has called them to do. Alternate translation: “No one is worthy of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
94 2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καπηλεύοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Word** here is a metonym for “message.” Alternate translation: “who sell God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
95 2:17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 “pure motives”
183 4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People strike us down but do not destroy us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
184 4:9 z8np καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 “We are hurt badly”
185 4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντοτε τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Paul speaks of his sufferings as if they are an experience of the death of Jesus. Alternate translation: “We are often in danger of dying, as Jesus died” or “We always suffer in such a way that we experience the death of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
186 4:10 l6f6 ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) Our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) The spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) the spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies.
187 4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “other people may see the life of Jesus in our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
188 4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες, εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Carrying the death of Jesus represents being in danger of dying because of being loyal to Jesus. Alternate translation: “For those of us who are alive, God is always leading us to face death because we are joined to Jesus” or “People are always causing us who are alive to be in danger of dying because we are joined to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
189 4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 God wants Jesus’ life be shown in us. This could mean: (1) Our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) The spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md). God wants Jesus’ life be shown in us. This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) the spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md).
190 4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 You can state this in active form. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “so other people may see the life of Jesus in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
191 4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul speaks of death and life as if they are persons who can work. This means that they are always in danger of physical death so that the Corinthians can have spiritual life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
192 4:13 ret6 τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 “the same attitude of faith.” Here the word **spirit** refers a person’s attitude and temperament.
235 5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things he has done in the physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
236 5:10 lsh8 εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 “whether those things were good or bad”
237 5:11 dzh5 εἰδότες & τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 “knowing what it means to fear the Lord”
238 5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 This could mean: (1) We persuade people of the truth of the gospel. (2) We persuade people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean: (1) we persuade people of the truth of the gospel. (2) we persuade people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
239 5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God clearly sees what kind of people we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
240 5:11 y5l1 καὶ ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 “that you are also convinced of it”
241 5:12 mza1 ἵνα ἔχητε 1 “so you may have something to say to”
242 5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 Here the word **appearances** refers to outward expressions of things like ability and status. The word **heart** refers to the inward character of a person. Alternate translation: “those who praise their own actions, but do not care about what they really are in their inner being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
243 5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἴτε & ἐξέστημεν & εἴτε σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Paul is speaking about the way others think of him and his coworkers. Alternate translation: “if people think we are crazy … if people think we are sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
244 5:14 azi9 ἡ γὰρ ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to our love for Christ. (2) This refers to Christ’s love for us. This could refer to: (1) our love for Christ. (2) Christ’s love for us.
245 5:14 nd9g ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν 1 “died for all people”
246 5:15 h831 τῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 “him who for their sake died and whom God caused to live again” or “Christ, who died for their sake and whom God raised”
247 5:15 ri6f ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) These words refer only to “died.” (2) These words refer to both “died” and “was raised.” This could refer: (1) only to “died.” (2) to both “died” and “was raised.”
248 5:16 f2ww 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of Christ’s love and death, we are not to judge by human standards. We are appointed to teach others how to be united with and have peace with God through Christ’s death and receive God’s righteousness through Christ.
249 5:16 ic21 ὥστε 1 This refers to what Paul has just said about living for Christ instead of living for self.
250 5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καινὴ κτίσις 1 Paul speaks of the person who believes in Christ as if God had created a new person. Alternate translation: “he is a new person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
283 6:7 p5l5 ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 “by showing God’s power to people”
284 6:7 ven8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Paul speaks of their righteousness as if it is weapons that they use to fight spiritual battles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
285 6:7 ef5b τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 “righteousness as our armor” or “righteousness as our weapons”
286 6:7 ijr2 τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 This could mean: (1) There is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) They are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction. This could mean: (1) there is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) they are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction.
287 6:8 zi7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul lists several extremes of how people think about him and his ministry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
288 6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς πλάνοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People accuse us of being deceitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
289 6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as if people did not know us and yet people still know us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
327 7:5 f3c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Corinthians or Titus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
328 7:5 c8ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **bodies** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “we had no rest” or “we were very tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
329 7:5 h3cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we experienced trouble in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
330 7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, **outside** could mean: (1) This means “outside of our bodies.” (2) This means “outside of the church.” The word **inside** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **outside** could mean: (1) “outside of our bodies.” (2) “outside of the church.” The word **inside** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
331 7:7 w7td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Paul received comfort from knowing that the Corinthians had comforted Titus. Alternate translation: “by learning about the comfort that Titus had received from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
332 7:8 b2xj 0 # General Information:\n\nThis refers to Paul’s previous letter to these Corinthian believers where he rebuked them for their acceptance of a believer’s sexual immorality with his father’s wife.
333 7:8 jic5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul praises them for their godly sorrow, their zeal to do right, and the joy that it brought him and Titus.
335 7:9 kn5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not because what I said in my letter distressed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
336 7:9 l6d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 “you suffered no loss because we rebuked you.” This means that although the letter caused them sorrow, they eventually benefited from the letter because it led them to repentance. Alternate translation: “so that we did not harm you in any way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
337 7:10 dtm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ γὰρ κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 The word **repentance** may be repeated to clarify its relationship to what precedes it and what follows it. Alternate translation: “For godly sorrow produces repentance, and repentance leads to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
338 7:10 lc4m ἀμεταμέλητον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has no regret that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) The Corinthians will not regret experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation. This could mean: (1) Paul has no regret that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) the Corinthians will not regret experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation.
339 7:10 lc1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη, θάνατον κατεργάζεται 1 This kind of sorrow leads to death instead of salvation because it does not produce repentance. Alternate translation: “Worldly sorrow, however, leads to spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
340 7:11 l24s ἰδοὺ γὰρ αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 “Look and see for yourselves what great determination”
341 7:11 gpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations σπουδήν: ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν 1 Here the word **How** makes this statement an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your determination to prove you were innocent was very great!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
351 7:14 q5hg ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη 1 “you proved that our boasting about you to Titus was true”
352 7:15 d87j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 You can state this noun “obedience” with a verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
353 7:15 g9bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
354 7:15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to great reverence for God. (2) This refers to great reverence for Titus. This could refer to: (1) great reverence for God. (2) great reverence for Titus.
355 8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Gift to the church in Jerusalem\n\nThe church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md))
356 8:1 mm8g 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving.
357 8:1 d1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
426 9:12 esk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers’ act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
427 9:13 plj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
428 9:13 ze14 δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Paul says that the Corinthians will glorify God both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need.
429 9:15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” This could mean: (1) This gift refers to “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) This gift refers to Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers. “for his gift, which words cannot describe.” This **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers.
430 10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.\n\nIn this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\n“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
431 10:1 yc1g 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does.
432 10:1 gq7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The word **humility** and **gentleness** are abstract nouns, and can be expressed in another way. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
434 10:2 ik1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 1 The word **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. “we are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
435 10:3 cvd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες 1 Here, **walk** is an metaphor for “live” and “flesh” is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
436 10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Paul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical war. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
437 10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα 1 This could mean: (1) The word **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) The word **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) The word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
438 10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν & λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Paul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
439 10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ σαρκικὰ 1 This could mean: (1) The word **fleshly** is a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) The word **fleshly** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) The word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
440 10:5 xuz9 πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον 1 Paul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and “every high thing” were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves”
441 10:5 b74d πᾶν ὕψωμα 1 “everything that proud people do”
442 10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The words **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
443 10:5 r2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of people’s thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “We show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
444 10:6 m4ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν 1 The words **act of disobedience** are a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
445 10:7 y2yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This could mean: (1) This is a command. (2) This is a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) This could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
446 10:7 z1t5 λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 “he needs to remember”
447 10:7 f3i9 καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 “that we belong to Christ just as much as he does”
448 10:8 d4zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
547 12:2 fth2 εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Paul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body”
548 12:2 k4aw τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 This refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe).
549 12:3 cju3 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul continues to speak of himself as though he were speaking of someone else.
550 12:4 qv5h ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This continues Paul’s account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into paradise. (2) An angel took this man into paradise. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took … paradise” or “they took … paradise.” This continues Paul’s account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into paradise. (2) an angel took this man into paradise. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took … paradise” or “they took … paradise.”
551 12:4 wm7y ἡρπάγη 1 suddenly and forcefully held and taken
552 12:4 ic45 τὸν Παράδεισον 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to heaven. (2) This refers to the third heaven. (3) This refers to a special place in heaven. This could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven.
553 12:5 hpq6 τοῦ τοιούτου 1 “of that person”
554 12:5 i12f οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses”
555 12:6 vg13 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nAs Paul defends his apostleship from God, he tells of the weakness that God gave him to keep him humble.
564 12:8 wc7r ὑπὲρ τούτου & τὸν Κύριον 1 “Lord about this thorn in the flesh,” or “Lord about this affliction”
565 12:9 nr2j ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου 1 “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need”
566 12:9 cs63 ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 “for my power works best when you are weak”
567 12:9 g8mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of Christ’s power as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) People might see that Paul has the power of Christ” (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks of Christ’s power as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ” (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
568 12:10 pxf1 εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is content in weakness, insults, troubles, persecutions, and distressing situations if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ.
569 12:10 s5sx ἐν ἀσθενείαις 1 “when I am weak”
570 12:10 xl8q ἐν ὕβρεσιν 1 “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person”
601 12:19 vg3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς 1 “to strengthen you.” Paul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
602 12:20 cu6s οὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς 1 “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing”
603 12:20 zy6g κἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε 1 “you might not like what you see in me”
604 12:20 rh1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι 1 The abstract nouns “quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder” can be translated using verbs. This could mean: (1) Some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) Some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) The abstract nouns “quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder” can be translated using verbs. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
605 12:21 ddw3 πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων, 1 “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins”
606 12:21 hq1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
607 12:21 rh22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 The abstract noun impurity can be translated as “things that do not please God.” Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

14
tn_2JN.tsv
View File

@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ front:intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
1:1 uspy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:1 z4tk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 y7hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:1 a9w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John may be writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:1 a9w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John is writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:1 ueev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 In this context, the term **chosen** indicates a person or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “to the congregation that God has saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:1 axty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 Here, **her children** could mean: (1) Just as “chosen lady” figuratively refers to a church, here **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children, or (3) It may refer figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:1 src4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. This could mean: (1) The phrase **the truth** describes how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) The phrase **the truth** provides the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:1 axty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 Here, **her children** could mean: (1) just as “chosen lady” figuratively refers to a church, **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children. (3) it refers figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:1 src4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. The phrase **the truth** could: (1) refer to how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) provide the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:1 a50f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 John uses the phrase **all who have known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the people of this church. Alternate translation: “all who are with me and who know and accept the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:2 spdg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 et6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν 1 If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -14,10 +14,10 @@ front:intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
1:3 gad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, with **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 zfgr ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 In this culture, letter writers would normally offer a good wish or blessing for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. But instead of a blessing here, John makes a declarative statement. This probably expresses his confidence that God will do as he promised. Be sure that your translation also expresses this confidence.
1:3 vpl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός & Υἱοῦ 1 **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:3 w6tr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could mean: (1) This refers to qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) This refers to how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternative translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 w6tr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could refer to: (1) the qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternative translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 ir6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σου 1 The word **your** is singular here, since John is addressing the church figuratively as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:4 ajlf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐχάρην λείαν 1 If it is more natural in your language to state the reason first and then the result, you can put this after “I found some of your children walking in the truth,” as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:4 a3vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν τέκνων σου 1 See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could mean: (1) This refers to the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 a3vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν τέκνων σου 1 See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could refer to: (1) the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 w2b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 John refers figuratively to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living according to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 ddnx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this, you could use a phrase with an adjective. Alternate translation: “in a way that agrees with the true message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 s7hr καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός 1 The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded the believers to do something. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us”
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ front:intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
1:7 u749 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:7 w25m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10-11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 x8yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί 1 The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 vqnb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 Here, **this** could mean: (1) This refers to the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) This refers to any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 vqnb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 vfdn ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 In your translation, it may be helpful to clarify that **the deceiver** and **the antichrist** are one person, not two.
1:8 it9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βλέπετε ἑαυτούς 1 The implication is that the believers are to **watch** themselves, that is, be careful, so that they are not deceived by the deceivers and antichrists. Alternate translation: “be careful not to let the deceivers and antichrists influence you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 i8n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἃ 1 The word **what** is more fully defined in the next phrase as a “reward.” If it would be clearer in your language, you can say “reward” here, as well. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ front:intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
1:12 hwtk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “so that this will make you completely joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:12 lt77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 See the note in Part 3 of the General Introduction to 2 John about the textual issue here. Alternate translation: “our joy might be made complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:12 k9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὑμῶν 1 If you use “our” here instead of **your**, it would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:13 fh6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This is a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) This may refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 fh6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 This could: (1) be a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 aonw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 In this context, the term **chosen** indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. In the context of John’s metaphor, this indicates a church or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “The members of this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:13 a4rc ἀσπάζεταί σε 1 As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
1:13 qjdz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σε & σου 1 The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
3 1:1 uspy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
4 1:1 z4tk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5 1:1 y7hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
6 1:1 a9w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John may be writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John is writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7 1:1 ueev rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 In this context, the term **chosen** indicates a person or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “to the congregation that God has saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8 1:1 axty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 Here, **her children** could mean: (1) Just as “chosen lady” figuratively refers to a church, here **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children, or (3) It may refer figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, **her children** could mean: (1) just as “chosen lady” figuratively refers to a church, **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children. (3) it refers figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9 1:1 src4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. This could mean: (1) The phrase **the truth** describes how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) The phrase **the truth** provides the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. The phrase **the truth** could: (1) refer to how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) provide the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10 1:1 a50f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 John uses the phrase **all who have known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the people of this church. Alternate translation: “all who are with me and who know and accept the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11 1:2 spdg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12 1:2 et6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν 1 If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
14 1:3 gad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, with **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15 1:3 zfgr ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 In this culture, letter writers would normally offer a good wish or blessing for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. But instead of a blessing here, John makes a declarative statement. This probably expresses his confidence that God will do as he promised. Be sure that your translation also expresses this confidence.
16 1:3 vpl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός & Υἱοῦ 1 **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
17 1:3 w6tr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could mean: (1) This refers to qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) This refers to how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternative translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could refer to: (1) the qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternative translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternative translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 1:4 ir6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σου 1 The word **your** is singular here, since John is addressing the church figuratively as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
19 1:4 ajlf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐχάρην λείαν 1 If it is more natural in your language to state the reason first and then the result, you can put this after “I found some of your children walking in the truth,” as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
20 1:4 a3vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν τέκνων σου 1 See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could mean: (1) This refers to the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) If this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/1.md). This could refer to: (1) the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21 1:4 w2b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 John refers figuratively to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living according to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22 1:4 ddnx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this, you could use a phrase with an adjective. Alternate translation: “in a way that agrees with the true message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
23 1:4 s7hr καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός 1 The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded the believers to do something. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us”
33 1:7 u749 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34 1:7 w25m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10-11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35 1:7 x8yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί 1 The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
36 1:7 vqnb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 Here, **this** could mean: (1) This refers to the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) This refers to any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you can make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
37 1:7 vfdn ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 In your translation, it may be helpful to clarify that **the deceiver** and **the antichrist** are one person, not two.
38 1:8 it9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βλέπετε ἑαυτούς 1 The implication is that the believers are to **watch** themselves, that is, be careful, so that they are not deceived by the deceivers and antichrists. Alternate translation: “be careful not to let the deceivers and antichrists influence you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
39 1:8 i8n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἃ 1 The word **what** is more fully defined in the next phrase as a “reward.” If it would be clearer in your language, you can say “reward” here, as well. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
58 1:12 hwtk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “so that this will make you completely joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
59 1:12 lt77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 See the note in Part 3 of the General Introduction to 2 John about the textual issue here. Alternate translation: “our joy might be made complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
60 1:12 k9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὑμῶν 1 If you use “our” here instead of **your**, it would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
61 1:13 fh6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This is a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) This may refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could: (1) be a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
62 1:13 aonw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 In this context, the term **chosen** indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. In the context of John’s metaphor, this indicates a church or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “The members of this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
63 1:13 a4rc ἀσπάζεταί σε 1 As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you”
64 1:13 qjdz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you σε & σου 1 The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

671
tn_2PE.tsv
View File

@ -1,194 +1,485 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter\n\n1. Introduction (1:1-2)\n1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)\n1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)\n1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?\n\nThe author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?\n\nPeter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Who were the people Peter spoke against?\n\nIt is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nThe doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?\n\nFor the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”\n* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”\n* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”\n* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPeter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Knowledge of God\n\nHaving knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])\n\n### Living godly lives\n\nPeter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### The truth of Scripture\n\nPeter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
1:1 n1di 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to.
1:1 v381 δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Peter speaks of being a **servant of Jesus Christ**. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**.
1:1 yy7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον & λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 That these people have **received** **faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given the same precious faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 mbg7 τοῖς & λαχοῦσιν 1 “to you who have received.” Peter addresses all believers who may read this letter.
1:1 y157 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles, but not to those to whom he is writing. Alternate translation: “as we apostles have received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:2 y7l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 God is the one who will give **grace** and **peace** to believers. Alternate translation: “May God increase your grace and your peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:2 n59n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Peter speaks of **grace and peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or numbers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 vq19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 You can translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “through your knowing God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 ywj9 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to teach the believers about living godly lives.
front:intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–2)\n1. Reminder to live godly lives because God has enabled us to (1:3–15)\n1. Reminder of the veracity of apostolic teaching (1:16–21)\n1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)\n1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)\n1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)\n1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)\n1. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?\n\nThe author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?\n\nPeter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Who were the people Peter spoke against?\n\nIt is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nThe doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?\n\nFor the following verses, there are differences between some of the ancient manuscripts. The ULT text follows the reading that most scholars consider to be original and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the language of wider communication in the region, translators may want to consider using the reading found in that version. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.\n* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some ancient manuscripts have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”\n* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some manuscripts have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”\n* “Bosor” (2:15). A few other manuscripts read, “Beor.”\n* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other manuscripts have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n1. Introduction (1:1–2)\n1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3–15)\n1. Reminder of the veracity of apostolic teaching (1:16–21)\n\nPeter begins this letter in [1:1–2](..01/02.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Knowledge of God\n\nHaving knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is the knowledge of personal relationship in which God saves a person and gives him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])\n\n### Living godly lives\n\nPeter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### The truth of Scripture\n\nPeter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
1:1 n1di rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Σίμων Πέτρος 1 # General Information:\n\nIn this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Simon Peter, am writing this letter” or “From Simon Peter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:1 sf2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σίμων Πέτρος 1 This is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to 2 Peter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:1 v381 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This phrase gives further information about Simon Peter. He describes himself as being both a **servant of Jesus Christ** and one given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
1:1 mbg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τοῖς & λαχοῦσιν 1 In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you who have received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:1 yy7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον ἡμῖν λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 That these people have **received a faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given a faith equal in value with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:1 a186 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς ἰσότιμον & λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb, such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “to those whom God has made to trust” or “to those whom God has made to believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:1 y157 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, the word **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles, but not to those to whom he is writing. Alternate translation: “as we apostles have received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:1 fdyd ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Here, the word **by** indicates the means by which they received the faith. Alternate translation: “by means of the righteousness”
1:1 fpsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνῃ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “righteous” or “right.” Alternate translation: “the righteous acts of our God and Savior” or “the right way of our God and Savior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 oaej rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God increase his kind acts to you and make you more peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 y7l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 God is the one who will give **grace** and **peace** to believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you can make that information explicit. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:2 ui01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 n59n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χάρις & καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Peter speaks of **grace and peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or numbers. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May God increase his grace and peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 f8na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural, since Peter is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally throughout the letter, the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:2 vq19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If you would not use an abstract noun here, you can translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because you know God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 dgax ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 This could mean: (1) “because of knowing God and Jesus our Lord” or (2) “through knowing God and Jesus our Lord”
1:2 pmb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:3 ywj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς & ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ & δεδωρημένης 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **as** indicates that this verse provides the reason for the expected result, which is Peter's command in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “since his divine power has given to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:3 zwdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:3 rtxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God's divine power” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, by his power as God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:3 adrw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “God, because he can do anything,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 az3s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ & δεδωρημένης 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of God's **divine power** as if it were a living thing that could give something to people. God is the one who is giving and uses his **divine power** to do so. Alternate translation: “God has used his divine power to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1:3 z8qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν 1 Here, the word **for** indicates the purpose for which God has given all these things to believers. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of life and godliness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:3 epx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν 1 Here, **godliness** describes the word **life**. Alternate translation: “for a godly life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:3 an3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter and his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:4 m91m δι’ ὧν 1 Here, **which** refers back to “his glory and excellence” in the previous verse.
1:4 f42f γένησθε & κοινωνοὶ 1 “you might share”
1:4 yk7g θείας & φύσεως 1 of what God is like
1:4 p2yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποφυγόντες τῆς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ φθορᾶς 1 Peter speaks of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. Alternate translation: “and so that the wicked desires in this world will no longer corrupt you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 kjnh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns φθορᾶς 1 The word **corruption** is an abstract noun that can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “things that corrupt you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 exd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 This refers to what Peter has just said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 a8ti τὴν φιλαδελφίαν 1 This refers to love for a friend or family member and likely means love for ones spiritual family.
1:8 jz77 ταῦτα 1 This refers to faith, virtue, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in the previous verses.
1:8 l7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if he is a field that will not produce a crop. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:8 qcav rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 You can state this in positive terms. Alternate translation: “you will produce and be fruitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:8 f9qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους 1 These words mean basically the same thing and emphasize that this person will be productive and experience the benefits from knowing Jesus. Alternate translation: “unproductive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:8 ppd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἐπίγνωσιν 1 You can translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “through your knowing God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 gg2c ᾧ & μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα 1 the person who does not have these things
1:9 h6fn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if he were a **blind** or **nearsighted** person because he does not understand their value. Alternate translation: “is like a shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:9 gq4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 You can use a verb to translate this. Alternate translation: “that God has cleansed him from his old sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:10 raa1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet βεβαίαν ὑμῶν τὴν κλῆσιν καὶ ἐκλογὴν ποιεῖσθαι 1 The words **calling** and **election** share similar meanings and refer to God’s choosing them to belong to him. Alternate translation: “make sure that God has really chosen you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:10 jcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 Here, **stumble** could mean: (1) This refers to committing sin. Alternate translation: “you will not practice sinful behavior” (2) This refers to becoming unfaithful to Christ. Alternate translation: “you will not become unfaithful to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:11 f45v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλουσίως ἐπιχορηγηθήσεται ὑμῖν ἡ εἴσοδος εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will richly provide for you an entrance into the eternal kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 k1e4 ἡ εἴσοδος 1 the opportunity to enter
1:12 du69 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter tells the believers about his obligation to continue reminding them and teaching them.
1:12 l2kh ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 “you strongly believe the truth that you now have”
1:13 vmj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 Here the word **stir up** means to awaken someone from sleep. Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 ax2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὅσον εἰμὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σκηνώματι 1 Peter speaks of his body as if it were a tent that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive. Alternate translation: “as long as I am in this body” or “as long as I am alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 j8f5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου 1 Peter speaks of his body as if it were a tent that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive, and taking it off represents dying. Alternate translation: “I will soon take off this body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 fpng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου 1 **Putting off** his **tent** is a a nice way to refer to dying. Alternate translation: “I will die soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:15 c2iw τούτων 1 Here the words **these things** refers to everything that Peter has said in the previous verses.
1:15 alg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον 1 Peter speaks of his death as if he were leaving one place to go to another. Alternate translation: “after my death” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:15 ivw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον 1 Peter uses the word **departure** as a nice way to speak of his death. Alternate translation: “after my death” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:16 k3rm 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter continues to explain his teachings to the believers and explains why they are trustworthy.
1:16 vc99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οὐ & ἐξακολουθήσαντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles, but not to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:16 jwy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν & δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν 1 These two phrases may refer to the same thing and be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:16 zs6v τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ & παρουσίαν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the future second coming of the Lord Jesus. (2) This refers to the first coming of the Lord Jesus.
1:16 v4kd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the word **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:17 m33h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ τοιᾶσδε ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when he heard that voice come from the Majestic Glory” or “when he heard the voice of the Majestic Glory speak to him” or “when the Majestic Glory spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:17 yd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 Peter refers to God in terms of his **Glory**. This is a euphemism that avoids using God’s name, out of reverence for him. Alternate translation: “God, the Supreme Glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:17 wz1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 Here, **Glory** is a euphemism that avoids using God’s name, out of reverence for him. Alternate translation: “God, the Supreme Glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:18 ezn2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταύτην τὴν φωνὴν ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν 1 With the words **we ourselves**, Peter is referring to himself and to the disciples James and John, who heard the voice of God. Alternate translation: “we ourselves heard this voice that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:18 chy4 ταύτην τὴν φωνὴν ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν 1 “we ourselves heard the voice of the one who spoke from heaven”
1:18 mlm9 σὺν αὐτῷ, ὄντες 1 “when we were with Jesus”
1:19 km3l 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to warn the believers about false teachers.
1:19 h498 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔχομεν βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 The things that Peter and the other apostles saw, which he described in the previous verses, confirm what the prophets spoke. Alternate translation: “the things that we saw make this prophetic message more sure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:19 z3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to all believers, including Peter and his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:19 l7zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 This refers to the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the scriptures, which the prophets spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:19 sjd3 ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες 1 Peter instructs the believers to pay close attention to the prophetic message.
1:19 xt8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς λύχνῳ φαίνοντι ἐν αὐχμηρῷ τόπῳ, ἕως οὗ ἡμέρα διαυγάσῃ 1 Peter compares the prophetic word to a lamp that gives light in the dark until light comes in the morning. The coming of morning is a reference to Christ’s coming. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1:19 kc3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φωσφόρος ἀνατείλῃ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 Peter speaks of Christ as the **morning star**, which indicates that daybreak and the end of darkness is near. Christ will bring light into the hearts of believers, ending all doubt and bringing full understanding of who he is. Alternate translation: “Christ shines his light into your hearts like the morning star shines its light into the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 tr1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εὐσέβειαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **godliness** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “acting honorably toward God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 bl1o διὰ τῆς ἐπιγνώσεως 1 The word **through** here indicates the means by which God has given us all things for life and godliness. Alternate translation: “by means of the knowledge”
1:3 nvh0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς ἐπιγνώσεως τοῦ καλέσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “through our knowing the one who called us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 cxxo τοῦ καλέσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 This phrase could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “of God who called us” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “of Jesus who called us”
1:3 an3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and his audience, who are fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:3 twp8 διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀρετῆς 1 Here, **through** indicates the means by which God called us. Alternate translation: “by means of his glory and excellence”
1:3 tmxh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀρετῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **glory** and **excellence** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because he is so great and so good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 g7fc δι’ ὧν 1 Here, **through** indicates the means by which God gave his promises. Alternate translation: “by means of which”
1:4 m91m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δι’ ὧν 1 Here, **which** refers back to words from the previous verse. It could refer to: (1) “his glory and excellence.” Alternate translation: “through his glory and excellence” (2) “all the things for life and godliness.” Alternate translation: “by giving us all of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:4 zspe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and his audience, who are fellow believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:4 dl8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δεδώρηται 1 The pronoun **he** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God has given” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:4 gnjn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ τίμια καὶ μέγιστα ἡμῖν ἐπαγγέλματα δεδώρηται, 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **promises** with a verbal phrase.” Alternate translation: “the precious and great things he has promised to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 zxij rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα διὰ τούτων γένησθε θείας κοινωνοὶ φύσεως 1 This is a purpose clause. Peter is stating the purpose for which God has given to us precious and great promises. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order that through them you might be sharers of the divine nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:4 f42f διὰ τούτων 1 The word **through** here indicates the means by which you might be sharers of the divine nature. Alternate translation: “by means of them”
1:4 umh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τούτων 1 The pronoun **them** here refers back to the precious and great promises of the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “through these promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:4 yk7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θείας & φύσεως 1 The abstract noun **nature** refers to the inherent features of something or what it is like. Alternate translation: “of what God is like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:4 p2yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποφυγόντες τῆς & φθορᾶς 1 Peter speaks figuratively of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “no longer being corrupted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 hxuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **the world** could mean: (1) the place where we all live, where we are surrounded by sinful people and temptations to sin. Alternate translation: “that is all around us” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “of the world's ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:4 wnec ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 Here, **by** indicates the means by which the world became corrupt. It does not indicate the means by which Peter's addressees escaped corruption. Alternate translation: “by means of lust”
1:4 kjnh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns φθορᾶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **corruption** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “things that corrupt you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 exd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο δὲ 1 The phrase **for this very reason** refers to what Peter has just said in the previous verses. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of these things that God has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 ceir σπουδὴν πᾶσαν παρεισενέγκαντες 1 The phrase **applying all diligence** indicates the means by which one is to do the action of supplying that follows. Alternate translation: “by means of applying all diligence”
1:5 fp0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σπουδὴν πᾶσαν παρεισενέγκαντες 1 Here, **applying all diligence** is an idiom that means doing one's best or making the best effort. Alternate translation: “making every effort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:5 j0tr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιχορηγήσατε ἐν τῇ πίστει ὑμῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in Jesus, add” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 tukx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν 1 The pronoun **your** is plural here, since Peter is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally throughout the letter, the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:5 wj3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀρετήν & τῇ ἀρετῇ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodness** with an adjective phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “doing what is good … doing what is good” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 d74i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀρετῇ τὴν γνῶσιν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in your goodness, knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:5 r61t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν γνῶσιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 anfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ γνώσει τὴν ἐνκράτειαν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in knowledge, self-control” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:6 anfa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ γνώσει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 s5ni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐνκράτειαν & τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **self-control** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “controlling yourself … controlling yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 wloy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ τὴν ὑπομονήν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in self-control, endurance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:6 ajag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὑπομονήν & τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “enduring hardship … enduring hardship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 mile rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ ὑπομονῇ τὴν εὐσέβειαν, 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in endurance, godliness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:6 f7go rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν εὐσέβειαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **godliness** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “acting honorably toward God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 nbk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ εὐσεβείᾳ τὴν φιλαδελφίαν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in godliness, brotherly affection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:7 a8ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν φιλαδελφίαν & τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **brotherly affection** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “being concerned for your brothers and sisters … being concerned for your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 dzwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ φιλαδελφίᾳ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in brotherly affection, love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:7 h713 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 tlhv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα 1 The word **For** here indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Because if these things are existing and increasing in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:8 ecc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα, οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if these things are existing and increasing in you, then they will cause you to be neither barren nor unfruitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1:8 jz77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:8 l7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if he is a field that will not produce a crop. If that is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “cause you to be neither unproductive nor useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:8 qcav rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in positive terms. Alternate translation: “you will produce and bear fruit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:8 f9qm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους 1 The words **barren** and **unfruitful** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that this person will not be unproductive but will experience great benefits from knowing Jesus. If it is confusing in your language to use two words together that mean the same thing, you can just use one word with that meaning. Alternate translation: “not unproductive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:8 ppd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἐπίγνωσιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in your knowing our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 k6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ᾧ γὰρ μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα 1 Here, **For** indicates that Peter is giving another reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Peter gave a positive reason in [1:8](../01/08.md) and gives a negative reason here. Alternate translation: “Because he who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:9 gg2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ᾧ & μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα, τυφλός ἐστιν 1 Here, **he** does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does not have these things. Alternate translation: “anyone who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1:9 vycf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:9 h6fn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 In this metaphor, Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if the person were **blind** or **nearsighted**. He means this in a spiritual sense, that this person cannot see what is spiritually important. If that is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is like a blind or shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:9 henf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you can use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “is blind or nearsighted” or “is blindly nearsighted” or “is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:9 i0hq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λήθην λαβὼν τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgetfulness** in this phrase with a verb. Alternate translation: “having forgotten the cleansing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 gq4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **cleansing** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “that God has cleansed him from his old sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 gopx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν. 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were something that made people dirty and thus required **cleansing** from God. Alternate translation: “the forgiving of his past sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 ob38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the two reasons for obedience given in [1:8–9](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:10 ffdb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** figuratively as a way to directly address his fellow believers in Jesus. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 ot7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that Peter is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could say “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:10 raa1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet βεβαίαν ὑμῶν τὴν κλῆσιν καὶ ἐκλογὴν ποιεῖσθαι 1 The words **calling** and **election** share similar meanings and both refer to God’s choosing believers to belong to him. Peter uses them together to emphasize this idea. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use just one word and provide the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make sure that God has really chosen you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:10 pm78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:10 gx39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if you do these things, then you may certainly not ever stumble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
1:10 kd2t οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 The combination of words here expresses strong emphatic negation. Alternative translation: "you will most certainly never stumble"
1:10 jcv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 Here, **stumble** could mean: (1) abandoning faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not abandon faith in Christ” (2) committing sin. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not practice sinful behavior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:11 avh1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his readers should want to obey the commands given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:11 sl6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, **in this way** refers back to the way of living that includes the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 f45v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλουσίως ἐπιχορηγηθήσεται ὑμῖν ἡ εἴσοδος εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God will richly provide to you the entrance into the eternal kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 k1e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verbal phrase, such as “where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules.” Alternate translation: “into the eternal place where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:12 du69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter uses **Therefore** to introduce the purpose of his letter. In order to encourage his readers to do everything he has said in [1:5–10](..01/05.md), and especially because of the promise in [1:11](..01/11.md), he wants to keep reminding them about these things. Use a natural form in your language to show that this introduces a result or purpose for saying what came before. Alternate translation: “Because these things are very important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:12 hxjq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these things** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:12 onqh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐστηριγμένους ἐν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you learned well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 l2kh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **established** is used figuratively to refer to one being firmly committed to something. Alternative translation: “you strongly believe the truth that you now have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 jys8 ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **in** has the meaning of “in reference to” or “with regard to.” Alternate translation: “in reference to the present truth”
1:12 pqq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **present** is used figuratively as if **truth** was an object that could be with Peter’s audience. Here it does not refer to present time. Alternate translation: “in the truth that you have” or “in the truth that is with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 yy7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective, such as “true.” Alternate translation: “in these true teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:13 p1da rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, **But** could mean: (1) Peter is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. His audience already knows the truth, but he wants to remind them again. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Nevertheless.” (2) Peter is connecting this statement with what he said at the beginning of the previous verse. Peter is always ready to remind them of the truth and he thinks it is correct to do so. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1:13 ax2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὅσον εἰμὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σκηνώματι 1 Peter speaks of his body as if it were a **tent** that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive. If it would be clearer in your language, you can indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “as long as I am in this body” or “as long as I live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 vmj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 Peter uses **arouse** figuratively to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 q0sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:14 slej rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδὼς 1 In this clause Peter is giving a reason why he will always remind his audience of doctrinal truths in this letter, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because I know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:14 j8f5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου 1 Peter speaks of his body as if it were a **tent** that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive, and taking it off represents dying. Alternate translation: “I will soon take off this body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 fpng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου 1 **Putting off** his **tent** is a nice way to refer to dying. If it would be clearer in your language, you can indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “I will die soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:14 yzag καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, ἐδήλωσέν μοι 1 Suggested footnote: “Peter may be referring here to what Jesus told him in John 21:18–19.”
1:15 aau5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ καὶ 1 **Likewise** here could mean: (1) this statement is in addition to what Peter just said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Moreover” (2) this statement is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
1:15 hz8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχειν ὑμᾶς & τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:15 c2iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:15 ivw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον 1 Peter uses the word **departure** as a nice way to speak of his death. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more common euphemism in your language or state it directly. Alternate translation: “after my passing” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:16 k3rm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, **For** indicates that in [1:16–21](../01/16.md) Peter explains to the believers why they should remember “these things,” which were mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:16 yw0c οὐ & ἐξακολουθήσαντες 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the apostles had *not* made known to others the second coming of Jesus. Peter may have said this as a rebuttal to the claims of false teachers that he and the apostles were basing their teaching about the return of Jesus on myths. Alternate translation: “not by means of accepting as authoritative”
1:16 vc99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐγνωρίσαμεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:16 jwy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν & δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν 1 The words **power** and **coming** work together to refer to the same thing and may be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:16 zs6v τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν 1 In this clause Peter refers to the future second coming of the Lord Jesus to earth. This future event was foreshadowed by the powerful appearance of Jesus known as the “transfiguration,” which is described in Matthew 17:1–8, Mark 9:1–8, and Luke 9:28–36. Peter was an eyewitness of that event.
1:16 v4kd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:16 miqe ἐπόπται γενηθέντες 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the apostles had made known to others the second coming of Jesus. The apostles based their teaching about the return of Jesus partly on their eyewitness experience. Alternate translation: “by means of becoming eyewitnesses”
1:16 hxhh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῆς ἐκείνου μεγαλειότητος 1 Here, the pronoun **that one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the majesty of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:16 k3w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐκείνου μεγαλειότητος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **majesty** with an adjective such as “majestic.” Alternate translation: “of his majestic nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:17 f93a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows in [1:17–18](..01/17.md) is the reason that Peter can say in the previous verse that he was an eyewitness to the majesty of Jesus. Use a connector that indicates that this is a reason or explanation. Alternate translation: “I say this because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:17 q605 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:17 flph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λαβὼν & παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς τιμὴν καὶ δόξαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract nouns **honor** and **glory** with equivalent expressions that use verbs. Alternate translation: “and God the Father honored and glorified him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:17 m33h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ τοιᾶσδε ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when he heard that voice come to him from the Majestic Glory” or “when he heard the voice of the Majestic Glory speak to him” or “when the Majestic Glory spoke to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:17 o62f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations φωνῆς ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ τοιᾶσδε ὑπὸ τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “such a voice having been brought to him by the Majestic Glory, and this is what God said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1:17 sz0p rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐνεχθείσης αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been brought to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:17 yd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς Μεγαλοπρεποῦς Δόξης 1 Peter refers to God in terms of his **Glory**. The glory of God is closely associated with God himself and here substitutes for his name. Alternate translation: “God, the Supreme Glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:17 cxh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:17 ppum rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns μου & μου & ἐγὼ 1 These pronouns refer to God the Father, who is the one speaking in the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:18 ezn2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταύτην τὴν φωνὴν ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν 1 With the words **we ourselves**, Peter is referring to himself and to the disciples James and John, who heard the voice of God. Alternate translation: “we, James, John, and I, heard this voice that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:18 chy4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐνεχθεῖσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “having come from heaven” or “that came from heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:18 mlm9 σὺν αὐτῷ, ὄντες 1 This is a temporal phrase that can begin with “when.” Alternate translation: “when we were with him”
1:18 ricv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to Jesus, not God the Father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “being with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:18 daqi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἁγίῳ ὄρει 1 Here, the **mountain** Peter refers to is the mountain on which the powerful appearance of Jesus known as the “transfiguration” took place. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this information explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the holy mountain of the powerful appearance of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:19 h498 ἔχομεν βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 The word translated as **very certain** could mean: (1) something that is extremely reliable. In this case, Peter is saying in [1:18–19](..01/18.md) that we have two reliable witnesses to Jesus' glory: God's own voice speaking on the mountain of transfiguration, and the extremely reliable prophetic scriptures. Alternate translation: “We also have the most reliable prophetic word” (2) something that is confirmed by something else. In this case, Peter is saying that God's voice on the mountain confirms, or makes even more trustworthy, the prophetic scripture that we already trusted completely. Alternate translation: “we have the prophetic word confirmed”
1:19 z3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to all believers, including Peter and his readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:19 l7zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 Peter uses the phrase **prophetic word** to refer figuratively to the entire Old Testament. It does not refer only to those Old Testament books called “the Prophets” nor only to the predictive prophecies within the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the scriptures, which the prophets spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:19 sjd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες 1 Here, the relative pronoun **which** refers to the prophetic word mentioned in the previous phrase. Peter instructs the believers to pay close attention to the prophetic message, which is the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
1:19 zilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες 1 Peter uses the statement **you do well** to tell his audience that they should pay attention to the Old Testament scriptures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this phrase as a suggestion or command. Alternate translation: “to which you should pay attention” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1:19 xt8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς λύχνῳ φαίνοντι ἐν αὐχμηρῷ τόπῳ 1 Peter compares the prophetic word to a lamp that gives light in the darkness. Just as a lamp gives light in order for someone to see in a dark place, so the prophetic word gives believers guidance for how to live properly in this sin-filled world. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because it will guide you to know how to live in this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1:19 hmb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἕως οὗ ἡμέρα διαυγάσῃ 1 Peter speaks figuratively of Christ’s second coming by calling it the new **day** that comes in the morning. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “until the day Christ returns” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 kc3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φωσφόρος ἀνατείλῃ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 Peter speaks figuratively of Christ as the **morning star**, which is a star that indicates daybreak and the end of the night. Christ will **rise** by bringing light into the hearts of believers, ending all doubt and bringing full understanding of who he is. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way or change the metaphor to a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ brings full understanding to you like the morning star shines its light into the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 v0ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s minds. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “to help you understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:19 bl8s φωσφόρος 1 The **morning star** refers to the planet Venus, which sometimes rises just before the sun and indicates that daybreak is near.
1:20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 “Most importantly, you must understand”
1:20 s4k2 πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται 1 This could mean: (1) The prophets did not make any of their prophecies on their own. (2) People must rely on the Holy Spirit to understand all the prophecies. (3) People must interpret every prophecy with the help of the entire Christian community of believers.
1:21 mh2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit was carrying them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God as the Holy Spirit directed them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### Implicit information\n\nThere are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 us8u 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to warn the believers about false teachers.
2:1 l2cg ἐγένοντο & καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐν τῷ λαῷ, ὡς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσονται ψευδοδιδάσκαλοι 1 Just as **false prophets** came deceiving Israel with their words, so will false teachers come teaching lies about Christ.
2:1 tbz8 αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 The word **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. These heresies destroy the faith of those who believe them.
2:1 g99z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 Peter speaks of Jesus as the owner of people whom he has bought, the price being his death. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:1 xscu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν & Δεσπότην 1 The word **master** here refers to a person who owns slaves. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:2 z53e ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 immoral sexual behavior
2:2 nzx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 The phrase **way of truth** refers to the Christian faith as the true path to God. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “unbelievers will blaspheme the way of truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:3 dl1k πλαστοῖς λόγοις ὑμᾶς ἐμπορεύσονται 1 “they will convince you to give them money by telling you lies”
2:3 k359 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 The two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize how soon the false teachers will be condemned. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:3 jvh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification κρίμα & ἀπώλεια 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** as if they are persons who act. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:3 c57u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα & οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 The abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” can be expressed in verbal form. Alternate translation: “it will not be long until they are condemned, and they will soon be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:3 jetw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 You can translate these phrases with verbs in positive terms. Alternate translation: “God will soon condemn them; he is ready to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:4 s115 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter gives examples of people who acted against God and whom God punished because of what they did.
2:4 pr13 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 “did not refrain from punishing” or “punished”
2:4 b54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ταρταρώσας 1 The word **Tartarus** is a term from Greek religion that refers to the place where evil spirits and wicked men who have died are punished. Alternate translation: “he cast them into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:4 h7uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σειροῖς ζόφου & τηρουμένους 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where he will keep them in chains of darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:4 uzy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σειροῖς ζόφου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to chains in a very dark place. (2) This refers to a very deep darkness that imprisons them like chains. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 c2ak εἰς κρίσιν 1 This refers to the day of **judgment** when God will judge every person.
2:5 hpv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀρχαίου κόσμου οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here the word **world** refers to the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he did not spare the people who lived in the ancient world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 iw5v ὄγδοον, Νῶε & ἐφύλαξεν 1 God did not destroy **Noah** and **seven** other people when he destroyed the rest of the people who lived in the ancient world.
2:6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 “after burning the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah with fire until only ashes remained”
2:6 reg3 καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 Here the word **them** refers to Sodom and Gomorrah and the people who lived in them.
2:6 hgt7 ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν 1 Sodom and Gomorrah serve as an **example** and a warning of what will happen to others who disobey God.
2:7 fm1p 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter gives an example of Lot, whom God rescued out from among men who deserved punishment.
2:7 k79d τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 “the immoral behavior of people who broke God’s law”
2:8 b1ba ὁ δίκαιος 1 This refers to Lot.
2:8 hpi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ψυχὴν δικαίαν & ἐβασάνιζεν 1 Here the word **soul** refers to Lot’s thoughts and emotions. The immoral behavior of the citizens of Sodom and Gomorrah disturbed him emotionally. Alternate translation: “was greatly disturbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:10 skh8 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter begins describing the characteristics of unrighteous men.
2:10 eb1k τοὺς ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ πορευομένους 1 Here the **flesh** and **lusts** refer to the desires of the sinful nature. Alternate translation: “those who continue to indulge their corrupt, sinful desires”
2:10 axr4 κυριότητος καταφρονοῦντας 1 “refusing to submit to God’s authority.” Here the word **authority** probably refers to God’s authority.
2:10 n7n8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κυριότητος 1 Here, **authority** stands for God, who has the right to give commands and to punish disobedience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 esb2 αὐθάδεις 1 “doing whatever they want to do”
2:10 s7l1 δόξας 1 This phrase refers to spiritual beings, such as angels or demons.
2:11 u2jk ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες 1 “more strength and power than the false teachers”
2:11 v1qt οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν & βλάσφημον κρίσιν 1 Here, **them** could mean: (1) This refers to the glorious ones. (2) This refers to the false teachers.
2:11 zi6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν & βλάσφημον κρίσιν 1 The idea that angels could accuse them is spoken of as if they could attack them using accusations as weapons. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:12 y4bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗτοι & ὡς ἄλογα ζῷα, γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 Just as **animals** cannot reason, these men cannot be reasoned with. Alternate translation: “these false teachers are like unreasoning animals who are made to be captured and destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:12 ipd4 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν βλασφημοῦντες 1 They speak evil of what they do not know or understand.
2:12 jw8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:13 p7g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἀδικούμενοι μισθὸν ἀδικίας 1 Peter speaks of the punishment that the false teachers will receive as if it were a wage they had earned. Alternate translation: “receiving what they deserve for their wrongdoing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
2:13 e62s τὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφήν 1 Here the word ** reveling** refers to immoral activity that includes gluttony, drunkenness, and sexual activity. Doing these things **during the day** indicates that these people are not ashamed of this behavior.
2:13 u1rc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 Peter speaks of the false teachers as if they were **stains** or **blemishes** on a garment that cause shame for those who wear it. Alternate translation: “They are like stains and blemishes on clothes, which cause disgrace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:13 pwd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 The word **stains** and **blemishes** share similar meanings. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:14 v7t4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 Here the **eyes** represent their desires and **eyes full** means they constantly want something. Alternate translation: “constantly wanting to commit more adultery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:14 a22r ἀκαταπαύστους ἁμαρτίας 1 Although they sin in order to satisfy their lusts, the sin that they commit never satisfies.
2:14 wt89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δελεάζοντες ψυχὰς ἀστηρίκτους 1 Here the word **souls** refers to persons. Alternate translation: “enticing unstable people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:14 c55u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the thoughts and emotions of the person. Because of their habitual actions, they have **trained** themselves to think and act out of **covetousness**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 et62 καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν, ἐπλανήθησαν ἐξακολουθήσαντες 1 “abandoning the right way, these false teachers have gone astray to follow.” The false teachers have refused to be obedient to God because they have rejected what is right.
2:15 ky5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 **Right** behavior that honors God is spoken of as if it were a path to follow. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:16 z37w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν 1 You can express the abstract noun **rebuke** as a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “he was rebuked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 gsm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν 1 You can specify that it was God who rebuked Balaam. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:16 g9dr ὑποζύγιον ἄφωνον ἐν ἀνθρώπου φωνῇ φθεγξάμενον 1 A **donkey**, which is naturally unable to speak, spoke with a **voice** like a **human**.
2:16 tf38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 God used a donkey to stop the foolish action of the **prophet**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 t137 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 **Springs** flowing with water promise refreshment for thirsty people, but **springs without water** will leave the thirsty disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 hzu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 When people see storm clouds, they expect rain to fall. When the winds from the **storm** blow the clouds away before the rain can fall, the people are disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 xe3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους τετήρηται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and so God has reserved the gloom of thick darkness for them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:18 cxt8 ὑπέρογκα & ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι 1 They use impressive but meaningless words.
2:18 f8tg δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς ἀσελγείαις 1 They appeal to the sinful nature to engage people in immoral and sinful actions.
2:18 nks3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους 1 This phrase refers to people who recently became believers. The phrase **those who live in error** refers to unbelievers who still live in sin. Alternate translation: “people who try to live rightly, instead of living sinfully as they used to and as other people do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:18 jec8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας 1 Peter speaks of people who live sinfully as if they are slaves to sin who need to be released from their captivity. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 uyw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι, αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Here, **freedom** is a metaphor for the ability to live exactly as one wants. Alternate translation: **promising to give them the ability to live exactly as they want to live, but they themselves cannot escape their own sinful desires** (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 v5tt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλευθερίαν & ἐπαγγελλόμενοι & δοῦλοι & τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Peter speaks of people who live sinfully as if they are slaves to sin who need to be released from their captivity. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 b79v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 Peter speaks of a person as a slave when anything has control over that person, and that thing as the master of that person. Alternate translation: “For if something has control over a person, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 d6ra 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe words **they** and **them** refer to the false teachers Peter speaks of in verses 12-19.
2:20 q96i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 This sentence is a description of a conditional statement that is true. The false teachers had at one time **escaped**, but if they are again **entangled** and **overcome**, so their **last** state has become **worse** than their **first** state. You can state this as a fact. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, so that the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:20 lu22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 The word **impurities** refers to sinful behavior that makes one morally impure. The **world** refers to human society. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:20 bi73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 You can translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. See how you translated similar phrases in [2 Peter 1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “by knowing our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:20 d42g γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 “their condition is worse than it was before”
2:21 pm7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter speaks of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to living a life that is according to God’s will. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 bl8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit φωσφόρος 1 The **morning star** refers to the planet Venus, which is sometimes visible in the sky just before the sun rises, thus indicating that daybreak is near. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “the star that appears just before the sun rises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Peter uses **first** here to refer to the degree of importance. It does not to refer to order in time. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, you must understand”
1:20 ctiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Peter is using a statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can indicate this by translating it as a command. If you do so, it might be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Above all, know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
1:20 s4k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται 1 Here, **one's own interpretation** could mean: (1) that the Old Testament prophets did not base any of their prophecies on their own interpretations of what God had said, but only prophesied what God revealed to them. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of information. Alternate translation: “no prophet interpreted his prophecy according to his own interpretation” (2) that no individual person can interpret scripture on his or her own, but only with the help of the Holy Spirit and the larger community of believers. Alternate translation: “no one is able to explain any prophecy in the Bible through his own ability” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
1:20 p5xo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως 1 The word **interpretation** is an abstract noun that represents an action. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a verb. Alternate translation: “no prophet interpreted his prophecy according to what he himself thought” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:21 isqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that what follows is the reason that the statement of the previous verse is true. It could mean: (1) the prophets could not prophecy according to their own interpretations because true prophecy could only come from the Holy Spirit. (2) no one can interpret prophecy without help from the Holy Spirit because prophecy came from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “The reason for this is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:21 evx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “no prophet ever prophesied by the will of man” or “the will of man never produced any prophecy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:21 yxdx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ & θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** with a verbal phrase, such as “what a man desires.” Alternate translation: “no prophecy was ever made according to what a man desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:21 n2hv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations θελήματι ἀνθρώπου 1 Peter is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “human desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:21 mh2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 Peter speaks figuratively of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:21 z1xw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “men spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)\n1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)\n1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)\n\nPeter continues this letter in [2:1–3](..02/01.md) by predicting that false teachers will try to deceive the believers, just as false prophets did during the time true prophets were writing the Old Testament. Then in [2:4–10a](..02/04.md) Peter describes examples of God punishing those who acted similarly to the coming false teachers. Peter then closes this section in [2:10b–22](..02/10.md) by describing the wicked character and deeds of these false teachers.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])\n\n### Implicit information\n\nThere are several analogies in [2:4–8](..02/04.md) that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 us8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 # General Information:\n\nThe term translated **Now** could refer to: (1) a new topic expressed by **Now** in the ULT. (2) a contrast between the false prophets in this clause and the true Old Testament prophets mentioned in the previous verse. Alternative translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:1 l2cg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ λαῷ 1 Here, **the people** refers specifically to the Israelites. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 tbz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. Alternate translation: “opinions of destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:1 x2bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας, 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “destructive heresies” or “heresies that destroy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:1 jif2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe an opinion that is characterized by **destruction**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “destructive” instead of the noun “destruction.” Alternate translation: “destructive heresies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:1 wnuv αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **destruction** could refer to: (1) the eternal damnation of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that result in their eternal damnation” (2) the destruction of the faith of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that destroy their faith in the Messiah”
2:1 xscu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 Here, **master** refers to Jesus. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate Translation: “master Jesus who bought them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 g99z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 Peter uses the phrase **master who bought** to speak figuratively of Jesus as the owner of the people he has saved from damnation by paying the penalty for their sins with his death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus who saved them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:1 aaan rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here, **bringing** indicates that this clause is the result of the deeds of the false teachers described in the previous clauses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection clearer and make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are bringing swift destruction on themselves.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:1 nk1x ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here,**swift** could mean: (1) their destruction will come soon. Alternative translation: “destruction that will happen soon” or “imminent destruction” (2) their destruction will be sudden or quick. Alternate translation: “quick destruction”
2:1 flv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “they are causing themselves to be destroyed soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:2 eevb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοὶ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that this refers to people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:2 tzw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσουσιν 1 Here, Peter uses the word **follow** figuratively to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “will imitate their licentious acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 dg82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, the pronoun **their** refers to the false teachers introduced in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the licentious acts of these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:2 z53e ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts”
2:2 jh4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δι’ οὓς 1 Here, **through whom** indicates the reason for the slandering of the way of truth mentioned next in the clause. Alternate translation: “because of whom” or “on account of whom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:2 fz5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δι’ οὓς 1 Here, **whom** refers to the false teachers. It does not refer to the licentious acts in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that this refers to the false teachers. Alternate translation: “through these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:2 cqjb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Peter uses the phrase**the way of truth** here figuratively to refer to the Christian faith or how a Christian person lives his or her life. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “the true Christian manner of living” or “the true Christian faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 vspm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **truth**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “the true way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:2 nzx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “unbelievers will slander the way of truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:2 s3oo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 Peter speaks figuratively of **the way of truth** as if it were a person who could be **slandered** or shown disrespect. Alternate translation: “they will say bad things about the way of truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:2 l8ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 Peter assumes that his audience will know that unbelievers will be the ones who slander the Christian faith when they see the sensual lives of the false teachers and their followers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the way of truth will be slandered by unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:3 ds4g ἐν πλεονεξίᾳ 1 Here, **in** indicates the reason for what the false teachers do. Alternate translation: “because of greed”
2:3 td8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πλεονεξίᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **greed**with an adjective, such as “greedy.” Alternate translation: “because they are greedy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:3 dl1k πλαστοῖς λόγοις 1 Here **false words** are the means by which the false teachers will exploit their victims. Alternate translation: “by means of false words”
2:3 hbnf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλαστοῖς λόγοις 1 Peter is using term **words** to describe the teachings of the false teachers that were conveyed by using **words**. Alternate translation: “by false teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:3 borm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμπορεύσονται 1 Here, **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will exploit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:3 ztws rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ 1 Here, **whom** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not idle for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:3 fvw3 οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ 1 Here, **for whom** indicates that the condemnation is directed again the false teachers. Alternate translation: “against whom condemnation from long ago is not idle”
2:3 k359 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the false teachers will certainly be condemned. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “their destruction from long ago is certain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2:3 jetw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 You can translate these phrases with verbs in positive terms. Alternate translation: “their condemnation from long ago is active, and their destruction is awake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:3 jvh9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** figuratively as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:3 c57u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “they are not idly condemned from long ago, and they will not be destroyed too late” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:4 k2g4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that Peter is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. He is saying why the destruction of the false teachers is certain. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:4 s115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](..02/04.md) to [2:10](..02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:4 pr13 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here, **spare** means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing”
2:4 dzi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἀγγέλων ἁμαρτησάντων 1 Peter uses **who had sinned** to distinguish the angels who were punished by God from those that were not. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:4 nwxn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants σειροῖς ζόφου 1 Some of the best ancient manuscripts read “pits” instead of “chains.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2:4 uzy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σειροῖς ζόφου 1 This phrase could refer to: (1) chains in a very dark place. Alternate translation: “in chains in darkness” (2) a very deep darkness that imprisons them like chains. Alternate translation: “bound in darkness like chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 b54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ταρταρώσας 1 The word **Tartarus** is a term from Ancient Greek religion that refers to the place where evil spirits and wicked men who have died are punished. Some ancient Jewish literature written in Greek uses **Tartarus** as a term for the place where God punishes the wicked. Alternate translation: “he cast them into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:4 xgmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρέδωκεν 1 God is the one who **handed over** the angels who had sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “God handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:4 jjzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of God imprisoning the angels who sinned like someone who has **handed over** a criminal to the prison guards for imprisonment. Alternate translation: “imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 c2ak rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς κρίσιν 1 This phrase gives the purpose or goal for which the sinning angels are being held in captivity. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:4 plhp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίσιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **judgment** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to be judged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:4 e0ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 This phrase refers to the sinful angels mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful angels who are being kept for judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:4 ppvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active verbal form and you could indicate who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “those whom God is keeping for judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:5 zx4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](..02/04.md) to [2:10](..02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:5 hpv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀρχαίου κόσμου οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he did not spare the people who lived in the ancient world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 f000 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 As in [2:4](..02/04.md), the word **spare** here means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing”
2:5 t2w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not spare” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:5 iw5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὄγδοον, Νῶε 1 Here, **eighth** is an idiom used to refer to a group of eight people. It means that Noah was one of only eight people in the ancient world whom God did not destroy. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express the literal meaning of the idiom. Alternative translation: “eight people, including Noah” or “with seven others, Noah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:5 xrsw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Νῶε 1 **Noah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:5 llfu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Νῶε, δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 This phrase gives us more information about Noah. It tells us that Noah proclaimed **righteousness** to the ungodly people of the ancient world. It does not distinguish this Noah from any other person named Noah. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:5 kro6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. In this context, the term refers righteous deeds. Alternate translation: “a preacher of righteous deeds” or “a preacher of how to act rightly” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/[[figs-abstractnouns]])
2:5 xy9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:5 enbs κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας 1 This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, as it is translated in the UST.
2:5 z814 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:6 chcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](..02/04.md) to [2:10](..02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:6 ap1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2:6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed Sodom and Gomorrah. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes”
2:6 zi0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας 1 **Sodom and Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:6 ffyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God condemned them to destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:6 reg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 Here, **them** refers to Sodom and Gomorrah and the people who lived in those two cities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:6 w1b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:6 hgt7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς 1 This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:6 eocy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀσεβέσιν 1 Here, **ungodly** refers to wicked people in general, not to one specific wicked person. Alternate translation: “to an ungodly person” or “to ungodly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:7 fm1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](..02/04.md) to [2:10](..02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:7 zif8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐρύσατο 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God rescued” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:7 gjq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λὼτ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\n**Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:7 uknf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:7 mort rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness oppressed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:7 g8vy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Here, **by** could refer to: (1) the thing that was oppressing Lot, as in the ULT. (2) the reason why Lot was oppressed. Alternate translation: “because of the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:7 wrba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τῆς & ἀναστροφῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **behavior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what they did” or “by how they acted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:7 wq2r ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Here, **in** indicates the content of what the lawless people were doing. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate **in licentiousness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior”
2:7 cnys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective. See how you translated the plural form of this term in [2:2](..02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior of the lawless ones” or “the wild sensual behavior of the lawless ones”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:7 k79d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀθέσμων 1 Here, **the lawless ones** refers to the people who lived in the city of Sodom, where Lot lived. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the lawless people of Sodom” or “of the people who act as if there is no law in Sodom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 dvle rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background γὰρ 1 Peter uses **for** here to provide background information about Lot’s life in Sodom. This is to help readers understand why Peter called Lot a righteous person in the previous verse. Peter is not using **for** here to indicate result. Use the natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2:8 sn4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns βλέμματι γὰρ καὶ ἀκοῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract nouns **seeing** and **hearing** with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “what he saw and what he heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:8 b1ba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ δίκαιος 1 This refers to Lot. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “righteous Lot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 adlw ἐνκατοικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This clause indicates the time when Lot dwelled in Sodom. Alternate translation: “when he lived among them”
2:8 ta7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the inhabitants of Sodom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify what the pronoun **them** refers to. Alternate translation: “the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:8 ujf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐνκατοικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας 1 This phrase **day from day** is an idiom meaning “day after day” or “every day.” You may need to express this literally in your language. Alternate translation: “living among them day after day” or “living among them every day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:8 hpi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ψυχὴν δικαίαν & ἐβασάνιζεν 1 Here, **soul** refers to Lot’s thoughts and emotions. The immoral behavior of the citizens of Sodom and Gomorrah disturbed him emotionally. Alternate translation: “was greatly disturbed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:8 co5v ἀνόμοις ἔργοις 1 This phrase could mean: (1) the lawless works were the means by which Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “with lawless works” (2) the lawless works were the reason why Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “because of lawless works”
2:9 j0m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact 0 This verse and the next verse are the end of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](..02/04.md) to [2:10](..02/10.md). Peter is giving the result of the previous conditions being true. If you have made [2:4–10](..02/04.md) into separate sentences, then you will need to indicate that [2:9](..02/09.md) is the result of the previous conditions being true. Alternate translation: “Therefore, it is true that the Lord knows” or “Since these things are true, it is also true that the Lord knows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:9 fk2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 Here, **but** could refer to: (1) a contrast between the previous clause and what follows, as in the ULT and UST. (2) a simple connection between the previous clause and what follows. Alternate translation: “and to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:9 bcf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀδίκους & εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 In this clause, Peter is leaving out some words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord knows how to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:9 zdos rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀδίκους & κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 This is a purpose clause. Peter is stating the purpose for which God is keeping the unrighteous people. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “to keep the unrighteous ones in order to be punished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:9 qwcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδίκους & κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to keep the unrighteous ones to punish them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:9 ms6u εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Here, **in** could refer to: (1) when the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (2) the point in time up to which the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “until the day of judgment”
2:9 nnf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **judgment**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:10 skh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, **but** indicates a connection between the last clause of the previous and what follows. It does not indicate a contrast between “the unrighteous” in the previous verse and “those going after the flesh” in this verse. Alternate translation: “And especially those going after the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:10 guxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀπίσω & πορευομένους 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter uses the phrase **going after** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something, like someone who walks toward something. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshipping false gods. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually engaging in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 eb1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonym σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to person’s sinful nature. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 ag5a ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ 1 Here, **in** indicates that this phrase shows the means by which the wicked people go after the flesh. Alternate translation: “by means of practicing its lusts of defilement”
2:10 dndv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilement** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in its lusts that defile” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:10 c571 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ κυριότητος καταφρονοῦντας 1 Here, **and** indicates that this clause provides an additional characteristic of those mentioned in the previous clause. It does not indicate a second group of wicked people. These wicked people not only pursue their sinful desires, but also despise authority. Alternate translation: “and who also despise authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:10 axr4 κυριότητος καταφρονοῦντας 1 Here, **authority** could refer to: (1) God’s authority, as suggested from the examples of rebelling against God in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “despising God’s authority” (2) angelic authority, as suggested by the insulting of “glorious ones” mentioned in the remainder of the verse. Alternate translation: “despising the authority of angels”
2:10 n89f τολμηταὶ 1 Here, **Audacious ones** marks the beginning of the second section of this chapter, which continues until the end of [2:22](..02/22.md). In this section Peter describes the wicked character and deeds of the false teachers.
2:10 nkjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations τολμηταὶ αὐθάδεις 1 The words **Audacious ones** and **Self-willed ones** are exclamations that emphasize the bold pride of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are so audacious and self-willed!” or “How audacious and self-willed they are!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2:10 esb2 αὐθάδεις 1 Here, **Self-willed** means “doing whatever one wants to do.” Alternate translation: “those who do whatever they want”
2:10 c82c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐ τρέμουσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers do not tremble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:10 f4gi δόξας & βλασφημοῦντες 1 This clause indicates the time when the false teachers do not tremble. Alternate translation: “when insulting glorious ones”
2:10 s7l1 δόξας 1 Here, **glorious ones** could refer to: (1) spiritual beings, such as angels, demons, or both. Alternate translation: “glorious spiritual beings” (2) important human beings, such as church leaders. Alternate translation: “glorious people”
2:11 u2jk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) a contrast between the description of the **angels** in this clause with their behavior in the next clause. Alternate translation: “despite being greater in strength and power” (2) a description of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “who are greater in strength and power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:11 ljdy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the surrounding context, which is a description of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “being greater in strength and power than these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:11 vg2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 The words **strength** and **power** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Together, the words describe extreme power. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this pair of words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “being much more powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:11 v1qt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν & βλάσφημον κρίσιν 1 Here, **them** could mean: (1) the “glorious ones.” Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these glorious ones.” (2) the false teachers. Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these false teachers.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 ytrj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 Here, **these** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 y4bl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile οὗτοι & ὡς ἄλογα ζῷα 1 Peter describes the false teachers by comparing them to **unreasoning animals**. Just as **animals** cannot think rationally, neither can these people. Alternate translation: “these false teachers are like animals who aren't capable of thinking rationally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:12 nhxj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 This clause gives more information about the unreasoning animals and thus, by way of comparison, the false teachers. Alternate translation: “which have by nature been born for capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
2:12 yxsy γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 Here, **by nature** means that the unreasoning animals (and false teachers by comparison) were destined for capture and destruction due to their very nature as animals born for this purpose. Alternate translation: “according to their nature, these animals are born for capture and destruction”
2:12 x14h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 This is a purpose clause. The word **for** here indicates that what follows it is the purpose for which these animals have been born. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
2:12 erfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **capture** and **destruction** with verbs. Alternate translation: “in order to capture and destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:12 ipd4 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν βλασφημοῦντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) more information about the false teachers. Alternate translation: “who slander those things in which they are ignorant” (2) the reason the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “because they slander those things in which they are ignorant”
2:12 c4b8 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν 1 Here, **those things** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](..02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those whom they are ignorant of” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings they are ignorant of”
2:12 zzcp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will also be destroyed in their destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:12 jw8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:12 h4v8 καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, **and** is used for emphasis and may be translated as “indeed” or “surely.” Alternate translation: “they will indeed be destroyed” or “they will surely be destroyed”
2:12 ai6a ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν 1 This clause indicates the time when the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “at the time of their destruction”
2:12 ig4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “when they are destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 p7g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδικούμενοι μισθὸν ἀδικίας 1 Peter speaks of the punishment that the false teachers will receive figuratively as if it were a wage they had earned. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “receiving the punishment they deserve for their unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:13 n4gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀδικίας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the wrong things they have done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 djr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡδονὴν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **pleasure** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “something that pleases” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 e62s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφήν 1 Here, **reveling** refers to immoral activity that includes gluttony, drunkenness, and sexual activity. If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate this abstract noun with with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to revel in the day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 hl1e τὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφήν 1 This phrase indicates the time when the false teachers were **reveling**. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could translate **in** as “during.” Doing these things “during the day” indicates that these people are not ashamed of this behavior. Alternate translation: “reveling during the day”
2:13 u1rc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 Peter speaks of the false teachers as if they were **stains** or **blemishes** on a garment that cause shame for those who wear it. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “like stains and blemishes on clothes, which cause disgrace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:13 pwd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 The words **stains** and **blemishes** share similar meanings. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “unsightly stains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:13 vz0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 For emphasis, here Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “They are stains and blemishes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:13 d3uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐντρυφῶντες ἐν ταῖς ἀπάταις αὐτῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **deceptions** with an adjective like “deceptive.” Alternate translation: “reveling in their deceptive deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:14 v7t4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 Here, **eyes** refers figuratively to a person’s desires and **eyes full** means that a person constantly desires one thing. Alternate translation: “constantly desiring an adulteress” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:14 to71 ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 This clause could mean: (1) the false teachers constantly desired to have immoral sexual relations with any woman they saw, thereby viewing every women as a potential adulteress. Alternate translation: “constantly desiring women to commit adultery with” (2) the false teachers were constantly looking for immoral women with which to have immoral sexual relations. Alternate translation: “constantly seeking sexually immoral women”
2:14 a22r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἀκαταπαύστους ἁμαρτίας 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and their eyes are never ceasing from sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:14 cb2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δελεάζοντες ψυχὰς ἀστηρίκτους 1 This clause refers to the actions of the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice unstable souls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 wt89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche δελεάζοντες ψυχὰς ἀστηρίκτους 1 Here, **souls** refers to persons. Alternate translation: “enticing unstable people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:14 mn07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 This clause refers to the actions of the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they have hearts trained in covetousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 xgkb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “they trained their hearts to be covetous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:14 c55u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 Peter is using **hearts** figuratively to refer to whole persons, including their thoughts, desires, and emotions. The term can thus be translated here with the reflexive pronoun “themselves.” Alternate translation: “having trained themselves to covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:14 sbp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with a verb. Alternate translation: “having training their hearts to covet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:14 sv4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατάρας τέκνα 1 Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here **children of cursing** refers to people who are **cursed** by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:14 c7cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations κατάρας τέκνα 1 These words are an exclamation that emphasizes the wickedness of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are such cursed children!” or “What cursed children they are!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
2:15 et62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 Peter uses **Abandoning the straight way** to speak figuratively of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on a path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 ky5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 Here, **the straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](..02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:15 d3k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλανήθησαν 1 Here, Peter continues the path metaphor from the previous clause. He figuratively describes the wicked lifestyles of the false teachers as if they had been **led astray** from the straight path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “behaving wickedly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 b39g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπλανήθησαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they went astray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:15 xkt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ, ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 In this verse, Peter compares the false teachers to Balaam. Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, he used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship, so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “the way of Balaam son of Bosor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness so much that he led the Israelites into immorality and idolatry in order to receive money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:15 fi4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses the word **followed** figuratively to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “having imitated the way of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 v9lx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βαλαὰμ & Βοσὸρ 1 These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:15 alxl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses **the way of Balaam** figuratively to refer to how a Balaam lived his life. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “Balaam son of Bosor’s manner of living” or “the way Balaam son of Bosor lived his life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 v3wn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 Here, the pronoun**who** refers to Balaam. It does not refer to Bosor, nor to the false teachers. If it would be clearly in your language, you could say this directly. Alternate translation: “Balaam loved the wages of unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:15 befr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 Here, Peter is using the possessive form to describe **wages** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “unrighteous wages” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:15 s5gg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with the adjective “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “unrighteous wages” or “unrighteous acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 z37w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you can express the abstract noun **rebuke** as a verb. Alternate translation: “he was rebuked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 gsm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλεγξιν & ἔσχεν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could specify who rebuked Balaam. This clause could mean: (1) the donkey rebuked Balaam. Alternate translation: “a donkey rebuked him” (2) God rebuked Balaam through the donkey. Alternate translation: “God rebuked him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:16 d7zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδίας παρανομίας 1 This **transgression** specifically refers to Balaam’s use of wicked women to lead the Israelites into sexual immorality and idolatry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for his wicked act of leading the Israelites into immorality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:16 dspp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **irrationality** with an adjective like “irrational” or “foolish.” Alternate translation: “irrational action” or “foolish action” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 tf38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 Here, **the prophet** refers to Balaam. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “restraining the madness of the prophet Balaam” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:17 t5rj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 Here, **These men** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:17 t137 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 Peter speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect **springs** to provide water to quench thirst, but **waterless springs** leave thirsty people disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be clearer to you readers, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternative translation: “These false teachers never give what they promise” or “These false teachers are disappointing like springs without water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 hzu1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 Peter gives a second figurative description of the uselessness of the false teachers. When people see storm clouds, they expect rain to fall. When the winds from the **storm** blow the clouds away before the rain can fall, the people are disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternative translation: “they never give what they promise” or “they are disappointing like rain clouds that the storm drives away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 von6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι, καὶ ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 These two metaphors mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “These men surely never give what they promise” or “These men surely disappoint” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:17 xe3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους τετήρηται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:17 v90z ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 This could mean: (1) the **gloom** is characterized by **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the dark gloom” (2) the **gloom** is identical to the **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the gloom, which is darkness.”
2:17 frpf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here, Peter uses **gloom** and **darkness** figuratively to refer to hell. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:18 rmgu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὑπέρογκα γὰρ ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι, δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς ἀσελγείαις, τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους, 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of the clauses in this verse in order to put the main clause at the beginning. Alternate translation: “For they entice those barely escaping from those living in error by the lusts of the flesh, by licentious acts, speaking arrogant things of vanity.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
2:18 agoc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the false teachers are reserved for punishment in the gloom of darkness, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:18 cxt8 ὑπέρογκα & ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι 1 This clause indicates the means by which the false teachers entice others to sin. Alternate translation: “by means of speaking arrogant things of vanity”
2:18 g2by rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὑπέρογκα & ματαιότητος 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **arrogant** speech that is characterized by **vanity**. Alternate translation: “vain arrogant things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:18 n2pr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ματαιότητος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vanity** with an adjective, such as “vain.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:18 f8tg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:18 t543 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this literal meaning for the metaphor. Alternate translation: “by the lusts of their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:18 bibq ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. See how you translated this term in [2:2](..02/02.md). Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts”
2:18 nks3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who recently became believers as **those barely escaping** from sinful humanity. He also refers to unbelievers who still live according to their sinful desires as **those living in error**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “people who recently ceased living sinfully as other people do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 gqla ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 This clause could refer to: (1) another means by which the false teachers enticed their followers, continuing from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “They also entice them by promising freedom to them” (2) another action of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “These false teachers promise freedom to them”
2:19 uyw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 Here, **freedom** is a metaphor for the ability to live exactly as one wants. Alternate translation: “promising to give them the ability to live exactly as they want to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 je1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to those people who are deceived by the false teachers. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “promising freedom to those whom they deceive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:19 n0bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς; 1 Peter uses the word **themselves** here to emphasize the irony of spiritually enslaved people promising spiritual freedom to others. Alternate translation: “while they themselves are slaves of destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2:19 v5tt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοῦλοι 1 Peter speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they are **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “those who are controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 dyua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δοῦλοι & τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:19 b79v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, and that thing as the master of that person. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could translate this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 aqmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. It does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And”
2:20 q96i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
2:20 efnj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](..02/18.md), here Peter speaks figuratively of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this is a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 zpo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:20 lu22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:20 bi73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verbal phrase. See how you translated similar phrases in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “by knowing our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:20 zxcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:20 ih4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τούτοις & πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again, they have overcome them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:20 ygag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this is a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 noa9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:20 d6ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](..02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](..02/12.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:20 d42g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you could supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:21 z7gd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:21 e3dv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:21 hg05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:21 pm7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter speaks figuratively of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](..02/02.md) and “the straight way” in [2:15](..02/15/md). Alternate translation: “the manner of living that pleases the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:21 lib0 ἐπιγνοῦσιν 1 This clause indicates that the next clause describes an event that happened after the event of this clause. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “after having known it”
2:21 ic3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑποστρέψαι ἐκ τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 Here, **to turn away from** is a metaphor that means to stop doing something. Alternate translation: “to stop obeying the holy commandment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 blr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 You can state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that God delivered to them” or “the holy commandment that God made sure that they received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:22 hqr3 συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 “What the true proverb says has happened to them” or “This proverb describes what happened to them”
2:22 h42r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate how the false teachers, although they have known “the way of righteousness,” have turned back to the things that make them morally and spiritually impure. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
3:intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fire\n\nPeople often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])\n\n### Day of the Lord\n\nThe exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:1 n92f 0 # General Information:\n\nPeter begins to talk about the last days.
3:1 gc3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν & τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: “I am causing you to think pure thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:2 gxj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke in the past” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 yhi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the command of our Lord and Savior, which your apostles gave to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:3 lm1a τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 “knowing this as the most important thing.” See how you translated this in [2 Peter 1:20](../01/20.md).
3:3 znh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here the word **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “living according to their own sinful desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:4 zrj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 The word **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the promise that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “Why should we believe that Jesus is going to return?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:4 hgdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 The mockers ask this rhetorical question to emphasize that they do not believe that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “The promise that Jesus would return is not true! He will not return!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:4 t6hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **fathers** refers to ancestors who lived long ago. Falling asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: “our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
3:4 c2en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 The mockers exaggerate with the word **all**, and they argue that since nothing in the world has ever changed, it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:4 yue7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 You can translate this as a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:5 mku9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐρανοὶ ἦσαν ἔκπαλαι, καὶ γῆ & συνεστῶσα τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God long ago established the heavens and the earth … by his word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:5 s77f ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ δι’ ὕδατος συνεστῶσα 1 This means that God caused the land to come up out of the **water**, gathering the bodies of water together to make the land appear.
3:6 jh4r δι’ ὧν 1 Here this phrase refers to God’s word and water.
3:6 nyb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ τότε κόσμος ὕδατι κατακλυσθεὶς ἀπώλετο 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God flooded the world that existed at that time with water and destroyed it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 b2in rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ, τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ τεθησαυρισμένοι εἰσὶν, πυρὶ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God, by that same word, has reserved the present heavens and the earth for fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 e673 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, **word** stands for God, who will speak the word: AT “by God, who commands it”
3:7 jl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τηρούμενοι εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 You can state this in active form and can begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “he is reserving them for the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 y3gg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως καὶ ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 You can state **judgment** and **destruction** with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “for the day when he judges and destroys ungodly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:8 s5cy ἓν & τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς 1 “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing”
3:8 enh9 ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη 1 “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years”
3:9 zv9m οὐ βραδύνει Κύριος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 “The Lord does not move slowly to fulfill his promises”
3:9 dzq8 ὥς τινες βραδύτητα ἡγοῦνται 1 Some people think that the Lord is slow to fulfill his promises because their perspective of time is different than God’s.
3:10 w6ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The connecting word **but** indicates a contrast between what the mockers believe bout God and what God will really do. Although the Lord is being patient and wants people to repent, he will indeed return and bring judgment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:10 c5m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἥξει & ἡμέρα Κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης 1 Peter speaks of the **day** when God will judge everyone as if it were a **thief** who will unexpectedly and take people by surprise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:10 fu2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἥξει & ἡμέρα Κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης 1 Peter speaks of the **day** as if it were a person who is a **thief**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:10 k31z οἱ οὐρανοὶ & παρελεύσονται 1 “the heavens will disappear”
3:10 z32k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive στοιχεῖα & καυσούμενα λυθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will burn the elements with fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:10 zgd3 στοιχεῖα 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. (2) This refers to the things that make up heaven and earth, such as soil, air, fire, and water.
3:10 j1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 1 God will see all the **earth** and all the **deeds** of everyone, and he will then judge everything. You can state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “God will expose the earth and everything that people have done on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:11 buq4 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter begins to tell the believers how they should live as they wait for the day of the Lord.
3:11 nq63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Since God will destroy all these things in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:11 t8wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποταποὺς δεῖ ὑπάρχειν ὑμᾶς? 1 Peter uses this rhetorical question to emphasize what he will say next, that they “should live holy and godly lives.” Alternate translation: “you know what kind of people you should be.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:12 rq9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐρανοὶ πυρούμενοι, λυθήσονται, καὶ στοιχεῖα καυσούμενα, τήκεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the heavens by fire, and he will melt the elements in great heat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:12 v15i στοιχεῖα 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. (2) This refers to the things that make up heaven and earth, such as soil, air, fire, and water. See how you translated this in [2 Peter 3:10](../03/10.md).
3:13 df3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 This is a metonym for people who are righteous. Alternate translation: “where righteous people will dwell” or “where people will live righteously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:13 r5qo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 Peter speaks of **righteousness** as if it were a person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:14 fj1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπουδάσατε ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι αὐτῷ εὑρεθῆναι ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “do your best to live in a way so that God will find you spotless and blameless, and be at peace with him and each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:14 s141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι 1 The words **spotless** and **blameless** mean basically the same thing and emphasize moral purity. Alternate translation: “completely pure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:14 byr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄσπιλοι 1 Here this stands for **faultless**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:15 g35u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν μακροθυμίαν, σωτηρίαν ἡγεῖσθε 1 Because the Lord is patient, the day of judgment has not yet happened. This gives people an opportunity to repent and be saved, as he explained in [2 Peter 3:9](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “think about the patience of our Lord as giving you an opportunity to repent and be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 nnd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “according to the wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:16 wil1 ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐπιστολαῖς, λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων 1 “Paul speaks of the patience of God leading to salvation in all his letters”
3:16 z4cj ἐν αἷς ἐστιν δυσνόητά τινα 1 There are things in Paul’s letters that are difficult to understand.
3:16 dt6r ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 **Ignorant and unstable** men misinterpret the things that are difficult to understand in Paul’s letters.
3:16 giz1 οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι 1 “the unlearned and unsteady.” These men have not been taught how to properly interpret scripture and are not well established in the truth of the gospel.
3:16 sh4j πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 “resulting in their own destruction”
3:17 kn3d 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPeter finishes instructing the believers and ends his letter.
3:17 z54q φυλάσσεσθε 1 “protect yourselves”
3:17 h2ik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες, ἐκπέσητε 1 Here, **led astray** is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 xjht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες, ἐκπέσητε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that lawless people do not deceive you and cause you do something wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:17 w3sp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ & ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 **Steadfastness** is spoken of as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. Alternate translation: “you will not stop being faithful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:18 lk3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐξάνετε & ἐν χάριτι 1 The abstract noun **grace** can be expressed with the phrase “act kindly.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:18 ccm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐξάνετε & ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here growing in the **grace and knowledge** of the **Lord** represents experiencing his grace more and knowing him more. Alternate translation: “receive more of the grace of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, and know him more” or “be more aware of how our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ acts kindly toward you, and know him better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 j7s6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: rc://*/ta/man/[[translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:21 twid rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς & ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:21 blr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that the apostles delivered to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:22 hqr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 Here, **This** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:22 pc36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](02/01.md). If it would be clearer for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:22 h42r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
2:22 ggjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κύων 1 A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use this animal instead. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:22 zycp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὗς 1 A **pig** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **pig** was an insult. If pigs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use this animal instead. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
3:intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)\n1. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fire\n\nPeople often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])\n\n### Day of the Lord\n\nThe exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:1 n92f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **Beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:1 aah9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 # General Information:\n\nHere, **which** refers to both this letter and the previous letter that Peter had written to this group of believers. If it would be clearer in your language you could say this explicitly and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “in both of these letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:1 gc3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 Here, Peter uses **arouse** figuratively to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this with a non-figurative expression. See how you translated this term in [1:13](..01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:1 deoa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with a verb. See how you translated this term in [1:13](..01/13.md). Alternate translation: “remind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:1 qxt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμῶν & τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 Although the word **pure** usually refers to the something being uncontaminated or not mixed with something else, Peter uses it figuratively here to indicate that his readers have minds that have not been deceived by the false teachers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “your undeceived minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:2 bp8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal μνησθῆναι 1 Here, Peter is stating a purpose for which he is writing this letter. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to remember” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
3:2 gxj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 p4i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων 1 Peter is using **words** here to describe the prophecies of the Old Testament prophets that were conveyed by using words, especially those prophecies about the future return of Christ. Alternate translation: “the prophecies spoken previously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:2 ijnq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 Here, **prophets** refers to the Old Testament prophets whom Peter also referred to in [1:19–21](..01/19.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the holy Old Testament prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:2 yhi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the command of our Lord and Savior, which your apostles gave to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:2 jnq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς & ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **command** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what our Lord and Savior commanded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:2 jx0u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῆς & ἐντολῆς τοῦ Κυρίου καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Peter uses **command** here to speak of the commands of Jesus in general. He is not referring to one specific command. These commands were delivered by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the commands of the Lord and Savior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
3:2 vusd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Lord** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:2 z9rg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Σωτῆρος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Savior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the person who saves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:2 tsn4 τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν 1 This phrase indicates the means by which **the command of the Lord and Savior** was given to Peter’s readers. Alternate translation: “by means of your apostles”
3:2 cbuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀποστόλων ὑμῶν 1 Here, **your apostles** could refer to: (1) the apostles who proclaimed the teachings of Christ to Peter’s readers or ministered to them in some way. Alternate translation: “the apostles who serve you” (2) all apostles, who belong to all Christians. Alternate translation: “the apostles of us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:3 lm1a τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Peter uses **first** here to refer to the degree of importance. It does not to refer to order in time. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Most importantly, you must understand”
3:3 hcd9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Peter is using a statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can indicate this by translating it as a command. If you do so, it might be helpful to start a new sentence here. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Above all, know this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
3:3 mjgr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλεύσονται & ἐν ἐμπαιγμονῇ ἐμπαῖκται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mockery** with a verb. Alternate translation: “mockers will come and mock” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:3 s69n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here, Peter uses **going** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something, like someone who walks toward something. If it would be clearer in your language, you can express this literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living according to their own lusts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:3 znh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “living according to their own sinful desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:4 fe37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they will say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
3:4 hgdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 The mockers ask this rhetorical question to emphasize that they do not believe that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “There is no promise of his coming!” or “The promise of his coming is not true!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:4 lw3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 Here, **Where** is used idiomatically to ask what has happened to the promise. The mockers are not asking for the location of something. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “What happened to the promise of his coming?” or “What has come about regarding the promise of his coming?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:4 zrj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the promise that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “Where is the fulfillment of the promise of his coming?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:4 wm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise of Jesus’s coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:4 u54w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his coming** refers to the future second coming of the Lord Jesus to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the return of Jesus to earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:4 dfkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς γὰρ οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **the fathers** is used figuratively. It could refer to: (1) the Old Testament ancestors of the Israelites, often called “the patriarchs.” Alternate translation: “For since Israel’s patriarchs fell asleep” (2) those leaders of the first generation of Christians who had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “For since the first Christian leaders fell asleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:4 t6hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **fell asleep** is a euphemism for dying. You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the fathers died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
3:4 c2en rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 Here, **all things** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:4 yue7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **creation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:5 g2ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λανθάνει γὰρ αὐτοὺς τοῦτο, θέλοντας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they willingly hide this from themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:5 fgsy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis θέλοντας ὅτι οὐρανοὶ ἦσαν ἔκπαλαι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “that the heavens existed long ago by the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:5 mku9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γῆ & συνεστῶσα τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the word of God formed the earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:5 s77f ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ δι’ ὕδατος συνεστῶσα 1 This clause refers to God causing the land to come up **out of** and **through** the **water**, gathering the bodies of water together to make the land appear.
3:5 o7sz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 Here, **the word of God** refers to the God’s specific commands by which the earth was created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the commands of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 jh4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δι’ ὧν 1 Here, **which** refers both to God’s word and water. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the word of God and water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:6 nyb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ τότε κόσμος ὕδατι κατακλυσθεὶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God flooded the world at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 hvc3 ὁ τότε κόσμος 1 Here, **at that time** refers to the time when the world existed before the flood. It does not refer to the exact time when the universe was created. Alternate translation: “the world that existed then”
3:6 hm5i ὕδατι κατακλυσθεὶς 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the ancient world was destroyed. Alternate translation: “by having been flooded by water”
3:7 alp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οἱ δὲ νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ 1 Here, **But** indicates that Peter is contrasting the past destruction of the ancient world he mentioned in the previous verse with the future destruction of the present world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In contrast to the destruction of the world long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:7 b2in rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ & νῦν οὐρανοὶ καὶ ἡ γῆ, τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ τεθησαυρισμένοι εἰσὶν, πυρὶ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God, by that same word, has reserved the present heavens and the earth for fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 e673 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, **word** refers to “the word of God,” which Peter said in [3:5–6](..03/05.md) was the means by which the heavens and earth were created and a flood destroyed the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the same word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:7 ghco rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal πυρὶ 1 Here, **for** indicates the purpose for which God has been reserving the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
3:7 nl8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πυρὶ 1 Here, Peter uses **fire** to refer to what fire does, which is burn. Alternate translation: “for burning with fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:7 jl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τηρούμενοι εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and say who is doing the action. It might also be helpful to begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God is keeping them for the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:7 u7x2 εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Here, **for** could refer to: (1) the purpose for which God is keeping the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of the day of judgment” (2) the point in time up to which God is keeping the present heavens and earth. Alternate translation: “until the day of judgment”
3:7 lrw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **judgment**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
3:7 y3gg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “and when God destroys the ungodly men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:7 zxxk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of the ungodly people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:8 s5cy ἓν & τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing”
3:8 enh9 ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη 1 Here, **with the Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years”
3:8 o1wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη, καὶ χίλια ἔτη ὡς ἡμέρα μία 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God does not perceive of time the same way that humans do. What might seem to be a short or long time for people would not seem so for God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “one day and 1,000 years are alike for the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:9 zv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ βραδύνει Κύριος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the **promise** that Jesus will return. See how you translated it in [3:4](..03/04.md). Alternate translation: “The Lord does not delay to fulfill his promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:9 dzq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥς τινες βραδύτητα ἡγοῦνται 1 Here, **some** refers to the “mockers” introduced in [3:3](..03/03.md) and anyone else who believed that the Lord is slow to fulfill his promises because Jesus had not yet returned. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as some, such as these mockers, consider slowness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:9 a18l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ μακροθυμεῖ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Peter is leaving out a word that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. This word can be supplied from the beginning of the verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say who is the one being **patient** and begin a new sentence. Alternate translation: “but God is patient toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:9 szyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ βουλόμενός τινας ἀπολέσθαι 1 This clause indicates the reason why God is delaying the return of Jesus. Alternate translation: “because he does not want any to perish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:9 l9ay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ πάντας εἰς μετάνοιαν χωρῆσαι 1 Peter is leaving out words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he wants all to move on to repentance” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:9 jwjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ πάντας εἰς μετάνοιαν χωρῆσαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **repentance** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “but all to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 w6ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **But** indicates a contrast between what the mockers believed about God and what God will really do. Although the Lord is being patient and wants people to repent, he will indeed return and bring judgment. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
3:10 c5m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἥξει & ἡμέρα Κυρίου ὡς κλέπτης 1 Peter speaks of the **day** when God will judge everyone as if it were a **thief** who will come unexpectedly and take people by surprise. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord will come unexpectedly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:10 fu2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν ᾗ 1 Here, **which** refers to “the day of the Lord”. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:10 z32k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive στοιχεῖα & λυθήσεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in an active form and you could indicate who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the elements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:10 zgd3 στοιχεῖα & λυθήσεται 1 Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed”
3:10 lz8t στοιχεῖα δὲ καυσούμενα λυθήσεται 1 Here, **being burned up** refers to the means by which the elements will be destroyed. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the elements will be destroyed by means of burning” or “and the elements will be destroyed by means of fire”
3:10 j1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 1 God will see all the **earth** and all the **deeds** of everyone, and he will then judge everything. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “God will find the earth and the deeds in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:10 qnu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 1 Here, **deeds** refers to that actions of people on the earth. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the earth and what people have done in it will be found” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:10 z9f6 γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 1 Here, **found** indicates that the removal of the heavens and elements will leave the earth and what has been done on it exposed for God to see and judge. Alternate translation: “the earth and the deeds in it will be exposed” or “the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed”
3:11 buq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων 1 This clause indicates the reason for the expected result that follows in the rest of the verse. Peter tells his readers that God‘s future destruction of heaven and earth should result in them living holy and godly lives. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things being thus destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:11 nq63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will thus destroy all of these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:11 tpfg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these things** refers to the heavens, the elements, and the earth mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternative translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:11 t8wx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ποταποὺς δεῖ ὑπάρχειν ὑμᾶς? 1 Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “it is certainly necessary for you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3:11 qoui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν ἁγίαις ἀναστροφαῖς καὶ εὐσεβείαις 1 Peter is leaving out words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “living with holy behaviors and godly acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
3:12 bqnn προσδοκῶντας καὶ σπεύδοντας 1 Here, **waiting for and hastening** are two things Peter wanted his readers to do while also living holy and godly lives, as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “while expecting and hastening”
3:12 b73o rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δι’ ἣν 1 Here, **which** refers to “the day of God” from the previous clause. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of that day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:12 ko6c πυρούμενοι 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the heavens will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “by means of being set on fire”
3:12 rq9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐρανοὶ & λυθήσονται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:12 v15i στοιχεῖα & τήκεται 1 Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed” See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md).
3:12 i1ry καυσούμενα 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the heavens will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “by means of being burned up by heat”
3:12 w7le rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive στοιχεῖα & τήκεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will melt the elements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:13 ptmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καινοὺς & οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ προσδοκῶμεν 1 Peter put the direct object of the main verb at the front of this sentence for emphasis. If your language uses a similar construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would be confusing in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way and change the structure of the sentence. Alternate translation: “according to his promise, we are waiting for new heavens and a new earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
3:13 r2y9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “according to God's promise” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “according to Jesus's promise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:13 evil τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **promise** could refer to: (1) God‘s promise to create a new heavens and earth, as promised in Isaiah 65:17 and Isaiah 66:22. Alternate translation: “his promise of a new heavens and earth” (2) the promise of Jesus's second coming, as in [3:4](..03/04.md). Alternate translation: “his promise of the return of Jesus”
3:13 df3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 Here, **righteousness** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could dwell somewhere. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in which righteousness exists” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:13 r5qo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “in which everyone is righteous” or “in which everyone does what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:14 d178 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the discussion of the coming day of the Lord given in [3:10–13](..03/10.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:14 qjca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](..03/01.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:14 ndxd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the events related to the coming day of the Lord, which Peter described in [3:10–13](..03/10.md). If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:14 fj1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σπουδάσατε ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι αὐτῷ εὑρεθῆναι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “be diligent so that God will find you spotless and blameless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:14 s141 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι 1 The words **spotless** and **blameless** share similar meanings. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “completely pure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:14 byr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pronoun **him** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “by Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:14 rtyg ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 This could refer to: (1) having peace with God. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “at peace with God” (2) feeling peace in one’s heart. Alternate translation: “with peace in your heart”
3:15 g35u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν μακροθυμίαν, σωτηρίαν ἡγεῖσθε 1 Because the Lord is patient, the day of judgment has not yet happened. This gives people an opportunity to repent and be saved, as Peter explained in [3:9](../03/09.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “consider the patience of our Lord as an opportunity to repent and be saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:15 pd30 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν μακροθυμίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “that our Lord is patient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:15 vbso rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to save people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:15 vo82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἡμῶν ἀδελφὸς Παῦλος 1 Peter is using the term **brother** figuratively to refer to Paul as a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “our beloved fellow Christian brother Paul” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
3:15 nnd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “according to the wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:15 esr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective, such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “according to the wise words having been given to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:16 zzko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐπιστολαῖς 1 Here, the context suggests that Paul is the author of **the letters**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in all Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:16 wil1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](..03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](..03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](..03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and God’s patience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:16 z4cj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **which** refers to the things in Paul’s letters that are difficult to understand. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The ignorant and unstable ones distort these difficult things in Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
3:16 weh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **distort** is used figuratively to describe changing the meaning of a statement in order to give a false meaning like twisting something so that it changes shape. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which the ignorant and unstable ones interpret falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:16 sg60 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς Γραφὰς 1 Here, **the other scriptures** refers to both the entire Old Testament and the New Testament texts that had been written by the time Peter wrote this letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as also the other authoritative scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:16 sh4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here, **to** indicates that this clause provides the result of the “ignorant and unstable ones” falsely interpreting the scriptures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulting in their own destruction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:16 wrqu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “so that they will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:17 kn3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, Peter uses **therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has said, which could be: (1) the destruction of those who falsely interpret the scriptures mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because those who falsely interpret the scriptures will be destroyed” (2) the previous content of the entire letter, especially the sure destruction of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “Because of all these things I have told you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:17 wk5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](..03/01.md) and [3:14](..03/14.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:17 bq8o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result προγινώσκοντες 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere, Peter is giving the reason why his readers should heed his command in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “since you know beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:17 w3sp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ & ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say it in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 v5cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἵνα μὴ & ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **steadfastness** with the adjective “steadfast.” Alternate translation: “so that you might not lose your own steadfast faith” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
3:17 um49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 This clause indicates the reason why people might lose their own steadfastness. If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of being led astray by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:17 xjht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the error of the lawless ones having led you astray” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:17 h2ik rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 Here, Peter uses **led astray** figuratively to describe people being deceived into living wickedly by false teachers as if they had been led away from the straight path. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “having been deceived into living wickedly by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 px85 τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which one might be led astray. Alternate translation: “by means of the error of the lawless ones”
3:18 ccm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐξάνετε & ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **grow** is used figuratively to express experiencing or having something in increasing amounts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “have more and more of the grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:18 zjqa ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει 1 Here, **in** means “with reference to.” Alternate translation: “with reference to the grace and knowledge”
3:18 lk3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “kind acts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:18 qlbc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γνώσει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **knowledge** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:18 z13o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction and indicates that our also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])\n
3:18 bpnr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **glory** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “may everyone glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:18 u1g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος 1 Here, **to the day of the age** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

Can't render this file because it contains an unexpected character in line 88 and column 144.

2
tn_2TH.tsv
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)\n1. Christians suffering from persecution\n - They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)\n - God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)\n1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ\n - Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)\n - Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians\n - His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)\n - His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)\n1. Closing (3:16-17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)\n1. Christians suffering from persecution\n * They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)\n * God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)\n1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ\n * Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)\n * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians\n * His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)\n * His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)\n1. Closing (3:16-17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
1:1 b6vf 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica.
1:1 nrxt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)\n1. Christians suffering from persecution\n - They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)\n - God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)\n1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ\n - Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)\n - Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians\n - His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)\n - His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)\n1. Closing (3:16-17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)\n1. Christians suffering from persecution\n * They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)\n * God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)\n1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ\n * Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)\n * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians\n * His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)\n * His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)\n1. Closing (3:16-17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1:intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))
4 1:1 b6vf 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica.
5 1:1 nrxt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

48
tn_2TI.tsv
View File

@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:2 ey7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 w43q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 p003 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes these three abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 ub7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 This is an important title for God. Paul could be referring to God here as: (1) He is the Father of Christ. (2) He is the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:2 ub7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 This is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:2 dcr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:3 p004 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternative translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 tvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -35,15 +35,15 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:6 p010 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternative translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 s6vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 u8vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be clearer in your language, you can replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **spirit** may refer to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) Here, **spirit** may refer to the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
1:7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
1:7 p011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 The word **discipline** could mean: (1) Here, **discipline** may refer to self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) Here, **discipline** may refer to the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
1:7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
1:8 fk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternative translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternative translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
1:8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with Paul. (2) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
1:8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
1:8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternative translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
1:8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
1:9 ld55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 Here, **with a holy calling** could mean: (1) This refers to what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) This refers to the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:9 ld55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
1:9 kyr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 Here the words **purpose and grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:9 p012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -60,17 +60,17 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:12 y8l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 Paul expresses that he is certain that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
1:12 p6pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 hhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) The deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) The deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:12 hhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:12 qcu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:13 h1qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **the healthy words** figuratively means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “the correct message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 p016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγων 1 Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 p017 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **love** could mean: (1) This refers to the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) This refers to the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
1:13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
1:13 ix6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **faith and love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 i5g5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 cb5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
1:15 p018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) Paul may have used the word **all** to mean “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) Paul may have used the word **all** to refer to the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:15 p018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:15 p019 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀσίᾳ 1 This is the name of a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:15 p6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:15 p020 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:2 ig9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:2 kv1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 p027 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:3 yc1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:3 yc1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:3 juu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 a4x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a soldier who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 p7n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -135,27 +135,27 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “You can trust this statement”
2:11 p045 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:11 g6e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
2:11 in38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could mean: (1) Paul may be referring to the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have figuratively “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) Paul may be referring to the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could mean: (1) This refers to life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) This refers to how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
2:11 in38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have figuratively “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
2:12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
2:12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
2:13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
2:13 p050 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “he remains faithful to us” (2) “he remains true to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 p050 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15-19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
2:14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 The word **them**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
2:14 p051 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 r5lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 g6p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) The believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) The believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 g6p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
2:14 ywty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:14 x7gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
2:15 rj6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 Paul says figuratively that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 xgz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul refers figuratively to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 p052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could mean: (1) It may refer to the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) It may refer to the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 p052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 p053 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 e27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 Paul speaks of these discussions figuratively as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of godlessness as that direction. Paul is figuratively describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 i73t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread is either: (1) This refers to the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) This refers to the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:17 i73t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:17 p054 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 p055 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 **Gangrene** is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:17 p056 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Paul gives Timothy the names of two men who are examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@ -173,10 +173,10 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:20 p061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:20 j75l σκεύη 1 The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
2:20 mt5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:21 jm3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks figuratively of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. This could mean: (1) The word **these** may refer to the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) The word **these** may refer to the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 jm3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks figuratively of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 g79f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of container. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 p062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 These four phrases could mean: (1) The ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) All four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
2:21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
2:21 p063 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:21 nl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 p064 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God figuratively as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:5 xm1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 gu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 Here Paul uses the term **captivating** figuratively to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
3:6 e9ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) These women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) These women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 e9ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 p079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 p080 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 izz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 Paul speaks figuratively about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 Alternative translation: “fully capable”
3:17 p099 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)\n2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)\n3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “I adjure you”\n\nWith these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.\n\n### Crown\n\nScripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
4:1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could mean: (1) This refers to placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) This refers to solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
4:1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
4:1 cb15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 u32g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:1 p100 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
4:2 p102 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4:2 g5r0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:2 p103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) The word **all** may be a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:2 p103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
4:3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
4:3 ilx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -303,11 +303,11 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:6 sh23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was being poured out as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:6 p108 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:6 fb7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
4:7 d9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 Paul speaks of himself figuratively as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. This could mean: (1) The word **good** may describe the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) The word **good** may mean that Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:7 d9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 Paul speaks of himself figuratively as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:7 kq83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a race on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:7 vk2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 ujg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:8 hg8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) The **crown** figuratively represents the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) The **crown** may represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 hg8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 Here, the **crown** could: (1) figuratively represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 dwn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown στέφανος 1 See how you translated this in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:8 n3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:8 uh88 τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “those who are looking forward to his return”
@ -335,8 +335,8 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
4:16 rm2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 t1fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 Paul is speaking as if the Lord had physically stood with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:17 y69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) At his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 p113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) This is a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) This is a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:17 y69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 p113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:17 gsr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 Paul speaks figuratively as if he had been in danger of being killed by a lion at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:17 p114 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:18 p115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
11 1:2 ey7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12 1:2 w43q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
13 1:2 p003 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes these three abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
14 1:2 ub7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 This is an important title for God. Paul could be referring to God here as: (1) He is the Father of Christ. (2) He is the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) This is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
15 1:2 dcr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16 1:3 p004 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternative translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17 1:3 tvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
35 1:6 p010 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternative translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
36 1:6 s6vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
37 1:7 u8vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be clearer in your language, you can replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
38 1:7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **spirit** may refer to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) Here, **spirit** may refer to the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline” Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
39 1:7 p011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
40 1:7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 The word **discipline** could mean: (1) Here, **discipline** may refer to self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) Here, **discipline** may refer to the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others” Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
41 1:8 fk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternative translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
42 1:8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternative translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
43 1:8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with Paul. (2) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with all Christians who suffer. The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
44 1:8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternative translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
45 1:8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
46 1:9 ld55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 Here, **with a holy calling** could mean: (1) This refers to what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) This refers to the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
47 1:9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
48 1:9 kyr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 Here the words **purpose and grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
49 1:9 p012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60 1:12 y8l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
61 1:12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 Paul expresses that he is certain that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
62 1:12 p6pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
63 1:12 hhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) The deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) The deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
64 1:12 qcu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
65 1:13 h1qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **the healthy words** figuratively means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “the correct message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
66 1:13 p016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγων 1 Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
67 1:13 p017 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you can use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
68 1:13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **love** could mean: (1) This refers to the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) This refers to the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him” Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
69 1:13 ix6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **faith and love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
70 1:14 i5g5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
71 1:14 cb5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
72 1:14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
73 1:15 p018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) Paul may have used the word **all** to mean “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) Paul may have used the word **all** to refer to the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
74 1:15 p019 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀσίᾳ 1 This is the name of a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
75 1:15 p6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
76 1:15 p020 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
96 2:2 ig9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
97 2:2 kv1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
98 2:2 p027 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
99 2:3 yc1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) It may mean for Timothy to suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
100 2:3 juu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
101 2:4 a4x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a soldier who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
102 2:4 p7n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
135 2:11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “You can trust this statement”
136 2:11 p045 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
137 2:11 g6e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
138 2:11 in38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could mean: (1) Paul may be referring to the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have figuratively “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) Paul may be referring to the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul is speaking figuratively since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have figuratively “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
139 2:11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could mean: (1) This refers to life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) This refers to how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do” Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
140 2:12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
141 2:12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
142 2:13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
143 2:13 p050 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “he remains faithful to us” (2) “he remains true to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
144 2:13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15-19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
145 2:14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 The word **them**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
146 2:14 p051 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
147 2:14 r5lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
148 2:14 g6p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) The believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) The believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
149 2:14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
150 2:14 ywty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
151 2:14 x7gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
152 2:15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
153 2:15 rj6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 Paul says figuratively that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
154 2:15 xgz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul refers figuratively to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
155 2:15 p052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could mean: (1) It may refer to the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) It may refer to the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
156 2:15 p053 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
157 2:16 e27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 Paul speaks of these discussions figuratively as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of godlessness as that direction. Paul is figuratively describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
158 2:17 i73t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread is either: (1) This refers to the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) This refers to the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
159 2:17 p054 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
160 2:17 p055 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 **Gangrene** is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
161 2:17 p056 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Paul gives Timothy the names of two men who are examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
173 2:20 p061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
174 2:20 j75l σκεύη 1 The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
175 2:20 mt5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
176 2:21 jm3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks figuratively of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. This could mean: (1) The word **these** may refer to the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) The word **these** may refer to the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks figuratively of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
177 2:21 g79f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of container. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178 2:21 p062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
179 2:21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 These four phrases could mean: (1) The ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) All four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work” These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
180 2:21 p063 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
181 2:21 nl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
182 2:21 p064 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God figuratively as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
221 3:5 xm1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
222 3:6 gu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 Here Paul uses the term **captivating** figuratively to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
223 3:6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
224 3:6 e9ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 Paul speaks figuratively of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) These women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) These women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks figuratively of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
225 3:6 p079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
226 3:6 p080 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
227 3:6 izz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 Paul speaks figuratively about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
273 3:17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 Alternative translation: “fully capable”
274 3:17 p099 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
275 4:intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)\n2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)\n3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “I adjure you”\n\nWith these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.\n\n### Crown\n\nScripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
276 4:1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could mean: (1) This refers to placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) This refers to solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you” The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
277 4:1 cb15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
278 4:1 u32g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
279 4:1 p100 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
285 4:2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
286 4:2 p102 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
287 4:2 g5r0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
288 4:2 p103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) The word **all** may be a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
289 4:3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
290 4:3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
291 4:3 ilx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
303 4:6 sh23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was being poured out as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
304 4:6 p108 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
305 4:6 fb7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
306 4:7 d9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 Paul speaks of himself figuratively as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. This could mean: (1) The word **good** may describe the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) The word **good** may mean that Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks of himself figuratively as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
307 4:7 kq83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a race on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
308 4:7 vk2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
309 4:8 ujg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
310 4:8 hg8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 This could mean one of two things: (1) The **crown** figuratively represents the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) The **crown** may represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, the **crown** could: (1) figuratively represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
311 4:8 dwn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown στέφανος 1 See how you translated this in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
312 4:8 n3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
313 4:8 uh88 τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “those who are looking forward to his return”
335 4:16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
336 4:16 rm2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
337 4:17 t1fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 Paul is speaking as if the Lord had physically stood with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
338 4:17 y69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) At his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
339 4:17 p113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) This is a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) This is a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
340 4:17 gsr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 Paul speaks figuratively as if he had been in danger of being killed by a lion at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
341 4:17 p114 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
342 4:18 p115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

6
tn_3JN.tsv
View File

@ -15,11 +15,11 @@ front:intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduct
1:5 g4gz ὃ, ἐὰν ἐργάσῃ εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τοῦτο ξένους 1 “when you help fellow believers, especially those whom you do not know”
1:6 wzf6 οἳ ἐμαρτύρησάν σου τῇ ἀγάπῃ ἐνώπιον ἐκκλησίας 1 These words describe the “strangers” (verse 5). “strangers who have told the believers in the church about how you have loved them”
1:6 pb64 οὓς καλῶς ποιήσεις, προπέμψας 1 John is commending Gaius for his normal practice of helping believers who are traveling. Translate this in a way that shows that this is something that Gaius does continually.
1:7 d8y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ γὰρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ἐξῆλθον 1 Here, **the name** refers to Jesus. This could mean: (1) They left where they were in order to tell others about Jesus. (2) They left where they were because others forced them to leave because of their belief in Jesus. (3) This refers to both of these things. Alternate translation: “since they have gone out to tell people about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 yzc8 μηδὲν λαμβάνοντες 1 This could mean: (1) Unbelievers have not helped them by giving them anything. (2) They did not accept any help or gifts from unbelievers.
1:7 d8y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ γὰρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ἐξῆλθον 1 Here, **the name** refers to Jesus. This could mean: (1) they left where they were in order to tell others about Jesus. (2) they left where they were because others forced them to leave because of their belief in Jesus. (3) both of these things. Alternate translation: “since they have gone out to tell people about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 yzc8 μηδὲν λαμβάνοντες 1 This could mean: (1) unbelievers have not helped them by giving them anything. (2) they did not accept any help or gifts from unbelievers.
1:7 hk3p τῶν ἐθνικῶν 1 Here, **Gentiles** does not just mean people who are not Jewish. It refers to any people who do not trust in Jesus.
1:8 d2l7 ἵνα συνεργοὶ γινώμεθα τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 “so that we will cooperate with them in announcing God’s truth to people”
1:8 ab01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **the truth** is spoken of here as though it were a person that John, Gaius, and others worked for. This could mean: (1) This refers to “the true message from God” as in the UST. (2) This refers to “God, who is Truth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1:8 ab01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **the truth** is spoken of here as though it were a person that John, Gaius, and others worked for. This could refer to: (1) “the true message from God” as in the UST. (2) “God, who is Truth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1:9 tm9q τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Here, **the church** refers to Gaius and the group of believers who met together to worship God.
1:9 cz9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Διοτρέφης 1 He was a member of the congregation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:9 s82w ὁ φιλοπρωτεύων αὐτῶν 1 “who loves to be the most important one among them” or “who loves to act as though he is their leader”

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
15 1:5 g4gz ὃ, ἐὰν ἐργάσῃ εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς καὶ τοῦτο ξένους 1 “when you help fellow believers, especially those whom you do not know”
16 1:6 wzf6 οἳ ἐμαρτύρησάν σου τῇ ἀγάπῃ ἐνώπιον ἐκκλησίας 1 These words describe the “strangers” (verse 5). “strangers who have told the believers in the church about how you have loved them”
17 1:6 pb64 οὓς καλῶς ποιήσεις, προπέμψας 1 John is commending Gaius for his normal practice of helping believers who are traveling. Translate this in a way that shows that this is something that Gaius does continually.
18 1:7 d8y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ γὰρ τοῦ ὀνόματος ἐξῆλθον 1 Here, **the name** refers to Jesus. This could mean: (1) They left where they were in order to tell others about Jesus. (2) They left where they were because others forced them to leave because of their belief in Jesus. (3) This refers to both of these things. Alternate translation: “since they have gone out to tell people about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **the name** refers to Jesus. This could mean: (1) they left where they were in order to tell others about Jesus. (2) they left where they were because others forced them to leave because of their belief in Jesus. (3) both of these things. Alternate translation: “since they have gone out to tell people about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
19 1:7 yzc8 μηδὲν λαμβάνοντες 1 This could mean: (1) Unbelievers have not helped them by giving them anything. (2) They did not accept any help or gifts from unbelievers. This could mean: (1) unbelievers have not helped them by giving them anything. (2) they did not accept any help or gifts from unbelievers.
20 1:7 hk3p τῶν ἐθνικῶν 1 Here, **Gentiles** does not just mean people who are not Jewish. It refers to any people who do not trust in Jesus.
21 1:8 d2l7 ἵνα συνεργοὶ γινώμεθα τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 “so that we will cooperate with them in announcing God’s truth to people”
22 1:8 ab01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **the truth** is spoken of here as though it were a person that John, Gaius, and others worked for. This could mean: (1) This refers to “the true message from God” as in the UST. (2) This refers to “God, who is Truth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) Here, **the truth** is spoken of here as though it were a person that John, Gaius, and others worked for. This could refer to: (1) “the true message from God” as in the UST. (2) “God, who is Truth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
23 1:9 tm9q τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Here, **the church** refers to Gaius and the group of believers who met together to worship God.
24 1:9 cz9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Διοτρέφης 1 He was a member of the congregation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
25 1:9 s82w ὁ φιλοπρωτεύων αὐτῶν 1 “who loves to be the most important one among them” or “who loves to act as though he is their leader”

103
tn_ACT.tsv
View File

@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
1:6 f7uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰ & ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a concrete noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:6 a252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 **Israel** is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:7 a012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι 1 Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 y1fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 This could mean: (1) The words **times** and **seasons** may refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) Jesus may be using the two words, which have similar meanings, together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:7 y1fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:7 a013 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:7 a014 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **authority** with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 ld4k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες 1 Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
1:10 a018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
1:10 a019 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄνδρες δύο 1 These were actually angels. Luke calls them **men** because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:10 a020 ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς 1 In this context, the word **white** likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
1:11 a021 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἳ & εἶπαν 1 This could mean: (1) One of the angels may have spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) The two angels may have each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 a021 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἳ & εἶπαν 1 This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:11 a022 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs οἳ & εἶπαν 1 If you retain the word **they** in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
1:11 gpg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:11 a023 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 **Galileans** are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
2:1 x075 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 **Pentecost** is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:1 i4sb rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 Here the word **they** refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
2:2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Luke may be using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) Luke may mean that the sound came from **heaven** itself.
2:2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself.
2:2 a078 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:2 jec5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 a079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
4:4 a257 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
4:4 a258 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:4 bm1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν 1 Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4:4 qd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 This could mean: (1) The word **became** may be indicating that the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) The word translated **became** may mean “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:4 qd8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγενήθη & ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:5 lw2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
4:5 cdj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:5 j6p8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
4:15 ql31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες & αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:15 a271 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:15 a272 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:16 p4g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 This could mean: (1) The Jewish leaders may be using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) The leaders may be asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:16 p4g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
4:16 jn12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
4:17 a273 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
4:18 a279 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν 1 The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
4:18 a280 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:19 a281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4:19 a282 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 This could mean: (1) Peter and John may have each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter may have spoken these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:19 a282 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:19 jf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:19 a283 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:20 a284 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Peter and John are using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
4:32 zyp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:33 a317 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:33 a318 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
4:33 d8dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. The word could mean: (1) It may describe how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) The word may describe how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:33 d8dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:34 a331 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be clearer in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
4:34 a319 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:34 a320 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
5:5 a344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
5:5 a345 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
5:6 a346 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:6 a347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 This could mean: (1) This may simply be a reference to some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) There may have been a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:6 a347 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:6 a348 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
5:7 a349 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:7 ry54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@ -854,48 +854,63 @@ front:intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
5:42 jj94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory τε 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
5:42 kyp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5:42 x424 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
6:intro z5r5 0 # Acts 06 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The distribution to the widows\n\nThe believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them had lived in Judea and spoke Hebrew, and others had lived in Gentile areas and spoke Greek. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “His face was like the face of an angel”\n\nNo one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. It is best for the translation to say only what the ULT says about this.
6:intro z5r5 0 # Acts 06 General Notes\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The distribution to the widows\n\nThe believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “His face was like the face of an angel”\n\nNo one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
6:1 f8br rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
6:1 cg5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:1 e7vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:1 ftz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοὺς Ἑβραίους 1 In this context, Luke is using the name **Hebrews** to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:1 s4qy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:1 rde8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **service** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:2 jr1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the word “you” refers to the believers. The words “us” and “we” here refer to the 12 apostles. Where applicable, use the exclusive form in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:2 n5r4 οἱ δώδεκα 1 This refers to the eleven apostles plus Matthias, who was selected in [Acts 1:26](../01/26.md).
6:2 g56w τὸ πλῆθος τῶν μαθητῶν 1 “all of the disciples” or “all the believers”
6:2 jm17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an exaggeration in order to emphasize the importance of their task of teaching the word of God. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
6:2 fwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 This is a phrase meaning to serve food to the people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:3 y3bm ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους & πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 Possible meanings are (1) the men have three qualities—a good reputation, being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom or (2) the men have a reputation for two qualities—being full of the Spirit, and being full of wisdom .
6:3 p1yz ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους 1 “men that people know are good” or “men whom people trust”
6:3 i27a ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 “to be responsible to do this task”
6:4 b3bj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τῇ διακονίᾳ τοῦ λόγου 1 It may be helpful to add more information. Alternate translation: “the ministry of teaching and preaching the message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
6:5 wh9t ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 “all the disciples liked their suggestion”
6:5 ajq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Στέφανον, & Φίλιππον, καὶ Πρόχορον, καὶ Νικάνορα 1 These are Greek names, and suggest that all of the men elected were from the Grecian Jewish group of believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:5 qas9 προσήλυτον 1 a Gentile who converted to the Jewish religion
6:6 wu1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 This represented giving a blessing and imparting responsibility and authority for the work to the seven. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6:7 x48w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse gives an update on the church’s growth.
6:7 wu4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 The writer speaks of the growing number of people who believed the word as if the word of God itself were covering a larger area. Alternate translation: “the number of people who believed the word of God increased” or “the number of people who believed the message from God increased” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:7 jg8y ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 “followed the teaching of the new belief”
6:7 qq3l τῇ πίστει 1 Possible meanings of **faith** here are (1) the gospel message of trust in Jesus or (2) the teaching of the church or (3) the Christian teaching.
6:8 wn1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background 0 # General Information:\n\nThese verses give background information about Stephen and other people that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
6:8 n3re 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis is the beginning of a new part of the story.
6:8 et2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 This introduces Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6:8 h8sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 The words **grace** and **power** here refer to power from God. This could be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “God was giving Stephen power to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:9 k88n συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 **Freedmen** were probably ex-slaves from these different locations. It is unclear if the other people listed were part of the synagogue or just participated in the debate with Stephen.
6:9 j8pq συνζητοῦντες τῷ Στεφάνῳ 1 “They were arguing with Stephen”
6:10 s2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the word “We” refers only to the men they persuaded to lie. The word “they” refers back to the people from the synagogue of the freemen in [Acts 6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:10 fp41 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe background information that began in [Acts 6:8](../06/08.md) continues through verse 10.
6:10 v5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 This phrase means they could not prove false what he said. Alternate translation: “they could not argue against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:10 fnb2 Πνεύματι 1 this refers to the Holy Spirit
6:11 ren5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 They were given money to give false testimony. Alternate translation: “some men to lie and say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:11 x747 ῥήματα βλάσφημα εἰς 1 “bad things about”
6:12 tqk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nEach use of word “they” most likely refers back to the people from the synagogue of the Freedmen in [Acts 6:9](../06/09.md). They were responsible for the false witnesses and for inciting the council, the elders, the scribes, and the other people. Here the word “we” refers only to the false witness that they brought to testify. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:12 l251 συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 “They also caused the people, the elders, and the scribes to be very angry at Stephen”
6:12 j3wd συνήρπασαν αὐτὸν 1 “they grabbed him and held him so he could not get away”
6:13 zv6s οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 “continually speaks”
6:14 vak4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν 1 The phrase **handed down** means “passed on.” Alternate translation: “taught our ancestors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:15 k8rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 This phrase compares his face to that of an angel but does not say specifically what they have in common. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
6:2 kwvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 0 Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:2 n5r4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:2 is74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:2 jm17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:2 w9re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:2 fwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 lcyx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 p1yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄνδρας & μαρτυρουμένους 1 The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:3 mgid rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:3 pxe5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:3 i27a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:4 b3bj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 The apostles are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:5 wh9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:5 jayc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
6:5 ajq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Στέφανον & Φίλιππον & Πρόχορον & Νικάνορα & Τίμωνα & Παρμενᾶν & Νικόλαον 1 These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:5 vsyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:5 yqsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:5 cg5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:6 wu1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
6:7 x48w rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
6:7 wu4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:7 ueie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:7 jg8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
6:7 qq3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:8 et2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
6:8 pzr0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:8 h8sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6:8 xscq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος & πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **power** with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:8 m0zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
6:9 d74m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:9 nei0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:9 k88n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:9 e7b0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κυρηναίων & Ἀλεξανδρέων & Κιλικίας & Ἀσίας 1 **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:10 v5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 The expression **stand against** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:10 fnb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
6:10 psha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:11 ren5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:11 s2cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
6:11 x747 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:11 dgxi rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:12 tqk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 In this verse and the next one, the word "they" continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6:12 l251 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:12 dkbj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Συνέδριον 1 **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:13 zv6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
6:13 ju6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:13 o3j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:14 c5l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:14 uok4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:14 vak4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:15 k8rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
7:intro p9h4 0 # Acts 07 General Notes\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.\n\nIt appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “Stephen said”\n\nStephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.\n\n### “Full of the Holy Spirit”\n\nThe Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.\n\n### Foreshadowing\n\nWhen an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Implied information\n\nStephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Metonymy\n\nStephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Background knowledge\n\nThe Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
7:1 pt4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThe word “our” includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word “your” is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
7:1 hy9r 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe part of the story about Stephen, which began in [Acts 6:8](../06/08.md), continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. Most of this history comes from Moses’ writings.

Can't render this file because it is too large.

2
tn_COL.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

48
tn_EPH.tsv
View File

@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:3 cr9h ὁ εὐλογήσας ἡμᾶς 1 “for God has blessed us”
1:3 m8qh πάσῃ εὐλογίᾳ πνευματικῇ 1 “every blessing coming from the Spirit of God”
1:3 j2lk ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 “in the supernatural world.” The word **heavenly** refers to the place where God is.
1:3 v9qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **in Christ** has its general meaning as a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) Here the phrase **in Christ** refers to what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 v9qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here, **in Christ** could mean: (1) a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 ibv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἁγίους καὶ ἀμώμους 1 Paul uses these two similar words to emphasize moral goodness. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:4 ab01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀμώμους 1 The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it is clearer in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:5 fp7l 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “his,” “He,” and “he” refer to God.
@ -24,21 +24,21 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:7 abcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτοῦ 1 The **blood** of Jesus is a metonym for his death. Alternate translation: “because he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 m9l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s grace as if it were material wealth. Alternate translation: “greatness of God’s grace” or “abundance of God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:8 pg6j ἧς ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 “which he gave us in a great amount” or “being extremely kind to us”
1:8 sw98 ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “because he has all wisdom and understanding” (2) “so that we might have great wisdom and understanding.”
1:8 sw98 ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει 1 This could mean: (1) because he has all wisdom and understanding. (2) so that we might have great wisdom and understanding.
1:8 ab98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει 1 Here, **wisdom** and **understanding** mean very similar things. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:9 v71p κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “because he wanted to make it known to us” (2) “which was what he wanted.”
1:9 v71p κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) because he wanted to make it known to us. (2) which was what he wanted.
1:9 c2uk ἣν προέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “as he demonstrated this purpose in Christ”
1:9 u53h ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “by means of Christ”
1:10 n2sl εἰς οἰκονομίαν 1 A new sentence can be started here. Alternate translation: “He did this with a view to an administration” or “He did this, thinking about a stewardship”
1:10 em7q τοῦ πληρώματος τῶν καιρῶν 1 “when the time is right” or “at the time that he has appointed”
1:10 ab7q ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “under his rule” or “under his authority”
1:11 ww9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν, προορισθέντες 1 Both pronouns **we** and **We** are inclusive in this verse. Paul is referring to all Christians, who were predestined to belong to Christ. In verses 12 and 13 he will divide this group into “we” (exclusive) Jewish Christians and “you” Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:11 t281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν 1 You can state this in active form. Possible meanings are: (1) “God also chose us to be his possession” (2) “God also chose us to be heirs.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 t281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God also chose us to be his possession. (2) God also chose us to be heirs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 nkf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προορισθέντες 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 gj44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & τοὺς προηλπικότας ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Here, the word **we** is exclusive and refers to the Jewish believers who first heard the good news, not the believers at Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:12 zqm9 εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς, εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 “so that we … would live to praise him for his glory”
1:13 j1zc 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul has been speaking in the previous two verses about himself and the other Jewish believers, but now he begins speaking about the Ephesian believers.
1:13 ac1e τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “the message about the truth” (2) “the true message.”
1:13 ac1e τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 This could mean: (1) the message about the truth. (2) the true message.
1:13 qgf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσφραγίσθητε τῷ Πνεύματι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, τῷ Ἁγίῳ 1 In this metaphor Paul pictures the Holy Spirit as a seal, comparing him to the wax that was placed on a letter and stamped with a symbol representing the person who wrote the letter. Paul uses this custom as a picture to show how God has used the Holy Spirit to assure us that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “God has placed the Holy Spirit that he promised on you as if he were a seal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:13 abcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσφραγίσθητε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sealed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:14 g6dw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀρραβὼν τῆς κληρονομίας ἡμῶν 1 Receiving what God has promised is spoken of in terms of one inheriting property or wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “an initial portion that we will receive from what God has promised” or “a guarantee that we will receive what God has promised to give us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -65,15 +65,15 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
1:20 f3dh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καθίσας ἐν δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 To sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “seated him in the place of honor and authority beside him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1:20 jrv1 ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 “in the supernatural world.” The word **heavenly** refers to the place where God is. See how you translated this in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md).
1:21 k8k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑπεράνω πάσης ἀρχῆς, καὶ ἐξουσίας, καὶ δυνάμεως, καὶ κυριότητος 1 These are all terms for the ranks of supernatural beings, both angelic and demonic. If your language does not have four different terms for rulers or authorities, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “far above all types of supernatural beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:21 ra11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παντὸς ὀνόματος ὀνομαζομένου 1 You can state this in active form. Possible meaning for alternate translation: (1) “every name that man gives” (2) “every name that God gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:21 x6qc ὀνόματος 1 This could mean: (1) This is a title. (2) This refers to a position of authority.
1:21 ra11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παντὸς ὀνόματος ὀνομαζομένου 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) every name that man gives. (2) every name that God gives. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:21 x6qc ὀνόματος 1 This could refer to: (1) a title. (2) a position of authority.
1:21 pym8 ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 “at this time”
1:21 qw2x ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 “in the future”
1:22 jm9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **feet** represents Christ’s lordship, authority, and power. Alternate translation: “under Christ’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:22 pm4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 1 Here, **head** is a metaphor that refers to the leader or the one who is in charge. Alternate translation: “ruler over all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:23 ge2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 1 Just as the head (verse 22) rules all things pertaining to a human body, so Christ is the head of the church body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:23 w2kh τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν πληρουμένου 1 “for Christ fills the church with his life and power just as he gives life to all things”
1:23 x2kh τὸ πλήρωμα 1 This could mean: (1) It has a passive sense, which would mean that Christ fills or completes the church. (2) It has an active sense, which would mean that the church completes Christ (as a body completes a head).
1:23 x2kh τὸ πλήρωμα 1 This could have: (1) a passive sense, which would mean that Christ fills or completes the church. (2) an active sense, which would mean that the church completes Christ (as a body completes a head).
2:intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter focuses on the life that a Christian had before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person’s former way of living is distinct from a Christian’s new identity “in Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### One body\n\nPaul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or “body.” The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### “Dead in trespasses and sins”\n\nPaul teaches that those who are not Christians are “dead” in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually “dead.” Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Descriptions of worldly living\n\nPaul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They “lived according to the ways of this world” and are “living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air,” “fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature,” and “carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind.”\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “It is the gift of God”\n\nSome scholars believe “it” here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, “it” here probably refers to both things: the gift is that we are saved by God’s grace through faith.\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is sometimes used as a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. The phrase “Gentiles in the flesh” indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. But “flesh” is also used in this verse to refer to the physical person, similar to “body part of man.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
2:1 xf5s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul reminds the believers of their past and the way they now are before God.
2:1 dxx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ὄντας νεκροὺς τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 This shows how the inability of a sinful person to obey God is similar to a dead person’s inability to respond physically. Alternate translation: “you were spiritually dead, unable to do anything but sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:5 h6km rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι 1 You can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God saved you by being gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:5 abkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι 1 The word **grace** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God saved you by being extremely kind to you” or “God saved you as a free gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:6 na2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom συνήγειρεν 1 Here, **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:6 abch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνήγειρεν 1 This could mean: (1) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given Paul and the believers in Ephesus new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given us new life because we belong to Christ” (2) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Ephesus can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we can be sure that God will give us life just as he has caused Christ to come alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2:6 abch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνήγειρεν 1 This could mean: (1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given Paul and the believers in Ephesus new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given us new life because we belong to Christ” (2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Ephesus can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we can be sure that God will give us life just as he has caused Christ to come alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2:6 ab11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεκάθισεν 1 Paul talks about the believers as already **seated** in heaven with Christ because, although it is something that will happen in the future, it was guaranteed by what Christ did in the past. Alternate translation: “it is as though God has already seated us next to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
2:6 b499 ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 The phrase **heavenly places** refers to the place where God is. See how this is translated in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “in the supernatural world”
2:6 m6pq ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
2:11 e76g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκροβυστία 1 Non-Jewish people were not circumcised as babies and thus the Jews considered them people who do not follow any of God’s laws. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised pagans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:11 nlf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy περιτομῆς 1 This was another term for Jewish people because all male infants were **circumcised**. Alternate translation: “circumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:11 tf9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῆς λεγομένης 1 You can translate this with an active form. Alternate translation: “by what people call” or “by those whom people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:11 fb4r τῆς λεγομένης περιτομῆς ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Jews, who are circumcised by humans. (2) This refers to Jews, who circumcise the physical body.
2:11 fb4r τῆς λεγομένης περιτομῆς ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου 1 This could refer to: (1) the Jews, who are circumcised by humans. (2) the Jews, who circumcise the physical body.
2:12 abcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were not part of the Jews, who were circumcised. The result is that the Gentile Ephesians were separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:12 u3vu χωρὶς Χριστοῦ 1 “unbelievers”
2:12 sti2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ξένοι τῶν διαθηκῶν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Paul speaks to the Gentile believers as if they had been foreigners, kept out of the land of God’s **covenants** and **promise**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:1 jb9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τούτου χάριν 1 The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:1 abd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτου χάριν 1 You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:1 m9b6 ὁ δέσμιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 “the one who is in prison because I serve Christ Jesus”
3:2 rx7t τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, τῆς δοθείσης μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **grace** could mean: (1) This refers to the gift of the gospel that Paul is bringing to the Gentiles, and you could translate, “the responsibility that God gave me to bring his grace to you.” (2) This refers to the gift to Paul of being the steward of the gospel for the Gentiles, and you could translate that as “the responsibility that God graciously gave me for your benefit.”
3:2 rx7t τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, τῆς δοθείσης μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **grace** could mean: (1) the gift of the gospel that Paul is bringing to the Gentiles, and you could translate, “the responsibility that God gave me to bring his grace to you.” (2) the gift to Paul of being the steward of the gospel for the Gentiles, and you could translate that as “the responsibility that God graciously gave me for your benefit.”
3:3 dc7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν ἐγνωρίσθη μοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “according to what God revealed to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:3 qm6m καθὼς προέγραψα ἐν ὀλίγῳ 1 Paul refers here to another letter that he had written to these people.
3:5 srn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃ ἑτέραις γενεαῖς οὐκ ἐγνωρίσθη τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make these things known to people in the past” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:6 pqy3 εἶναι τὰ ἔθνη, συνκληρονόμα & διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This is the hidden truth that Paul began to explain in the previous verse. The **Gentiles** who receive Christ also receive everything that the Jewish believers receive from God.
3:6 y88q σύνσωμα 1 The church is often referred to as the **body** of Christ.
3:6 wxs4 ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
3:6 i4h7 διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This could mean: (1) Because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow sharers in the promise. (2) Because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow heirs and members of the body and fellow sharers in the promise.
3:6 i4h7 διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This could mean: (1) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow sharers in the promise. (2) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow heirs and members of the body and fellow sharers in the promise.
3:8 y97f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνεξιχνίαστον 1 Paul speaks of everything that Christ offers as something so physically vast that it cannot be fully explored. Alternate Translation: “unable to be completely known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:8 e96z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the truth about **Christ** and the blessings he brings as if they were material wealth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 f2zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ μυστηρίου, τοῦ ἀποκεκρυμμένου ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of God, who created all things, kept this plan hidden for long ages in the past” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:18 abd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ would live in their hearts. The result is that the Ephesian believers would fully know the love of God and be filled with God’s fullness. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:18 bkk6 καταλαβέσθαι 1 This is the third item for which Paul bends his knees and prays; the first is that God will grant that they be strengthened ([Ephesians 3:16](../03/16.md)) and the second is that Christ may live in their hearts through faith ([Ephesians 3:17](../03/17.md)).
3:18 uu6l πᾶσιν τοῖς ἁγίοις 1 “all the believers in Christ”
3:18 ef4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος 1 In this metaphor Paul pictures something that is not physical or measurable as something that is physical but stretches out in all directions and, thus, is very large. This could mean: (1) These word describe the intensity of Christ’s love for us. Alternate translation: “how very much Christ loves us” (2) These words describe the greatness of God’s wisdom. Alternate translation: “how very wise God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:18 ef4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος 1 In this metaphor Paul pictures something that is not physical or measurable as something that is physical but stretches out in all directions and, thus, is very large. This could refer to: (1) the intensity of Christ’s love for us. Alternate translation: “how very much Christ loves us” (2) the greatness of God’s wisdom. Alternate translation: “how very wise God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:18 ef4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος 1 It may be necessary to state explicitly what these words refer to. If so, you can combine this with the phrase from the next verse and say: “the width and length and height and depth of, and truly know the love of Christ” or “the width and length and height and depth of the love of Christ, and truly know it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:19 rev9 γνῶναί τε τὴν & ἀγάπην τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This continues the idea from the previous verse. They both refer to knowing the greatness of the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “that you can know how great Christ’s love for us is”
3:19 px4z ἵνα πληρωθῆτε εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is the fourth item for which Paul bends his knees and prays ([Ephesians 3:14](../03/14.md)). The first is that they would “be strengthened” ([Ephesians 3:16](../03/16.md)), the second is that “Christ would live in their hearts through faith” ([Ephesians 3:17](../03/17.md)), and the third is that they “could comprehend Christ’s love” ([Ephesians 3:18](../03/18.md)).
@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
3:20 jk5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “we” and “us” in this book continue to include Paul and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:20 m7gi 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul concludes his prayer with a blessing.
3:20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 “Now to God, who”
3:20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about”
3:20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about”
3:21 ab12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The word **glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
4:intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual gifts\n\nSpiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Unity\n\nPaul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Old man and new man\n\nThe term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
4:1 sb64 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other.
@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:8 wj8t ἀναβὰς εἰς ὕψος 1 “When Christ went up into heaven”
4:9 e5at ἀνέβη 1 “Christ went up”
4:9 zu81 καὶ κατέβη 1 “Christ also came down”
4:9 eq56 εἰς τὰ κατώτερα μέρη τῆς γῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the **lower regions** are a part of the **earth**. (2) This refers to **the lower regions** is another way of referring to the **earth** itself. Alternate translation: “into the lower regions, the earth”
4:9 eq56 εἰς τὰ κατώτερα μέρη τῆς γῆς 1 This could refer to: (1) the **lower regions** as a part of the **earth**. (2) **the lower regions** as another way of referring to the **earth** itself. Alternate translation: “into the lower regions, the earth”
4:10 w6t5 ἵνα πληρώσῃ τὰ πάντα 1 “so that he might be working powerfully everywhere”
4:10 b5ig πληρώσῃ 1 “he might complete” or “he might satisfy”
4:12 jx12 πρὸς τὸν καταρτισμὸν τῶν ἁγίων 1 “to prepare the people whom he has set apart” or “to provide the believers with what they need”
@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:17 n5cy 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells them what they should no longer do now that they, as believers, are sealed by the Holy Spirit of God.
4:17 abde rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ wants every believer to become spiritually mature and to serve the other believers. The result is that the Ephesian believers should no longer act as the Gentiles act. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
4:17 ksr8 τοῦτο οὖν λέγω καὶ μαρτύρομαι 1 “Because of what I have just said, I will now say something more in order to strongly encourage”
4:17 abr8 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the authority of the Lord. (2) This may be stating that we all belong to the Lord.
4:17 abr8 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could be: (1) referring to the authority of the Lord. (2) stating that we all belong to the Lord.
4:17 wcx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηκέτι ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν, καθὼς καὶ τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ ἐν ματαιότητι τοῦ νοὸς αὐτῶν 1 Paul commonly uses this metaphor that compares walking to living one’s life. Alternate translation: “you … to stop living like the Gentiles with their worthless thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:18 lab7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ 1 This metaphor compares wrong thinking with darkness. Alternate translation: “they no longer think or reason clearly” or “they are not able to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:18 abci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Their way of thinking has become dark” or “They no longer think or reason clearly” or “They are not able to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:20 e5vk ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐμάθετε τὸν Χριστόν 1 The word **thus** refers to the way that the Gentiles live, as described in [Ephesians 4:17-19](../04/17.md). This emphasizes that what the believers learned from Christ was the opposite of that. Alternate translation: “But what you learned about the ways of Christ was not like that”
4:20 abdh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The sinful way the Gentiles live is in contrast to the way that Paul taught the Ephesians to live according to the truth of Jesus. Use a connecting word in your language that marks a contrast here (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
4:21 hy7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony εἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατε καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 Paul knows that the people to whom he is writing have **heard** and been **taught** these things. He is using irony as a form of rebuke—if they are doing things contrary to the way of Christ, they know better than that and need to stop. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
4:21 b3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) This may mean they received instruction in his ways. (2) This may mean that Jesus’ people have taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:21 b3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) they received instruction in his ways. (2) Jesus’ people have taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:21 gdz6 καθώς ἐστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 “as Jesus teaches us the true way to live” or “as everything about Jesus is true.” See the UST.
4:22 h1ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν 1 Paul is speaking of moral qualities as if they were pieces of clothing. Alternate translation: “You must stop living according to your former manner of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:22 j7n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Paul is speaking of a way of living as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “You must stop doing the things that your former self did” or “Stop doing the things that you used to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:13 abdy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. Hiding the shameful works of darkness now is in contrast to the light exposing them later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:13 vqi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶν & τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν 1 Paul makes this general statement in order to imply that God’s Word shows people’s actions to be good or bad. The Bible often speaks of God’s truth as if it were **light** that could reveal the character of something. Alternate translation: “if you compare everything to what God says, you can know if it is good or bad” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:14 abdz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that their sins will be revealed by the light. The result is that sinners should allow Christ to shine on them. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
5:14 z4ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ἔγειρε, ὁ καθεύδων, καὶ ἀνάστα ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject. (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
5:14 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ὁ καθεύδων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul addresses this comment directly to the believers who are reading or hearing the letter. (2) Paul addresses this comment directly to unbelievers who are not reading or hearing the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
5:14 z4ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ἔγειρε, ὁ καθεύδων, καὶ ἀνάστα ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject. (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
5:14 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ὁ καθεύδων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing this comment directly to the believers who are reading or hearing the letter. (2) Paul is addressing this comment directly to unbelievers who are not reading or hearing the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
5:14 e873 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To arise from among them speaks of becoming alive again and is a metaphor for becoming alive spiritually and living for God. Alternate Translation: “from among all those who have died” or “from among those who are spiritually dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:14 ma8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἐπιφαύσει σοι 1 Here, **you** refers to the “sleeper” and is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
5:14 ym6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιφαύσει σοι ὁ Χριστός 1 **Christ** will enable an unbeliever to understand how evil his deeds are and how Christ will forgive him and give him new life, just as light shows what actually is there that the darkness had hid. This aso applies to anything that a believer has not yet recognized as sinful. Alternate translation: “Christ will show you what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -365,12 +365,12 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:18 cd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ ἐστιν ἀσωτία 1 The word **recklessness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “which leads to reckless behavior” or “because that will ruin you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5:18 lgw3 ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθε ἐν Πνεύματι 1 “Instead, you should be controlled by the Holy Spirit”
5:18 abe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Being drunk is in contrast to being filled with the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
5:19 egk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ψαλμοῖς, καὶ ὕμνοις, καὶ ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 Possible meanings are that: (1) Paul is using these words as a merism for “all sorts of songs to praise God” (2) Paul is listing specific forms of music. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5:19 egk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ψαλμοῖς, καὶ ὕμνοις, καὶ ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is using these words as a merism for “all sorts of songs to praise God” (2) Paul is listing specific forms of music. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
5:19 n5jj ψαλμοῖς 1 These are probably songs from the Old Testament book of Psalms that Christians sang.
5:19 g5ss ὕμνοις 1 These are songs of praise and worship that may have been written specifically for Christians to sing.
5:19 v9ay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 Possible meanings are: (1) these are songs that the Holy Spirit inspires a person to sing right at that moment (2) **spiritual songs** and “hymns” form a doublet. They mean basically the same thing, and you could use one word for these instead of two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:19 v3ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or inner being. This could mean: (1) They should do this with true motives and sincerity. Alternate translation: “from deep within your being” or “sincerely” (2) They should do this with enthusiasm: Alternate translation: “with all of your being” or “enthusiastically” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:20 e6w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** could mean: (1) This refers to Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because you belong to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) This refers to the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:19 v9ay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 This could mean: (1) these are songs that the Holy Spirit inspires a person to sing right at that moment (2) **spiritual songs** and “hymns” form a doublet. They mean basically the same thing, and you could use one word for these instead of two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:19 v3ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or inner being. This could mean: (1) they should do this with true motives and sincerity. Alternate translation: “from deep within your being” or “sincerely” (2) they should do this with enthusiasm: Alternate translation: “with all of your being” or “enthusiastically” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:20 e6w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because you belong to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:20 abw5 τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί 1 “to God, who is our father”
5:22 isd7 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul begins to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to one another ([Ephesians 5:21](../05/21.md)). He starts with instructions to wives and husbands on how they should act toward each other.
5:23 abe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The connecting word **For** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the husband is head of the wife in the same way Christ is head of the church. The result is that wives should submit to their husbands. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ front:intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
5:25 kp8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς 1 Paul speaks of the assembly of believers as though it were a woman whom Jesus will marry. Alternate translation: “for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:26 abe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Christ giving himself up to death is to sanctify the church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
5:26 h6vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὴν ἁγιάσῃ, καθαρίσας 1 Paul speaks of the assembly of believers as though it were a woman whom Jesus will marry. Alternate translation: “he might make us holy, having cleansed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:26 a9p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθαρίσας τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐν ῥήματι 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Paul is referring to God making Christ’s people clean by the preaching and acceptance of God’s **word** in the gospel message and through **water** baptism in Christ. (2) Paul speaks of God making us spiritually clean from our sins by the message as if God were making our bodies clean by washing them with **water**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:26 a9p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθαρίσας τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐν ῥήματι 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is referring to God making Christ’s people clean by the preaching and acceptance of God’s **word** in the gospel message and through **water** baptism in Christ. (2) Paul is speaking of God making us spiritually clean from our sins by the message as if God were making our bodies clean by washing them with **water**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:27 abea rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Christ cleansing the church with the word is to present the church to himself as a glorious bride. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
5:27 d1sm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἔχουσαν σπίλον, ἢ ῥυτίδα 1 Paul speaks of the church as though it were a garment that is clean and in perfect condition. Alternate translation: “not having any defect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:27 abcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μὴ ἔχουσαν σπίλον, ἢ ῥυτίδα 1 Here, **stain** and **wrinkle** represent the same idea of defect in two ways to emphasize the church’s purity. If your language does not have two different words, you can use one word for this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
11 1:3 cr9h ὁ εὐλογήσας ἡμᾶς 1 “for God has blessed us”
12 1:3 m8qh πάσῃ εὐλογίᾳ πνευματικῇ 1 “every blessing coming from the Spirit of God”
13 1:3 j2lk ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 “in the supernatural world.” The word **heavenly** refers to the place where God is.
14 1:3 v9qz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **in Christ** has its general meaning as a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) Here the phrase **in Christ** refers to what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, **in Christ** could mean: (1) a metaphor referring to our close relationship with Christ. Alternate translation: “by uniting us with Christ” or “because we are united with Christ” (2) what Christ has done. Alternate translation: “through Christ” or “through what Christ has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15 1:4 ibv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἁγίους καὶ ἀμώμους 1 Paul uses these two similar words to emphasize moral goodness. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
16 1:4 ab01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀμώμους 1 The word **blameless** contains two negative ideas: “blame” or “fault,” and “-less,” which means “without.” If it is clearer in your language, the two negative ideas can be replaced with the corresponding positive idea, “perfect.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
17 1:5 fp7l 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “his,” “He,” and “he” refer to God.
24 1:7 abcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτοῦ 1 The **blood** of Jesus is a metonym for his death. Alternate translation: “because he died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25 1:7 m9l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s grace as if it were material wealth. Alternate translation: “greatness of God’s grace” or “abundance of God’s grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
26 1:8 pg6j ἧς ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 “which he gave us in a great amount” or “being extremely kind to us”
27 1:8 sw98 ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “because he has all wisdom and understanding” (2) “so that we might have great wisdom and understanding.” This could mean: (1) because he has all wisdom and understanding. (2) so that we might have great wisdom and understanding.
28 1:8 ab98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σοφίᾳ καὶ φρονήσει 1 Here, **wisdom** and **understanding** mean very similar things. If your language does not have two similar words, you can use one word for both. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
29 1:9 v71p κατὰ τὴν εὐδοκίαν αὐτοῦ 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “because he wanted to make it known to us” (2) “which was what he wanted.” This could mean: (1) because he wanted to make it known to us. (2) which was what he wanted.
30 1:9 c2uk ἣν προέθετο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “as he demonstrated this purpose in Christ”
31 1:9 u53h ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “by means of Christ”
32 1:10 n2sl εἰς οἰκονομίαν 1 A new sentence can be started here. Alternate translation: “He did this with a view to an administration” or “He did this, thinking about a stewardship”
33 1:10 em7q τοῦ πληρώματος τῶν καιρῶν 1 “when the time is right” or “at the time that he has appointed”
34 1:10 ab7q ἐν αὐτῷ 1 “under his rule” or “under his authority”
35 1:11 ww9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν, προορισθέντες 1 Both pronouns **we** and **We** are inclusive in this verse. Paul is referring to all Christians, who were predestined to belong to Christ. In verses 12 and 13 he will divide this group into “we” (exclusive) Jewish Christians and “you” Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
36 1:11 t281 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐκληρώθημεν 1 You can state this in active form. Possible meanings are: (1) “God also chose us to be his possession” (2) “God also chose us to be heirs.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God also chose us to be his possession. (2) God also chose us to be heirs. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
37 1:11 nkf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προορισθέντες 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God chose us ahead of time” or “God chose us long ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
38 1:12 gj44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & τοὺς προηλπικότας ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Here, the word **we** is exclusive and refers to the Jewish believers who first heard the good news, not the believers at Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
39 1:12 zqm9 εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς, εἰς ἔπαινον δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 “so that we … would live to praise him for his glory”
40 1:13 j1zc 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul has been speaking in the previous two verses about himself and the other Jewish believers, but now he begins speaking about the Ephesian believers.
41 1:13 ac1e τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “the message about the truth” (2) “the true message.” This could mean: (1) the message about the truth. (2) the true message.
42 1:13 qgf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσφραγίσθητε τῷ Πνεύματι τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, τῷ Ἁγίῳ 1 In this metaphor Paul pictures the Holy Spirit as a seal, comparing him to the wax that was placed on a letter and stamped with a symbol representing the person who wrote the letter. Paul uses this custom as a picture to show how God has used the Holy Spirit to assure us that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “God has placed the Holy Spirit that he promised on you as if he were a seal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
43 1:13 abcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσφραγίσθητε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sealed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
44 1:14 g6dw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀρραβὼν τῆς κληρονομίας ἡμῶν 1 Receiving what God has promised is spoken of in terms of one inheriting property or wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “an initial portion that we will receive from what God has promised” or “a guarantee that we will receive what God has promised to give us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
65 1:20 f3dh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καθίσας ἐν δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 To sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “seated him in the place of honor and authority beside him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
66 1:20 jrv1 ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 “in the supernatural world.” The word **heavenly** refers to the place where God is. See how you translated this in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md).
67 1:21 k8k7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑπεράνω πάσης ἀρχῆς, καὶ ἐξουσίας, καὶ δυνάμεως, καὶ κυριότητος 1 These are all terms for the ranks of supernatural beings, both angelic and demonic. If your language does not have four different terms for rulers or authorities, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “far above all types of supernatural beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
68 1:21 ra11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παντὸς ὀνόματος ὀνομαζομένου 1 You can state this in active form. Possible meaning for alternate translation: (1) “every name that man gives” (2) “every name that God gives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) every name that man gives. (2) every name that God gives. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
69 1:21 x6qc ὀνόματος 1 This could mean: (1) This is a title. (2) This refers to a position of authority. This could refer to: (1) a title. (2) a position of authority.
70 1:21 pym8 ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ 1 “at this time”
71 1:21 qw2x ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 “in the future”
72 1:22 jm9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὸ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **feet** represents Christ’s lordship, authority, and power. Alternate translation: “under Christ’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
73 1:22 pm4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 1 Here, **head** is a metaphor that refers to the leader or the one who is in charge. Alternate translation: “ruler over all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
74 1:23 ge2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 1 Just as the head (verse 22) rules all things pertaining to a human body, so Christ is the head of the church body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
75 1:23 w2kh τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν πληρουμένου 1 “for Christ fills the church with his life and power just as he gives life to all things”
76 1:23 x2kh τὸ πλήρωμα 1 This could mean: (1) It has a passive sense, which would mean that Christ fills or completes the church. (2) It has an active sense, which would mean that the church completes Christ (as a body completes a head). This could have: (1) a passive sense, which would mean that Christ fills or completes the church. (2) an active sense, which would mean that the church completes Christ (as a body completes a head).
77 2:intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter focuses on the life that a Christian had before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person’s former way of living is distinct from a Christian’s new identity “in Christ.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### One body\n\nPaul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or “body.” The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### “Dead in trespasses and sins”\n\nPaul teaches that those who are not Christians are “dead” in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually “dead.” Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Descriptions of worldly living\n\nPaul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They “lived according to the ways of this world” and are “living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air,” “fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature,” and “carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind.”\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “It is the gift of God”\n\nSome scholars believe “it” here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, “it” here probably refers to both things: the gift is that we are saved by God’s grace through faith.\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is sometimes used as a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. The phrase “Gentiles in the flesh” indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. But “flesh” is also used in this verse to refer to the physical person, similar to “body part of man.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
78 2:1 xf5s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul reminds the believers of their past and the way they now are before God.
79 2:1 dxx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ὄντας νεκροὺς τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 This shows how the inability of a sinful person to obey God is similar to a dead person’s inability to respond physically. Alternate translation: “you were spiritually dead, unable to do anything but sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92 2:5 h6km rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι 1 You can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God saved you by being gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
93 2:5 abkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριτί ἐστε σεσῳσμένοι 1 The word **grace** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “God saved you by being extremely kind to you” or “God saved you as a free gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
94 2:6 na2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom συνήγειρεν 1 Here, **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
95 2:6 abch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνήγειρεν 1 This could mean: (1) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given Paul and the believers in Ephesus new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given us new life because we belong to Christ” (2) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Ephesus can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we can be sure that God will give us life just as he has caused Christ to come alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) This could mean: (1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given Paul and the believers in Ephesus new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given us new life because we belong to Christ” (2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Ephesus can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: “we can be sure that God will give us life just as he has caused Christ to come alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
96 2:6 ab11 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεκάθισεν 1 Paul talks about the believers as already **seated** in heaven with Christ because, although it is something that will happen in the future, it was guaranteed by what Christ did in the past. Alternate translation: “it is as though God has already seated us next to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
97 2:6 b499 ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 The phrase **heavenly places** refers to the place where God is. See how this is translated in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “in the supernatural world”
98 2:6 m6pq ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
114 2:11 e76g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκροβυστία 1 Non-Jewish people were not circumcised as babies and thus the Jews considered them people who do not follow any of God’s laws. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised pagans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
115 2:11 nlf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy περιτομῆς 1 This was another term for Jewish people because all male infants were **circumcised**. Alternate translation: “circumcised people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
116 2:11 tf9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῆς λεγομένης 1 You can translate this with an active form. Alternate translation: “by what people call” or “by those whom people call” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
117 2:11 fb4r τῆς λεγομένης περιτομῆς ἐν σαρκὶ χειροποιήτου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Jews, who are circumcised by humans. (2) This refers to Jews, who circumcise the physical body. This could refer to: (1) the Jews, who are circumcised by humans. (2) the Jews, who circumcise the physical body.
118 2:12 abcz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The connecting word **For** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that they were not part of the Jews, who were circumcised. The result is that the Gentile Ephesians were separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
119 2:12 u3vu χωρὶς Χριστοῦ 1 “unbelievers”
120 2:12 sti2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ξένοι τῶν διαθηκῶν τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Paul speaks to the Gentile believers as if they had been foreigners, kept out of the land of God’s **covenants** and **promise**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
158 3:1 jb9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τούτου χάριν 1 The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
159 3:1 abd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τούτου χάριν 1 You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
160 3:1 m9b6 ὁ δέσμιος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 “the one who is in prison because I serve Christ Jesus”
161 3:2 rx7t τὴν οἰκονομίαν τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ, τῆς δοθείσης μοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **grace** could mean: (1) This refers to the gift of the gospel that Paul is bringing to the Gentiles, and you could translate, “the responsibility that God gave me to bring his grace to you.” (2) This refers to the gift to Paul of being the steward of the gospel for the Gentiles, and you could translate that as “the responsibility that God graciously gave me for your benefit.” Here, **grace** could mean: (1) the gift of the gospel that Paul is bringing to the Gentiles, and you could translate, “the responsibility that God gave me to bring his grace to you.” (2) the gift to Paul of being the steward of the gospel for the Gentiles, and you could translate that as “the responsibility that God graciously gave me for your benefit.”
162 3:3 dc7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν ἐγνωρίσθη μοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “according to what God revealed to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
163 3:3 qm6m καθὼς προέγραψα ἐν ὀλίγῳ 1 Paul refers here to another letter that he had written to these people.
164 3:5 srn9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃ ἑτέραις γενεαῖς οὐκ ἐγνωρίσθη τοῖς υἱοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not make these things known to people in the past” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
166 3:6 pqy3 εἶναι τὰ ἔθνη, συνκληρονόμα & διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This is the hidden truth that Paul began to explain in the previous verse. The **Gentiles** who receive Christ also receive everything that the Jewish believers receive from God.
167 3:6 y88q σύνσωμα 1 The church is often referred to as the **body** of Christ.
168 3:6 wxs4 ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him.
169 3:6 i4h7 διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This could mean: (1) Because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow sharers in the promise. (2) Because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow heirs and members of the body and fellow sharers in the promise. This could mean: (1) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow sharers in the promise. (2) because of the **gospel**, the Gentiles are fellow heirs and members of the body and fellow sharers in the promise.
170 3:8 y97f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνεξιχνίαστον 1 Paul speaks of everything that Christ offers as something so physically vast that it cannot be fully explored. Alternate Translation: “unable to be completely known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171 3:8 e96z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the truth about **Christ** and the blessings he brings as if they were material wealth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
172 3:9 f2zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ μυστηρίου, τοῦ ἀποκεκρυμμένου ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of God, who created all things, kept this plan hidden for long ages in the past” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
197 3:18 abd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ would live in their hearts. The result is that the Ephesian believers would fully know the love of God and be filled with God’s fullness. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
198 3:18 bkk6 καταλαβέσθαι 1 This is the third item for which Paul bends his knees and prays; the first is that God will grant that they be strengthened ([Ephesians 3:16](../03/16.md)) and the second is that Christ may live in their hearts through faith ([Ephesians 3:17](../03/17.md)).
199 3:18 uu6l πᾶσιν τοῖς ἁγίοις 1 “all the believers in Christ”
200 3:18 ef4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος 1 In this metaphor Paul pictures something that is not physical or measurable as something that is physical but stretches out in all directions and, thus, is very large. This could mean: (1) These word describe the intensity of Christ’s love for us. Alternate translation: “how very much Christ loves us” (2) These words describe the greatness of God’s wisdom. Alternate translation: “how very wise God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) In this metaphor Paul pictures something that is not physical or measurable as something that is physical but stretches out in all directions and, thus, is very large. This could refer to: (1) the intensity of Christ’s love for us. Alternate translation: “how very much Christ loves us” (2) the greatness of God’s wisdom. Alternate translation: “how very wise God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
201 3:18 ef4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ πλάτος, καὶ μῆκος, καὶ ὕψος, καὶ βάθος 1 It may be necessary to state explicitly what these words refer to. If so, you can combine this with the phrase from the next verse and say: “the width and length and height and depth of, and truly know the love of Christ” or “the width and length and height and depth of the love of Christ, and truly know it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
202 3:19 rev9 γνῶναί τε τὴν & ἀγάπην τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This continues the idea from the previous verse. They both refer to knowing the greatness of the love of Christ. Alternate translation: “that you can know how great Christ’s love for us is”
203 3:19 px4z ἵνα πληρωθῆτε εἰς πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is the fourth item for which Paul bends his knees and prays ([Ephesians 3:14](../03/14.md)). The first is that they would “be strengthened” ([Ephesians 3:16](../03/16.md)), the second is that “Christ would live in their hearts through faith” ([Ephesians 3:17](../03/17.md)), and the third is that they “could comprehend Christ’s love” ([Ephesians 3:18](../03/18.md)).
208 3:20 jk5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nThe words “we” and “us” in this book continue to include Paul and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
209 3:20 m7gi 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul concludes his prayer with a blessing.
210 3:20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 “Now to God, who”
211 3:20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν ποιῆσαι ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about”
212 3:21 ab12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The word **glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
213 4:intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual gifts\n\nSpiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Unity\n\nPaul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Old man and new man\n\nThe term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
214 4:1 sb64 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other.
231 4:8 wj8t ἀναβὰς εἰς ὕψος 1 “When Christ went up into heaven”
232 4:9 e5at ἀνέβη 1 “Christ went up”
233 4:9 zu81 καὶ κατέβη 1 “Christ also came down”
234 4:9 eq56 εἰς τὰ κατώτερα μέρη τῆς γῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the **lower regions** are a part of the **earth**. (2) This refers to **the lower regions** is another way of referring to the **earth** itself. Alternate translation: “into the lower regions, the earth” This could refer to: (1) the **lower regions** as a part of the **earth**. (2) **the lower regions** as another way of referring to the **earth** itself. Alternate translation: “into the lower regions, the earth”
235 4:10 w6t5 ἵνα πληρώσῃ τὰ πάντα 1 “so that he might be working powerfully everywhere”
236 4:10 b5ig πληρώσῃ 1 “he might complete” or “he might satisfy”
237 4:12 jx12 πρὸς τὸν καταρτισμὸν τῶν ἁγίων 1 “to prepare the people whom he has set apart” or “to provide the believers with what they need”
261 4:17 n5cy 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul tells them what they should no longer do now that they, as believers, are sealed by the Holy Spirit of God.
262 4:17 abde rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that Christ wants every believer to become spiritually mature and to serve the other believers. The result is that the Ephesian believers should no longer act as the Gentiles act. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
263 4:17 ksr8 τοῦτο οὖν λέγω καὶ μαρτύρομαι 1 “Because of what I have just said, I will now say something more in order to strongly encourage”
264 4:17 abr8 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the authority of the Lord. (2) This may be stating that we all belong to the Lord. This could be: (1) referring to the authority of the Lord. (2) stating that we all belong to the Lord.
265 4:17 wcx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηκέτι ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν, καθὼς καὶ τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ ἐν ματαιότητι τοῦ νοὸς αὐτῶν 1 Paul commonly uses this metaphor that compares walking to living one’s life. Alternate translation: “you … to stop living like the Gentiles with their worthless thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
266 4:18 lab7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ 1 This metaphor compares wrong thinking with darkness. Alternate translation: “they no longer think or reason clearly” or “they are not able to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
267 4:18 abci rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐσκοτωμένοι τῇ διανοίᾳ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Their way of thinking has become dark” or “They no longer think or reason clearly” or “They are not able to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
275 4:20 e5vk ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐμάθετε τὸν Χριστόν 1 The word **thus** refers to the way that the Gentiles live, as described in [Ephesians 4:17-19](../04/17.md). This emphasizes that what the believers learned from Christ was the opposite of that. Alternate translation: “But what you learned about the ways of Christ was not like that”
276 4:20 abdh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The sinful way the Gentiles live is in contrast to the way that Paul taught the Ephesians to live according to the truth of Jesus. Use a connecting word in your language that marks a contrast here (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
277 4:21 hy7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony εἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατε καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 Paul knows that the people to whom he is writing have **heard** and been **taught** these things. He is using irony as a form of rebuke—if they are doing things contrary to the way of Christ, they know better than that and need to stop. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
278 4:21 b3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) This may mean they received instruction in his ways. (2) This may mean that Jesus’ people have taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) they received instruction in his ways. (2) Jesus’ people have taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
279 4:21 gdz6 καθώς ἐστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 “as Jesus teaches us the true way to live” or “as everything about Jesus is true.” See the UST.
280 4:22 h1ha rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν 1 Paul is speaking of moral qualities as if they were pieces of clothing. Alternate translation: “You must stop living according to your former manner of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
281 4:22 j7n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποθέσθαι ὑμᾶς κατὰ τὴν προτέραν ἀναστροφὴν τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Paul is speaking of a way of living as if it were a person. Alternate translation: “You must stop doing the things that your former self did” or “Stop doing the things that you used to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
346 5:13 abdy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. Hiding the shameful works of darkness now is in contrast to the light exposing them later. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
347 5:13 vqi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶν & τὸ φανερούμενον φῶς ἐστιν 1 Paul makes this general statement in order to imply that God’s Word shows people’s actions to be good or bad. The Bible often speaks of God’s truth as if it were **light** that could reveal the character of something. Alternate translation: “if you compare everything to what God says, you can know if it is good or bad” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
348 5:14 abdz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that their sins will be revealed by the light. The result is that sinners should allow Christ to shine on them. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
349 5:14 z4ar rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ἔγειρε, ὁ καθεύδων, καὶ ἀνάστα ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject. (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing the believers and using death as a metaphor for their areas of spiritual weakness that they need to become aware of and reject. (2) Paul is addressing unbelievers who need to wake up from being dead spiritually just as a person who has died must come alive again in order to respond. See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
350 5:14 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe ὁ καθεύδων 1 This could mean: (1) Paul addresses this comment directly to the believers who are reading or hearing the letter. (2) Paul addresses this comment directly to unbelievers who are not reading or hearing the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) This could mean: (1) Paul is addressing this comment directly to the believers who are reading or hearing the letter. (2) Paul is addressing this comment directly to unbelievers who are not reading or hearing the letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]])
351 5:14 e873 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To arise from among them speaks of becoming alive again and is a metaphor for becoming alive spiritually and living for God. Alternate Translation: “from among all those who have died” or “from among those who are spiritually dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
352 5:14 ma8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἐπιφαύσει σοι 1 Here, **you** refers to the “sleeper” and is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
353 5:14 ym6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιφαύσει σοι ὁ Χριστός 1 **Christ** will enable an unbeliever to understand how evil his deeds are and how Christ will forgive him and give him new life, just as light shows what actually is there that the darkness had hid. This aso applies to anything that a believer has not yet recognized as sinful. Alternate translation: “Christ will show you what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
365 5:18 cd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ ἐστιν ἀσωτία 1 The word **recklessness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “which leads to reckless behavior” or “because that will ruin you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
366 5:18 lgw3 ἀλλὰ πληροῦσθε ἐν Πνεύματι 1 “Instead, you should be controlled by the Holy Spirit”
367 5:18 abe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Being drunk is in contrast to being filled with the Spirit. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
368 5:19 egk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ψαλμοῖς, καὶ ὕμνοις, καὶ ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 Possible meanings are that: (1) Paul is using these words as a merism for “all sorts of songs to praise God” (2) Paul is listing specific forms of music. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) This could mean: (1) Paul is using these words as a merism for “all sorts of songs to praise God” (2) Paul is listing specific forms of music. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
369 5:19 n5jj ψαλμοῖς 1 These are probably songs from the Old Testament book of Psalms that Christians sang.
370 5:19 g5ss ὕμνοις 1 These are songs of praise and worship that may have been written specifically for Christians to sing.
371 5:19 v9ay rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 Possible meanings are: (1) these are songs that the Holy Spirit inspires a person to sing right at that moment (2) **spiritual songs** and “hymns” form a doublet. They mean basically the same thing, and you could use one word for these instead of two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) This could mean: (1) these are songs that the Holy Spirit inspires a person to sing right at that moment (2) **spiritual songs** and “hymns” form a doublet. They mean basically the same thing, and you could use one word for these instead of two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
372 5:19 v3ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or inner being. This could mean: (1) They should do this with true motives and sincerity. Alternate translation: “from deep within your being” or “sincerely” (2) They should do this with enthusiasm: Alternate translation: “with all of your being” or “enthusiastically” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or inner being. This could mean: (1) they should do this with true motives and sincerity. Alternate translation: “from deep within your being” or “sincerely” (2) they should do this with enthusiasm: Alternate translation: “with all of your being” or “enthusiastically” See the UST (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
373 5:20 e6w5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** could mean: (1) This refers to Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because you belong to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) This refers to the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, **name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because you belong to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
374 5:20 abw5 τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί 1 “to God, who is our father”
375 5:22 isd7 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul begins to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to one another ([Ephesians 5:21](../05/21.md)). He starts with instructions to wives and husbands on how they should act toward each other.
376 5:23 abe7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The connecting word **For** introduces the reason of a reason-result relationship. The reason is that the husband is head of the wife in the same way Christ is head of the church. The result is that wives should submit to their husbands. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
382 5:25 kp8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς 1 Paul speaks of the assembly of believers as though it were a woman whom Jesus will marry. Alternate translation: “for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
383 5:26 abe9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Christ giving himself up to death is to sanctify the church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
384 5:26 h6vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὴν ἁγιάσῃ, καθαρίσας 1 Paul speaks of the assembly of believers as though it were a woman whom Jesus will marry. Alternate translation: “he might make us holy, having cleansed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
385 5:26 a9p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθαρίσας τῷ λουτρῷ τοῦ ὕδατος ἐν ῥήματι 1 Possible meanings are: (1) Paul is referring to God making Christ’s people clean by the preaching and acceptance of God’s **word** in the gospel message and through **water** baptism in Christ. (2) Paul speaks of God making us spiritually clean from our sins by the message as if God were making our bodies clean by washing them with **water**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could mean: (1) Paul is referring to God making Christ’s people clean by the preaching and acceptance of God’s **word** in the gospel message and through **water** baptism in Christ. (2) Paul is speaking of God making us spiritually clean from our sins by the message as if God were making our bodies clean by washing them with **water**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
386 5:27 abea rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of Christ cleansing the church with the word is to present the church to himself as a glorious bride. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
387 5:27 d1sm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἔχουσαν σπίλον, ἢ ῥυτίδα 1 Paul speaks of the church as though it were a garment that is clean and in perfect condition. Alternate translation: “not having any defect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
388 5:27 abcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μὴ ἔχουσαν σπίλον, ἢ ῥυτίδα 1 Here, **stain** and **wrinkle** represent the same idea of defect in two ways to emphasize the church’s purity. If your language does not have two different words, you can use one word for this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])

454
tn_EXO.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

2
tn_EZR.tsv
View File

@ -220,7 +220,7 @@ front:intro fa5r 0 # Introduction to Ezra\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\
2:69 qh93 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney זָהָ֗ב דַּרְכְּמוֹנִים֙ שֵׁשׁ־רִבֹּ֣אות וָ⁠אֶ֔לֶף 1 In ancient times, **gold darics** each weighed about 8 or 8.5 grams, or about a quarter of an ounce. You could try to express this in terms of modern money values, but if you did, that could cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. Instead, you might say something general like “61,000 gold coins,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term in the text and give the weight in a note. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2:69 ln9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney וְ⁠כֶ֕סֶף מָנִ֖ים חֲמֵ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 In ancient times, **silver minas** each weighed about half a kilogram, or about 1.25 pounds. However, as in the case of darics, it would probably be best to say something general like “5,000 silver bars,” or give the equivalent weight, or use the biblical term and give the equivalent weight in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2:69 h3zd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown וְ⁠כָתְנֹ֥ת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים מֵאָֽה 1 **Tunics** were the special garments that priests would wear while performing their duties in the temple. Alternate translation: “100 special garments for the priests to wear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:70 w7fw וַ⁠יֵּשְׁב֣וּ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ֠⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּם וּֽ⁠מִן־הָ⁠עָ֞ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֧ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֛ים וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This is a summary conclusion to the list. See how you translated each of these terms within the list: priests in v. [36](../02/36.md), Levites in v. [40](../02/40.md), singers in v. [41](../02/41.md), gatekeepers in v. [42](../02/42.md), and Nethinim in v. [43](../02/43.md). Review the notes to each of these verses if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “So the priests, Levites, other Israelites, singers, gatekeepers, and temple servants returned to Judah and settled in the places where their ancestors had formerly lived”
2:70 w7fw וַ⁠יֵּשְׁב֣וּ הַ⁠כֹּהֲנִ֣ים וְ֠⁠הַ⁠לְוִיִּם וּֽ⁠מִן־הָ⁠עָ֞ם וְ⁠הַ⁠מְשֹׁרְרִ֧ים וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁוֹעֲרִ֛ים וְ⁠הַ⁠נְּתִינִ֖ים בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם׃ 1 This is a summary conclusion to the list. See how you translated each of these terms within the list: priests in v. [36](../02/36.md), Levites in v. [40](../02/40.md), singers in v. [41](../02/41.md), gatekeepers in v. [42](../02/42.md), and temple servants in v. [43](../02/43.md). Review the notes to each of these verses if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “So the priests, Levites, other Israelites, singers, gatekeepers, and temple servants returned to Judah and settled in the places where their ancestors had formerly lived”
2:70 gg6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism וְ⁠כָל־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠עָרֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 This sentence summarizes the previous sentence, which was itself a summary of the chapter. It shows the result of the journey, that the return of the Israelites was accomplished successfully. You could include this meaning with the previous sentence if stating it separately might be confusing for your readers because of the repetition. Its meaning is included in the alternate translation suggested for the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3:intro rp9a 0 # Ezra 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins the story of the building of the temple and re-establishment of worship in the new temple. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/temple]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Rebuilding the temple\n\nThey immediately began the temple worship even though the temple had not yet been built because they feared the people of the surrounding nations.
3:1 us0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יִּגַּע֙ 1 The word **then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be clearer in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After this group had returned to Judah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

531
tn_GAL.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

22
tn_HEB.tsv
View File

@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Brothers\n\nThe author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
2:1 x7px 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives.
2:1 c72f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δεῖ & ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **we** refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:1 ayd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μήποτε παραρυῶμεν 1 This could mean: (1) People who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” (2) People who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:1 ayd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μήποτε παραρυῶμεν 1 This could mean: (1) people who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” (2) people who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 j4fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ γὰρ ὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος 1 The Jews believed that God spoke his law to Moses through angels. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For if the message that God spoke through the angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:2 k5kb εἰ γὰρ ὁ & λόγος 1 The author is certain that these things are true. Alternate translation: “Because the message”
2:2 u52i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶσα παράβασις καὶ παρακοὴ ἔλαβεν ἔνδικον μισθαποδοσίαν 1 Here, **trespass** and **disobedience** stand for the people who are guilty of these sins. Alternate translation: “every person who sins and disobeys will receive just punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:9 bil4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γεύσηται θανάτου 1 The experience of death is spoken of as if it were food that people can taste. Alternate translation: “he might experience death” or “he might die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 r899 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν ἀγαγόντα 1 The gift of **glory** is spoken of here as if it were a place to which people could be brought. Alternate translation: “save many sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 l95y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πολλοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Here this refers to believers in Christ, including males and females. Alternate translation: “many believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:10 sw9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) This is a metaphor in which the writer speaks of salvation as if it were a destination and of Jesus as the person who goes before the people on the road and leads them to salvation. Alternate translation: “the one who leads people to salvation” (2) The word translated here as **leader** can mean “founder” and the author speaks of Jesus as the one who establishes salvation, or makes it possible for God to save people. Alternate translation: “the one who makes their salvation possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 sw9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) this is a metaphor in which the writer speaks of salvation as if it were a destination and of Jesus as the person who goes before the people on the road and leads them to salvation. Alternate translation: “the one who leads people to salvation” (2) the word translated here as **leader** can mean “founder” and the author speaks of Jesus as the one who establishes salvation, or makes it possible for God to save people. Alternate translation: “the one who makes their salvation possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 l321 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι 1 Becoming mature and completely trained is spoken of as if a person were made complete, perhaps complete in all his body parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 jy9p 0 # General Information:\n\nThis prophetic quotation comes from a Psalm of King David.
2:11 ky9v ὅ & ἁγιάζων 1 “the one who makes others holy” or “the one who makes others pure from sin”
@ -411,8 +411,8 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
9:6 mra7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τούτων & οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “After the priests prepared these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:7 xs9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ χωρὶς αἵματος 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “he always brought blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
9:7 xtk5 αἵματος 1 This is the blood of the bull and goat that the high priest had to sacrifice on the Day of Atonement.
9:8 a26f τῶν ἁγίων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the inner room of the tabernacle on earth. (2) This refers to God’s presence in heaven.
9:8 e14c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔτι τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς ἐχούσης στάσιν 1 This could mean: (1) The outer room of the tabernacle was still standing. (2) The earthly tabernacle and the sacrificial system still existed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:8 a26f τῶν ἁγίων 1 This could refer to: (1) the inner room of the tabernacle on earth. (2) God’s presence in heaven.
9:8 e14c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔτι τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς ἐχούσης στάσιν 1 This could mean: (1) the outer room of the tabernacle was still standing. (2) the earthly tabernacle and the sacrificial system still existed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:9 cu76 ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 “This was a picture” or “This was a symbol”
9:9 fl6i εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα 1 “for now”
9:9 g16u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσφέρονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the priests now offer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
9:15 x3xr διὰ τοῦτο 1 “As a result” or “Because of this”
9:15 p2kg διαθήκης καινῆς μεσίτης ἐστίν 1 This means Christ caused the new covenant between God and humans to exist.
9:15 q3x3 τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ 1 See how you translated this in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
9:15 z29a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων 1 “to take away the sins of those who were under the first covenant.” This could mean: (1) Here, **their sins** is a metonym for the guilt of their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the guilt of those who were under the first covenant” (2) Here, **their sins** is a metonym for the punishment for their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the punisment for sins of those who were under the first covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 z29a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων 1 “to take away the sins of those who were under the first covenant.” Here, **their sins** is a metonym for: (1) the guilt of their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the guilt of those who were under the first covenant” (2) the punishment for their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the punisment for sins of those who were under the first covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:15 ve3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God has chosen to be his children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:15 xb9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομίας 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:16 rng2 διαθήκη 1 a legal document in which a person states who should receive his possessions when he himself dies
@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
10:19 f6g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Here this means all believers in Christ whether male or female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
10:19 fii7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἁγίων 1 This means the presence of God, not the most holy place in the old tabernacle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:19 zl87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματι Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **blood of Jesus** refers to the death of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:20 l7wh ὁδὸν & ζῶσαν 1 This could mean: (1) The new way to God that Jesus has provided results in believers living forever. (2) Jesus is alive, and he is the way believers enter into the presence of God.
10:20 l7wh ὁδὸν & ζῶσαν 1 This could mean: (1) the new way to God that Jesus has provided results in believers living forever. (2) Jesus is alive, and he is the way believers enter into the presence of God.
10:20 c3ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 The curtain in the earthly temple represents the separation between people and God’s true presence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:20 ega9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **flesh** stands for the body of Jesus, and his body stands for his sacrificial death. Alternate translation: “by means of his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:21 uh6i καὶ ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This must be translated in such a way as to make it clear that Jesus is this “great priest.”
@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
11:5 r3yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη, τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “It was by faith that Enoch did not die because God took him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:5 ki2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν θάνατον 1 This speaks of death as if it were an object that people can see. It means to experience death. Alternate translation: “die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:5 kb5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πρὸ & τῆς μεταθέσεως 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “before God took him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:5 jbx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God said that Enoch had pleased him. (2) People said that Enoch pleased God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:5 jbx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God said that Enoch had pleased him. (2) people said that Enoch pleased God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:6 hd94 χωρὶς δὲ πίστεως 1 Here, **Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
11:6 r9nb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς & πίστεως, ἀδύνατον εὐαρεστῆσαι 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “a person can please God only if he has faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
11:6 b438 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν προσερχόμενον τῷ Θεῷ 1 Wanting to worship God and belong to his people is spoken of as if the person is literally coming to God. Alternate translation: “that anyone who wants to belong to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
11:10 ufe6 τεχνίτης 1 a person who designs buildings and cities
11:11 ks44 0 # General Information:\n\nMany versions interpret this verse as referring to Sarah, and others interpret it as referring to Abraham.
11:11 mk6i πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ & ἡγήσατο 1 Some versions interpret this verse as referring to Sarah. “By faith Sarah, herself also barren, received power to bear children even beyond the time of maturity, since she considered”
11:11 mtf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 The abstract noun “faith” can be expressed with the verb “believe.” This could mean: (1) This happened because of Abraham’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Abraham believed God” (2) This happened because of Sarah’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Sarah believed God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:11 mtf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 The abstract noun “faith” can be expressed with the verb “believe.” This could mean: (1) this happened because of Abraham’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Abraham believed God” (2) this happened because of Sarah’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Sarah believed God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:11 dgu6 δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν 1 “received ability to become a father” or “received ability to have a child”
11:11 wgp6 ἐπεὶ πιστὸν ἡγήσατο τὸν ἐπαγγειλάμενον 1 “because he believed God, who had give the promise, to be faithful”
11:12 x8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγεννήθησαν & καθὼς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τῷ πλήθει, καὶ ὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος 1 This simile means Abraham had very many descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@ -661,7 +661,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
11:35 t9sp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔλαβον γυναῖκες ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν 1 This can be restated to remove the abstract noun “resurrection.” The word **dead** is a nominal adjective. You can state this as a verb. Alternate translation: “Women received back alive those who had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
11:35 ne1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄλλοι δὲ ἐτυμπανίσθησαν, οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν 1 It is implied that their enemies would have released them from prison under certain conditions. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Others accepted torture rather than release from prison” or “Others allowed their enemies to torture them rather than doing what their enemies required of them in order to release them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:35 faq3 ἐτυμπανίσθησαν 1 made to suffer great mental or physical pain
11:35 jyw7 κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως 1 This could mean: (1) These people will experience a better life in heaven than what they experienced in this world. (2) These people will have a better resurrection than those who did not have faith. Those with faith will live forever with God. Those without faith will live forever separated from God.
11:35 jyw7 κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως 1 This could mean: (1) these people will experience a better life in heaven than what they experienced in this world. (2) these people will have a better resurrection than those who did not have faith. Those with faith will live forever with God. Those without faith will live forever separated from God.
11:36 e9al rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕτεροι & ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον 1 You can state these in active form. Alternate translation: “People mocked and whipped others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:36 nx7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἕτεροι & ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον, ἔτι δὲ δεσμῶν καὶ φυλακῆς 1 This can be reworded so that the abstract nouns are expressed as verbs. Alternate translation: “God tested others by allowing their enemies to mock and whip them and even put them in chains and imprison them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:37 fg8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλιθάσθησαν, ἐπρίσθησαν, ἐπειράσθησαν, ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρης ἀπέθανον 1 You can state these in active form. Alternate translation: “People mocked and whipped others … People threw stones at others. People sawed others in two. People killed others with the sword” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
12:25 c9cn 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving contrasted the Israelites’ experience at Mount Sinai with the believers’ experience after Christ died, the writer reminds believers that they have the same God who warns them today. This is the fifth main warning given to believers.
12:25 nnk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ παραιτήσησθε τὸν λαλοῦντα 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “you pay attention to the one who is speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
12:25 gkn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ & ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐξέφυγον 1 You can state the implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the people of Israel did not escape judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12:25 fy9u ἐπὶ γῆς & τὸν χρηματίζοντα 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Moses, who warned them here on earth. (2) This refers to God, who warned them at Mount Sinai.
12:25 fy9u ἐπὶ γῆς & τὸν χρηματίζοντα 1 This could refer to: (1) Moses, who warned them here on earth. (2) God, who warned them at Mount Sinai.
12:25 s5lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς οἱ τὸν ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν ἀποστρεφόμενοι 1 Disobeying God is spoken of as if a person were changing direction and walking away from him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey the one who is warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:26 rf4e οὗ ἡ φωνὴ τὴν γῆν ἐσάλευσεν 1 “when God spoke, the sound of his voice caused the earth to shake”
12:26 i1c8 ἐσάλευσεν & σείσω 1 Use the word for what an earthquake does in moving the ground. This refers back to [Hebrews 12:18-21](./18.md) and what happened when the people saw the mountain where Moses received the law from God.
@ -821,5 +821,5 @@ front:intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
13:22 d5e6 ἀνέχεσθε τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 “patiently consider what I have just written to encourage you”
13:22 l8b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the encouraging message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:23 w3m2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολελυμένον 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is no longer in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:24 r7kn ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 This could mean: (1) The author is not in Italy, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) The author is in Italy while writing this letter.
13:24 r7kn ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 This could mean: (1) the author is not in Italy, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) the author is in Italy while writing this letter.
13:24 kk9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 This is the name of a region at that time. Rome was the then-capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
50 2:intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Brothers\n\nThe author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
51 2:1 x7px 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives.
52 2:1 c72f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δεῖ & ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **we** refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
53 2:1 ayd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μήποτε παραρυῶμεν 1 This could mean: (1) People who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” (2) People who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could mean: (1) people who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” (2) people who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
54 2:2 j4fa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ γὰρ ὁ δι’ ἀγγέλων λαληθεὶς λόγος 1 The Jews believed that God spoke his law to Moses through angels. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For if the message that God spoke through the angels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
55 2:2 k5kb εἰ γὰρ ὁ & λόγος 1 The author is certain that these things are true. Alternate translation: “Because the message”
56 2:2 u52i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶσα παράβασις καὶ παρακοὴ ἔλαβεν ἔνδικον μισθαποδοσίαν 1 Here, **trespass** and **disobedience** stand for the people who are guilty of these sins. Alternate translation: “every person who sins and disobeys will receive just punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80 2:9 bil4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γεύσηται θανάτου 1 The experience of death is spoken of as if it were food that people can taste. Alternate translation: “he might experience death” or “he might die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
81 2:10 r899 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς υἱοὺς εἰς δόξαν ἀγαγόντα 1 The gift of **glory** is spoken of here as if it were a place to which people could be brought. Alternate translation: “save many sons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
82 2:10 l95y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πολλοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Here this refers to believers in Christ, including males and females. Alternate translation: “many believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
83 2:10 sw9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρχηγὸν τῆς σωτηρίας αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) This is a metaphor in which the writer speaks of salvation as if it were a destination and of Jesus as the person who goes before the people on the road and leads them to salvation. Alternate translation: “the one who leads people to salvation” (2) The word translated here as **leader** can mean “founder” and the author speaks of Jesus as the one who establishes salvation, or makes it possible for God to save people. Alternate translation: “the one who makes their salvation possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could mean: (1) this is a metaphor in which the writer speaks of salvation as if it were a destination and of Jesus as the person who goes before the people on the road and leads them to salvation. Alternate translation: “the one who leads people to salvation” (2) the word translated here as **leader** can mean “founder” and the author speaks of Jesus as the one who establishes salvation, or makes it possible for God to save people. Alternate translation: “the one who makes their salvation possible” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
84 2:10 l321 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι 1 Becoming mature and completely trained is spoken of as if a person were made complete, perhaps complete in all his body parts. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
85 2:11 jy9p 0 # General Information:\n\nThis prophetic quotation comes from a Psalm of King David.
86 2:11 ky9v ὅ & ἁγιάζων 1 “the one who makes others holy” or “the one who makes others pure from sin”
411 9:6 mra7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τούτων & οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “After the priests prepared these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
412 9:7 xs9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ χωρὶς αἵματος 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “he always brought blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
413 9:7 xtk5 αἵματος 1 This is the blood of the bull and goat that the high priest had to sacrifice on the Day of Atonement.
414 9:8 a26f τῶν ἁγίων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the inner room of the tabernacle on earth. (2) This refers to God’s presence in heaven. This could refer to: (1) the inner room of the tabernacle on earth. (2) God’s presence in heaven.
415 9:8 e14c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔτι τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς ἐχούσης στάσιν 1 This could mean: (1) The outer room of the tabernacle was still standing. (2) The earthly tabernacle and the sacrificial system still existed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) This could mean: (1) the outer room of the tabernacle was still standing. (2) the earthly tabernacle and the sacrificial system still existed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
416 9:9 cu76 ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 “This was a picture” or “This was a symbol”
417 9:9 fl6i εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα 1 “for now”
418 9:9 g16u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive προσφέρονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the priests now offer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
437 9:15 x3xr διὰ τοῦτο 1 “As a result” or “Because of this”
438 9:15 p2kg διαθήκης καινῆς μεσίτης ἐστίν 1 This means Christ caused the new covenant between God and humans to exist.
439 9:15 q3x3 τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ 1 See how you translated this in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md).
440 9:15 z29a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς ἀπολύτρωσιν τῶν ἐπὶ τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ παραβάσεων 1 “to take away the sins of those who were under the first covenant.” This could mean: (1) Here, **their sins** is a metonym for the guilt of their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the guilt of those who were under the first covenant” (2) Here, **their sins** is a metonym for the punishment for their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the punisment for sins of those who were under the first covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) “to take away the sins of those who were under the first covenant.” Here, **their sins** is a metonym for: (1) the guilt of their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the guilt of those who were under the first covenant” (2) the punishment for their sins. Alternate translation: “to take away the punisment for sins of those who were under the first covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
441 9:15 ve3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God has chosen to be his children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
442 9:15 xb9f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κληρονομίας 1 Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
443 9:16 rng2 διαθήκη 1 a legal document in which a person states who should receive his possessions when he himself dies
512 10:19 f6g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Here this means all believers in Christ whether male or female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
513 10:19 fii7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν ἁγίων 1 This means the presence of God, not the most holy place in the old tabernacle. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
514 10:19 zl87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματι Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **blood of Jesus** refers to the death of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
515 10:20 l7wh ὁδὸν & ζῶσαν 1 This could mean: (1) The new way to God that Jesus has provided results in believers living forever. (2) Jesus is alive, and he is the way believers enter into the presence of God. This could mean: (1) the new way to God that Jesus has provided results in believers living forever. (2) Jesus is alive, and he is the way believers enter into the presence of God.
516 10:20 c3ve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 The curtain in the earthly temple represents the separation between people and God’s true presence. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
517 10:20 ega9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **flesh** stands for the body of Jesus, and his body stands for his sacrificial death. Alternate translation: “by means of his death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
518 10:21 uh6i καὶ ἱερέα μέγαν ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This must be translated in such a way as to make it clear that Jesus is this “great priest.”
583 11:5 r3yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πίστει Ἑνὼχ μετετέθη, τοῦ μὴ ἰδεῖν θάνατον 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “It was by faith that Enoch did not die because God took him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
584 11:5 ki2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν θάνατον 1 This speaks of death as if it were an object that people can see. It means to experience death. Alternate translation: “die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
585 11:5 kb5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πρὸ & τῆς μεταθέσεως 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “before God took him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
586 11:5 jbx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεμαρτύρηται εὐηρεστηκέναι τῷ Θεῷ 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God said that Enoch had pleased him. (2) People said that Enoch pleased God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God said that Enoch had pleased him. (2) people said that Enoch pleased God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
587 11:6 hd94 χωρὶς δὲ πίστεως 1 Here, **Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
588 11:6 r9nb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς & πίστεως, ἀδύνατον εὐαρεστῆσαι 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “a person can please God only if he has faith in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
589 11:6 b438 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν προσερχόμενον τῷ Θεῷ 1 Wanting to worship God and belong to his people is spoken of as if the person is literally coming to God. Alternate translation: “that anyone who wants to belong to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
605 11:10 ufe6 τεχνίτης 1 a person who designs buildings and cities
606 11:11 ks44 0 # General Information:\n\nMany versions interpret this verse as referring to Sarah, and others interpret it as referring to Abraham.
607 11:11 mk6i πίστει καὶ αὐτῇ Σάρρᾳ δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν, καὶ παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας, ἐπεὶ & ἡγήσατο 1 Some versions interpret this verse as referring to Sarah. “By faith Sarah, herself also barren, received power to bear children even beyond the time of maturity, since she considered”
608 11:11 mtf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 The abstract noun “faith” can be expressed with the verb “believe.” This could mean: (1) This happened because of Abraham’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Abraham believed God” (2) This happened because of Sarah’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Sarah believed God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) The abstract noun “faith” can be expressed with the verb “believe.” This could mean: (1) this happened because of Abraham’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Abraham believed God” (2) this happened because of Sarah’s faith. Alternate translation: “It was because Sarah believed God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
609 11:11 dgu6 δύναμιν εἰς καταβολὴν σπέρματος ἔλαβεν 1 “received ability to become a father” or “received ability to have a child”
610 11:11 wgp6 ἐπεὶ πιστὸν ἡγήσατο τὸν ἐπαγγειλάμενον 1 “because he believed God, who had give the promise, to be faithful”
611 11:12 x8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγεννήθησαν & καθὼς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τῷ πλήθει, καὶ ὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος 1 This simile means Abraham had very many descendants. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
661 11:35 t9sp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔλαβον γυναῖκες ἐξ ἀναστάσεως τοὺς νεκροὺς αὐτῶν 1 This can be restated to remove the abstract noun “resurrection.” The word **dead** is a nominal adjective. You can state this as a verb. Alternate translation: “Women received back alive those who had died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
662 11:35 ne1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄλλοι δὲ ἐτυμπανίσθησαν, οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν 1 It is implied that their enemies would have released them from prison under certain conditions. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Others accepted torture rather than release from prison” or “Others allowed their enemies to torture them rather than doing what their enemies required of them in order to release them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
663 11:35 faq3 ἐτυμπανίσθησαν 1 made to suffer great mental or physical pain
664 11:35 jyw7 κρείττονος ἀναστάσεως 1 This could mean: (1) These people will experience a better life in heaven than what they experienced in this world. (2) These people will have a better resurrection than those who did not have faith. Those with faith will live forever with God. Those without faith will live forever separated from God. This could mean: (1) these people will experience a better life in heaven than what they experienced in this world. (2) these people will have a better resurrection than those who did not have faith. Those with faith will live forever with God. Those without faith will live forever separated from God.
665 11:36 e9al rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕτεροι & ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον 1 You can state these in active form. Alternate translation: “People mocked and whipped others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
666 11:36 nx7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἕτεροι & ἐμπαιγμῶν καὶ μαστίγων πεῖραν ἔλαβον, ἔτι δὲ δεσμῶν καὶ φυλακῆς 1 This can be reworded so that the abstract nouns are expressed as verbs. Alternate translation: “God tested others by allowing their enemies to mock and whip them and even put them in chains and imprison them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
667 11:37 fg8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλιθάσθησαν, ἐπρίσθησαν, ἐπειράσθησαν, ἐν φόνῳ μαχαίρης ἀπέθανον 1 You can state these in active form. Alternate translation: “People mocked and whipped others … People threw stones at others. People sawed others in two. People killed others with the sword” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
747 12:25 c9cn 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving contrasted the Israelites’ experience at Mount Sinai with the believers’ experience after Christ died, the writer reminds believers that they have the same God who warns them today. This is the fifth main warning given to believers.
748 12:25 nnk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ παραιτήσησθε τὸν λαλοῦντα 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “you pay attention to the one who is speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
749 12:25 gkn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ & ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐξέφυγον 1 You can state the implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “if the people of Israel did not escape judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
750 12:25 fy9u ἐπὶ γῆς & τὸν χρηματίζοντα 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to Moses, who warned them here on earth. (2) This refers to God, who warned them at Mount Sinai. This could refer to: (1) Moses, who warned them here on earth. (2) God, who warned them at Mount Sinai.
751 12:25 s5lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς οἱ τὸν ἀπ’ οὐρανῶν ἀποστρεφόμενοι 1 Disobeying God is spoken of as if a person were changing direction and walking away from him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey the one who is warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
752 12:26 rf4e οὗ ἡ φωνὴ τὴν γῆν ἐσάλευσεν 1 “when God spoke, the sound of his voice caused the earth to shake”
753 12:26 i1c8 ἐσάλευσεν & σείσω 1 Use the word for what an earthquake does in moving the ground. This refers back to [Hebrews 12:18-21](./18.md) and what happened when the people saw the mountain where Moses received the law from God.
821 13:22 d5e6 ἀνέχεσθε τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 “patiently consider what I have just written to encourage you”
822 13:22 l8b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the encouraging message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
823 13:23 w3m2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολελυμένον 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is no longer in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
824 13:24 r7kn ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 This could mean: (1) The author is not in Italy, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) The author is in Italy while writing this letter. This could mean: (1) the author is not in Italy, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) the author is in Italy while writing this letter.
825 13:24 kk9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 This is the name of a region at that time. Rome was the then-capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

36
tn_JAS.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

1227
tn_JHN.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

4
tn_JUD.tsv
View File

@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ front:intro xh5n 0 # Introduction to Jude\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
1:4 v94i παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι 1 “For some men have come in without drawing attention to themselves”
1:4 wwz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 This can also be put into the active voice. Alternate translation: “men whom God long ago decided to condemn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:4 c642 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something horrible. Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits one to continue to live in sexual sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 ws1b τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι 1 This could mean: (1) YTey teach that Jesus is not God. (2) These men do not obey Jesus Christ.
1:4 ws1b τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι 1 This could mean: (1) they teach that Jesus is not God. (2) these men do not obey Jesus Christ.
1:5 fa5e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJude gives examples from the past of those who did not follow the Lord.
1:5 f4mm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας 1 You can state explicitly who the people were that he saved. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who rescued the Israelites long ago from Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 pt1k τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν 1 “their own position of authority” or “the responsibilities God entrusted to them”
@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ front:intro xh5n 0 # Introduction to Jude\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introductio
1:9 v9fh κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 “to say evil, untrue things about him”
1:9 kib4 κρίσιν & βλασφημίας 1 “an evil-speaking judgment” or “an evil judgment”
1:10 h6sq οὗτοι 1 the ungodly people
1:10 fjm5 ὅσα μὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to everything good that they do not understand. (2) This refers to the glorious ones, which they do not understand ([Jude 1:8](../01/08.md)).
1:10 fjm5 ὅσα μὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 This could refer to: (1) everything good that they do not understand. (2) the glorious ones, which they do not understand ([Jude 1:8](../01/08.md)).
1:11 j3g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν 1 Here, **gone in the way** is a metaphor for “lived in the same way as.” Alternate translation: “they have lived the same way Cain lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 s4az 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJude uses a series of metaphors to describe the ungodly men. He tells the believers how to recognize these men when they are among them.
1:12 r875 οὗτοί εἰσιν 1 The word **These** refers to the “ungodly men” of [Jude 1:4](../01/04.md).

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
14 1:4 v94i παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρωποι 1 “For some men have come in without drawing attention to themselves”
15 1:4 wwz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 This can also be put into the active voice. Alternate translation: “men whom God long ago decided to condemn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
16 1:4 c642 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something horrible. Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits one to continue to live in sexual sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17 1:4 ws1b τὸν μόνον Δεσπότην καὶ Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, ἀρνούμενοι 1 This could mean: (1) YTey teach that Jesus is not God. (2) These men do not obey Jesus Christ. This could mean: (1) they teach that Jesus is not God. (2) these men do not obey Jesus Christ.
18 1:5 fa5e 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJude gives examples from the past of those who did not follow the Lord.
19 1:5 f4mm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς λαὸν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου σώσας 1 You can state explicitly who the people were that he saved. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who rescued the Israelites long ago from Egypt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20 1:6 pt1k τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀρχὴν 1 “their own position of authority” or “the responsibilities God entrusted to them”
33 1:9 v9fh κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 “to say evil, untrue things about him”
34 1:9 kib4 κρίσιν & βλασφημίας 1 “an evil-speaking judgment” or “an evil judgment”
35 1:10 h6sq οὗτοι 1 the ungodly people
36 1:10 fjm5 ὅσα μὲν οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to everything good that they do not understand. (2) This refers to the glorious ones, which they do not understand ([Jude 1:8](../01/08.md)). This could refer to: (1) everything good that they do not understand. (2) the glorious ones, which they do not understand ([Jude 1:8](../01/08.md)).
37 1:11 j3g9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Κάϊν ἐπορεύθησαν 1 Here, **gone in the way** is a metaphor for “lived in the same way as.” Alternate translation: “they have lived the same way Cain lived” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
38 1:12 s4az 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJude uses a series of metaphors to describe the ungodly men. He tells the believers how to recognize these men when they are among them.
39 1:12 r875 οὗτοί εἰσιν 1 The word **These** refers to the “ungodly men” of [Jude 1:4](../01/04.md).

110
tn_LUK.tsv
View File

@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
1:36 l060 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ 1 This is a further use of the idiom also found in [1:32](../01/32.md) and [1:35](../01/35.md) in which “to be called” means “to be.” Alternate translation: “who was not able to have children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:37 v42f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reason for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “This shows that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:37 g7yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:37 l061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 Here, the term **word** has two possible meanings: (1) Since Mary uses the same term figuratively in the next verse to describe the message that Gabriel has brought from God, Gabriel may be using it to mean that message as well. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (2) Gabriel may be using the term in a general sense to mean “thing.” Alternate translation: “everything is possible with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:37 l061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 Here, the term **word** could mean: (1) since Mary uses the same term figuratively in the next verse to describe the message that Gabriel has brought from God, Gabriel may be using it to mean that message as well. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (2) Gabriel may be using the term in a general sense to mean “thing.” Alternate translation: “everything is possible with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:38 tef1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Here, **behold** means more literally “look,” that is, “Look at me,” by which Mary means, “This is who I am.” Alternate translation (not followed by a comma): “I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:38 kw3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ δούλη Κυρίου 1 By describing herself as a **servant**, Mary is responding humbly and willingly. She is not boasting about being in the Lord’s service. Choose an expression in your language that will show her humility and obedience to the Lord. Alternate translation: “someone who will gladly serve the Lord in any way he wishes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:38 b9ax γένοιτό μοι 1 Once again Mary is expressing her willingness for the things to happen that the angel has told her about. Alternative translation: “I am willing for these things to happen to me”
@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
1:79 s3eb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 Zechariah is using the word **guide** figuratively to mean “teach,” and the expression **the path of peace** figuratively to represent living at peace with God. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:79 l101 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 Zechariah is using the term **feet** figuratively to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:80 q2ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 This word introduces the next part of the story. In this verse, Luke describes a few transitional events in order to move quickly from the birth of John to the beginning of his ministry as an adult. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:80 a8bz ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the inner part of a person, as in [1:47](../01/47.md). Alternate translation: “he developed a strong character” (2) This refers to how God kept the promise that Gabriel made to Zechariah in [1:15](../01/15.md), that the Holy Spirit would empower his son. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit empowered him”
1:80 a8bz ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι 1 This could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, as in [1:47](../01/47.md). Alternate translation: “he developed a strong character” (2) how God kept the promise that Gabriel made to Zechariah in [1:15](../01/15.md), that the Holy Spirit would empower his son. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit empowered him”
1:80 eh9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 This expression means implicitly that John went to live there. Luke does not say at what age John did this. Alternate translation: “he went to live in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public”
1:80 ie4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 Here, Luke uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -339,18 +339,18 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
2:10 hnr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative μὴ φοβεῖσθε 1 As in [1:13](../01/13.md), while the angel speaks these words in the form of a command, he is really telling the shepherds something to help and encourage them. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2:10 l118 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen to this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 pw8t εὐαγγελίζομαι ὑμῖν χαρὰν μεγάλην, ἥτις ἔσται παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 Alternate translation: “I have come to announce good news that will make all the people very happy”
2:10 adz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 This could mean: (1) The angel may mean all people. That is the reading of UST. Alternate translation: “all people everywhere” (2) This may be a figurative generalization that refers specifically to the Jewish people who would welcome Jesus as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:10 adz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 This could be: (1) a reference to all people. That is the reading of UST. Alternate translation: “all people everywhere” (2) a figurative generalization that refers specifically to the Jewish people who would welcome Jesus as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “your people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:11 l119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτέχθη ὑμῖν σήμερον Σωτὴρ, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστὸς, Κύριος, ἐν πόλει Δαυείδ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a Savior, who is Christ the Lord, has been born for you today in the city of David!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:11 z9m2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πόλει Δαυείδ 1 This means Bethlehem. See the explanation in the note to [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “in Bethlehem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:11 l120 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅς ἐστιν Χριστὸς, Κύριος 1 **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “who is the Messiah, the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 yj15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον 1 The implication is that God has provided this sign. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has given you this sign” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 snr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον 1 This could mean: (1) It may be a sign that would help the shepherds recognize the baby. Alternate translation: “this sign to help you find the newborn Messiah” (2) It may be a sign to prove that what the angel was saying was true. Alternate translation: “the sign to prove that what I am telling you is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 snr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον 1 This could be: (1) a sign that would help the shepherds recognize the baby. Alternate translation: “this sign to help you find the newborn Messiah” (2) a sign to prove that what the angel was saying was true. Alternate translation: “the sign to prove that what I am telling you is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 xx57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐσπαργανωμένον 1 See how you translated this expression in [2:7](../02/07.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “with cloths wrapped tightly around him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:12 bua3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κείμενον ἐν φάτνῃ 1 See how you translated the term **manger** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “lying in a box that holds hay for animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:13 b54a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλῆθος στρατιᾶς οὐρανίου 1 This phrase could refer to a literal **army** of angels, or it could be speaking figuratively of a large organized group of angels. Alternate translation: “a large group of angels from heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:13 e2gp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys αἰνούντων τὸν Θεὸν καὶ λεγόντων 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The angels said these words in order to praise God. Alternate translation: “who praised God by saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2:14 p1fm δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις Θεῷ 1 This could mean: (1) The angels may be describing where God should receive honor. In that case **in the highest** would mean “in the highest place,” that is, “in heaven,” and the phrase would parallel “on earth.” Alternate translation: “Give honor to God in heaven” (2) The angels may be describing what kind of honor God should receive. Alternate translation: “Give the highest honor to God”
2:14 y2b3 ἐν ἀνθρώποις εὐδοκίας 1 This could mean: (1) This may be referring to God’s **good pleasure** with people. Alternate translation: “among people with whom God is pleased” (2) This may be referring to people who show **good pleasure** or “good will” to one another. Alternate translation: “among people of good will”
2:14 p1fm δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις Θεῷ 1 This could mean: (1) the angels are describing where God should receive honor. In that case **in the highest** would mean “in the highest place,” that is, “in heaven,” and the phrase would parallel “on earth.” Alternate translation: “Give honor to God in heaven” (2) the angels are describing what kind of honor God should receive. Alternate translation: “Give the highest honor to God”
2:14 y2b3 ἐν ἀνθρώποις εὐδοκίας 1 This could refer to: (1) God’s **good pleasure** with people. Alternate translation: “among people with whom God is pleased” (2) people who show **good pleasure** or “good will” to one another. Alternate translation: “among people of good will”
2:14 l121 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, the term **men** has a generic meaning that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:15 au2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 Luke uses this phrase to mark a shift in the story, to what the shepherds did after the angels left. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
2:15 s4js rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive διέλθωμεν & ἴδωμεν & ἡμῖν 1 The shepherds are speaking to one another, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive **us**, use the inclusive form here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
2:49 l165 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 Luke uses this word to draw a contrast between how readers might have expected Jesus to respond in this situation and how he actually responded. He did not say he was sorry for causing his parents so much worry. Instead, he told them that they should have known where to find him. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:49 r8eh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἐζητεῖτέ με? 1 Jesus is making a statement, not really asking a question. He is using the question form to challenge his parents respectfully. Alternate translation: “You should not have had to search for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:49 va82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐκ ᾔδειτε ὅτι ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου δεῖ εἶναί με? 1 Once again Jesus is making a statement rather than actually asking a question. He is using the question form to challenge his parents respectfully. Alternate translation: “You should have known that I would be involved in my Father’s business” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:49 p6aj ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus may be saying that he needed to be involved in the things that God was concerned about. Alternate translation: “involved in my Father’s business” (2) Jesus may be referring to the temple as a place that was dedicated to God. Alternate translation: “in my Father’s temple” or “here in the temple”
2:49 p6aj ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying that he needed to be involved in the things that God was concerned about. Alternate translation: “involved in my Father’s business” (2) Jesus is referring to the temple as a place that was dedicated to God. Alternate translation: “in my Father’s temple” or “here in the temple”
2:49 n76z rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ πατρός μου 1 At age 12, Jesus, the Son of God, understood that God was his real Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2:50 l166 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα ὃ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς 1 The term **word** refers figuratively to what Jesus told his parents by using words. Alternate translation: “the answer that he gave them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:51 h2i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ κατέβη μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 Jerusalem was on top of a mountain, so Israelites customarily spoke of going **down** when they traveled from Jerusalem to some other place. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back home with Mary and Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -569,7 +569,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
3:22 q2yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ γενέσθαι 1 Luke speaks figuratively of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:22 h7tn rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
3:23 uvm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ 1 Luke uses this word to introduce background information about Jesus’ age and ancestors. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3:23 d3sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτὸς ἦν Ἰησοῦς ἀρχόμενος ὡσεὶ ἐτῶν τριάκοντα 1 This idiomatic expression could mean: (1) The word **beginning** may be a reference to Jesus starting his own ministry. UST follows this interpretation. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was about 30 years old when he began his ministry” (2) Luke may also be saying that Jesus had just turned 30 was when he was baptized. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was just 30 years old at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:23 d3sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐτὸς ἦν Ἰησοῦς ἀρχόμενος ὡσεὶ ἐτῶν τριάκοντα 1 This idiomatic expression could mean: (1) the word **beginning** is a reference to Jesus starting his own ministry. UST follows this interpretation. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was about 30 years old when he began his ministry” (2) Luke is saying that Jesus had just turned 30 was when he was baptized. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was just 30 years old at this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:23 z2xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὢν υἱός, ὡς ἐνομίζετο, Ἰωσὴφ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People assumed that he was the son of Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:24 f8pm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ Μαθθὰτ, τοῦ Λευεὶ, τοῦ Μελχεὶ, τοῦ Ἰανναὶ, τοῦ Ἰωσὴφ 1 This continues the list that begins with the words “He was the son … of Joseph, the son of Heli” in verse 24. Consider how people normally list ancestors in your language. Use the same wording throughout the whole list. Possible formats are: (1) “He was the son … of Joseph, the son of Heli, the son of Matthat, the son of Levi, the son of Melchi, the son of Jannai, the son of Joseph” (2) “He was the son … of Joseph. Joseph was the son of Heli. Heli was the son of Matthat. Matthat was the son of Levi. Levi was the son of Melchi. Melchi was the son of Jannai. Jannai was the son of Joseph” or (3) “His father … was Joseph. Joseph’s father was Heli. Heli’s father was Matthat. Matthat’s father was Levi. Levi’s father was Melchi. Melchi’s father was Jannai. Jannai’s father was Joseph” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:25 xdc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τοῦ Ματταθίου, τοῦ Ἀμὼς, τοῦ Ναοὺμ, τοῦ Ἑσλεὶ, τοῦ Ναγγαὶ 1 This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
4:8 xj35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:8 bch3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου προσκυνήσεις καὶ αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις 1 Here, the Scriptures are using a statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must worship the Lord your God, and you must serve only him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
4:8 q8ni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd προσκυνήσεις 1 Here, it may not be clear whether to use the singular or plural form of **you** because this is a short quotation from the Scriptures and the context is not given. The word is actually singular because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular form of **you**, if your language marks that distinction. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context. But they will address ambiguous cases such as this one. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
4:9 j8r6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ πτερύγιον 1 The term **pinnacle** refers to the highest point or very top of something. If you have a similar term in your language, you could use it here. (See:c://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown)
4:9 j8r6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸ πτερύγιον 1 The term **pinnacle** refers to the highest point or very top of something. If you have a similar term in your language, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:9 g2n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦθεν κάτω 1 The devil is suggesting that this is a hypothetical condition, that Jesus will be able to jump safely from this great height if he really is the **Son of God**. The devil is speaking as if it is uncertain who Jesus is in order to challenge him to do this miracle to prove that he really is the **Son of God**. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are the Son of God by jumping safely from this great height” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
4:9 j9nx rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus. Even the devil knew its significance. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
4:9 i81s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦθεν κάτω 1 The exact location of the part of the temple that Luke describes is uncertain. However, the implication is that it was one of the places on the temple roof from which people would fall several hundred feet into the Kidron Valley if they jumped or slipped off. Make sure it is clear in your translation that this would ordinarily have been a deadly fall. Alternate translation: “jump from this great height” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -898,7 +898,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
6:14 zdq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns Ἀνδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Simon. Alternate translation: “Simon’s brother, Andrew” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
6:15 l291 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μαθθαῖον & Θωμᾶν & Ἰάκωβον Ἁλφαίου & Σίμωνα 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:15 l292 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μαθθαῖον 1 **Matthew** is often identified with the man named Levi whom Jesus calls to follow him in [5:27](../05/27.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
6:15 et48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ζηλωτὴν 1 The term **Zealot** could mean: (1) It may be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) It may be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:15 et48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ζηλωτὴν 1 The term **Zealot** could be: (1) a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the Patriot” (2) a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the Passionate One” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:16 l293 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδαν Ἰακώβου 1 **Judas** is the name of a man, and **James** is the name of his father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:16 l294 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰούδαν Ἰσκαριὼθ 1 **Judas** is the name of a man, and **Iscariot** is a distinguishing term that most likely means he came from the village of Kerioth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6:16 g24m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς ἐγένετο προδότης 1 It may be helpful to explain what **traitor** means in the context of this story. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
6:20 ymg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μακάριοι 1 This expression indicates that God is giving favor to people and that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “God will bless” or “How good it is for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:20 xj9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πτωχοί 1 Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” or “you who are poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:20 y18c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅτι ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “because God is ruling your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
6:20 k34r ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “the kingdom of God belongs to you” (2) “you are privileged within the kingdom of God”
6:20 k34r ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) “the kingdom of God belongs to you.” (2) “you are privileged within the kingdom of God.”
6:21 l344 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μακάριοι οἱ πεινῶντες νῦν 1 As in [6:20](../06/20.md), the expression **blessed** indicates that God is giving favor to people or that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “You who are hungry now receive God’s favor” or “You who are hungry now are in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
6:21 l298 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χορτασθήσεσθε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you will get enough to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:21 l299 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom μακάριοι οἱ κλαίοντες νῦν 1 Alternate translation: “You who are weeping now receive God’s favor” or “You who are weeping now are in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -968,17 +968,17 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
6:35 l318 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀχαρίστους καὶ πονηρούς 1 Here Jesus is using the adjectives **ungrateful** and **evil** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this pair of words with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are ungrateful and evil” or “people who do not thank God and who do wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:36 n28w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ Πατὴρ ὑμῶν 1 This is a figurative expression. God is not the **Father** of humans in the same actual way that he is the **Father** of Jesus. Even so, it would probably be best to translate **Father** with the same word that your language would naturally use to refer to a human father. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this means God. Alternate translation: “God your Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:37 a8c7 μὴ κρίνετε 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **judge**. Alternate translation: “do not judge other people”
6:37 e8fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ κριθῆτε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who would not judge. There are two possibilities. Alternate translations: (1) “God will not judge you” (2) “other people will not judge you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:37 e8fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ κριθῆτε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who would not judge. This could mean: (1) “God will not judge you.” (2) “other people will not judge you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:37 vkl8 καὶ μὴ καταδικάζετε 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **condemn**. Alternate translation: “Do not condemn other people”
6:37 gz37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ καταδικασθῆτε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who would not condemn. There are two possibilities. Alternate translations: (1) “God will not condemn you” (2) “other people will not condemn you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:37 gz37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ καταδικασθῆτε 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who would not condemn. This could mean: (1) “God will not condemn you.” (2) “other people will not condemn you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:37 l319 ἀπολύετε 1 Your language may require you to specify the object of **release**. Alternate translation: “Forgive other people”
6:37 ls01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπολύετε 1 Jesus is using the word **release** figuratively to mean “forgive.” Alternate translation: “Forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:37 a22w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολυθήσεσθε 1 Jesus does not say exactly who would **release**. There are two possibilities. Alternate translations: (1) “God will forgive you” (2) “other people will forgive you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:38 ryf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will give. There are two possibilities. Alternate translation: (1) “God will give to you” (2) “other people will give to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:37 a22w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπολυθήσεσθε 1 Jesus does not say exactly who would **release**. This could mean: (1) “God will forgive you.” (2) “other people will forgive you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:38 ryf8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will give. This could mean: (1) “God will give to you.” (2) “other people will give to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:38 q8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέτρον καλὸν, πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευμένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον, δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is comparing someone to a grain merchant who measures out very generously. He could mean either God or other people. The word **they** is indefinite, so it does not necessarily refer to people rather than to God. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, God will give you a generous amount” or “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, people will give you a generous amount” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
6:38 l320 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευμένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον, δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 1 These are all passive verb forms in Greek. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them with active verbal phrases. See the alternate translation in the previous note. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:38 l321 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 1 This is a reference to the way people in this culture would form a pocket or carrying pouch from the folds of the front of their robes. If you readers would not be familiar with this practice, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the folds of your robe” or “a container” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
6:38 fp26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ᾧ & μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will measure. There are two possibilities. Alternate translation: (1) “God will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others” (2) “people will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:38 fp26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ᾧ & μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will measure. This could mean: (1) “God will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (2) “people will give to you in just as generous or stingy a way as you give to others.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:39 bw7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables εἶπεν δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς 1 Jesus is giving a brief illustration that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he gave them this illustration to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
6:39 l322 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν? 1 Here the word translated **blind man** is masculine, but Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
6:39 l323 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν? 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind really guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
7:4 hm7l παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν σπουδαίως 1 Alternate translation: “they pleaded with him” or “they begged him”
7:4 y6vt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἄξιός ἐστιν 1 Here the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion, not the servant. Alternate translation: “This centurion is worthy” or “This centurion deserves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
7:5 cny7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our nation** refers to the Jewish people. Since the elders are speaking to Jesus as a fellow Jew, the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. Alternate translation: “our people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7:6 l350 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Here, **and** could mean: (1) It may mean that Jesus went with the elders because they pleaded with him. Alternate translation, as in UST: “So” (2) It may mean that Jesus went with the elders after they pleaded with him. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:6 l350 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Here, **and** could mean: (1) Jesus went with the elders because they pleaded with him. Alternate translation, as in UST: “So” (2) Jesus went with the elders after they pleaded with him. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
7:6 s5xg ἐπορεύετο 1 Alternate translation: “went along”
7:6 el4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας 1 Luke is expressing a positive meaning figuratively by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “when he was … near the house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
7:6 i6kv μὴ σκύλλου 1 The centurion is speaking politely to Jesus through these friends. Alternate translation: “I do not want to make you go out of your way”
@ -1655,7 +1655,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
10:9 ws6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς & ἀσθενεῖς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the people who are sick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
10:9 l565 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 Alternate translation: “who live in that city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:9 l566 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε αὐτοῖς, ἤγγικεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “tell them that the kingdom of God has come close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10:9 e1he rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἤγγικεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** can be expressed with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) The kingdom of God is close in location, that is, its activities are happening nearby. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) The kingdom of God is close in time, that is, it will begin soon. Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:9 e1he rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἤγγικεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** can be expressed with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God is close in location, that is, its activities are happening nearby. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God is close in time, that is, it will begin soon. Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
10:10 nt9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ μὴ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς 1 This is a direct contrast to the similar expression in [10:8](../10/08.md). Once again the pronoun **they** refers to the people living in this city. Alternate translation: “if the people there do not welcome you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
10:11 l567 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τὸν κονιορτὸν τὸν κολληθέντα ἡμῖν, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὑμῶν εἰς τοὺς πόδας ἀπομασσόμεθα ὑμῖν; πλὴν τοῦτο γινώσκετε, ὅτι ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting what he wants his disciples to say. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing from the end of the previous verse): “that you are going to wipe even the dust from their city off your feet as a warning to them, but that you still want them to know that the kingdom of God came close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
10:11 bc9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καὶ τὸν κονιορτὸν τὸν κολληθέντα ἡμῖν, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὑμῶν εἰς τοὺς πόδας ἀπομασσόμεθα ὑμῖν 1 This is a symbolic action by which these disciples are to show that they do not want to have the slightest connection with the people of any city who reject Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “Because you have rejected Jesus, we want to have nothing to do with you. We do not even want to have the dust from your town on our feet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@ -1707,7 +1707,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
10:18 v8fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα 1 While Jesus actually did see this in his vision, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this image, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:18 l590 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σατανᾶν 1 **Satan** is the name of the devil. It occurs a few more times in this book. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10:19 l591 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Jesus uses **behold** to focus his disciples’ attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:19 xl7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ἐξουσίαν τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω ὄφεων καὶ σκορπίων 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus may be referring to actual **snakes and scorpions** and saying that God will protect his disciples from these dangers everywhere they travel to proclaim the kingdom. Alternate translation: “protection from snakes and scorpions, even if you step on them” (2) The phrase **snakes and scorpions** may be a figurative way of describing evil spirits. Alternate translation: “the power to defeat evil spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:19 xl7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ἐξουσίαν τοῦ πατεῖν ἐπάνω ὄφεων καὶ σκορπίων 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is referring to actual **snakes and scorpions** and saying that God will protect his disciples from these dangers everywhere they travel to proclaim the kingdom. Alternate translation: “protection from snakes and scorpions, even if you step on them” (2) the phrase **snakes and scorpions** is a figurative way of describing evil spirits. Alternate translation: “the power to defeat evil spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:19 l592 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὄφεων 1 In context, this clearly means poisonous **snakes**. If your readers would not be familiar with **snakes**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “poisonous biting animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:19 mla6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown σκορπίων 1 The term **scorpions** describes small animals that are related to spiders. They have two claws and a poisonous stinger in their tail. If your readers would not be familiar with **scorpions**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “poisonous stinging animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
10:19 uvt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ ἐχθροῦ 1 This phrase continues the meaning from earlier in the sentence. The **enemy** is Satan, as described in the previous verse. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “I have also given you authority to overcome the resistance of Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1816,7 +1816,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
10:42 hqt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 Jesus says **one thing** as an overstatement for emphasis. Other things actually are necessary for life, but this is the most important one. Alternate translation: “but one thing is more important than all the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
10:42 l632 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 The implication is that this most important thing is what Jesus is teaching about God, and that Martha should have been concentrating on that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but one thing, what I am teaching about God, is more important than all the others, and you should have been concentrating on that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
10:42 l633 Μαριὰμ & τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο 1 While Jesus spoke just earlier about “one thing” as opposed to “many things,” here he seems to contrast only two things, **the good part** with another part, perhaps not “the bad part,” but at least the part that is not to be preferred. This likely refers to the two activities that Mary and Martha have chosen to pursue while Jesus is present in their home. Alternate translation: “Mary has chosen the better activity”
10:42 nzn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “I will not take that opportunity away from her” (2) “God will not let her lose what she has gained from listening to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:42 nzn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. This could mean: (1) “I will not take that opportunity away from her.” (2) “God will not let her lose what she has gained from listening to me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1-13)\n2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14-36)\n3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37-54)\n\nULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Lord’s Prayer\n\nWhen Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.\n\n### Jonah\n\nJonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### Washing\n\nThe Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])\n\n## Important textual issues in this chapter\n\n### Bread and stone, fish and snake\n\nIn 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
11:1 fl3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
11:1 l635 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 This disciple is referring to John the Baptist. You could say that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1839,7 +1839,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
11:6 l643 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπειδὴ 1 The speaker uses this word to introduce the reason why he is making this request at this time. If you translate this as a direct quotation, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you why I am asking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
11:6 zl5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρεγένετο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός με 1 The speaker uses the term **road** figuratively to describe being on a journey. Alternate translation: “another friend of mine is on a journey and has just arrived at my house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:6 zp7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 It is unlikely that the speaker has no food at all in his house that he could serve his friend. Rather, this is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “enough food to feed him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
11:6 l731 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 There are two other possibilities for why the speaker says this: (1) The issue could be, as UST implies, that while his family has the ingredients to make a meal, they do not want to make a weary traveler wait the time it would take for them to bake bread and prepare other food. Alternate translation: “any food prepared to feed him” (2) The implication may be that the speaker wants to extend hospitality by sharing a meal with his guest, and so he needs enough food for a family meal. Alternate translation: “enough food to share a meal with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:6 l731 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) as UST implies, while his family has the ingredients to make a meal, they do not want to make a weary traveler wait the time it would take for them to bake bread and prepare other food. Alternate translation: “any food prepared to feed him” (2) the speaker wants to extend hospitality by sharing a meal with his guest, and so he needs enough food for a family meal. Alternate translation: “enough food to share a meal with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:7 l644 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἴπῃ 1 The word **answering** indicates that what this friend **may say** would be a response. Alternate translation: “he may reply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
11:7 l645 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἴπῃ, μή μοι κόπους πάρεχε; ἤδη ἡ θύρα κέκλεισται, καὶ τὰ παιδία μου μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὴν κοίτην εἰσίν; οὐ δύναμαι ἀναστὰς δοῦναί σοι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he may tell you not to bother him, because he has already locked the door for the night and his children are in bed with him, so he cannot get up and give you anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
11:7 l646 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἤδη ἡ θύρα κέκλεισται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “We have already closed and locked the door” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
11:19 bs8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:20 l671 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
11:20 y643 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase refers figuratively to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:20 ja3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) The kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) The kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:20 ja3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
11:21 e4d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
11:21 l672 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a strong man who has all his weapons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:21 l673 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche φυλάσσῃ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ αὐλήν 1 Jesus speaks of one part of a house, its **courtyard** or entrance area, to refer figuratively to the entire house. Alternate translation: “is guarding his own house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -2047,7 +2047,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
12:1 l734 τοῦ ὄχλου 1 In this context, the word **crowd** refers to ordinary people. Alternate translation: “of the common people”
12:1 l735 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπισυναχθεισῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “were coming together” or “were crowding around” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12:1 ybz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους 1 This could be an exaggeration to emphasize how tightly packed together the crowd as. Alternate translation: “so that they were all tightly packed together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
12:1 x38n ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ πρῶτον 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus addressed his disciples before speaking to the crowd. Alternate translation: “Jesus first started speaking to his disciples, and said to them” (2) This was the first thing Jesus said to his disciples when he began to speak to them. Alternate translation: “Jesus started speaking to his disciples, and the first thing he said was”
12:1 x38n ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ πρῶτον 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus addressed his disciples before speaking to the crowd. Alternate translation: “Jesus first started speaking to his disciples, and said to them” (2) this was the first thing Jesus said to his disciples when he began to speak to them. Alternate translation: “Jesus started speaking to his disciples, and the first thing he said was”
12:1 f5b9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης, τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστὶν ὑπόκρισις 1 Jesus is describing the influence of **the Pharisees** figuratively by comparing its spread throughout the community to the way **yeast** spreads through a whole batch of dough or batter. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you do not become hypocrites like the Pharisees, whose behavior is influencing everyone around them, just as yeast spreads through a whole batch of dough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:1 l736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ζύμης 1 **Yeast** is a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. If your readers would not be familiar with yeast, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “leaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:2 m1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 **But** connects the statement it introduces to the previous statement about the hypocrisy of the Pharisees. In your translation, you can use the term that would show this connection in the way that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
@ -2156,7 +2156,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
12:27 s8d3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ κρίνα 1 The word **lilies** describes beautiful flowers that grow wild in the fields. If your language does not have a word for this flower, you could use the name of a similar flower that your readers would recognize, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “the flowers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:27 u3mf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οὐδὲ νήθει 1 In this context, to **spin** means to make thread or yarn for cloth. It does not mean to turn in a circle while standing in one place. If your readers might be confused by the term, you could explain the meaning with a phrase. Alternate translation: “and they do not make thread for cloth” or “and they do not make yarn for cloth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
12:27 l781 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that not even Solomon”
12:27 nug5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ 1 This could mean one of two things. You could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** in either way. Alternate translation: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:27 nug5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ 1 The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12:27 l782 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σολομὼν 1 **Solomon** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
12:28 rur9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:28 l783 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
@ -2238,9 +2238,9 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
12:46 j1m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ, καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is likely using the repetition to emphasize that the return of the master will be completely unexpected by the servant. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “at a time that is a complete surprise to the servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
12:46 l815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ 1 Here, Jesus uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he is not expecting him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:46 l816 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 Here, Jesus uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he does not think he will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:46 vg1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διχοτομήσει αὐτὸν 1 The expression **cut him in two** could mean one of two things, depending on how the word **unfaithful** is understood (see next note): (1) If **unfaithful** means “untrustworthy,” then the expression is probably figurative, since the master could not reassign this servant to less important responsibilities if he **cut him in two**. Alternate translation: “will punish him severely” (2) If **unfaithful** means “unbelieving,” then the expression is more literal, since it would describe something that will happen when God judges the world. Alternate translation: “destroy his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:46 l817 τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει 1 The term that ULT translates as **unfaithful** could mean: (1) It may mean “untrustworthy.” The meaning would be that the master will assign this servant to less important responsibilities, along with other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted with important ones. Alternate translation: “will give him unimportant responsibilities, like other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” (2) It may mean “unbelieving.” The master in the parable represents God, and Jesus would be speaking of what God will do, when he judges the world, to people who show by their disobedience that they do not have genuine faith. Alternate translation: “will assign him a place with the unbelievers”
12:46 l818 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀπίστων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **unfaithful** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. The meaning will depend on how you decided to translate **unfaithful** (see previous note). Alternate translation: (1) “servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” (2) “people who have shown that they are not genuine believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
12:46 vg1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διχοτομήσει αὐτὸν 1 The expression **cut him in two** could mean one of two things, depending on how the word **unfaithful** is understood (see next note): (1) if **unfaithful** means “untrustworthy,” then the expression is probably figurative, since the master could not reassign this servant to less important responsibilities if he **cut him in two**. Alternate translation: “will punish him severely” (2) if **unfaithful** means “unbelieving,” then the expression is more literal, since it would describe something that will happen when God judges the world. Alternate translation: “destroy his body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:46 l817 τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει 1 The term that ULT translates as **unfaithful** could mean: (1) “untrustworthy.” The meaning would be that the master will assign this servant to less important responsibilities, along with other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted with important ones. Alternate translation: “will give him unimportant responsibilities, like other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” (2) “unbelieving.” The master in the parable represents God, and Jesus would be speaking of what God will do, when he judges the world, to people who show by their disobedience that they do not have genuine faith. Alternate translation: “will assign him a place with the unbelievers”
12:46 l818 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀπίστων 1 Jesus is using the adjective **unfaithful** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. The meaning will depend on how you decided to translate **unfaithful** (see previous note). Alternate translation: “servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” or “people who have shown that they are not genuine believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
12:47 p1l2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐκεῖνος δὲ ὁ δοῦλος, ὁ γνοὺς τὸ θέλημα τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, καὶ μὴ ἑτοιμάσας ἢ ποιήσας πρὸς τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ, δαρήσεται πολλάς 1 Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation. It may be helpful to use two sentences if you translate it that way. Alternate translation: “Suppose a servant knew what his master wanted him to do, and suppose he did not get ready or do what the master wanted. Then his master would punish him severely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
12:47 aj41 τὸ θέλημα τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “what his master wanted him to do”
12:47 im3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δαρήσεται πολλάς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “his master will punish him severely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -2369,7 +2369,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
13:19 g4hr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 This is a simile or comparison. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is like a mustard seed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
13:19 l868 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ὁμοία ἐστὶν κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 This comparison is also a parable, a brief illustration designed to help the people understand what Jesus is teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave the people in the synagogue this illustration to help them understand. ‘The kingdom of God is like a mustard seed’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
13:19 x3p8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If your readers would not be familiar with it, in your translation you can use the name of another seed like it, or you can use a general phrase. Alternate translation: “a very small seed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:19 l869 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 This could mean: (1) This is a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “a person” (2) This refers to a man and a woman in paired examples to offer a comprehensive teaching about the kingdom of God, since Jesus speaks in his next illustration of a **woman** doing something. In that case, it would be appropriate to say **a man** here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
13:19 l869 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 This could: (1) be a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “a person” (2) refers to a man and a woman in paired examples to offer a comprehensive teaching about the kingdom of God, since Jesus speaks in his next illustration of a **woman** doing something. In that case, it would be appropriate to say **a man** here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
13:19 wv4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔβαλεν εἰς κῆπον ἑαυτοῦ 1 In this culture, people planted some kinds of seeds by throwing them so that they scattered in a garden. Jesus assumes that his listeners will know this. Alternate translation: “planted in his garden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:19 avk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατεσκήνωσεν ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ 1 In your language, it might seem that this phrase expresses unnecessary extra information. If so, you could abbreviate it. However, you could also use an action clause to keep the sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “birds built their nests in its branches” or “birds flew down and made nests in its branches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
13:20 hn4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνι ὁμοιώσω τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Jesus once again uses a question as a teaching tool. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am going to compare the kingdom of God to something else.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -2429,13 +2429,13 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
13:31 l7fe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἡρῴδης θέλει σε ἀποκτεῖναι 1 Herod would not kill Jesus personally. Rather, he would order people to do it. Alternate translation: “Herod plans to send his soldiers to kill you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:32 l904 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes πορευθέντες εἴπατε τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ, ἰδοὺ, ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Go and tell that fox that I will certainly continue to drive out demons and perform healings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
13:32 l905 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 A **fox** is a small wild dog. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **fox** is, you could use the name of a similar animal in your region, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “that little dog” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
13:32 af7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 Jesus is referring to Herod figuratively as a **fox**. This could mean: (1) Since foxes need to rely on cunning to catch their prey, Jesus may be saying that Herod is devious. Alternate translation: “that devious person” (2) Since a fox is a small animal, Jesus may be saying that Herod was not much of a threat. Alternate translation: “that insignificant person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:32 af7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 Jesus is referring to Herod figuratively as a **fox**. This could mean: (1) since foxes need to rely on cunning to catch their prey, Jesus may be saying that Herod is devious. Alternate translation: “that devious person” (2) since a fox is a small animal, Jesus may be saying that Herod was not much of a threat. Alternate translation: “that insignificant person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:32 l906 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Jesus uses the term **behold** to call attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:32 l907 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 The expression **today and tomorrow** is an idiom that means “at the present time” or “for now.” Alternate translation: “for now I will continue to drive out demons and perform healings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:32 l908 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 Jesus speaks of two parts of his ministry, **driving out demons and performing healings**, to mean all of his ministry, which also included teaching and other things. Alternate translation: “for now I will continue to carry on my ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
13:32 l909 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 The implication is that Jesus is saying he knows he does not need to be afraid of Herod’s deadly intentions, even though he is in territory that Herod rules, because God will keep him safe while he carries out his ministry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that for now, with God’s protection, I can safely carry on my ministry even in Herod’s territory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:32 l910 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ 1 In this culture, **the third day** meant “the day after tomorrow.” Jesus is using the expression as an idiom. Alternate translation: “at a short time in the future” or “soon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:32 l911 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τελειοῦμαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. This could mean: (1) Jesus may mean that he will soon complete his work of teaching and healing. Alternate translation: “I will complete my ministry” (2) This expression may also refer to someone reaching a goal or destination. Alternate translation: “I will finish traveling through Herod’s territory and reach Jerusalem” (3) Jesus may be referring to a goal or destination figuratively, and mean that he will reach the end of his life. Alternate translation: “I will give my life as a sacrifice” (4) The expression may also describe someone reaching maturity or perfection of character, and if that is what it means here, it would describe the character that Jesus demonstrated when he gave his life as the Savior. Alternate translation: “I will demonstrate supreme love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:32 l911 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τελειοῦμαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying he will soon complete his work of teaching and healing. Alternate translation: “I will complete my ministry” (2) this expression refers to someone reaching a goal or destination. Alternate translation: “I will finish traveling through Herod’s territory and reach Jerusalem” (3) Jesus is referring to a goal or destination figuratively, and mean that he will reach the end of his life. Alternate translation: “I will give my life as a sacrifice” (4) the expression describes someone reaching maturity or perfection of character, and if that is what it means here, it would describe the character that Jesus demonstrated when he gave his life as the Savior. Alternate translation: “I will demonstrate supreme love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:33 p9za πλὴν δεῖ με & πορεύεσθαι 1 Alternate translation: “But I must keep traveling”
13:33 l912 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σήμερον καὶ αὔριον καὶ τῇ ἐχομένῃ 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “now and in the time just ahead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
13:33 nbk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony οὐκ ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσθαι ἔξω Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This could also mean “it is not acceptable.” Either way, Jesus is speaking ironically. The Jewish leaders claimed to serve God, and yet their ancestors killed many of God’s prophets in Jerusalem. Jesus knew that they would kill him there too. Alternate translation: “it is in Jerusalem that the Jewish leaders have killed so many of God’s messengers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@ -2535,7 +2535,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
14:17 xkp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς κεκλημένοις 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “to those he had invited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:17 l951 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἔρχεσθε, ὅτι ἤδη ἕτοιμά ἐστιν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that they should come because everything was now ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
14:18 eh3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 This word introduces a contrast between what was expected, that all the invited guests would come to the dinner, and what happened, that they all declined to do that. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
14:18 l952 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀπὸ μιᾶς πάντες 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that this sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. This could mean a number of things, depending on what word is supplied, but the general sense is the same in every case: (1) “All from one mind” or “all from one voice,” that is, unanimously. Alternate translation: “all alike” (2) “All from one manner.” Alternate translation: “all in the same way” (3) “All from one time” Alternate translation: “all, as soon as the servant came to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:18 l952 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀπὸ μιᾶς πάντες 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that this sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. This could mean a number of things, depending on what word is supplied, but the general sense is the same in every case: (1) “all from one mind” or “all from one voice,” that is, unanimously. Alternate translation: “all alike” (2) “all from one manner.” Alternate translation: “all in the same way” (3) “all from one time” Alternate translation: “all, as soon as the servant came to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
14:18 s9as παραιτεῖσθαι 1 Alternate translation: “to give polite reasons why they could not come to the dinner”
14:18 l3r6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πρῶτος εἶπεν αὐτῷ 1 While **him** refers to the servant, the implication is that this first guest was giving the servant a message for his master, since it would be the master, not the servant, who would excuse him from attending the banquet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The first guest whom the servant approached told him to give this message to his master” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:18 l953 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ πρῶτος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “The first guest whom the servant approached” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@ -2558,7 +2558,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
14:22 l963 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes Κύριε, γέγονεν ὃ ἐπέταξας, καὶ ἔτι τόπος ἐστίν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that he had done what the master had commanded but there was still room” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
14:22 dgt3 γέγονεν ὃ ἐπέταξας 1 Alternate translation: “I have done what you commanded”
14:23 l964 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ὁ κύριος πρὸς τὸν δοῦλον, ἔξελθε εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμοὺς, καὶ ἀνάγκασον εἰσελθεῖν, ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the master told the servant to go out into the roads and hedges and compel people to come in so that his house would be filled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
14:23 n9x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) This refers to actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” (2) Since the term is paired with **roads**, it may figuratively mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:23 n9x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” (2) since the term is paired with **roads**, it may figuratively mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
14:23 w5w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that guests may fill my house” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:24 i5lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 The master is using a future statement to express the result he desires from the instructions he has just given his servants. Alternate translation: “For I say to you that I do not want any of those men who were invited to taste of my supper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
14:24 v5m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 While the word **you** is singular in [14:21-23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -2591,7 +2591,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
14:30 l976 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 This word introduces a contrast between what the man planned to do and what he failed to do in the end. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
14:31 vp3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ τίς βασιλεὺς πορευόμενος ἑτέρῳ βασιλεῖ συμβαλεῖν εἰς πόλεμον, οὐχὶ καθίσας πρῶτον βουλεύσεται, εἰ δυνατός ἐστιν ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι τῷ μετὰ εἴκοσι χιλιάδων ἐρχομένῳ ἐπ’ αὐτόν? 1 Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Certainly a king who was going to war against another king would sit down first and determine whether with 10,000 troops he would be able to defeat a king who was attacking him with 20,000 troops.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:31 l977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἢ τίς βασιλεὺς πορευόμενος ἑτέρῳ βασιλεῖ συμβαλεῖν εἰς πόλεμον, οὐχὶ καθίσας πρῶτον βουλεύσεται 1 Jesus is offering the crowds an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Or suppose one king were going to fight a war against another king. Then he would certainly sit down first and determine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
14:31 tl37 βουλεύσεται 1 This could mean: Alternate translation: (1) He would think carefully about it. (2) He would consult with his advisors to decide.
14:31 tl37 βουλεύσεται 1 This could mean: (1) he would think carefully about it. (2) he would consult with his advisors to decide.
14:32 dpc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ δὲ μή γε 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implicit meaning here. Alternate translation: “If he realizes that he will not be able to defeat the other king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14:32 l978 ἔτι αὐτοῦ πόρρω ὄντος, πρεσβείαν ἀποστείλας ἐρωτᾷ τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην 1 Alternate translation: “while the other king is still far away, the first king sends a delegation and asks for terms of peace”
14:32 p5h6 τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην 1 Alternate translation: “for terms to end the war” or “what the other king wants him to do so that he will not attack”
@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
15:4 pxm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἓν, οὐ καταλείπει τὰ ἐνενήκοντα ἐννέα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καὶ πορεύεται ἐπὶ τὸ ἀπολωλὸς, ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό? 1 Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “If one of you had 100 sheep and lost one of them, he would certainly leave the other 99 sheep in the wilderness and go looking for the sheep that had wandered off until he found it.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
15:4 l989 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἐξ αὐτῶν ἓν, οὐ καταλείπει 1 Jesus is offering the Pharisees and scribes an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you had 100 sheep and you lost one of them. Then you would certainly leave” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
15:4 m048 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν, ἔχων ἑκατὸν πρόβατα & ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό 1 Since Jesus begins the parable by asking, “Which man among you,” some languages would continue the parable in the second person. Alternate translation: “Which one of you, if you had 100 sheep … until you found it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
15:4 l990 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 This could mean: (1) While all of the Pharisees and scribes who are grumbling are probably men, Jesus is describing what any person, man or woman, would likely do in this situation, and he is telling the parable for the whole crowd to hear. So the term **man** here may be generic. Alternate translation: “Which person among you” (2) Since Jesus speaks in his next parable of a woman doing something, he may be using a man and a woman in paired examples to offer a comprehensive teaching about the kingdom of God. In that case, the term **man** here would not be generic. Alternate translation: “Which of you men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
15:4 l990 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τίς ἄνθρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 This could mean: (1) while all of the Pharisees and scribes who are grumbling are probably men, Jesus is describing what any person, man or woman, would likely do in this situation, and he is telling the parable for the whole crowd to hear. So the term **man** here may be generic. Alternate translation: “Which person among you” (2) since Jesus speaks in his next parable of a woman doing something, he may be using a man and a woman in paired examples to offer a comprehensive teaching about the kingdom of God. In that case, the term **man** here would not be generic. Alternate translation: “Which of you men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
15:4 l991 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀπολωλὸς 1 Here, Jesus is using the participle **lost**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **one** to show that. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the sheep that had wandered off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
15:5 l992 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person καὶ εὑρὼν, ἐπιτίθησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους αὐτοῦ χαίρων 1 If you decided in the previous verse that your language would continue this parable in the second person, use the second person here as well. Alternate translation: “Once you found it, you would very happily lay it across your shoulders” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
15:5 xwa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιτίθησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους αὐτοῦ 1 This is the way a shepherd carries a sheep. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he lays it across his shoulders to carry it home” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2661,7 +2661,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
15:17 m004 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἔφη, πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told himself that all of his father’s hired servants had more than enough food to eat, but he was perishing from hunger where he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
15:17 xw1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι 1 This is an exclamation, not a question. Alternate translation: “All of my father’s hired servants have more than enough food to eat, but I am perishing from hunger here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
15:17 m005 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἄρτων 1 The young man is using one kind of food, **bread**, figuratively to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
15:17 tal2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole λιμῷ & ἀπόλλυμαι 1 This could mean: (1) It may be a figurative overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “have so little to eat” (2) The young man may literally have been starving. Alternate translation: “am about to die of starvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
15:17 tal2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole λιμῷ & ἀπόλλυμαι 1 This could mean: (1) it is a figurative overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “have so little to eat” (2) the young man has literally been starving. Alternate translation: “am about to die of starvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
15:18 m006 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἀναστὰς, πορεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου, καὶ ἐρῶ αὐτῷ, Πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “He decided that he would leave that place and go to his father and tell him that he had sinned against God and directly against him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
15:18 m007 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “I will leave this place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
15:18 m4pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@ -2893,7 +2893,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
17:2 uk6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λίθος μυλικὸς περίκειται περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:2 gr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown λίθος μυλικὸς 1 A **millstone** is a very large, heavy, circular stone that is used for grinding grain into flour. If your readers would not be familiar with a millstone, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “a heavy stone” or “a heavy wheel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
17:2 k9xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίσῃ 1 See how you translated this in [17:1](../17/01.md). Jesus is using the word **trap** figuratively. Alternate translation: “he should tempt to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:2 xm7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “these children who believe in me” (2) This is a figurative reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “these new believers” or (3) This is a figurative reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “these common people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:2 xm7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 This could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “these children who believe in me” (2) a figurative reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “these new believers” or (3) a figurative reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “these common people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:3 m104 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς 1 Since Jesus is teaching about how important it is not to sin and not to encourage others to sin, the implication is that this statement means that he wants his disciples to help one another not to sin. Alternate translation: “Help one another not to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:3 m105 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you προσέχετε 1 The implied “you” in this imperative is plural, since Jesus is speaking to his disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
17:3 m106 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd σου & ἐπιτίμησον & ἄφες 1 The word **your** and the implied “you” in the imperatives **rebuke** and **forgive** are singular, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
@ -2984,7 +2984,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
17:21 m152 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε, ἤ, ἐκεῖ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “People will not say that they see it near them in one place or over in another place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
17:21 m153 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὧδε, ἤ, ἐκεῖ 1 These people would be using the term **behold** to get others to focus their attention on what they were saying. In this case, it would be appropriate to translate the term with a popular expression in your language that has this meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Hey, here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:21 m154 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 Jesus is using the term **behold** to get the Pharisees to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “For indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:21 xj7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus may be saying that the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of what people believe and decide within themselves. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is inside of you” (2) Since the word **you** is plural here, Jesus may be saying that the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of something that happens within communities of people. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
17:21 xj7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of what people believe and decide within themselves. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is inside of you” (2) since the word **you** is plural here, Jesus may be saying that the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of something that happens within communities of people. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
17:21 xpi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God is ruling inside of you” or “God is ruling in your midst” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17:22 x3y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ὅτε 1 Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “There will be a time when” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
17:22 v2i3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπιθυμήσετε & ἰδεῖν 1 Jesus is using the term **see** figuratively to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “you will want very much to experience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -3047,7 +3047,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
17:34 p84l λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “Indeed”
17:34 j3b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ ἔσονται δύο ἐπὶ κλίνης μιᾶς 1 Jesus is speaking of a hypothetical situation that might occur at this time. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Suppose this were to happen at night, and suppose there were two people sleeping in the same bed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
17:34 at99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐπὶ κλίνης μιᾶς 1 If your readers would not be familiar with what a **bed** is, you could use the name of the sleeping furniture that people in your own culture use, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sleeping on one mat” or “sleeping side by side” or “sleeping in the same place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
17:34 e9hj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ εἷς παραλημφθήσεται, καὶ ὁ ἕτερος ἀφεθήσεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use active forms for both of these verbs, and you can say who would do the actions. This could mean: (1) The person who is **taken** may be one whom God takes out of a situation in which they would be destroyed, as God brought Lot out of Sodom, and the person who is **left** may be one who remains in a situation where they will be destroyed, like the people who remained in Sodom. That is the interpretation of UST. Alternate translation: “God will spare one of them but destroy the other” (2) In the parallel to this passage in the gospel of Matthew, Jesus says that the people living in Noah’s time “knew nothing until the flood came and took them all away” (Matthew 24:39 ULT). So the person who is **taken** may actually be one whom God destroys, and the one who is **left** may be one whom God spares and allows to remain alive. Alternate translation: “God will destroy one of them but spare the other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:34 e9hj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ εἷς παραλημφθήσεται, καὶ ὁ ἕτερος ἀφεθήσεται 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use active forms for both of these verbs, and you can say who would do the actions. This could mean: (1) the person who is **taken** may be one whom God takes out of a situation in which they would be destroyed, as God brought Lot out of Sodom, and the person who is **left** may be one who remains in a situation where they will be destroyed, like the people who remained in Sodom. That is the interpretation of UST. Alternate translation: “God will spare one of them but destroy the other” (2) in the parallel to this passage in the gospel of Matthew, Jesus says that the people living in Noah’s time “knew nothing until the flood came and took them all away” (Matthew 24:39 ULT). So the person who is **taken** may actually be one whom God destroys, and the one who is **left** may be one whom God spares and allows to remain alive. Alternate translation: “God will destroy one of them but spare the other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:34 m183 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ὁ εἷς παραλημφθήσεται 1 If you translated the first sentence in this verse as the condition of a hypothetical situation, translate this sentence as the result of that condition. Alternate translation: “Then one of them will be taken” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
17:35 il9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἔσονται δύο ἀλήθουσαι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 Jesus is speaking of a hypothetical situation that might occur at this time. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Suppose that when this happens, two women are grinding grain together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
17:35 m184 δύο 1 The verb is feminine, so this means “two women.” (In [17:34](../17/34.md) and [17:36](../17/36.md), grammatically masculine forms are used, but conventionally in Greek that means that the people are not known to be all women; they could be men or women, so a general term such as “people” would be appropriate in those verses.) Alternate translation: “two women”
@ -3217,7 +3217,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
18:38 m252 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 The blind man assumes that Jesus will know that he is asking specifically to be healed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “please have mercy on me and heal me” or “please be merciful to me by healing me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:39 m253 οἱ προάγοντες 1 Alternate translation: “the people who were walking ahead of Jesus”
18:39 z7r6 ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ, ἵνα σιγήσῃ 1 Alternate translation: “kept telling him not to shout”
18:39 zug7 πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “he shouted even louder” (2) “he called out even more persistently”
18:39 zug7 πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔκραζεν 1 This could mean: (1) “he shouted even louder.” (2) “he called out even more persistently.”
18:39 m254 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυείδ, ἐλέησόν με 1 See how you decided to translate this phrase in [18:38](../18/38.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah, please have mercy on me and heal me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18:40 m255 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτὸν ἀχθῆναι πρὸς αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the people to bring the blind man to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
18:41 al8g ἵνα ἀναβλέψω 1 Alternate translation: “I want to be able to see again” or “I want you to restore my sight”
@ -3294,7 +3294,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
19:17 abcq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, εὖ ἀγαθὲ δοῦλε! ὅτι ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ, πιστὸς ἐγένου, ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the king told this first servant that he had done a good job, and that because he had shown in a small task that he was faithful, he was making him the ruler of ten cities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
19:17 m287 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ 1 Jesus uses this phrase to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So the king said to the first servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
19:17 n5at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations εὖ ἀγαθὲ δοῦλε! 1 Your language may have a phrase that an employer would use to show approval. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Good job!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
19:17 t6zk ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ 1 This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “in a small responsibility” (2) “with a little bit of money”
19:17 t6zk ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ 1 This could mean: (1) “in a small responsibility.” (2) “with a little bit of money.”
19:17 m288 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων 1 The new king speaks this as a command, but it is not one that the servant is capable of obeying on his own. Rather, the king is using the command form to appoint the servant to a position of authority. Alternate translation: “I am making you the ruler of ten cities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
19:18 zsr1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ἦλθεν ὁ δεύτερος λέγων, ἡ μνᾶ σου, Κύριε, ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the second servant came and told him that he had used his mina to make five more minas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
19:18 m289 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ δεύτερος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@ -3463,8 +3463,8 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
20:9 y37s γεωργοῖς 1 While **farmers** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to people who tend grape vines and grow grapes. Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
20:10 wm51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say more explicitly what time this was. Alternate translation: “at the time at which they had agreed to give him a share of the crop” or “at harvest time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:10 m361 γεωργοὺς & γεωργοὶ 1 See how you translated **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers”
20:10 kr7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 This could mean: (1) The word **fruit** may be intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) The word **fruit** may be figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:10 m362 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν, δείραντες κενόν 1 It may be helpful to state explicitly that the farmers did this after the servant arrived, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:10 kr7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 The word **fruit** could be: (1) intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:10 m362 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ & γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν, δείραντες κενόν 1 It may be helpful to state explicitly that the farmers did this after the servant arrived, as UST does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/ttranslate/figs-explicit]])
20:10 isk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν & κενόν 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
20:11 r72a ἀτιμάσαντες 1 Alternate translation: “humiliated him”
20:11 vxh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξαπέστειλαν κενόν 1 See how you translated this in [20:10](../20/10.md). Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -3663,7 +3663,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
21:10 m438 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
21:10 m439 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** figuratively represents the people of a kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:11 ib3l φόβηθρά 1 Alternate translation: “events that terrify people” or “events that cause people to be very afraid”
21:11 m440 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖα ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ μεγάλα 1 Here, the term **heaven** could mean: (1) Based on what Jesus says in [21:25](../21/25.md) about signs in the sun, moon, and stars, it may have the sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “great signs in the sky” (2) It may be a way of referring to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “great signs from God” or “great signs that God sends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:11 m440 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖα ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ μεγάλα 1 Here, the term **heaven** could mean: (1) based on what Jesus says in [21:25](../21/25.md) about signs in the sun, moon, and stars, it has the sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “great signs in the sky” (2) a way of referring to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “great signs from God” or “great signs that God sends” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:12 unm4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τούτων 1 This refers implicitly to the things that Jesus has said will happen. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:12 w5uz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν 1 This expression figuratively means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of that person. Alternate translation: “they will arrest you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:12 qd99 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the government authorities, who will be led to arrest the followers of Jesus by their enemies, as Jesus explains in [21:16](../21/16.md). Alternate translation: “the authorities will arrest you” or “your enemies will get the authorities to arrest you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@ -3684,7 +3684,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
21:15 m444 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἀντειπεῖν 1 The terms **resist** and **contradict** mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these terms into a single, equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to deny” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
21:16 xc2s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παραδοθήσεσθε & καὶ ὑπὸ γονέων, καὶ ἀδελφῶν, καὶ συγγενῶν, καὶ φίλων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “even your parents, brothers, relatives, and friends will turn you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:16 m445 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφῶν 1 Here, the term **brothers** has a generic sense that includes both brothers and sisters. Alternate translation: “siblings” or “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
21:16 ue17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns θανατώσουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 The pronoun **they** could possibly mean one of two things, though the first meaning is more likely. Alternate translation: (1) “the authorities will kill some of you” (2) “those who turn you in will kill some of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:16 ue17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns θανατώσουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 The pronoun **they** could mean: (1) “the authorities will kill some of you.” (2) “those who turn you in will kill some of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
21:17 m446 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:17 wbh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 The term **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many people will hate you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:17 lm66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** figuratively represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -3712,7 +3712,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
21:23 m459 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
21:23 m460 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Jesus uses this word to introduce the reason why it will be very difficult for pregnant women and nursing mothers at this time. If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the sentence that this word introduces first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that the other sentence in the verse describes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
21:23 m461 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 If the word **land** figuratively means the people who live in the land (see note below), then these two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “God will angrily punish the people who live in this land by making them suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
21:23 mzp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 This could mean: (1) The term **land** may refer figuratively to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (2) The term **land** may be literal. Alternate translation: “there will be physical disasters in the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:23 mzp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 The term **land** could be: (1) a figurative reference to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “there will be physical disasters in the land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:23 m462 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔσται & ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distress** with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21:23 iw4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 Jesus is using the word **wrath** figuratively to mean what God will do in his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “and God will angrily punish this people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:24 lmj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πεσοῦνται 1 Here, **fall** figuratively means to die by association with the way that people who die **fall** to the ground. Alternate translation: “they will die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -3723,7 +3723,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
21:24 cg3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἰχμαλωτισθήσονται εἰς τὰ ἔθνη πάντα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “their enemies will capture them and take them away into other countries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21:24 zn4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἰς τὰ ἔθνη πάντα 1 The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that their enemies will take the people away to many other countries. Alternate translation: “into many other countries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
21:24 m467 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐθνῶν 1 Jesus is using the term **nations** figuratively to mean the places where various people groups live. Alternate translation: “countries” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:24 d356 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of the Gentiles walking all over the city of Jerusalem. This could mean: (1) The image may be of people walking around on land that they own or control. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” (2) The image may be of walking over something to flatten it. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:24 d356 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of the Gentiles walking all over the city of Jerusalem. This image could be: (1) of people walking around on land that they own or control. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” (2) of walking over something to flatten it. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:24 m468 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” or “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:24 m469 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 2 Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that by **the nations**, he means in this instance the people groups who are not Jews. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21:24 na6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄχρι οὗ πληρωθῶσιν καιροὶ ἐθνῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. (See the discussion of the meaning of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “until the time when the Gentiles rule the Jews is over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -3753,7 +3753,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
21:31 y81z ταῦτα 1 Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described”
21:31 t1ca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
21:32 gsh9 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
21:32 h921 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born a certain generation. This could mean one of two things. The first is more likely. Alternate translation: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening” (2) “the people who are alive now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:32 h921 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening.” (2) “the people who are alive now.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:32 m3il οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ & ἕως ἂν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will still be alive when”
21:32 m481 πάντα 1 Alternate translation: “all of these things”
21:33 t53u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together figuratively to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@ -3840,7 +3840,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
22:16 m510 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge γὰρ 1 Jesus is giving the reason why he has been so eager to share this Passover meal with his disciples, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could combine [22:15](../22/15.md) and [22:16](../22/16.md), putting all of [22:16](../22/16.md) first, followed by all of [22:15](../22/15.md). This would require saying “this Passover meal” in [22:16](../22/16.md) and **it** in [22:15](../22/15.md). You could have no introductory word for [22:16](../22/16.md) and begin [22:15](../22/15.md) with “And so.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
22:16 gbj7 λέγω & ὑμῖν 1 Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you”
22:16 m511 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μὴ φάγω αὐτὸ 1 Since Jesus is just about to eat a Passover meal, he means implicitly that he will not eat such a meal again until the later time he describes. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not eat it again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:16 k28r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕως ὅτου πληρωθῇ ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. This could mean one of several things. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: (1) “until people celebrate this feast in the kingdom of God” (2) “until God gives this feast its full meaning when he establishes his kingdom” or (3) “until I die as the true Passover sacrifice and establish the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:16 k28r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἕως ὅτου πληρωθῇ ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. This could mean: (1) “until people celebrate this feast in the kingdom of God.” (2) “until God gives this feast its full meaning when he establishes his kingdom.” (3) “until I die as the true Passover sacrifice and establish the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:17 l5e6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεξάμενος ποτήριον 1 Luke is using the term **cup** figuratively to mean what it contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “Jesus picked up a cup of wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:17 d7pc εὐχαριστήσας 1 Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God”
22:17 xvm7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διαμερίσατε εἰς ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus meant that the apostles were to divide up the contents of the cup, not the cup itself. Alternate translation: “share the wine that is in this cup among yourselves” or “each of you drink some wine from this cup” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -3854,7 +3854,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
22:19 m515 εὐχαριστήσας 1 Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God”
22:19 d3yc ἔκλασεν 1 Jesus may have divided the loaf of **bread** into many pieces, as UST says, or he may have divided it into two pieces and given those to the apostles to divide among themselves. If possible, use an expression in your language that would apply to either situation.
22:19 m516 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς 1 The implication is that Jesus gave the bread to the disciples to eat. Alternate translation: “and gave it to them to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:19 d8r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate this phrase. Christians understand it to mean one of two things. In the first case, it would be a metaphor. Alternate translation: (1) “This represents my body” (2) “My body is really present in this bread” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:19 d8r1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about how to translate this phrase. Christians understand this phrase to be: (1) a metaphor. Alternate translation: “This represents my body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) literal. Alternate translation: “My body is really present in this bread”
22:19 lc9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “which I am giving for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:19 cxy5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν 1 Jesus seems to be telling his disciples implicitly that he wants them to re-enact this part of the meal regularly in the future in order to remember him. Alternate translation: “When you meet together, break and share bread like this in order to remember me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:20 m517 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ ποτήριον 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And he took the cup” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@ -3937,7 +3937,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
22:37 jz9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη 1 Jesus is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “he was considered a criminal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
22:37 jf1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “people considered him to be a criminal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
22:37 se1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ γὰρ τὸ περὶ ἐμοῦ τέλος ἔχει 1 Here Jesus is speaking implicitly about what the Scriptures say about him. Alternate translation: “Yes, what the Scriptures say about me must certainly happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:38 kbt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱκανόν ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus may be indicating that when he told his disciples to buy swords, he meant for their own defense, not to attack their enemies, and that they have enough swords for that purpose. Alternate translation: “That will be enough for us to defend ourselves” (2) Jesus wants them to stop talking about having swords. The implication would be that when he said they should buy swords, he was mainly warning them that they were going to face dangers, and he did not really want them to buy swords and fight. Alternate translation: “That is enough talk about swords, I do not really want you to buy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:38 kbt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱκανόν ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is indicating that when he told his disciples to buy swords, he meant for their own defense, not to attack their enemies, and that they have enough swords for that purpose. Alternate translation: “That will be enough for us to defend ourselves” (2) Jesus wants them to stop talking about having swords. The implication would be that when he said they should buy swords, he was mainly warning them that they were going to face dangers, and he did not really want them to buy swords and fight. Alternate translation: “That is enough talk about swords, I do not really want you to buy them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:39 zaw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background ἐξελθὼν, ἐπορεύθη κατὰ τὸ ἔθος εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 Luke provides this background information about where Jesus went to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Luke has already indicated in [21:37](../21/37.md) that during this time in Jerusalem, Jesus did not spend the nights in the city, but rather in this location. Alternate translation: “leaving the city of Jerusalem, Jesus went to spend the night on the Mount of Olives, as he had been doing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
22:39 m550 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 This is the name of a hill or mountain. See how you translated it in [19:29](../19/29.md). Alternate translation: “Olive Tree Mountain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
22:40 m551 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche γενόμενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to refer figuratively to Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “when Jesus and his disciples arrived at the Mount of Olives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -3953,7 +3953,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
22:43 m556 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants Ὤφθη δὲ αὐτῷ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ ἐνισχύων αὐτόν 1 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The note below discusses a translation issue in this verse, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
22:43 m557 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom Ὤφθη & αὐτῷ 1 **Appeared** does not mean that the angel simply seemed to be there, or that Jesus saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Jesus. Alternate translation: “came there to be with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:44 m558 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants Καὶ γενόμενος ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ ἐκτενέστερον προσηύχετο. καὶ Ἐγένετο ὁ ἱδρὼς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θρόμβοι αἵματος καταβαίνοντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this verse in your translation. The two notes below discusses translation issues in this verse, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
22:44 m559 ἐκτενέστερον προσηύχετο 1 This could mean: (1) Luke may be using the comparative form of the adjective **earnest**, which has an adverbial sense here, with a superlative meaning. Alternate translation: “he was praying most earnestly” or “he was praying very fervently” (2) The word may have an actual comparative sense. Alternate translation: “he began to pray even more earnestly than he had been praying before”
22:44 m559 ἐκτενέστερον προσηύχετο 1 This could mean: (1) Luke is using the comparative form of the adjective **earnest**, which has an adverbial sense here, with a superlative meaning. Alternate translation: “he was praying most earnestly” or “he was praying very fervently” (2) the word has an actual comparative sense. Alternate translation: “he began to pray even more earnestly than he had been praying before”
22:44 m560 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile Ἐγένετο ὁ ἱδρὼς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θρόμβοι αἵματος καταβαίνοντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 This could mean one of two things. The first is more likely. (1) It could describe the appearance of the drops. This would mean that Jesus had been under such stress that the small blood vessels that fed his sweat glands ruptured, and his sweat became mixed with blood. (This is a rare but well-document medical condition known as hematohidrosis.) Alternate translation: “his sweat became mixed with blood and it fell to the ground in drops” (2) It could describe the way in which the drops of sweat fell to the ground. Alternate translation: “he began to sweat so intensely that the sweat formed drops and fell to the ground as blood drops do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
22:45 m561 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Luke uses the word **and** to indicate that what he describes next came after what he described just previously. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
22:45 m562 ἀναστὰς ἀπὸ τῆς προσευχῆς, ἐλθὼν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 Alternate translation: “when Jesus had finished praying, he got up and went back to his disciples”
@ -4003,7 +4003,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
22:56 m582 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἰδοῦσα δὲ αὐτὸν, παιδίσκη τις 1 Luke says this to introduce this new character into the story. Alternate translation: “Now there was a female servant there who saw him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
22:56 fm4t καθήμενον πρὸς τὸ φῶς 1 Alternate translation: “sitting facing the light of the fire” or “sitting with his face lit up by the fire”
22:56 fxz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἀτενίσασα αὐτῷ εἶπεν 1 Though this woman was looking at Peter, she was not speaking to him but to the others around them. It might be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “She looked straight at Peter and said to the other people in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:56 zu63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὗτος σὺν αὐτῷ ἦν 1 This could mean: (1) Peter was with Jesus when the group came to arrest him, as UST suggests. (2) Since it is perhaps unlikely that this female servant accompanied that group, she may mean instead that she saw Peter with Jesus somewhere in Jerusalem earlier in the week and she could tell that he was associated with Jesus. Alternate translation: “I know that this man is one of Jesus’ disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:56 zu63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὗτος σὺν αὐτῷ ἦν 1 This could mean: (1) Peter was with Jesus when the group came to arrest him, as UST suggests. (2) since it is perhaps unlikely that this female servant accompanied that group, she may mean instead that she saw Peter with Jesus somewhere in Jerusalem earlier in the week and she could tell that he was associated with Jesus. Alternate translation: “I know that this man is one of Jesus’ disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:57 dzq9 ὁ δὲ ἠρνήσατο 1 Alternate translation: “But Peter said that was not true”
22:57 vdm1 γύναι 1 Peter addresses the female servant as **Woman** because he does not know her name. He is not insulting her by calling her that. If your readers might think he was insulting her, you could use a way that is acceptable in your culture for a man to address a woman he does not know. Alternate translation: “Miss” or “Ma’am”
22:58 m583 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants ἕτερος 1 Luke uses this word to introduce another new character into the story. Alternate translation: “another of the people who was there by the fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@ -4089,7 +4089,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
23:10 hn8g εὐτόνως κατηγοροῦντες αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “insisting strongly that Jesus was guilty of doing wrong”
23:11 m602 ἐξουθενήσας & αὐτὸν 1 This does not mean that Herod hated Jesus, but that he treated him as if he were worthless. Alternate translation: “humiliated him”
23:11 qt1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περιβαλὼν ἐσθῆτα λαμπρὰν 1 Herod and his soldiers did this to mock Jesus and to make fun of him, so be sure that your readers do not get the impression that they did this to honor or care for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Dressing him mockingly in beautiful clothes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 b6f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένοντο & φίλοι ὅ τε Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μετ’ ἀλλήλων 1 Luke does not say specifically why these two men **became friends**. This could mean: (1) Pilate had shown Herod courtesy by respecting his jurisdiction over Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because Pilate had respectfully sent Jesus to Herod to judge him” (2) They realized that they agreed in their opinion about Jesus. They both felt that he was not guilty of doing wrong, but they also felt they could mistreat him as a way of asserting their power and authority over someone the people considered a leader. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because they had both responded to Jesus in the same way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 b6f1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένοντο & φίλοι ὅ τε Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μετ’ ἀλλήλων 1 Luke does not say specifically why these two men **became friends**. This could mean: (1) Pilate had shown Herod courtesy by respecting his jurisdiction over Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because Pilate had respectfully sent Jesus to Herod to judge him” (2) they realized that they agreed in their opinion about Jesus. They both felt that he was not guilty of doing wrong, but they also felt they could mistreat him as a way of asserting their power and authority over someone the people considered a leader. Alternate translation: “Herod and Pilate became friends with each other that very day because they had both responded to Jesus in the same way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:12 x7r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result προϋπῆρχον γὰρ ἐν ἔχθρᾳ ὄντες πρὸς αὑτούς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this clause first in the verse, as UST does, since it gives the reason for the results that the rest of the verse describes. These two men had to become **friends** because they had not been **friends** previously. Alternate translation, as the beginning of the verse, replacing “Then”: “Before this Herod and Pilate had been enemies, but now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
23:13 d7gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants τὸν λαὸν 1 This is a further reference reintroducing these participants, whom Luke first introduced subtly in 23:4. It is not likely that Pilate asked a crowd to gather. Instead, the crowd was probably still there waiting to see what would happen to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the crowd of people that was still there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
23:14 dh77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, προσηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον 1 By **this man**, Pilate means Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “said to them about Jesus, ‘You brought this man to me’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -4199,7 +4199,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
23:35 m3f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σωσάτω ἑαυτόν 1 The implication is that Jesus ought to be able to save himself from dying on the cross, if he is the Messiah and can do miracles. Alternate translation: “let him do a miracle to save himself from dying on the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:35 a963 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ὁ ἐκλεκτός 1 The leaders are using the adjective **Chosen** as a noun. ULT adds the term **One** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the One whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
23:35 m649 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ὁ ἐκλεκτός 1 This is a title, not a description, so translate it following the conventions in your language for titles, for example, by capitalizing the main words. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
23:36 b3jz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέπαιξαν δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται, προσερχόμενοι ὄξος προσφέροντες αὐτῷ 1 Luke does not say specifically in what way the soliders **mocked** Jesus by offering him **vinegar**, that is, the sour wine that was their common drink. This could mean: (1) Since Luke records in the next verse that the soldiers spoke of Jesus being the “king of the Jews,” the common drink may have been intended to show that they did not really believe he was a king, since a king would have drunk fine wine. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him cheap sour wine, which was not what a real king would drink” (2) The soldiers may have **mocked** Jesus just by **offering** him something to drink, but then not giving it to him, even though he would have been very thirsty. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him some of their sour wine but then not giving him any to drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:36 b3jz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέπαιξαν δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται, προσερχόμενοι ὄξος προσφέροντες αὐτῷ 1 Luke does not say specifically in what way the soliders **mocked** Jesus by offering him **vinegar**, that is, the sour wine that was their common drink. This could mean: (1) since Luke records in the next verse that the soldiers spoke of Jesus being the “king of the Jews,” the common drink may have been intended to show that they did not really believe he was a king, since a king would have drunk fine wine. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him cheap sour wine, which was not what a real king would drink” (2) the soldiers may have **mocked** Jesus just by **offering** him something to drink, but then not giving it to him, even though he would have been very thirsty. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him some of their sour wine but then not giving him any to drink” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:37 x5wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων, σῶσον σεαυτόν 1 The soldiers are mockingly suggesting a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose you really are the King of the Jews. Then save yourself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
23:37 m650 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σῶσον σεαυτόν 1 The implication is that Jesus ought to be able to save himself from dying on the cross. Alternate translation: “do a miracle to save yourself from dying on that cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
23:38 l5be rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἦν δὲ καὶ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 Luke is referring figuratively to a placard that the soldiers placed above Jesus by association with the fact that it bore an **inscription**, that is, something that the soldiers had written on it. Alternate translation: “The soldiers also attached a placard at the top of Jesus’ cross on which they had written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -4230,7 +4230,7 @@ front:intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke\n\n\n## Part 1: Gener
23:44 m660 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background καὶ ἦν ἤδη 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. He explains that it was about noon so that readers will appreciate how extraordinary it was that the entire sky became dark. Alternate translation: “Now by this time it was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
23:44 x7fl ὡσεὶ ὥρα ἕκτη 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “about noon”
23:44 m661 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὡσεὶ ὥρα ἕκτη 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “around hour six” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
23:44 q4t3 σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν 1 This could mean: (1) The term translated as **land** may refer to a particular area. Alternate translation, as in UST: “it became dark throughout that whole area” (2) The term may also describe the earth. Alternate translation: “darkness covered the entire earth”
23:44 q4t3 σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν 1 The term translated as **land** could refer to: (1) a particular area. Alternate translation, as in UST: “it became dark throughout that whole area” (2) the earth. Alternate translation: “darkness covered the entire earth”
23:44 m662 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν 1 This could also be a figurative reference to the sky, since it is **over** the **land**. Alternate translation: “the entire sky became dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:44 e8zn ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 This phrase also expresses the way people in this culture began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “until three o’clock in the afternoon”
23:44 m663 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “until hour nine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

94
tn_MAT.tsv
View File

@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
2:2 v5t4 ποῦ ἐστιν ὁ τεχθεὶς Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων? 1 The men knew from studying the stars that the one who would become king had been born. They were trying to learn where he was. Alternate translation: “A baby who will become the king of the Jews has been born. Where is he?”
2:2 zj7c αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα 1 They were not saying that the baby was the rightful owner of the **star**. Alternate translation: “the star that tells about him” or “the star that is associated with his birth”
2:2 a7y9 ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ 1 “as it came up in the east” or “while we were in our country”
2:2 v248 προσκυνῆσαι 1 This could mean: (1) They intended to **worship** the baby as divine. (2) They wanted to honor him as a human king. If your language has a word that includes both meanings, you should consider using it here.
2:2 v248 προσκυνῆσαι 1 This could mean: (1) they intended to **worship** the baby as divine. (2) they wanted to honor him as a human king. If your language has a word that includes both meanings, you should consider using it here.
2:3 p5rw ἐταράχθη 1 “he was worried.” Herod was worried that this baby would replace him as king.
2:3 qu3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Here, **Jerusalem** refers to the people.Alternate translation: “all the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:3 mc1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Here, **all** means “many.” Matthew is exaggerating to emphasize how many people were worried. Alternate translation: “many of the people in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
3:16 inf6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς δὲ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But after John baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:16 sf5w ἰδοὺ 1 The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
3:16 jh1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρανοί 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus saw the sky open” or “God opened the heavens to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:16 e3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν 1 This could mean: (1) Matthew is simply saying that the Spirit was in the form of a **dove**. (2) This is a simile that compares the Spirit coming down upon Jesus gently, the way a **dove** would. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:16 e3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν 1 This could mean: (1) the Spirit was in the form of a **dove**. (2) this is a simile that compares the Spirit coming down upon Jesus gently, the way a **dove** would. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
3:17 m2wk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 “Jesus heard a voice from heaven saying.” Here, **voice** refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven saying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:17 myz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
4:intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “the kingdom of heaven has come near”\n\nNo one knows for use whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase “is coming near” and “has come near.”\n\n### “If you are the Son of God”\n\nThe reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as “Because you are the Son of God” or “You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do.” (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]])
@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
4:2 iw2i νηστεύσας & ἐπείνασεν 1 These refer to Jesus.
4:2 cft7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἡμέρας τεσσεράκοντα καὶ νύκτας τεσσεράκοντα 1 “forty days and forty nights.” This refers to 24-hour periods. Alternate translation: “40 days” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
4:3 vl86 ὁ πειράζων 1 These words refer to the same being as “the devil” (verse 1). You may have to use the same word to translate both.
4:3 l1lk εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰπὲ 1 It is best to assume that Satan knew that Jesus is the **Son of God**. This could mean: (1) This is a temptation to do miracles for Jesus’ own benefit. Alternate translation: “You are the Son of God, so you can command” (2) This is a challenge or accusation. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are the Son of God by speaking”
4:3 l1lk εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰπὲ 1 It is best to assume that Satan knew that Jesus is the **Son of God**. This could mean: (1) this is a temptation to do miracles for Jesus’ own benefit. Alternate translation: “You are the Son of God, so you can command” (2) this is a challenge or accusation. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are the Son of God by speaking”
4:3 c1ac rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
4:3 m1va rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰπὲ ἵνα οἱ λίθοι οὗτοι ἄρτοι γένωνται 1 You could translate this with a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “say to these stones, ‘Become bread.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
4:3 t3xm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἄρτοι 1 Here, **bread** refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
4:4 rld7 οὐκ ἐπ’ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 This implies that there is something more important to life than food.
4:4 jl6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ παντὶ ῥήματι ἐκπορευομένῳ διὰ στόματος Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word** and **mouth** refer to what God says. Alternate translation: “but by listening to everything that God says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:5 r4a5 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verse 6, Satan quotes from the Psalms in order to tempt Jesus.
4:6 fa8l εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν κάτω 1 It is best to assume that Satan knew that Jesus is the **Son of God**. This could mean: (1) This is a temptation to do a miracle for Jesus’ own benefit. Alternate translation: “Since you are truly the Son of God, you can throw yourself down” (2) This is a challenge or accusation. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are truly the Son of God by throwing yourself down”
4:6 fa8l εἰ Υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν κάτω 1 It is best to assume that Satan knew that Jesus is the **Son of God**. This could mean: (1) this is a temptation to do a miracle for Jesus’ own benefit. Alternate translation: “Since you are truly the Son of God, you can throw yourself down” (2) this is a challenge or accusation. Alternate translation: “Prove that you are truly the Son of God by throwing yourself down”
4:6 x2vg rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
4:6 c5kr βάλε σεαυτὸν κάτω 1 “let yourself fall to the ground” or “jump down”
4:6 a5h2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the writer wrote in the scriptures” or “for it says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
5:2 ji1p ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς 1 The word **them** refers to his disciples.
5:3 j7ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι 1 This means someone who is humble. Alternate translation: “those who know they need God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
5:3 wpi6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅτι αὐτῶν ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. This phrase is only in the book of Matthew. If possible, keep **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “for God in the heavens will be their king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:4 pgy8 οἱ πενθοῦντες 1 This could mean: (1) They are sad for the sinfulness of the world. (2) They are sad for their own sins. (3) They are sad for the death of someone. Do not specify the reason for mourning unless your language requires it.
5:4 pgy8 οἱ πενθοῦντες 1 This could mean: (1) they are sad for the sinfulness of the world. (2) They are sad for their own sins. (3) they are sad for the death of someone. Do not specify the reason for mourning unless your language requires it.
5:4 lie5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτοὶ παρακληθήσονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will comfort them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:5 mvb1 οἱ πραεῖς 1 “the gentle” or “those who do not rely on their own power”
5:5 iy1y αὐτοὶ κληρονομήσουσι τὴν γῆν 1 “God will give them the entire earth”
@ -262,8 +262,8 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
5:11 eez3 ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ 1 “because you follow me” or “because you believe in me”
5:12 ssk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet χαίρετε καὶ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε 1 Here, **Rejoice** and **be very glad** mean almost the same thing. Jesus wanted his hearers not merely to rejoice but to do even more than rejoice if possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
5:13 qp6l 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus begins to teach about how his disciples are like salt and light.
5:13 i3zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς 1 This could mean: (1) Just as **salt** makes food good, disciples of Jesus influence the people of the world so that they will be good. Alternate translation: “You are like salt for the people of the world” (2) Just as **salt** preserves food, disciples of Jesus keep people from becoming totally corrupt. Alternate translation: “As salt is for food, you are for the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 jv56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν & τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) The salt has lost its power to do things that salt does. (2) The salt has lost its flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 i3zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς 1 This could mean: (1) just as **salt** makes food good, disciples of Jesus influence the people of the world so that they will be good. Alternate translation: “You are like salt for the people of the world” (2) just as **salt** preserves food, disciples of Jesus keep people from becoming totally corrupt. Alternate translation: “As salt is for food, you are for the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 jv56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν & τὸ ἅλας μωρανθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) the salt has lost its power to do things that salt does. (2) the salt has lost its flavor. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 wp9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται? 1 “how can it be made useful again?” You can state this as a fact. Alternate translation: “there is no way for it to become useful again.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
5:13 yoif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τίνι ἁλισθήσεται? 1 Jesus uses a question to teach the disciples. Alternate translation: “a person who stops following Jesus cannot be made useful again.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
5:13 e7cz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ βληθὲν ἔξω, καταπατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “except for people to throw it out into the road and walk on it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -405,10 +405,10 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
6:5 rzpj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως φανῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that people will see them and give them honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:5 z3h6 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 “I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
6:6 dqv4 εἴσελθε εἰς τὸ ταμεῖόν σου καὶ κλείσας τὴν θύραν σου 1 “go to a private place” or “go where you can be alone”
6:6 vdr7 τῷ Πατρί σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) No one can see God. Alternate translation: “to your Father, who is invisible” (2) God is in that private place with the praying person. Alternate translation: “to your Father, who is with you in private”
6:6 vdr7 τῷ Πατρί σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) no one can see God. Alternate translation: “to your Father, who is invisible” (2) God is in that private place with the praying person. Alternate translation: “to your Father, who is with you in private”
6:6 kkn7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρί σου 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
6:6 eb6r ὁ Πατήρ σου, ὁ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 “your Father will see what you do in private and”
6:7 d1t2 μὴ βατταλογήσητε 1 This could mean: (1) The **repetitions** are **useless**. Alternate translation: “do not keep uselessly saying things over and over again” (2) The words or sentences are meaningless. Alternate translation: “do not keeping repeating meaningless words”
6:7 d1t2 μὴ βατταλογήσητε 1 This could mean: (1) the **repetitions** are **useless**. Alternate translation: “do not keep uselessly saying things over and over again” (2) the words or sentences are meaningless. Alternate translation: “do not keeping repeating meaningless words”
6:7 a8ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰσακουσθήσονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “their false gods will hear them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:8 fr1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus is talking to a group of people about how they as individuals should pray. The words **you** and **your** are plural in the first sentence. Within the prayer, the words **you** and **your** are singular and refer to God, “Our Father in heaven.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
6:8 nv9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@ -430,7 +430,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
6:16 xv6b ἀφανίζουσιν & τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν 1 The hypocrites would not wash their faces or comb their hair. They did this purposely to draw attention to themselves so that people would see them and give them honor for fasting.
6:16 ix6h ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 “I tell you the truth.” This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
6:17 k283 ἄλειψαί σου τὴν κεφαλὴν 1 “put oil in your hair” or “groom your hair.” To **anoint** the **head** here is to take normal care of one’s hair. It has nothing to do with “Christ” meaning “anointed one.” Jesus means that people should look the same whether they are fasting or not.
6:18 d27s τῷ Πατρί σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) No one can see God. Alternate translation: “Father, who is invisible” (2) God is with that person who fasts secretly. Alternate translation: “Father, who is with you in private” See how you translated this in [Matthew 6:6](../06/06.md).
6:18 d27s τῷ Πατρί σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ 1 This could mean: (1) no one can see God. Alternate translation: “Father, who is invisible” (2) God is with that person who fasts secretly. Alternate translation: “Father, who is with you in private” See how you translated this in [Matthew 6:6](../06/06.md).
6:18 m56a rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρί σου 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
6:18 tby8 ὁ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυφαίῳ 1 “who sees what you do in private.” See how you translated this in [Matthew 6:6](../06/06.md).
6:19 afg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should or should not do. All occurrences of “you” and “your” are plural, except in verse 21, where they are singular. In some languages these occurrences of “you” and “your” may also need to be plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
7:1 bk8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn you harshly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:2 f9nb γὰρ 1 Be sure the reader understands the statement in 7:2 is based on what Jesus said in 7:1.
7:2 kj24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ & κρίματι κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will condemn you in the same way you condemn others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:2 mt3d ᾧ μέτρῳ 1 This could mean: (1) This is the amount of punishment given. (2) This is the standard used for judgment.
7:2 mt3d ᾧ μέτρῳ 1 This could refer to: (1) the amount of punishment given. (2) the standard used for judgment.
7:2 wgh2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will measure it out to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7:3 hzb4 0 # General Information:\n\nJesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should or should not do. The instances of “you” and “your” are all singular, but in some languages they may need to be plural.
7:3 em5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος & τὴν δὲ ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς? 1 Jesus uses this question to rebuke the people for paying attention to other people’s sins and ignoring their own. Alternate translation: “You look at the speck … but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye.” or “Do not look at the speck … and ignore the log that is in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -529,7 +529,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
7:13 uhb3 0 # General Information:\n\nThis image of walking through a wide gate to destruction or a narrow gate to life represents how people live and the results of how they live. When you translate, use appropriate words for “wide” and “broad” that are as different as possible from “narrow” in order to emphasize the differences between the two sets of gates and ways.
7:13 dgr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰσέλθατε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης & πολλοί εἰσιν οἱ εἰσερχόμενοι δι’ αὐτῆς 1 This is an image of people traveling on a road and going through a **gate** into a kingdom. One kingdom is easy to enter; the other is hard to enter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
7:13 j8xn εἰσέλθατε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης 1 You may need to move this to the end of verse 14: “Therefore, enter through the narrow gate.”
7:13 y9ru τῆς στενῆς πύλης & ἡ ὁδὸς 1 This could mean: (1) The **way** refers to the road that leads to the **gate** of a kingdom. (2) The **gate** and **way** both refer to the entrance to the kingdom.
7:13 y9ru τῆς στενῆς πύλης & ἡ ὁδὸς 1 This could mean: (1) the **way** refers to the road that leads to the **gate** of a kingdom. (2) the **gate** and **way** both refer to the entrance to the kingdom.
7:13 zv24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 This abstract noun can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “to the place where people die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
7:14 x8u9 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues to speak of people choosing how they are going to live as if they are choosing whether to go on one path or another.
7:14 wlr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 The abstract noun **life** can be translated using the verb “live.” Alternate translation: “to the place where people live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
7:22 mp6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Jesus said **that day** knowing his hearers would understand he was referring to the day of judgment. You should include “the day of judgment” only if your readers would not understand otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:22 m9py rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι ἐπροφητεύσαμεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δαιμόνια ἐξεβάλομεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δυνάμεις πολλὰς ἐποιήσαμεν? 1 The people use a question to emphasize that they did these things. Alternate translation: “we prophesied in your name, and in your name cast out demons, and in your name did many mighty deeds.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
7:22 t5j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οὐ & ἐπροφητεύσαμεν 1 This **we** does not include Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
7:22 hg17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to his authority or power. (2) This means they were doing what he wanted them to do. or (3) This means they were asking him for the power to do it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:22 hg17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι 1 This could mean: (1) this refers to his authority or power. (2) they were doing what he wanted them to do. or (3) they were asking him for the power to do it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
7:22 p67f δυνάμεις 1 “miracles”
7:23 d4y5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐδέποτε ἔγνων ὑμᾶς 1 This means the person does not belong to Jesus. Alternate translation: “You are not my follower” or “I have nothing to do with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
7:24 fg9k οὖν 1 “For that reason”
@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
8:4 gt5s ὅρα μηδενὶ εἴπῃς 1 “Do not say anything to anyone” or “Do not tell anyone I healed you”
8:4 zi3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν, δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 Jewish law required that the person **show** his healed skin **to the priest**, who would then allow him or her to return to the community, to be with other people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:4 tq9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσένεγκον τὸ δῶρον ὃ προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 The law of **Moses** required that someone healed of leprosy give a thanksgiving offering to the priest. When the priest accepted the gift, people would know that the man had been healed. Lepers were ostracized, banned from the community, until they had proof of their healing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:4 rj8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the priests. (2) This refers to all the people. (3) This refers to the critics of Jesus. If possible, use a pronoun that could refer to any of these groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
8:4 rj8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 This could refer to: (1) the priests. (2) all the people. (3) the critics of Jesus. If possible, use a pronoun that could refer to any of these groups. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
8:5 sxz8 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere the scene shifts to a different time and place and tells of Jesus healing another person.
8:5 vzb9 προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ & παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 1 Here both instances of **him** refer to Jesus.
8:6 cr8h παραλυτικός 1 unable to move because of disease or stroke
@ -628,14 +628,14 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
8:20 qvm5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 2 Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
8:20 yl4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 This refers to a place to sleep. Alternate translation: “has no place of his own to sleep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8:21 hlx9 ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶτον ἀπελθεῖν καὶ θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου 1 It is unclear whether the man’s **father** has died and he will **bury** him immediately, or if the man wants to stay for a longer amount of time until his father dies so he can bury him then. The main point is that the man wants to do something else first before he follows Jesus.
8:22 h7fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς 1 Jesus does not mean literally that dead people will bury other dead people. Here, **the dead** could mean: (1) It is a metaphor for those who will soon die. (2) It is a metaphor for those who do not follow Jesus and are spiritually dead. The main point is that a disciple must not let anything delay him from following Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:22 h7fb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς 1 Jesus does not mean literally that dead people will bury other dead people. Here, **the dead** could be: (1) a metaphor for those who will soon die. (2) a metaphor for those who do not follow Jesus and are spiritually dead. The main point is that a disciple must not let anything delay him from following Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:23 us1s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere the scene shifts to the account of Jesus calming a storm as he and his disciples cross the Sea of Galilee.
8:23 e8k1 καὶ ἐμβάντι αὐτῷ εἰς πλοῖον 1 “And when he got into a boat”
8:23 sl7v ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Try to use the same words for **disciples** and **followed** that you used in ([Matthew 8:21-22](../08/21.md)).
8:24 j55j ἰδοὺ 1 This marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “suddenly” or “without warning”
8:24 x7k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεισμὸς μέγας ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a powerful storm arose on the sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:24 m6w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὥστε τὸ πλοῖον καλύπτεσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that the waves covered the boat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:25 k2hd ἤγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Κύριε, σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα! 1 This could mean: (1) They first woke Jesus and then they said, “Save us, Lord; we are perishing!” (2) As they were waking Jesus up, they were saying “Save us, Lord; we are perishing!”
8:25 k2hd ἤγειραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, Κύριε, σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα! 1 This could mean: (1) they first woke Jesus and then they said, “Save us, Lord; we are perishing!” (2) as they were waking Jesus up, they were saying “Save us, Lord; we are perishing!”
8:25 b2wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Κύριε, σῶσον, ἀπολλύμεθα! 1 If you need to translate these words as inclusive or exclusive, then inclusive is best. The disciples probably meant they wanted Jesus to save the disciples and himself from drowning. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
8:25 xf5d ἀπολλύμεθα 1 “we are about to die”
8:26 jmt8 αὐτοῖς 1 “to the disciples”
@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
9:2 k9qq τέκνον 1 The man was not Jesus’ real son. Jesus was speaking to him politely. If this is confusing, it can also be translated “My friend” or “Young man” or even omitted.
9:2 iys2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφίενταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I have forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:3 a35d ἰδού 1 This marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. It may involve different people than the previous events. Your language may have a way of doing this.
9:3 f88r ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) Each one was thinking to himself. (2) They were speaking among themselves.
9:3 f88r ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) each one was thinking to himself. (2) they were speaking among themselves.
9:3 mq8v βλασφημεῖ 1 Jesus was claiming to be able to do things the scribes thought only God can do.
9:4 u643 ἰδὼν & τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν 1 Jesus knew what they were thinking either supernaturally or because he could see them talking to each other.
9:4 n4yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἵνα τί ἐνθυμεῖσθε πονηρὰ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Jesus used this question to rebuke the scribes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
10:2 f1vu τῶν & δώδεκα ἀποστόλων 1 This is the same group as the “12 disciples” in [Matthew 10:1](../10/01.md).
10:2 sc7b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 This is first in order, not in rank. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
10:3 g6eg Μαθθαῖος ὁ τελώνης 1 “Matthew, who was a tax collector”
10:4 n4st ὁ Καναναῖος 1 This could mean: (1) The word **Zealot** is a title that shows that he was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the patriot” or “the nationalist” (2) The word **Zealot** is a description that shows that he was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the zealous one” or “the passionate one”
10:4 n4st ὁ Καναναῖος 1 The word **Zealot** could be: (1) a title that shows that he was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the patriot” or “the nationalist” (2) a description that shows that he was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the zealous one” or “the passionate one”
10:4 kmp2 ὁ καὶ παραδοὺς αὐτόν 1 “who would betray Jesus”
10:5 sn9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events 0 # General Information:\n\nAlthough verse 5 begins by saying that he sent out the twelve, Jesus gave these instructions before he sent them out. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
10:5 aw5h 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHere Jesus begins to give instructions to his disciples about what they should do and expect when they go to preach.
@ -847,7 +847,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
10:13 kc9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μὲν ᾖ ἡ οἰκία ἀξία & μὴ ᾖ ἀξία 1 Here, **the house** represents those who live in the house. A **worthy** person is a person who is willing to welcome the disciples. Jesus compares this person to one who is not worthy, a person who does not welcome the disciples. Alternate translation: “the people who live in that house receive you well” or “the people who live in that house treat you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:13 q75a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐλθάτω ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν ἐπ’ αὐτήν 1 The word **it** refers to the house, which represents the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “let them receive your peace” or “let them receive the peace that you greeted them with” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:13 ha8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν & μὴ ᾖ ἀξία 2 The word **it** means the house, and “house” refers to the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “if they do not receive you well” or “if they do not treat you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
10:13 my3y ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω 1 This could mean: (1) If the household was not worthy, then God would hold back peace or blessings from that household. (2) If the household was not worthy, then the apostles were supposed to do something, such as asking God not to honor their greeting of peace. If your language has a similar meaning of taking back a greeting or its effects, that should be used here.
10:13 my3y ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπιστραφήτω 1 This could mean: (1) if the household was not worthy, then God would hold back peace or blessings from that household. (2) if the household was not worthy, then the apostles were supposed to do something, such as asking God not to honor their greeting of peace. If your language has a similar meaning of taking back a greeting or its effects, that should be used here.
10:14 yn9k 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues to instruct his disciples about what they should do when they go to preach.
10:14 m8e9 καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται ὑμᾶς, μηδὲ ἀκούσῃ 1 “And if no people in that house or city will receive you or listen to”
10:14 w5py rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμᾶς & ὑμῶν 1 This is plural and refers to the twelve apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
10:25 bg2l πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 “the names that they call the members of his household will certainly be much worse” or “they will certainly call the members of his household much worse names”
10:25 cp96 εἰ & ἐπεκάλεσαν 1 “Since people have called”
10:25 pu5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην 1 Jesus is using this as a metaphor for himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:25 y5md Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 This name can either translated as follows: (1) It can be transcribed directly as “Beelzebul.” (2) It can be translated with its original, intended meaning of “Satan.”
10:25 y5md Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 The name **Beelzebul** could be translated: (1) as “Beelzebul.” (2) with its original, intended meaning of “Satan.”
10:25 r5ll rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 This is a metaphor for Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10:26 zb2j 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues to instruct his disciples about the persecution they will endure when they go out to preach.
10:26 twv2 μὴ & φοβηθῆτε αὐτούς 1 Here, **them** refers to the people who mistreat followers of Jesus.
@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
12:8 jx98 Κύριος & ἐστιν τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 “rules over the Sabbath” or “makes the laws about what people can do on the Sabbath”
12:9 i489 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the scene shifts to a later time when the Pharisees criticize Jesus for healing a man on the Sabbath.
12:9 hns8 καὶ μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν 1 “After Jesus left the grain fields” or “When Jesus left from there”
12:9 y4me τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **their** refers to the Jews of that town. Alternate translation: “the synogogue” (2) The word **their** refers to the Pharisees that Jesus had just spoken to, and this was the synagogue that they and other Jews in that town attended. The word **their** does not mean that the Pharisees owned the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that they attended”
12:9 y4me τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 The word **their** could refer to: (1) the Jews of that town. Alternate translation: “the synogogue” (2) the Pharisees that Jesus had just spoken to, and this was the synagogue that they and other Jews in that town attended. The word **their** does not mean that the Pharisees owned the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that they attended”
12:10 kjf6 ἰδοὺ 1 The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
12:10 xb13 ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 “there was a man who had a paralyzed hand” or “there was a man with a crippled hand”
12:10 t948 ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, εἰ ἔξεστι τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύειν? ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 “the Pharisees wanted to accuse Jesus of sinning, so they asked him, ‘Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath?’”
@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
12:32 hfs4 οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will not forgive that person”
12:32 lw5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὔτε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 Here, **this age** and **the one coming** refer to the present life and the next life. Alternate translation: “in this life or in the next life” or “now or ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:33 d73d 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues to respond to the Pharisees.
12:33 bi8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν 1 This could mean: (1) If you make a tree good, its fruit will be good, and if you make the tree bad, its fruit will be bad. (2) This is a proverb that means if you consider a tree to be good, it will be because its fruit is good, and if you consider it tree to be bad, it will be because its fruit is bad. People were to apply its truth to how they can know whether a person is good or bad. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
12:33 bi8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν 1 This could mean: (1) if you make a tree good, its fruit will be good, and if you make the tree bad, its fruit will be bad. (2) this is a proverb that means if you consider a tree to be good, it will be because its fruit is good, and if you consider it tree to be bad, it will be because its fruit is bad. People were to apply its truth to how they can know whether a person is good or bad. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
12:33 kl16 καλὸν & σαπρὸν 1 “healthy … diseased”
12:33 kz12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for what a person does. Alternate translation: “people know whether a person is good or bad by looking at the results of that person’s activities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12:33 nx9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people know whether a tree is good or bad by looking at its fruit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -1268,7 +1268,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
12:41 gnh1 ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 “The citizens of Nineveh”
12:41 b94i ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 “on judgment day” or “when God judges people”
12:41 x8gm τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 This refers to the people living during the time Jesus was preaching.
12:41 duz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **condemn** here represents accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) God **will condemn** this generation of people because they did not repent as the people of Nineveh had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:41 duz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν 1 The word **condemn** could: (1) here represent accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) mean God **will condemn** this generation of people because they did not repent as the people of Nineveh had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:41 qg29 καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 “and look.” This emphasizes what Jesus says next.
12:41 dbs3 πλεῖον 1 “someone more important”
12:41 zb6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person πλεῖον 1 Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@ -1278,7 +1278,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
12:42 kku7 ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 “will stand up at the judgment”
12:42 z46e ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 “on judgment day” or “when God judges people.” See how you translated this in [Matthew 12:41](../12/41.md).
12:42 zc72 τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 This refers to the people living during the time Jesus was preaching.
12:42 k4ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν 1 See how you translated a similar statement in [Matthew 12:41](../12/41.md). This could mean: (1) The word **condemn** here represents accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) God will **condemn** this generation of people because they did not listen to wisdom as the Queen of the South had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:42 k4ls rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν 1 See how you translated a similar statement in [Matthew 12:41](../12/41.md). The word **condemn** could: (1) here represent accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) mean God will **condemn** this generation of people because they did not listen to wisdom as the Queen of the South had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
12:42 q8q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **the ends of the earth** is an idiom that means “far away.” Alternate translation: “she came from very far away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
12:42 t521 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος 1 This statement explains why the Queen of the South will condemn the people of Jesus’ generation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
12:42 n99z καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 “and look.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
@ -1349,9 +1349,9 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
13:13 hm4t 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues to explain to his disciples why he teaches in parables.
13:13 v6pb αὐτοῖς & οὐ βλέπουσιν & οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 All occurrences of **them** and **they** refer to the people in the crowd.
13:13 uk7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὅτι βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσιν, καὶ ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδὲ συνίουσιν 1 Jesus uses this parallelism to tell and emphasize to the disciples that the crowd refuses to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
13:13 ae8k βλέποντες 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to them **seeing** what Jesus does. Alternate translation: “though they see what I do” (2) This refers to their ability to see. Alternate translation: “though they are able to see”
13:13 ae8k βλέποντες 1 This could refer to: (1) them **seeing** what Jesus does. Alternate translation: “though they see what I do” (2) their ability to see. Alternate translation: “though they are able to see”
13:13 nbi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ βλέπουσιν 1 Here, **see** represents understanding. Alternate translation: “they do not understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:13 j4bg ἀκούοντες 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to them **hearing** what Jesus teaches. Alternate translation: “though they hear what I say” (2) This refers to their ability to hear. Alternate translation: “though they are able to hear”
13:13 j4bg ἀκούοντες 1 This could refer to: (1) them **hearing** what Jesus teaches. Alternate translation: “though they hear what I say” (2) their ability to hear. Alternate translation: “though they are able to hear”
13:13 gq65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 Here, **hear** represents listening well. Alternate translation: “they do not listen well” or “they do not pay attention” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:14 jz9n καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And they are fulfilling what God said long ago through the prophet Isaiah”
13:14 z2es rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 This begins a quote from the prophet Isaiah about the unbelieving people of Isaiah’s day. Jesus uses this quote to describe the very crowd that was listening to him. These statements are again parallel and emphasize that the people refused to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
@ -1566,7 +1566,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
14:19 u613 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom λαβὼν 1 “he held in his hands.” He did not steal them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
14:19 i34u κλάσας, ἔδωκεν & τοὺς ἄρτους 1 “after tearing the loaves into pieces, he gave them”
14:19 bf1a τοὺς ἄρτους 1 “the pieces of the loaves of bread”
14:19 t7ei ἀναβλέψας 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to while they were looking up. (2) This refers to after they looked up.
14:19 t7ei ἀναβλέψας 1 This could refer to: (1) while they were looking up. (2) after they looked up.
14:20 l2h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they were full” or “until they were no longer hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14:20 p73g ἦραν 1 “the disciples gathered up” or “some people gathered up”
14:20 czj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers δώδεκα κοφίνους πλήρεις 1 “twelve baskets full” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@ -1711,7 +1711,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
16:17 gi3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
16:18 z897 κἀγὼ δέ σοι λέγω 1 This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
16:18 th3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ εἶ Πέτρος 1 The name Peter means “rock.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16:18 x43d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. This could mean: (1) The phrase **this rock** represents Peter. (2) The phrase **this rock** represents the truth that Peter had just said in [Matthew 16:16](../16/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:18 x43d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Here, **build my church** is a metaphor for uniting the people who believe in Jesus into a community. The phrase **this rock** could represent: (1) Peter. (2) the truth that Peter had just said in [Matthew 16:16](../16/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:18 vu9u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 Here, **Hades** represents death, and its “gates” represent its power. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:18 l6o0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πύλαι ᾍδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν αὐτῆς 1 Here, **Hades** is spoken of as if it were a city surrounded by walls with gates that keep dead people in and other people out. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying the powers of death will not overcome his church. (2) Jesus is saying his church will break down the power of death the way an army breaks into a city. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
16:19 ysk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you δώσω σοι 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Peter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
@ -1773,7 +1773,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
17:10 nwt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγουσιν ὅτι Ἠλείαν δεῖ ἐλθεῖν πρῶτον? 1 The disciples are referring to the belief that **Elijah** will come back to life and return to the people of Israel before the Messiah comes. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17:11 xbs2 ἀποκαταστήσει πάντα 1 “will put things in order” or “will get the people ready to receive the Messiah”
17:12 whp9 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν 1 This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
17:12 a4h7 ἐποίησαν & αὐτῶν 1 Here, **they** and **them** could mean: (1) These refer to the Jewish leaders. (2) These refer to all the Jewish people.
17:12 a4h7 ἐποίησαν & αὐτῶν 1 Here, **they** and **them** could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. (2) all the Jewish people.
17:12 i74i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
17:14 t687 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis begins an account of Jesus healing a boy who had an evil spirit. These events happen immediately after Jesus and his disciples descend from the mountain.
17:15 ufb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλέησόν μου τὸν υἱόν 1 It is implied that the man wants Jesus to heal his son. Alternate translation: “have mercy on my son and heal him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1876,7 +1876,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
18:20 s5rx συνηγμένοι 1 “meeting together”
18:20 l7vu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα 1 Here, **name** refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because they are my disciples” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
18:21 cys4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑπτάκις 1 “7 times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
18:22 b19x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑβδομηκοντάκις ἑπτά 1 This could mean: (1) This means 70 times 7. (2) This means 77 times. If using a number would be confusing, you can translate it as “more times than you can count” or “you must always forgive him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
18:22 b19x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑβδομηκοντάκις ἑπτά 1 This could mean: (1) 70 times 7. (2) 77 times. If using a number would be confusing, you can translate it as “more times than you can count” or “you must always forgive him.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
18:23 n44s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus uses a parable to teach about forgiveness and reconciliation.
18:23 rqp1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 This introduces a parable. See how you translated a similar parable introduction in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
18:23 bp72 συνᾶραι λόγον μετὰ τῶν δούλων αὐτοῦ 1 “his slaves to pay him what they owed”
@ -2358,7 +2358,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
23:37 xv4t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὃν τρόπον ὄρνις ἐπισυνάγει τὰ νοσσία αὐτῆς ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας 1 This is a simile that emphasizes Jesus’ love for the people and how he wanted to take care of them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
23:37 as8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὄρνις 1 a female chicken. You can translate with any bird that protects her children under her wing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
23:38 r6ss ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημος 1 “God will leave your house, and it will be empty”
23:38 ck2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the city of Jerusalem. (2) This refers to the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:38 ck2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 This could refer to: (1) the city of Jerusalem. (2) the temple. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23:39 i14n λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν 1 This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
23:39 ig61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου! 1 Here, **in the name** means “in the power” or “as a representative.” See how you translated this in [Matthew 21:9](../21/09.md). Alternate translation: “He who comes in the power of the Lord is blessed” or “He who comes as the representative of the Lord will be blessed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
24:intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “The end of the age”\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### The example of Noah\n\nIn the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “Let”\n\nThe ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as “let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains” (24:16), “let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house” (24:17), and “let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak” (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages.
@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
24:11 mi2e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθήσονται 1 Here, **be raised up** is an idiom for “become established.” Alternate translation: “will come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:11 tjb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ πλανήσουσιν πολλούς 1 Here, **lead … astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “and will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24:12 w4af rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ πληθυνθῆναι τὴν ἀνομίαν 1 The abstract noun **lawlessness** can be translated with the phrase “disobeying the law.” Alternate translation: “disobeying the law will increase” or “people will disobey God’s law more and more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
24:12 bu9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν 1 This could mean: (1) Many people will no longer love other people. (2) Many people will no longer love God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:12 bu9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν 1 This could mean: (1) many people will no longer love other people. (2) many people will no longer love God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
24:13 v3ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save the person who endures to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:13 l1pp ὁ δὲ ὑπομείνας 1 “But the person who stays faithful”
24:13 ht34 εἰς τέλος 1 It is not clear whether **the end** refers to when a person dies or when the persecution ends or the end of the age when God shows himself to be king. The main point is that they endure as long as necessary.
@ -2409,7 +2409,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
24:26 n2pt ἐν τοῖς ταμείοις 1 “he is in a secret room” or “he is in secret places”
24:27 j1w1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ & ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἐξέρχεται ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ φαίνεται ἕως δυσμῶν, οὕτως ἔσται ἡ παρουσία 1 This means that the Son of Man will come very quickly and will be easy to see. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
24:27 za8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
24:28 mu35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ὅπου ἐὰν ᾖ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ ἀετοί 1 This is probably a proverb that the people of Jesus’ time understood. This could mean: (1) When the Son of Man comes, everyone will see him and know that he has come. (2) Wherever spiritually dead people are, false prophets will be there to tell them lies. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
24:28 mu35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs ὅπου ἐὰν ᾖ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ ἀετοί 1 This is probably a proverb that the people of Jesus’ time understood. This could mean: (1) when the Son of Man comes, everyone will see him and know that he has come. (2) wherever spiritually dead people are, false prophets will be there to tell them lies. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
24:28 ivl8 οἱ ἀετοί 1 birds that eat the bodies of dead or dying creatures
24:29 zmm6 εὐθέως & μετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων, ὁ ἥλιος 1 “as soon as the tribulation of those days has finished, the sun”
24:29 l15m τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων 1 “that time of suffering”
@ -2427,7 +2427,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
24:33 cfz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ θύραις 1 “close to the gates.” Jesus uses the imagery of a king or important official getting close to the gates of a walled city. It is a metaphor meaning the time for Jesus to come is soon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24:34 j8np ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
24:34 gld5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 Here, **pass away** is a polite way of saying “die.” Alternate translation: “this generation will not all die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
24:34 y73t ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the people alive when Jesus was speaking. (2) This refers to all people alive when these things Jesus has just described happen. Try to translate so that both interpretations are possible.
24:34 y73t ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 This could refer to: (1) the people alive when Jesus was speaking. (2) all people alive when these things Jesus has just described happen. Try to translate so that both interpretations are possible.
24:34 fb4k ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται 1 “until God causes all these things to happen”
24:34 r6sk οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ 1 “will certainly not disappear” or “will certainly remain alive”
24:35 i8vv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσεται 1 The phrase **the heaven and the earth** is a synecdoche that includes everything that God has created, especially those things that seem permanent. Jesus is saying that his word, unlike these things, is permanent. Alternate translation: “Even the heaven and the earth will pass away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@ -2442,7 +2442,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
24:39 ah5v ἦρεν ἅπαντας; οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 You can translate this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “too them all away. This is how it will be when the Son of Man comes”
24:40 ksk6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus begins to tell his disciples to be ready for his return.
24:40 hth3 τότε 1 This is when the Son of Man comes.
24:40 gt4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἷς παραλαμβάνεται, καὶ εἷς ἀφίεται 1 This could mean: (1) The Son of Man will take one away to heaven and will leave the other on earth for punishment. (2) The angels will take one away for punishment and leave the other for blessing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:40 gt4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἷς παραλαμβάνεται, καὶ εἷς ἀφίεται 1 This could mean: (1) the Son of Man will take one away to heaven and will leave the other on earth for punishment. (2) the angels will take one away for punishment and leave the other for blessing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24:42 j83i οὖν 1 “Because what I have just said is true,”
24:42 s6ir γρηγορεῖτε 1 “pay attention”
24:43 ak6a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης, ποίᾳ φυλακῇ ὁ κλέπτης ἔρχεται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν, καὶ οὐκ ἂν εἴασεν διορυχθῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses a parable of a **master** and a **thief** to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
25:intro qe8a 0 # Matthew 25 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter continues the teaching of the previous chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The parable of the ten virgins\n\nJesus told the parable of the ten virgins ([Matthew 25:1-13](./01.md)) to tell his followers to be ready for him to return. His hearers could understand the parable because they knew Jewish wedding customs.\n\nWhen the Jews arranged marriages, they would plan for the wedding to take place weeks or months later. At the proper time, the young man would go to his bride’s house, where she would be waiting for him. The wedding ceremony would take place, and then the man and his bride would travel to his home, where there would be a feast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
25:1 em28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus tells a parable about wise and foolish virgins to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
25:1 pg5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁμοιωθήσεται ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “when our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
25:1 uhj1 λαμπάδας 1 This could mean: (1) It refers to **lamps**. (2) This refers to torches made by putting cloth around the end of a stick and wetting the cloth with oil.
25:1 uhj1 λαμπάδας 1 This could could refer to: (1) oil **lamps**. (2) torches made by putting cloth around the end of a stick and wetting the cloth with oil.
25:2 c8nf πέντε & ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 “five of the virgins”
25:3 b37a οὐκ ἔλαβον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἔλαιον 1 “took with them only the oil in their lamps”
25:5 r458 δὲ 1 This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Jesus starts to tell a new part of the story.
@ -2601,12 +2601,12 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
26:17 e7wc 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis begins the account of Jesus celebrating the Passover with his disciples.
26:17 f3s2 δὲ 1 This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story.
26:18 hc78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν πόλιν πρὸς τὸν δεῖνα καὶ εἴπατε αὐτῷ, ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ὁ καιρός μου ἐγγύς ἐστιν; πρὸς σὲ ποιῶ τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου. 1 This has quotations within quotations. You can state some of the direct quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “But he told his disciples to go into the city to a certain man and tell him that the Teacher says to him, ‘My time is at hand. I will keep the Passover at your house with my disciples.’” or “But he told his disciples to go into the city to a certain man and say to him that the Teacher’s time is at hand and he will keep the Passover with his disciples at that man’s house.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
26:18 r4tg ὁ καιρός μου 1 This could mean: (1) The is the time that Jesus told them about. (2) This is the time God has set for Jesus.
26:18 a4i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) It “is near.” (2) It “has come.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:18 r4tg ὁ καιρός μου 1 This could refer to: (1) the time that Jesus told them about. (2) the time God has set for Jesus.
26:18 a4i5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) it “is near.” (2) it “has come.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:18 j9pz ποιῶ τὸ Πάσχα 1 “I am eat the Passover meal” or “I am celebrating the Passover by eating the special meal”
26:20 bga4 ἀνέκειτο 1 Use the word for the position people in your culture usually are in when they eat.
26:21 ehx6 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next.
26:22 n12r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, Κύριε? 1 “I am surely not the one, am I, Lord?” This could mean: (1) This is a rhetorical question since the apostles were sure they would not betray Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, I would never betray you!” (2) This was a sincere question since Jesus’ statement probably troubled and confused them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:22 n12r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, Κύριε? 1 “I am surely not the one, am I, Lord?” This could be: (1) a rhetorical question since the apostles were sure they would not betray Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, I would never betray you!” (2) a sincere question since Jesus’ statement probably troubled and confused them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:24 n7dw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
26:24 x2n9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὑπάγει 1 Here, **depart** is a polite way to refer to dying. Alternate translation: “will go to his death” or “will die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
26:24 vix3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote about him in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -2713,7 +2713,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
26:63 lry9 τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, **living** contrasts the **God** of Israel to all the false gods and idols that people worshiped. Only the God of Israel is alive and has power to act. See how you translated this in [Matthew 16:16](../16/16.md).
26:64 gi6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σὺ εἶπας 1 This is an idiom that Jesus uses to mean “yes” without being completely clear about what he means. Alternate translation: “You are saying it” or “You are admitting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26:64 zu47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπ’ ἄρτι ὄψεσθε 1 Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is speaking to the high priest and to the other persons there. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
26:64 ll8r ἀπ’ ἄρτι ὄψεσθε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The phrase **from now on** could mean: (1) This is an idiom that means they will see the Son of Man in his power at some time in the future. (2) This means that from the time of Jesus’ trial and onward, Jesus is showing himself to be the Messiah who is powerful and victorious.
26:64 ll8r ἀπ’ ἄρτι ὄψεσθε τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The phrase **from now on** could: (1) be an idiom that means they will see the Son of Man in his power at some time in the future. (2) means that from the time of Jesus’ trial and onward, Jesus is showing himself to be the Messiah who is powerful and victorious.
26:64 b6cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in third person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
26:64 p5px rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καθήμενον ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμεως 1 Here, **Power** is metonym that represents God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
26:64 lcxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction καθήμενον ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμεως 1 To sit at the **right hand of God** is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “sitting in the place of honor beside the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@ -2722,7 +2722,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
26:65 qq51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐβλασφήμησεν 1 The reason the high priest called Jesus’ statement **blasphemy** is probably that he understood Jesus’ words in [Matthew 26:64](../26/64.md) as a claim to be equal with God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26:65 t68t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων? 1 The high priest uses this question to emphasize that he and the members of the council do not need to hear from any more witnesses. Alternate translation: “We do not need to hear from any more witnesses!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
26:65 wh4h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you νῦν ἠκούσατε 1 Here, **you** is plural and refers to the members of the council. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
26:67 adc2 τότε ἐνέπτυσαν 1 This could mean: (1) Some of the men spit. (2) The soldiers spit.
26:67 adc2 τότε ἐνέπτυσαν 1 This could mean: (1) some of the men spit. (2) the soldiers spit.
26:67 g1c2 ἐνέπτυσαν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 This was done as an insult.
26:68 f2bj προφήτευσον ἡμῖν 1 Here, **Prophesy to us** means to tell by means of God’s power. It does not mean to tell what will happen in the future.
26:68 b5xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony Χριστέ 1 Those hitting Jesus do not really think he is the **Christ**. They call him this to mock him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
@ -2750,7 +2750,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
27:3 pe4n τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια 1 This was the money that the chief priests had given Judas to betray Jesus. See how you translated it in [Matthew 26:15](../26/15.md).
27:4 f6u8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αἷμα ἀθῷον 1 This is an idiom that refers to the death of an **innocent** person. Alternate translation: “a person who does not deserve to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
27:4 mf6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 The Jewish leaders use this question to emphasize that they do not care about what Judas said. Alternate translation: “That is not our problem!” or “That is your problem!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
27:5 tuh4 ῥίψας τὰ ἀργύρια εἰς τὸν ναὸν 1 This could mean: (1) He threw **the pieces of silver** while in the **temple** courtyard. (2) He was standing in the temple courtyard, and he threw **the pieces of silver** into the **temple**.
27:5 tuh4 ῥίψας τὰ ἀργύρια εἰς τὸν ναὸν 1 This could mean: (1) he threw **the pieces of silver** while in the **temple** courtyard. (2) he was standing in the temple courtyard, and he threw **the pieces of silver** into the **temple**.
27:6 r5r9 οὐκ ἔξεστιν βαλεῖν αὐτὰ 1 “Our laws do not allow us to put this”
27:6 ce2x βαλεῖν αὐτὰ 1 “to put this silver”
27:6 gtp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν κορβανᾶν 1 This is the place they kept the money they used to provide for things needed for the temple and the priests. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -2818,7 +2818,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
27:39 d4fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν 1 They did this to make fun of Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
27:40 t23i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ κατάβηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 They did not believe that Jesus is **the Son of God**, so they wanted him to prove it if it was true. Alternate translation: “If you are the Son of God, prove it by coming down from the cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
27:40 b5lw rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples υἱὸς & τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for the Christ that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
27:42 ff4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἄλλους ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται σῶσαι 1 This could mean: (1) The Jewish leaders do not believe that Jesus **saved others** or that he can **save himself**. (2) They believe he did save others but are laughing at him because now he cannot **save himself**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
27:42 ff4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἄλλους ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται σῶσαι 1 This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders do not believe that Jesus **saved others** or that he can **save himself**. (2) they believe he did save others but are laughing at him because now he cannot **save himself**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
27:42 j6l7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραήλ ἐστιν, 1 The leaders are mocking Jesus. They call him **King of Israel**, but they do not really believe he is king. Alternate translation: “He says that he is the King of Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
27:43 w46n 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe Jewish leaders continue mocking Jesus.
27:43 cl97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν γὰρ, ὅτι Θεοῦ εἰμι Υἱός. 1 This is a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Jesus even said that he is the Son of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
@ -2829,7 +2829,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
27:45 pi8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν 1 The word **darkness** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “it became dark over the whole land” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27:46 qyp7 ἀνεβόησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 “Jesus called out” or “Jesus shouted”
27:46 xub2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει 1 These words are what Jesus cried out in his own language. Translators usually leave these words as is. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
27:48 jm37 εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to one of the soldiers. (2) This refers to one of those who stood by and watched.
27:48 jm37 εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 This could refer to: (1) one of the soldiers. (2) one of those who stood by and watched.
27:48 bsy1 σπόγγον 1 This is a sea animal that is harvested and used to take up and hold liquids. These liquids can later be pushed out.
27:48 ny3e ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν 1 “gave it to Jesus”
27:50 fj1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἀφῆκεν τὸ πνεῦμα 1 Here, **spirit** refers to that which gives life to a person. This phrase is a way of saying that Jesus died. Alternate translation: “he died, giving his spirit over to God” or “he breathed his last breath” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
@ -2862,7 +2862,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
27:64 c7bf ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
27:64 u5tg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χείρων τῆς πρώτης 1 You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “and if they deceive people by saying that, it will be worse than the way he deceived people before when he said that he was the Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
27:65 dkq9 κουστωδίαν 1 This consisted of four to sixteen Roman soldiers.
27:66 pk1q σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον 1 This could mean: (1) They put a cord around **the stone** and attached it to the rock wall on either side of the entrance to the tomb. (2) They put seals between **the stone** and the wall.
27:66 pk1q σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον 1 This could mean: (1) they put a cord around **the stone** and attached it to the rock wall on either side of the entrance to the tomb. (2) they put seals between **the stone** and the wall.
27:66 e8uf μετὰ τῆς κουστωδίας 1 “and having told the soldiers to stand where they could keep people from tampering with the tomb”
28:intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The tomb\n\nThe tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.\n\n### “Make disciples”\n\nThe last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](../19.md)) are commonly known as “The Great Commission” because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to “make disciples” by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### An angel of the Lord\n\nMatthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md))
28:1 anr1 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis begins the account of the resurrection of Jesus from the dead.
@ -2870,7 +2870,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
28:1 gs43 δὲ 1 This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story.
28:1 zu2b ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία 1 “the other woman named Mary.” This is **Mary** the mother of James and Joseph ([Matthew 27:56](../27/56.md)).
28:2 j25i ἰδοὺ 1 The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. Your language may have a way of doing this.
28:2 l4s2 σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας; ἄγγελος γὰρ Κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ προσελθὼν, ἀπεκύλισε τὸν λίθον 1 This could mean: (1) The **earthquake happened** because the **angel** came down and **rolled away the stone**. (2) All these events happened at the same time.
28:2 l4s2 σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας; ἄγγελος γὰρ Κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ προσελθὼν, ἀπεκύλισε τὸν λίθον 1 This could mean: (1) the **earthquake happened** because the **angel** came down and **rolled away the stone**. (2) all these events happened at the same time.
28:2 s43v σεισμὸς & μέγας 1 a sudden and violent shaking of the ground
28:3 vfh4 ἡ εἰδέα αὐτοῦ 1 “the angel’s appearance”
28:3 p12y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἦν & ὡς ἀστραπὴ 1 This is a simile that emphasizes how bright in appearance the angel was. Alternate translation: “was bright like lightning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@ -2902,7 +2902,7 @@ front:intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew\n\n## Part 1: Gene
28:15 cp7r ὁ λόγος οὗτος παρὰ Ἰουδαίοις μέχρι τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας 1 “Many Jews heard this report and continue to tell others about it even today”
28:15 vp3a μέχρι τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας 1 This refers to the time Matthew wrote the book.
28:16 h1ln 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis begins the account of Jesus meeting with his disciples after his resurrection.
28:17 pze9 προσεκύνησαν, οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν 1 This could mean: (1) They all worshiped Jesus even though some of them doubted. (2) Some of them worshiped Jesus, but others did not worship him because they doubted.
28:17 pze9 προσεκύνησαν, οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν 1 This could mean: (1) they all worshiped Jesus even though some of them doubted. (2) some of them worshiped Jesus, but others did not worship him because they doubted.
28:17 xgr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν 1 You can state this explicitly what the disciples doubted. Alternate translation: “some doubted that he was really Jesus and that he had become alive again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
28:18 v37p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι πᾶσα ἐξουσία 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “My Father has given me all authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28:18 sm35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean everyone and everything in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])

Can't render this file because it is too large.

48
tn_MRK.tsv
View File

@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
1:8 e4qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This metaphor compares John’s baptism with water to the future baptism with the **Holy Spirit**. This means John’s baptism only symbolically cleanses people of their sins. The baptism by the Holy Spirit will truly cleanse people of their sins. If possible, use the same word for **baptize** here as you used for John’s baptism to keep the comparison between the two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:9 u65k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 This marks the beginning of a new event in the story line. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1:9 gi39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:10 m5f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) This is a simile, and **the Spirit** descended upon Jesus as a bird descends from the sky toward the ground. (2) The **Spirit** literally looked **like a dove** as he descended upon Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1:10 m5f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) this is a simile, and **the Spirit** descended upon Jesus as a bird descends from the sky toward the ground. (2) the **Spirit** literally looked **like a dove** as he descended upon Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
1:11 e6ke rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 The **voice** represents God speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:11 ky16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Sometimes people avoid referring directly to God because they respect him. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:11 s6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 This is an important title for Jesus. The Father calls Jesus his **beloved Son** because of his eternal love for him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
1:44 a7hs ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 “Be sure to not say anything to anyone”
1:44 xhu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest if they had been unclean but were no longer unclean. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:44 w6b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σεαυτὸν δεῖξον 1 The word **yourself** here represents the skin of the leper. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:44 ish7 μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 It is best to use the pronoun **them**, if possible, in your language. This could mean: (1) It was to be a testimony to the priests. (2) It was to be a testimony to the people.
1:44 ish7 μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 It is best to use the pronoun **them**, if possible, in your language. This could be: (1) a testimony to the priests. (2) a testimony to the people.
1:45 m63p ὁ δὲ ἐξελθὼν 1 The word **he** refers to the man Jesus healed.
1:45 i91a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:45 bn6r ὥστε 1 “so much that”
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
2:3 c1vr φέροντες & παραλυτικὸν 1 “bringing a man who was unable to walk or use his arms”
2:4 h3yn μὴ δυνάμενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ 1 “they could not get close to where Jesus was”
2:4 v6ma ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay and covered with tiles. The process of making a hole in the roof can be explained more clearly or made more general so that it may be understood in your language. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered”
2:5 trg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 “Having seen the men’s faith.” This could mean: (1) Only the men who carried the paralyzed man had **faith**. (2) The paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had **faith**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:5 trg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 “Having seen the men’s faith.” This could mean: (1) only the men who carried the paralyzed man had **faith**. (2) the paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had **faith**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:5 hzg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. Alternate translation: “My son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:5 vd3i ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If possible translate this in such a way that Jesus does not clearly say who forgives the man’s **sins**. Alternate translation: “your sins are gone” or “you do not have to pay for your sins” or “your sins do not count against you”
2:6 le6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “were thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
2:15 udb2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIt is now later in the day, and Jesus is at Levi’s house for a meal.
2:15 if3i τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 “the home of Levi”
2:15 qf38 ἁμαρτωλοὶ 1 people who did not obey the law of Moses but committed what others thought were very bad sins
2:15 bwv2 ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus. (2) Jesus had many disciples and they followed him.
2:15 bwv2 ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) there were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus. (2) Jesus had many disciples and they followed him.
2:16 b1bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 The scribes and Pharisees asked this question to show they disapproved of Jesus’ hospitality. This can be worded as a statement. Alternate translation: “He should not eat with sinners and tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:17 ba3n 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus responds to what the scribes had said to his disciples about his eating with tax collectors and sinful people.
2:17 q8r6 λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 “he said to the scribes”
@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
2:17 ca4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 The words “I came to call” are understood from the phrase before this. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:18 zkz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus tells parables to show why his disciples should not fast while he is with them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
2:18 f1ds ἦσαν & οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 These two phrases refer to the same group of people, but the second is more specific. Both refer to the followers of the Pharisee sect, but they do not focus on the leaders of the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “the disciples of the Pharisees were fasting … the disciples of the Pharisees”
2:18 z394 ἔρχονται 1 “some men are coming.” It is best to translate this phrase without specifying exactly who these men are. If in your language you have to be more specific, this could mean: (1) These men were not among John’s disciples or the disciples of the Pharisees. (2) These men were among John’s disciples.
2:18 z394 ἔρχονται 1 “some men are coming.” It is best to translate this phrase without specifying exactly who these men are. If in your language you have to be more specific, this could mean: (1) these men were not among John’s disciples or the disciples of the Pharisees. (2) these men were among John’s disciples.
2:18 vl3z ἔρχονται καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ 1 “they came and said to Jesus”
2:19 eke3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 Jesus uses this question to remind the people of something they already know and to encourage them to apply it to him and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Wedding attendants do not fast while the bridegroom is with them. Rather they celebrate and feast.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2:20 vg2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ & ὁ νυμφίος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will go away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
3:20 jxr5 καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον 1 “Then Jesus went to the house where he was staying.”
3:20 rq6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν 1 The word **bread** represents food. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples could not eat at all” or “they could not eat anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3:21 bk6g ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν 1 Members of his family went to the house, so that they could take hold of him and force him to go home with them.
3:21 uyl8 ἔλεγον γὰρ 1 Here, **they** could mean: (1) This refers to his relatives. (2) This refers to some people in the crowd.
3:21 uyl8 ἔλεγον γὰρ 1 Here, **they** could refer to: (1) his relatives. (2) some people in the crowd.
3:21 mf5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστη 1 Jesus’ family uses this idiom to describe how they think he is acting. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” or “He is insane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:22 yxd9 ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια 1 “By the power of Beelzebul, who is the ruler of the demons, Jesus drives out demons”
3:23 ji69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus explains with a parable why it is foolish for people to think that Jesus is controlled by Satan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
4:23 k1a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Mark 4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to listen, listen” or “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:23 izg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Mark 4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
4:24 r2r1 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 “Jesus said to the crowd”
4:24 zis1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is talking about a literal **measure** and giving generously to others. (2) This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:24 zis1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is talking about a literal **measure** and giving generously to others. (2) this is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:24 c4xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add it to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:25 i24l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθήσεται αὐτῷ & καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” or “God will give more to him … God will take away from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:26 n1mq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus then tells the people parables to explain the kingdom of God, which he later explains to his disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
5:34 gbk8 θυγάτηρ 1 Jesus was using this term figuratively to refer to the woman as a believer.
5:34 a5qw ἡ πίστις σου 1 “your faith in me”
5:35 kmm7 ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 “While Jesus was still speaking”
5:35 ld5e ἔρχονται ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 This could mean: (1) These people had come from Jarius’ house. (2) Jairus had previously given these people orders to go see Jesus. (3) These people had been sent by the man who was presiding as the synagogue leader in Jairus’ absence.
5:35 ld5e ἔρχονται ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 This could mean: (1) these people had come from Jarius’ house. (2) Jairus had previously given these people orders to go see Jesus. (3) these people had been sent by the man who was presiding as the synagogue leader in Jairus’ absence.
5:35 akl8 τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 The leader of the synagogue is Jairus.
5:35 ip1p λέγοντες 1 “saying to Jairus”
5:35 t2wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer.” or “There no need to bother the teacher any longer.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
6:41 l8q3 ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 This means that he **looked up** toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives.
6:41 gr6v εὐλόγησεν 1 “he spoke a blessing” or “he gave thanks”
6:41 r49p τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν 1 “he divided the two fish so that everyone could have some”
6:43 rq7a ἦραν 1 This could mean: (1) The disciples took up the pieces. (2) The people took up the pieces.
6:43 rq7a ἦραν 1 This could mean: (1) the disciples took up the pieces. (2) the people took up the pieces.
6:43 sk2v κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 “twelve baskets full of broken pieces of bread”
6:43 xk9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers δώδεκα κοφίνων 1 “twelve baskets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
6:44 v4m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
6:56 bjv5 ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο 1 “wherever Jesus entered”
6:56 gi6y ἐτίθεσαν 1 Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.
6:56 y6hs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
6:56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) The sick were begging him. (2) The people were begging him.
6:56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) the sick were begging him. (2) the people were begging him.
6:56 m366 ἅψωνται 1 The word **they** refers to the sick.
6:56 wd2u τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 “the hem of his robe” or “the edge of his clothes”
6:56 ugr3 ὅσοι ἂν 1 “all those who”
@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
7:29 pa3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου 1 Jesus has caused the unclean spirit to leave the woman’s **daughter**. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “I have caused the evil spirit to leave your daughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
7:31 g44h 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nAfter healing people in Tyre, Jesus goes to the Sea of Galilee. There he heals a deaf man, which amazes the people.
7:31 k9gy ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῶν ὁρίων Τύρου 1 “having left the region of Tyre”
7:31 paz4 ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean “up to a place in the region” as Jesus is at the sea in the region of the Decapolis. (2) This may mean “through part of the region” as Jesus went through the region of the Decapolis to get to the sea.
7:31 paz4 ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων 1 This could mean: (1) “up to a place in the region” as Jesus is at the sea in the region of the Decapolis. (2) “through part of the region” as Jesus went through the region of the Decapolis to get to the sea.
7:31 cxa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 This is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:20](../05/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7:32 bnq6 φέρουσιν 1 “the people brought”
7:32 i5gy κωφὸν 1 “a person who was not able to hear”
@ -584,7 +584,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
8:1 sgv6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nA great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place.
8:1 rmd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
8:2 h8v8 ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν 1 “this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat”
8:3 u3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐκλυθήσονται 1 This could mean: (1) It literally means “they may lose consciousness temporarily.” (2) It is a hyperbolic exaggeration that means “they may become weak.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:3 u3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐκλυθήσονται 1 This could be: (1) a literal statement that they may lose consciousness temporarily. (2) a hyperbolic exaggeration that means “they may become weak.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
8:4 jdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? 1 The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
8:4 b7tn ἄρτων 1 Loaves of **bread** are lumps of dough that have been shaped and baked.
8:5 m56c ἠρώτα αὐτούς 1 “Jesus asked his disciples”
@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
8:10 x33a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δαλμανουθά 1 This is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
8:11 cqy5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn Dalmanutha, Jesus refuses to give the Pharisees a sign before he and his disciples get in a boat and leave.
8:11 f9y8 ζητοῦντες παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 “asking him for”
8:11 zi91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 They wanted **a sign** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. This could mean: (1) The word **heaven** is a metonym for God. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (2) The word **heaven** refers to the sky. Alternate translation: “a sign from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:11 zi91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 They wanted **a sign** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. The word **heaven** could be: (1) a metonym for God. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (2) the sky. Alternate translation: “a sign from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:11 cl3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πειράζοντες αὐτόν 1 The Pharisees tried to test Jesus to make him prove that he was from God. Some information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “to prove that God had sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
8:12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 This means that he groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated this in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md).
8:12 s8xl τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 “in himself”
@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
9:45 r1dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Dying and then beginning to live eternally is spoken of as entering **into life**. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and begin to live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:45 c2vw χωλὸν 1 “unable to walk easily.” Here it refers not being able to walk well because of missing a foot. Alternate translation: “without a foot” or “missing a foot”
9:45 tmd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:47 n5tw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Here the word **eye** could mean: (1) It is a metonym for desiring to sin by looking at something. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful by looking at something, tear your eye out” (2) It is a metonym for desiring to sin because of what you have looked at. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:47 n5tw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Here the word **eye** could be: (1) a metonym for desiring to sin by looking at something. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful by looking at something, tear your eye out” (2) a metonym for desiring to sin because of what you have looked at. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
9:47 e52s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ δύο ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντα 1 This refers to the state of a person’s physical body when he dies. A person does not take his physical body with him into eternity. Alternate translation: “to enter into the kingdom of God after having lived on earth with only one eye than, having lived on earth with two eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9:47 r2gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 You can state this in the active form. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:48 uh4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 The meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “where worms that eat people there do not die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
10:40 eu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” or “God has prepared them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:41 ad19 ἀκούσαντες, 1 The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hands.
10:42 sbk8 προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 “after Jesus called his disciples, he”
10:42 sfs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) The people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) The Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:42 sfs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) the people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) the Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
10:42 hme7 κατακυριεύουσιν 1 have control or power over
10:42 zfr3 κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 “flaunt their authority over.” This means that they show or use their authority in an overbearing way.
10:43 zfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This refers back to the previous verse about the Gentile rulers. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “But do not be like them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -938,7 +938,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
11:10 a6b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 “Blessed is our father David’s coming kingdom.” This refers to Jesus **coming** and ruling as king. Alternate translation: “Blessed be the coming of your kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:10 kkfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 The word **blessed** can be translated as an active verb. Alternate translation: “May God bless you as you rule your coming kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11:10 diq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Here David’s descendant who will rule is referred to as **David** himself. Alternate translation: “of the greatest descendant of our father David” or “that David’s greatest descendant will rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 This could mean: (1) They should praise God who is in heaven. (2) Those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’.
11:10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 This could mean: (1) they should praise God who is in heaven. (2) those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’.
11:10 vqm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 Here heaven is spoken of as **the highest**. Alternate translation: “the highest heaven” or “heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:11 mz8r ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας 1 “because it was already late in the day”
11:11 t5nv ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 “he and his twelve disciples left Jerusalem and went to Bethany”
@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
11:27 s2ac ἔρχονται & εἰς 1 “Jesus and his disciples came to”
11:27 alh5 ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 This means that Jesus was walking around inside of the temple courtyard; he was not walking into the temple.
11:28 r3ik ἔλεγον αὐτῷ 1 The word **they** refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders.
11:28 se9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς? 1 This could mean: (1) Both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) These are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
11:28 se9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς? 1 This could mean: (1) both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) these are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
11:28 p5u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 The words **these things** refer to Jesus turning over the sellers’ tables in the temple and speaking against what the chief priests and scribes taught. Alternate translation: “things like those you did here yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
11:30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 “The baptism that John performed”
11:30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 “was it authorized by heaven or by men”
@ -1131,9 +1131,9 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
13:5 fe42 λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 “to say to his disciples”
13:5 u79c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ 1 Here, **lead you astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “deceives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:6 wv12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν 1 Here, **will lead many astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “they will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:6 z63u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 This could mean: (1) They would be claiming his authority. (2) They would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:6 z63u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 This could mean: (1) they would be claiming his authority. (2) they would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:6 l7f9 ἐγώ εἰμι 1 “I am the Christ”
13:7 fl5h ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 “you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) They would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) They would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start.
13:7 fl5h ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 “you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) they would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) they would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start.
13:7 d1k9 ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 “but it is not yet the end” or “but the end will not happen until later” or “but the end will be later”
13:7 mi4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 This probably refers to **the end** of the world. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:8 xln4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’ 1 This idiom means to fight against one another. Alternate translation: “will fight against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
13:13 jhp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Jesus uses the metonym **my name** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
13:13 w28q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:13 c33n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 Here, **endures** represents continuing to be faithful to God even while suffering. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:13 vcz4 εἰς τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the end of his life”.(2) This refers to the end of that time of trouble.
13:13 vcz4 εἰς τέλος 1 This could refer to: (1) the end of his life”.(2) the end of that time of trouble.
13:14 d4nw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως 1 This phrase is from the book of Daniel. His audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the things of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13:14 vx3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ 1 Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:14 ck7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω 1 This is not Jesus speaking. Matthew added this to get the readers’ attention, so that they would listen to this warning. Alternate translation: “may everyone who is reading this pay attention to this warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
13:24 a3qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς 1 Here the **moon** is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. Alternate translation: “the moon will not shine” or “the moon will be dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
13:25 z1sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἀστέρες ἔσονται ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πίπτοντες 1 This does not mean that they will fall to earth but that they will fall from where the are now. Alternate translation: “the stars will fall from their places in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13:25 au6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the powers in the heavens will shake” or “God will shake the powers that are in the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13:25 hge7 αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 “the powerful things in the heavens.” This could mean: (1) This refers to the sun, moon, and stars. (2) This refers to powerful spiritual beings.
13:25 hge7 αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 “the powerful things in the heavens.” This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, and stars. (2) powerful spiritual beings.
13:25 h5k1 ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 “in the sky”
13:26 kl95 τότε ὄψονται 1 “then people will see”
13:26 h4z1 μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 “powerfully and gloriously”
@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
14:18 cwl8 ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν 1 In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they lay down on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table.
14:18 dg95 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
14:19 v3a1 εἷς κατὰ εἷς 1 This means that “one at a time” each disciple asked him.
14:19 f13p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ? 1 This could mean: (1) This was a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) This was a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:19 f13p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ? 1 This could be: (1) a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
14:20 b25j εἷς τῶν δώδεκα 1 “He is one of the twelve of you”
14:20 htn4 ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would often eat bread, **dipping** it in a shared bowl of sauce or of oil mixed with herbs.
14:21 q5l3 ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus refers to the scriptures prophesying about his death. If you have a polite way to talk about death in your language, use it here. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die in the way that the scriptures say”
@ -1263,7 +1263,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
14:24 hs24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου 1 “This wine is my blood.” Though most understand this to mean that the wine is a symbol of Jesus’ **blood** and that it is not actual blood, it is best to translate this statement literally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
14:25 i9yk ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
14:25 t7ai ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 “wine.” This is a descriptive way to refer to wine.
14:25 y1pf καινὸν 1 This could mean: (1) It would happen again. (2) It would happen in a new way.
14:25 y1pf καινὸν 1 This could mean: (1) it would happen again. (2) it would happen in a new way.
14:26 l996 ὑμνήσαντες 1 A **hymn** is a type of song. It was traditional for them to sing an Old Testament psalm.
14:27 pu4s λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 “Jesus said to his disciples”
14:27 lty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σκανδαλισθήσεσθε 1 This is an idiom that means leave. Alternate translation: “will leave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ front:intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark\n\n## Part 1: General
15:1 mps2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nWhen the chief priests, the elders, the scribes, and the council gave Jesus over to Pilate, they accused Jesus of doing many bad things. When Pilate asked if what they said was true, Jesus did not answer him.
15:1 xz7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν 1 They commanded for Jesus to be **bound**, but it would have been the guards who actually bound him and **led him away**. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then they led him away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
15:1 v2yf παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ 1 They had Jesus led to Pilate and transferred control of Jesus over to him.
15:2 dh6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ λέγεις 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (2) Jesus implied that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:2 dh6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ λέγεις 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (2) Jesus was implying that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:3 ue18 κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά 1 “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many bad things”
15:4 c9uc ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν 1 “But Pilate asked Jesus again”
15:4 s2as οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Do you have an answer?”

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
23 1:8 e4qi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς δὲ βαπτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 This metaphor compares John’s baptism with water to the future baptism with the **Holy Spirit**. This means John’s baptism only symbolically cleanses people of their sins. The baptism by the Holy Spirit will truly cleanse people of their sins. If possible, use the same word for **baptize** here as you used for John’s baptism to keep the comparison between the two. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
24 1:9 u65k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 This marks the beginning of a new event in the story line. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
25 1:9 gi39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη & ὑπὸ Ἰωάννου 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John baptized him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26 1:10 m5f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) This is a simile, and **the Spirit** descended upon Jesus as a bird descends from the sky toward the ground. (2) The **Spirit** literally looked **like a dove** as he descended upon Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) This could mean: (1) this is a simile, and **the Spirit** descended upon Jesus as a bird descends from the sky toward the ground. (2) the **Spirit** literally looked **like a dove** as he descended upon Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
27 1:11 e6ke rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 The **voice** represents God speaking. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
28 1:11 ky16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Sometimes people avoid referring directly to God because they respect him. Alternate translation: “God spoke from the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
29 1:11 s6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 This is an important title for Jesus. The Father calls Jesus his **beloved Son** because of his eternal love for him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
82 1:44 a7hs ὅρα μηδενὶ, μηδὲν εἴπῃς 1 “Be sure to not say anything to anyone”
83 1:44 xhu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 Jesus told the man to **show** himself **to the priest** so that the priest could look at his skin to see if his leprosy was really gone. The law of Moses required people to present themselves to the priest if they had been unclean but were no longer unclean. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
84 1:44 w6b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σεαυτὸν δεῖξον 1 The word **yourself** here represents the skin of the leper. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
85 1:44 ish7 μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 It is best to use the pronoun **them**, if possible, in your language. This could mean: (1) It was to be a testimony to the priests. (2) It was to be a testimony to the people. It is best to use the pronoun **them**, if possible, in your language. This could be: (1) a testimony to the priests. (2) a testimony to the people.
86 1:45 m63p ὁ δὲ ἐξελθὼν 1 The word **he** refers to the man Jesus healed.
87 1:45 i91a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
88 1:45 bn6r ὥστε 1 “so much that”
99 2:3 c1vr φέροντες & παραλυτικὸν 1 “bringing a man who was unable to walk or use his arms”
100 2:4 h3yn μὴ δυνάμενοι προσενέγκαι αὐτῷ 1 “they could not get close to where Jesus was”
101 2:4 v6ma ἀπεστέγασαν τὴν στέγην ὅπου ἦν, καὶ ἐξορύξαντες, χαλῶσι 1 Houses where Jesus lived had flat roofs made of clay and covered with tiles. The process of making a hole in the roof can be explained more clearly or made more general so that it may be understood in your language. Alternate translation: “they removed the tiles from the part of the roof above where Jesus was. And when they had dug through the clay roof, they lowered” or “they made a hole in the roof above where Jesus was, and then they lowered”
102 2:5 trg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἰδὼν & τὴν πίστιν αὐτῶν 1 “Having seen the men’s faith.” This could mean: (1) Only the men who carried the paralyzed man had **faith**. (2) The paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had **faith**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) “Having seen the men’s faith.” This could mean: (1) only the men who carried the paralyzed man had **faith**. (2) the paralyzed man and the men who brought him to Jesus all had **faith**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
103 2:5 hzg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 The word **Child** here shows Jesus cared for the man as a father cares for a son. Alternate translation: “My son” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
104 2:5 vd3i ἀφέωνται σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 If possible translate this in such a way that Jesus does not clearly say who forgives the man’s **sins**. Alternate translation: “your sins are gone” or “you do not have to pay for your sins” or “your sins do not count against you”
105 2:6 le6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διαλογιζόμενοι ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Here, **hearts** is a metonym for the people’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “were thinking to themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
120 2:15 udb2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIt is now later in the day, and Jesus is at Levi’s house for a meal.
121 2:15 if3i τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 “the home of Levi”
122 2:15 qf38 ἁμαρτωλοὶ 1 people who did not obey the law of Moses but committed what others thought were very bad sins
123 2:15 bwv2 ἦσαν γὰρ πολλοὶ, καὶ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ 1 This could mean: (1) There were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus. (2) Jesus had many disciples and they followed him. This could mean: (1) there were many tax collectors and sinful people who followed Jesus. (2) Jesus had many disciples and they followed him.
124 2:16 b1bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ὅτι μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίει? 1 The scribes and Pharisees asked this question to show they disapproved of Jesus’ hospitality. This can be worded as a statement. Alternate translation: “He should not eat with sinners and tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
125 2:17 ba3n 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus responds to what the scribes had said to his disciples about his eating with tax collectors and sinful people.
126 2:17 q8r6 λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 “he said to the scribes”
129 2:17 ca4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς 1 The words “I came to call” are understood from the phrase before this. Alternate translation: “but I came to call sinners” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
130 2:18 zkz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus tells parables to show why his disciples should not fast while he is with them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
131 2:18 f1ds ἦσαν & οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύοντες & οἱ μαθηταὶ τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 These two phrases refer to the same group of people, but the second is more specific. Both refer to the followers of the Pharisee sect, but they do not focus on the leaders of the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “the disciples of the Pharisees were fasting … the disciples of the Pharisees”
132 2:18 z394 ἔρχονται 1 “some men are coming.” It is best to translate this phrase without specifying exactly who these men are. If in your language you have to be more specific, this could mean: (1) These men were not among John’s disciples or the disciples of the Pharisees. (2) These men were among John’s disciples. “some men are coming.” It is best to translate this phrase without specifying exactly who these men are. If in your language you have to be more specific, this could mean: (1) these men were not among John’s disciples or the disciples of the Pharisees. (2) these men were among John’s disciples.
133 2:18 vl3z ἔρχονται καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ 1 “they came and said to Jesus”
134 2:19 eke3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μὴ δύνανται οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν νηστεύειν? 1 Jesus uses this question to remind the people of something they already know and to encourage them to apply it to him and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Wedding attendants do not fast while the bridegroom is with them. Rather they celebrate and feast.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
135 2:20 vg2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ & ὁ νυμφίος 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the bridegroom will go away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
208 3:20 jxr5 καὶ ἔρχεται εἰς οἶκον 1 “Then Jesus went to the house where he was staying.”
209 3:20 rq6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μὴ δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς μηδὲ ἄρτον φαγεῖν 1 The word **bread** represents food. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples could not eat at all” or “they could not eat anything” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
210 3:21 bk6g ἐξῆλθον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν 1 Members of his family went to the house, so that they could take hold of him and force him to go home with them.
211 3:21 uyl8 ἔλεγον γὰρ 1 Here, **they** could mean: (1) This refers to his relatives. (2) This refers to some people in the crowd. Here, **they** could refer to: (1) his relatives. (2) some people in the crowd.
212 3:21 mf5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστη 1 Jesus’ family uses this idiom to describe how they think he is acting. Alternate translation: “He is crazy” or “He is insane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
213 3:22 yxd9 ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια 1 “By the power of Beelzebul, who is the ruler of the demons, Jesus drives out demons”
214 3:23 ji69 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus explains with a parable why it is foolish for people to think that Jesus is controlled by Satan. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
285 4:23 k1a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Mark 4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to listen, listen” or “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
286 4:23 izg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Mark 4:9](../04/09.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
287 4:24 r2r1 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 “Jesus said to the crowd”
288 4:24 zis1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is talking about a literal **measure** and giving generously to others. (2) This is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could mean: (1) Jesus is talking about a literal **measure** and giving generously to others. (2) this is a metaphor in which Jesus speaks of “understanding” as if it were “measuring.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289 4:24 c4xp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will measure that amount for you, and he will add it to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
290 4:25 i24l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δοθήσεται αὐτῷ & καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτο 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to him God will give more … from him God will take away” or “God will give more to him … God will take away from him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
291 4:26 n1mq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus then tells the people parables to explain the kingdom of God, which he later explains to his disciples. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
377 5:34 gbk8 θυγάτηρ 1 Jesus was using this term figuratively to refer to the woman as a believer.
378 5:34 a5qw ἡ πίστις σου 1 “your faith in me”
379 5:35 kmm7 ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 “While Jesus was still speaking”
380 5:35 ld5e ἔρχονται ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 This could mean: (1) These people had come from Jarius’ house. (2) Jairus had previously given these people orders to go see Jesus. (3) These people had been sent by the man who was presiding as the synagogue leader in Jairus’ absence. This could mean: (1) these people had come from Jarius’ house. (2) Jairus had previously given these people orders to go see Jesus. (3) these people had been sent by the man who was presiding as the synagogue leader in Jairus’ absence.
381 5:35 akl8 τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου 1 The leader of the synagogue is Jairus.
382 5:35 ip1p λέγοντες 1 “saying to Jairus”
383 5:35 t2wd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί ἔτι σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον? 1 This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is useless to bother the teacher any longer.” or “There no need to bother the teacher any longer.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
469 6:41 l8q3 ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 This means that he **looked up** toward the sky, which is associated with the place where God lives.
470 6:41 gr6v εὐλόγησεν 1 “he spoke a blessing” or “he gave thanks”
471 6:41 r49p τοὺς δύο ἰχθύας ἐμέρισεν πᾶσιν 1 “he divided the two fish so that everyone could have some”
472 6:43 rq7a ἦραν 1 This could mean: (1) The disciples took up the pieces. (2) The people took up the pieces. This could mean: (1) the disciples took up the pieces. (2) the people took up the pieces.
473 6:43 sk2v κλάσματα δώδεκα κοφίνων πληρώματα 1 “twelve baskets full of broken pieces of bread”
474 6:43 xk9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers δώδεκα κοφίνων 1 “twelve baskets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
475 6:44 v4m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
492 6:56 bjv5 ὅπου ἂν εἰσεπορεύετο 1 “wherever Jesus entered”
493 6:56 gi6y ἐτίθεσαν 1 Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples.
494 6:56 y6hs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 This phrase refers to people. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
495 6:56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 This could mean: (1) The sick were begging him. (2) The people were begging him. This could mean: (1) the sick were begging him. (2) the people were begging him.
496 6:56 m366 ἅψωνται 1 The word **they** refers to the sick.
497 6:56 wd2u τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 “the hem of his robe” or “the edge of his clothes”
498 6:56 ugr3 ὅσοι ἂν 1 “all those who”
561 7:29 pa3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξελήλυθεν τὸ δαιμόνιον, ἐκ τῆς θυγατρός σου 1 Jesus has caused the unclean spirit to leave the woman’s **daughter**. This can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “I have caused the evil spirit to leave your daughter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
562 7:31 g44h 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nAfter healing people in Tyre, Jesus goes to the Sea of Galilee. There he heals a deaf man, which amazes the people.
563 7:31 k9gy ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῶν ὁρίων Τύρου 1 “having left the region of Tyre”
564 7:31 paz4 ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων 1 This could mean: (1) This may mean “up to a place in the region” as Jesus is at the sea in the region of the Decapolis. (2) This may mean “through part of the region” as Jesus went through the region of the Decapolis to get to the sea. This could mean: (1) “up to a place in the region” as Jesus is at the sea in the region of the Decapolis. (2) “through part of the region” as Jesus went through the region of the Decapolis to get to the sea.
565 7:31 cxa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 This is the name of a region that means Ten Cities. It is located to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. See how you translated this in [Mark 5:20](../05/20.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
566 7:32 bnq6 φέρουσιν 1 “the people brought”
567 7:32 i5gy κωφὸν 1 “a person who was not able to hear”
584 8:1 sgv6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nA great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place.
585 8:1 rmd8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
586 8:2 h8v8 ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν 1 “this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat”
587 8:3 u3mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐκλυθήσονται 1 This could mean: (1) It literally means “they may lose consciousness temporarily.” (2) It is a hyperbolic exaggeration that means “they may become weak.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) This could be: (1) a literal statement that they may lose consciousness temporarily. (2) a hyperbolic exaggeration that means “they may become weak.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
588 8:4 jdk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτους δυνήσεταί τις ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπ’ ἐρημίας? 1 The disciples are expressing surprise that Jesus would expect them to be able to find enough food. Alternate translation: “This place is so deserted that there is no place here for us to get enough loaves of bread to satisfy these people!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
589 8:4 b7tn ἄρτων 1 Loaves of **bread** are lumps of dough that have been shaped and baked.
590 8:5 m56c ἠρώτα αὐτούς 1 “Jesus asked his disciples”
600 8:10 x33a rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δαλμανουθά 1 This is the name of a place on the northwestern shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
601 8:11 cqy5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn Dalmanutha, Jesus refuses to give the Pharisees a sign before he and his disciples get in a boat and leave.
602 8:11 f9y8 ζητοῦντες παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 “asking him for”
603 8:11 zi91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 They wanted **a sign** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. This could mean: (1) The word **heaven** is a metonym for God. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (2) The word **heaven** refers to the sky. Alternate translation: “a sign from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) They wanted **a sign** that would prove that Jesus’ power and authority were from God. The word **heaven** could be: (1) a metonym for God. Alternate translation: “a sign from God” (2) the sky. Alternate translation: “a sign from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
604 8:11 cl3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πειράζοντες αὐτόν 1 The Pharisees tried to test Jesus to make him prove that he was from God. Some information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “to prove that God had sent him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
605 8:12 sn5a ἀναστενάξας τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 This means that he groaned or that he let out a long deep breath that could be heard. It probably shows Jesus’ deep sadness that the Pharisees refused to believe him. See how you translated this in [Mark 7:34](../07/34.md).
606 8:12 s8xl τῷ πνεύματι αὐτοῦ 1 “in himself”
786 9:45 r1dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Dying and then beginning to live eternally is spoken of as entering **into life**. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and begin to live forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
787 9:45 c2vw χωλὸν 1 “unable to walk easily.” Here it refers not being able to walk well because of missing a foot. Alternate translation: “without a foot” or “missing a foot”
788 9:45 tmd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
789 9:47 n5tw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐὰν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτόν 1 Here the word **eye** could mean: (1) It is a metonym for desiring to sin by looking at something. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful by looking at something, tear your eye out” (2) It is a metonym for desiring to sin because of what you have looked at. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here the word **eye** could be: (1) a metonym for desiring to sin by looking at something. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful by looking at something, tear your eye out” (2) a metonym for desiring to sin because of what you have looked at. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful because of what you look at, tear your eye out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
790 9:47 e52s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μονόφθαλμον εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἢ δύο ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντα 1 This refers to the state of a person’s physical body when he dies. A person does not take his physical body with him into eternity. Alternate translation: “to enter into the kingdom of God after having lived on earth with only one eye than, having lived on earth with two eyes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
791 9:47 r2gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βληθῆναι εἰς τὴν Γέενναν 1 You can state this in the active form. Alternate translation: “for God to throw you into hell” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
792 9:48 uh4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ 1 The meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “where worms that eat people there do not die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
888 10:40 eu9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡτοίμασται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has prepared it” or “God has prepared them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
889 10:41 ad19 ἀκούσαντες, 1 The word **this** refers to James and John asking to sit at Jesus’ right and left hands.
890 10:42 sbk8 προσκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 “after Jesus called his disciples, he”
891 10:42 sfs9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) The people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) The Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) the people in general consider these people the rulers of the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “that those whom people consider to be the rulers of the Gentiles.” (2) the Gentiles consider these people their rulers. Alternate translation: “that those whom the Gentiles think of as their rulers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
892 10:42 hme7 κατακυριεύουσιν 1 have control or power over
893 10:42 zfr3 κατεξουσιάζουσιν 1 “flaunt their authority over.” This means that they show or use their authority in an overbearing way.
894 10:43 zfz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ οὕτως δέ ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This refers back to the previous verse about the Gentile rulers. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “But do not be like them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
938 11:10 a6b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 “Blessed is our father David’s coming kingdom.” This refers to Jesus **coming** and ruling as king. Alternate translation: “Blessed be the coming of your kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
939 11:10 kkfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχομένη βασιλεία τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 The word **blessed** can be translated as an active verb. Alternate translation: “May God bless you as you rule your coming kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
940 11:10 diq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, Δαυείδ 1 Here David’s descendant who will rule is referred to as **David** himself. Alternate translation: “of the greatest descendant of our father David” or “that David’s greatest descendant will rule” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
941 11:10 b1si ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 This could mean: (1) They should praise God who is in heaven. (2) Those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’. This could mean: (1) they should praise God who is in heaven. (2) those who are in heaven should shout ‘Hosanna’.
942 11:10 vqm2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῖς ὑψίστοις 1 Here heaven is spoken of as **the highest**. Alternate translation: “the highest heaven” or “heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
943 11:11 mz8r ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας 1 “because it was already late in the day”
944 11:11 t5nv ἐξῆλθεν εἰς Βηθανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 “he and his twelve disciples left Jerusalem and went to Bethany”
979 11:27 s2ac ἔρχονται & εἰς 1 “Jesus and his disciples came to”
980 11:27 alh5 ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 This means that Jesus was walking around inside of the temple courtyard; he was not walking into the temple.
981 11:28 r3ik ἔλεγον αὐτῷ 1 The word **they** refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders.
982 11:28 se9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς? 1 This could mean: (1) Both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) These are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) This could mean: (1) both of these questions have the same meaning and are asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority and so can be combined. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (2) these are two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
983 11:28 p5u3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 The words **these things** refer to Jesus turning over the sellers’ tables in the temple and speaking against what the chief priests and scribes taught. Alternate translation: “things like those you did here yesterday” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
984 11:30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 “The baptism that John performed”
985 11:30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 “was it authorized by heaven or by men”
1131 13:5 fe42 λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 “to say to his disciples”
1132 13:5 u79c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ 1 Here, **lead you astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “deceives you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1133 13:6 wv12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν 1 Here, **will lead many astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe what is not true. Alternate translation: “they will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1134 13:6 z63u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 This could mean: (1) They would be claiming his authority. (2) They would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) This could mean: (1) they would be claiming his authority. (2) they would be claiming that God had sent them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1135 13:6 l7f9 ἐγώ εἰμι 1 “I am the Christ”
1136 13:7 fl5h ἀκούσητε πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 “you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) They would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) They would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start. “you may hear of wars and reports about wars.” This could mean: (1) they would hear the sounds of wars close by and news of wars far away. (2) they would hear of wars that have started and reports about wars that are about to start.
1137 13:7 d1k9 ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 “but it is not yet the end” or “but the end will not happen until later” or “but the end will be later”
1138 13:7 mi4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 This probably refers to **the end** of the world. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1139 13:8 xln4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται & ἐπ’ 1 This idiom means to fight against one another. Alternate translation: “will fight against” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1157 13:13 jhp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Jesus uses the metonym **my name** to refer to himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1158 13:13 w28q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whoever endures to the end, God will save that person” or “God will save whoever endures to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1159 13:13 c33n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 1 Here, **endures** represents continuing to be faithful to God even while suffering. Alternate translation: “whoever suffers and stays faithful to God to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1160 13:13 vcz4 εἰς τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the end of his life”.(2) This refers to the end of that time of trouble. This could refer to: (1) the end of his life”.(2) the end of that time of trouble.
1161 13:14 d4nw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως 1 This phrase is from the book of Daniel. His audience would have been familiar with this passage and the prophecy about **the abomination** entering the temple and defiling it. Alternate translation: “the shameful thing that defiles the things of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1162 13:14 vx3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἑστηκότα ὅπου οὐ δεῖ 1 Jesus’ audience would have known that this refers to the temple. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple, where it should not be standing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1163 13:14 ck7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω 1 This is not Jesus speaking. Matthew added this to get the readers’ attention, so that they would listen to this warning. Alternate translation: “may everyone who is reading this pay attention to this warning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1182 13:24 a3qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς 1 Here the **moon** is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. Alternate translation: “the moon will not shine” or “the moon will be dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1183 13:25 z1sh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἀστέρες ἔσονται ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πίπτοντες 1 This does not mean that they will fall to earth but that they will fall from where the are now. Alternate translation: “the stars will fall from their places in the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1184 13:25 au6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the powers in the heavens will shake” or “God will shake the powers that are in the heavens” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1185 13:25 hge7 αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 “the powerful things in the heavens.” This could mean: (1) This refers to the sun, moon, and stars. (2) This refers to powerful spiritual beings. “the powerful things in the heavens.” This could refer to: (1) the sun, moon, and stars. (2) powerful spiritual beings.
1186 13:25 h5k1 ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 “in the sky”
1187 13:26 kl95 τότε ὄψονται 1 “then people will see”
1188 13:26 h4z1 μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 “powerfully and gloriously”
1250 14:18 cwl8 ἀνακειμένων αὐτῶν 1 In Jesus’ culture, when people gathered to eat, they lay down on their sides, propping themselves up on pillows beside a low table.
1251 14:18 dg95 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
1252 14:19 v3a1 εἷς κατὰ εἷς 1 This means that “one at a time” each disciple asked him.
1253 14:19 f13p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ? 1 This could mean: (1) This was a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) This was a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) This could be: (1) a question for which the disciples expected the answer to be no. (2) a rhetorical question that did not require a response. Alternate translation: “Surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1254 14:20 b25j εἷς τῶν δώδεκα 1 “He is one of the twelve of you”
1255 14:20 htn4 ἐμβαπτόμενος μετ’ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τρύβλιον 1 In Jesus’ culture, people would often eat bread, **dipping** it in a shared bowl of sauce or of oil mixed with herbs.
1256 14:21 q5l3 ὅτι ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑπάγει, καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus refers to the scriptures prophesying about his death. If you have a polite way to talk about death in your language, use it here. Alternate translation: “For the Son of Man will die in the way that the scriptures say”
1263 14:24 hs24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου 1 “This wine is my blood.” Though most understand this to mean that the wine is a symbol of Jesus’ **blood** and that it is not actual blood, it is best to translate this statement literally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1264 14:25 i9yk ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 This indicates that the statement that follows is especially true and important. See how you translated this in [Mark 3:28](../03/28.md).
1265 14:25 t7ai ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 “wine.” This is a descriptive way to refer to wine.
1266 14:25 y1pf καινὸν 1 This could mean: (1) It would happen again. (2) It would happen in a new way. This could mean: (1) it would happen again. (2) it would happen in a new way.
1267 14:26 l996 ὑμνήσαντες 1 A **hymn** is a type of song. It was traditional for them to sing an Old Testament psalm.
1268 14:27 pu4s λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 “Jesus said to his disciples”
1269 14:27 lty4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom σκανδαλισθήσεσθε 1 This is an idiom that means leave. Alternate translation: “will leave me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1365 15:1 mps2 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nWhen the chief priests, the elders, the scribes, and the council gave Jesus over to Pilate, they accused Jesus of doing many bad things. When Pilate asked if what they said was true, Jesus did not answer him.
1366 15:1 xz7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δήσαντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ἀπήνεγκαν 1 They commanded for Jesus to be **bound**, but it would have been the guards who actually bound him and **led him away**. Alternate translation: “commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then they led him away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1367 15:1 v2yf παρέδωκαν Πειλάτῳ 1 They had Jesus led to Pilate and transferred control of Jesus over to him.
1368 15:2 dh6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ λέγεις 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (2) Jesus implied that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean: (1) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (2) Jesus was implying that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1369 15:3 ue18 κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ & πολλά 1 “were accusing Jesus of many things” or “were saying that Jesus had done many bad things”
1370 15:4 c9uc ὁ δὲ Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν 1 “But Pilate asked Jesus again”
1371 15:4 s2as οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ οὐδέν? 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Do you have an answer?”

87
tn_PHM.tsv
View File

@ -1,67 +1,50 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Philemon\n\n1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)\n2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)\n3. Conclusion (1:22-25)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?\n\nPaul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of Philemon about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a Christian who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison.\n\nPaul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Does this letter approve of the practice of slavery?\n\nPaul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean Paul thought slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people serving God in whatever situation they were in.\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 sg4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThree times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter. Evidently Timothy was with him and probably wrote the words down as Paul said them. Paul greets others who meet for church at Philemon’s house. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of “you” and “your” refer to him and are singular unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 niq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Παῦλος, δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ Τιμόθεος, ὁ ἀδελφὸς; Φιλήμονι 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the authors of a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, a prisoner of Christ Jesus, and Timothy, our brother, are writing this letter to Philemon” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus.” People who opposed Paul’s preaching had punished him by putting him into prison.
1:1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Here, **brother** means a fellow Christian.
front:intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Philemon\n\n1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)\n2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)\n3. Conclusion (1:22-25)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?\n\nPaul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of Philemon about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a Christian who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison.\n\nPaul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Does this letter approve the practice of slavery?\n\nPaul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean Paul thought slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people serving God in whatever situation they were in.\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 sg4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nThree times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter. Evidently Timothy was with him and probably wrote the words down as Paul said them. Paul greets others who meet for church at Philemon’s house. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of singular “you” and “your” refer to Philemon unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:1 ne8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Παῦλος, 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the authors of a letter. Alternate translations: “I am Paul," or "Paul," (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 People who opposed Paul’s preaching had punished him by putting him in prison.
1:1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Here **brother** means a fellow Christian.
1:1 r3l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 “who, like us, works to spread the gospel”
1:1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 alternate translation: “who, like us, works to spread the gospel”
1:2 e8su rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:2 zh5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ, τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here, **sister** means she was a believer, and not a relative. Alternate translation: “to Apphia our fellow believer” or “to Apphia our spiritual sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:2 kyzo Ἀπφίᾳ & Ἀρχίππῳ & τῇ & ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house,on the same level as Philemon.
1:2 zh5c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ, τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here **sister** means she was a believer, and not a relative. Alternate translation: “to Apphia our fellow believer” or “to Apphia our spiritual sister” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:2 sq44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 This is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:2 mnn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks here of Archippus as if they were both soldiers in an army. He means that Archippus works hard, as Paul himself works hard, to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “our fellow spiritual warrior” or “who also fights the spiritual battle with us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 r4nq χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” This is a blessing.
1:3 e5z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** here refers to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:3 r4nq χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” This is a blessing.
1:3 e5z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** here refers to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]])
1:3 lh8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὸς 1 This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:4 kh5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive 0 # General Information:\n\nThe word “us” is plural and refers to Paul, those with him, and all Christians, including the readers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:6 t54l ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου 1 “your working together with us”
1:6 pxw1 ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ 1 “may result in knowing what is good”
1:6 n25e εἰς Χριστόν 1 “because of Christ”
1:6 t54l ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου 1 This could mean: (1) "you share your faith with others" (2) "you share the same faith of those who believe in the Messiah" (3) "you share your possessions with others."
1:6 pxw1 ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) "will result in you knowing every good thing" (2) "those you share your faith with will know every good thing"
1:6 n25e εἰς Χριστόν 1 Alternate translation: “because of Christ” or "what the Messiah has done for us"
1:7 shpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you have encouraged believers” or “you have helped the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:7 aq4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 Here, ****inward parts**** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “the thoughts and feelings of the saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 m5ip σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 “you, dear brother” or “you, dear friend.” Paul called Philemon **brother** because they were both believers and he emphasizing their friendship.
1:7 aq4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 Here **inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: “the thoughts and feelings of God's people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 m5ip σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 Paul called Philemon **brother** because they were both believers and he is emphasizing their spiritual friendship. Alternate translation: "you, dear brother” or “you, dear friend.”
1:8 ayy1 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul begins his plea and the reason for his letter.
1:8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 This could mean: (1) “all authority because of Christ” or (2) “all courage because of Christ.” Alternate translation: “all courage because Christ has given me authority”
1:9 l9fh διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Possible meanings: (1) “because I know that you love God’s people” (2) “because you love me” or (3) “because I love you”
1:10 lsr6 0 # General Information:\n\nOnesimus is the name of a man. He was apparently Philemon’s slave and had stolen something and ran away.
1:10 m6fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦ ἐμοῦ τέκνου & Ὀνήσιμον 1 Paul speaks of the way he is friends with **Onesimus** as if it were the way a father and his son love each other. Onesimus was not Paul’s actual son, but he received spiritual life when Paul taught him about Jesus, and Paul loved him. Alternate translation: “my spiritual son Onesimus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 dj9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνήσιμον 1 The name **Onesimus** means “profitable” or “useful.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:10 mui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν ἐγέννησα ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Here, **fathered** is a metaphor that means Paul converted Onesimus to Christ. Alternate translation: “who became my spiritual son when I taught him about Christ and he received new life while I was in my chains” or “who became like a son to me while I was in my chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 This could mean: (1) “all authority because of Christ” (2) “all courage because of Christ.”
1:9 l9fh διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 This could mean: (1) “because I know that you love God’s people” (2) “because you love me” (3) “because I love you”
1:10 lsr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνήσιμον 1 # General Information:\n\nOnesimus is the name of a man. He was apparently Philemon’s slave and had stolen something and ran away. The name **Onesimus** means “profitable” or “useful.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:10 mui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν ἐγέννησα ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Here **fathered** is a metaphor that means Paul told Onesimus about Christ and Onesimus became a believer. Alternate translation: “who became my spiritual son when I taught him about Christ and he received new life while I was in my chains” or “who became like a son to me while I was in my chains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 nx1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he taught Onesimus and was still in prison when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “while I was in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:12 t1kp ὃν ἀνέπεμψά σοι 1 Paul was probably sending Onesimus with another believer who carried this letter.
1:12 h9qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 The phrase **who is my inward parts** is a metaphor for deep feelings about someone. Paul was saying this about Onesimus. Alternate translation: “whom I love dearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 fdwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here, ** inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s emotions.Alternate translation: “good thoughts and feelings to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 t4xl ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ 1 “so that, since you cannot be here, he might help me” or “so that he could help me in your place”
1:13 bb3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he taught Onesimus and was still in prison when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “while I am in prison because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 iwa8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Paul was in prison because he preached **the gospel** publicly. This can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “because I preach the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 g9wp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς δὲ τῆς σῆς γνώμης, οὐδὲν ἠθέλησα ποιῆσαι 1 Paul states a double negative to mean the opposite. Alternate translation: “But I wanted to keep him with me only if you approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:14 jxi7 ἵνα μὴ ὡς κατὰ ἀνάγκην τὸ ἀγαθόν σου ᾖ, ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον 1 “for I did not want you to do this good deed because I commanded you to do it, but because you wanted to do it”
1:14 ngg8 ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον 1 “but because you freely chose to do the right thing”
1:15 q1dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τάχα γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐχωρίσθη πρὸς ὥραν, ἵνα 1 This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For perhaps the reason God took Onesimus away from you for a time was so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:15 fp5v πρὸς ὥραν 1 “for this short time”
1:16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 “more valuable than a slave”
1:16 f8tz ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 “a dear brother” or “a precious brother in Christ”
1:16 f38v πόσῳ δὲ μᾶλλον σοὶ 1 “but he means even more to you”
1:16 yub9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καὶ ἐν σαρκὶ 1 “both as a man.” Paul is referring to Onesimus’ being a trustworthy servant. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 “as a brother in the Lord” or “because he belongs to the Lord”
1:12 fdwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here ** inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s emotions and expresses his deep feelings for Onesimus. Alternate translation: “very precious to me" or "very special to me" or "whom I dearly love" (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 t4xl ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ 1 Alternate translation: “so that, since you cannot be here, he might help me” or “so that he could help me while you are away”
1:13 bb3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he told Onesimus about the Messiah, and he was still in prison when he wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:14 ngg8 ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον 1 Alternate translation: “but because you freely chose to do the right thing” or "because you wanted to do this"
1:16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “more valuable than a slave” or "more dear than a slave"
1:16 f8tz ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 Alternate translation: “a dear brother” or “a precious brother in Christ”
1:16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Alternate translation: “because he is a brother in the Lord” or “because he is a fellow believer in the Lord”
1:17 e1j2 εἰ & με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 “if you think of me as a fellow worker for Christ”
1:18 u5m1 τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα 1 “say that I am the one who owes you”
1:19 wb53 ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί 1 “I, Paul, write this myself.” Paul wrote this part with his **own hand** so that Philemon would know that the words were really from Paul. Paul really would pay him.
1:19 gn6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι 1 “I do not need to remind you” or “You already know.” Paul says he does not need to tell Philemon this, but then continues to tell him anyway. This emphasizes the truth of what Paul is telling him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1:19 st7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις 1 “you even owe me your own life.” Paul was implying that Philemon should not say that Onesimus or Paul owed him anything because Philemon owed Paul even more. The reason Philemon owed Paul his life can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “you owe me much because I saved your life” or “you owe me your own life because what I told you saved your life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 xp0b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 How Paul wanted Philemon refresh him can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “refresh my inward parts in Christ by accepting Onesimus kindly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 j8lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here, **refresh** is a metaphor for comfort or encourage. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:19 wb53 ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί 1 Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this myself.” Paul wrote this part of the letter with his **own hand** so that Philemon would know that the words were really from Paul. Paul really would pay him. This also implies that for most of the letter, Paul dictated what he said and it was written down by someone else.
1:19 gn6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι 1 Alternate translation: “I do not need to remind you” or “You already know.” Paul says he does not need to tell Philemon this, but then he continues to tell him anyway. This emphasizes the truth of what Paul is telling him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
1:19 st7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις 1 Alternate translation: “you owe me much because I saved your life by telling you about the Messiah” or “you owe me your own life because what I told you about the Messiah saved your life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 xp0b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 How Paul wanted Philemon to refresh him can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “refresh my inward parts in Christ by accepting Onesimus kindly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:20 j8lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here **refresh** is a metaphor for comfort or encourage. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:20 kmpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here “inward parts” is a metonym for a person’s feelings, thoughts, or inner being. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:21 am1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you 0 # General Information:\n\nHere the words “your” and “you” are plural and refer to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:21 xpn6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul closes his letter and gives a blessing on Philemon and the believers that met for church in Philemon’s house.
1:21 g6fx πεποιθὼς τῇ ὑπακοῇ σου 1 “Because I am sure that you will do what I ask”
1:22 bx62 ἅμα 1 “while you are doing this”
1:22 akw1 καὶ ἑτοίμαζέ μοι ξενίαν 1 “also make a room in your house ready for me.” Paul asked Philemon to do this for him.
1:22 ctr4 χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν 1 “those who are keeping me in prison will set me free so that I can go to you.”
1:22 bx62 ἅμα 1 Alternate translation: “While you are doing this”
1:22 ctr4 χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν 1 Alternate translation: “those who are keeping me in prison will set me free so that I can go to you.”
1:23 x2d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἐπαφρᾶς 1 This is a fellow believer and prisoner with Paul. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:23 khx1 ὁ συναιχμάλωτός μου ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 “who is in prison with me because he serves Christ Jesus”
1:24 si6p Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς, οἱ συνεργοί μου 1 “and Mark, Aristarchus, Demas, and Luke, my fellow workers, also greet you”
1:24 i5gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς 1 These are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:24 gf6e οἱ συνεργοί μου 1 “the men who work with me” or “who all work with me.”
1:25 gq7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** here refers to Philemon and all who met in his house. Alternate translation: “your spirits” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:25 apvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 The words **your spirit** are a synecdoche and represent the people themselves. Alternate translation: “be kind to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:24 gf6e οἱ συνεργοί μου 1 Alternate translation: “the men who work with me” or “who all work with me.”
1:25 apvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 The words **your spirit** are a synecdoche and represent the people themselves. Paul is referring to Philemon and all who met in his house. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

Can't render this file because it contains an unexpected character in line 4 and column 184.

222
tn_PHP.tsv
View File

@ -1,102 +1,164 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of the Philippians\n\n1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)\n1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)\n1. Instructions\n - To be steadfast (1:27-30)\n - To be united (2:1-2)\n - To be humble (2:3-11)\n - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)\n - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)\n1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)\n1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)\n1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)\n1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)\n1. Final remarks\n - Values (4:8-9)\n - Contentment (4:10-20)\n - Final Greetings (4:21-23)\n\n### Who wrote the Book Philippians?\n\nPaul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Philippians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Philippi like?\n\nPhilip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?\n\nThe “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).\n\n### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?\n\nSome versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
front:intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of the Philippians\n\n1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)\n1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)\n1. Instructions\n - To be steadfast (1:27-30)\n - To be united (2:1-2)\n - To be humble (2:3-11)\n - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)\n - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)\n1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)\n1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)\n1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)\n1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)\n1. Final remarks\n - Values (4:8-9)\n - Contentment (4:10-20)\n - Final Greetings (4:21-23)\n\n### Who wrote the Book Philippians?\n\nPaul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Philippians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Philippi like?\n\nPhilip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?\n\nThe “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).\n\n### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?\n\nSome versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The day of Christ\n\nThis probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
1:1 xk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:2 uuep rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing.
1:3 ntp5 ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could mean: (1) Paul thanked God each time that he thought about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “each time I think about you” (2) Paul thanked God for the good things that he remembered about the Christians in Philppi. Alternate translation: “because of all that I remember about you”
1:5 bca2 ἐπὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 Here, **because** could mean: (1) It could be introducing the reason for Paul’s joy. See the UST’s translation of this verse. Or (2) It could be introducing the reason that Paul gives thanks to God. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God because of your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now”
1:5 yi9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate/figs-explicit] τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here, **your fellowship in the gospel** refers to the Philippian Christians’ partnering with Paul in the various things involved in spreading the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language you can state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your participation with me in advancing the gospel” or “your partnership with me in working to spread the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 vi1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 The phrase **from the first day** could mean: (1) It could mean the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel which Paul preached to them. See UST. (2) It could refer to the time at which Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi. Alternate translation: “from the time I first preached the gospel to you until now” If the phrase **from the first day** would be unclear in your language you could translate this phrase using option 1 or 2 or using a combination of option 1 and 2. Alternate translation: “from the time you first heard and believed the gospel I preached until now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:2 uuep rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 pyji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:3 ntp5 ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could refer to (1) Paul thanking God each time that he thought about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “each time I think about you” (2) Paul thanking God for the good things that he remembered about the Christians in Philppi. Alternate translation: “because of all that I remember about you”
1:3 w8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated the word **you** in [1:2](../01/2.md). In this letter, every use of the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians except for in one use in [4:3](../04/3.md) which has a note will discuss to discuss it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:5 bca2 ἐπὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 Here, **because** could refer to: (1) the reason for Paul’s joy. See UST. (2) the reason that Paul gives thanks to God. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God because of your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now”
1:5 fdqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **your** is plural and refers to the Philippian Christians. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are always plural and always refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:5 yi9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here, **your fellowship in the gospel** refers to the Philippian Christians’ partnering with Paul in the various things involved in spreading the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language you can state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your participation with me in advancing the gospel” or “your partnership with me in working to spread the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:5 vi1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 The phrase **from the first day** could refer to: (1) the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel which Paul preached to them. See UST. (2) the time at which Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi. Alternate translation: “from the time I first preached the gospel to you until now” (3) both the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel and to the time when Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi.\nAlternate translation: “from the time you first heard and believed the gospel I preached until now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 s1l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεποιθὼς αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 The phrase **having been persuaded** indicates the reason that Paul thanks God. If it would be clearer in your language you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The reason I thank God is because I am confident of this very thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 jf4x ὁ ἐναρξάμενος 1 Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God having begun”
1:6 jf4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἐναρξάμενος 1 Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God having begun” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 u80a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι ὁ ἐναρξάμενος ἐν ὑμῖν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν 1 The phrase **good work in you** refers to both the initial conversion of the Philippian Christians and to God’s ongoing work in their lives, through the work of the Holy Spirit, after they first believed in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that God, having begun his good work in you through your conversion and the ongoing work of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 p2a5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιτελέσει 1 Here, **will perfect it** means that God will bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian Christians at their conversion and was currently doing through the Holy Spirit. If it would be clearer in your language you can say this explicitly. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 p2a5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιτελέσει 1 Here, **will perfect it** means that God will bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian Christians at their conversion and was currently doing. If it would be clearer in your language you can say this explicitly. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 p5pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμέρας Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **the day of Jesus Christ** refers to the time in the future when Jesus Christ will return to judge the world and save those who believe in him. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus Christ returns” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 sowf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς 1 This idiom expresses strong affection. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:7 sowf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς 1 The phrase, **I have you in my heart** is an idiom which expresses strong affection. If you have an equivalent expression which adequately communicates the meaning you may use it here or you state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:7 jn2s συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος & ὄντας 1 Alternate translation: “sharing in grace with me”
1:7 df00 χάριτος 1 Here, Paul uses the word **grace** to refer to both to His imprisonment and to his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel. Consider saying this in a way which would make the meaning clear in your language. See UST.
1:7 o7ef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard. The Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 r3jp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is figuratively describing his thoughts and feelings of love by associating them with his **heart**. Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to represent the center of Paul’s inner thoughts and feelings. Paul uses the phrase **I have you in my heart** to mean that he loves and cares for the Philippian Christians. If this would be confusing in your language you may use an equivalent expression from your language to express this or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you deeply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 df00 χάριτος 1 Here, Paul uses the word **grace** to refer both to His imprisonment and to his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel. If this would be unclear, consider saying this in a way that would make the meaning clear in your language. See UST.
1:7 o7ef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard and the Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:7 dv6x ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At the time Paul wrote this letter the word translated **defense** was often used with a legal meaning to refer to the defense given in a court of law against a charge that was made. Here, Paul uses the word **defense** to speak of his defending the truth of the gospel. If your language has a word or phrase which expresses the legal sense of this word, considering using it if it would be natural to use in the context of defending the gospel.
1:7 cp9o βεβαιώσει 1 At the time Paul wrote this letter the word **confirmation** could be used with a legal meaning to refer to legally defending and confirming the truth of something. If your language has a word or phrase which expresses the legal sense of this word, considering using it if it would be natural to use in the context of defending and confirming the truth of the gospel.
1:8 xun1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The word **bowels** is a term which refers to body organs and particularly to the liver, lungs, and heart. Here, Paul uses **bowels** figuratively. The figurative use of **bowels** could mean: (1) **Bowels** could figuratively refer to the center and source of emotion. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” (2) **Bowels** could figuratively refer to emotion itself. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 w910 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει 1 The word **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “see.” Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:8 xun1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The word **bowels** is a term which refers to body organs and particularly to the liver, lungs, and heart. Here, Paul uses **bowels** figuratively. The figurative use of **bowels** could refer to: (1) the center and source of emotion. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” (2) emotion itself. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:9 w910 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει 1 The word **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “see”. Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:9 tbtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει 1 The word **understanding** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** by using a verb phrase such as “and teach you to love wisely.” Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:10 e17g εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν ὑμᾶς τὰ διαφέροντα 1 Alternate translation: “so that you may approve and choose what pleases God”
1:10 ybw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς 1 Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine and is the desired result. Consider using a word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows the phrase **so that** is the reason for what Paul prays in verse 9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:10 ybw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς 1 Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine and is the desired result of his prayer. Consider using a word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows the phrase **so that** is the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:10 s4ec τὰ διαφέροντα 1 Alternate translation: “what is most pleasing to God”
1:10 siv8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ ἀπρόσκοποι 1 The words **pure** and **blameless** have very similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the idea of moral purity. If it would be clearer in your language you could combine these two words and translate them as one idea. Alternate translation: “completely blameless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:11 lu5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **being filled** figuratively refers to what characterizes a person. The comparison is between a good tree which produces good fruit and a person who discerns and acts on what is good with the result that their life produces good works. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “habitually doing the good works which Jesus the Messiah produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:11 lu5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **fruit of** is a metaphor which figuratively refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. The phrase **fruit of righteousness** is a comparison between a good tree which produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “habitually doing the good works which Jesus the Messiah produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:11 t3w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπληρωμένοι 1 The phrase **being filled with** is in the passive tense. If using a passive verb form would be confusing in your language you may translate this phrase using an active verb form. Alternate translation: “God has enabled you to produce” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:12 tu2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:12 zy4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ, μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 The phrase **the things concerning me** refers to Paul’s imprisonment. If this would be unclear in your language you may state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things I have suffered because I was put into prison for preaching about Jesus have happened for the greater progress of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:12 q288 μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel”
1:12 q288 μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel”
1:13 wi6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **As a result** introduces the result of Paul’s circumstances which he began discussing in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:13 h1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμούς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment by using the phrase **my chains**. This is because Paul was chained to a guard. The Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 f8az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς δεσμούς μου & ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here, the preposition **in** used in the phrase **chains in Christ** could mean: (1) It could mean that Paul’s chains are because of his work for the cause of Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (2) It could mean that Paul is in chains because of his close connection with Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains because of my connection with Christ” or “my chains because I am in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:13 h1ly δεσμούς μου 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:7](../01/7.md).
1:13 f8az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς δεσμούς μου & ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here, the preposition **in** used in the phrase **chains in Christ** could refer to: (1) that Paul’s chains are because of his work for the cause of Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (2) the fact that Paul is in chains because of his close connection with Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains because of my connection with Christ” or “my chains because I am in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:13 dm1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πραιτωρίῳ 1 The phrase **palace guard** refers to a special group of soldiers that helped protect the Roman emperor. Consider translating this phrase in a way that is easily understood in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:14 gy47 ἀφόβως τὸν λόγον λαλεῖν 1 “to fearlessly speak God’s message”
1:15 vw1s τινὲς μὲν καὶ & τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν 1 “Some people preach the good news about Christ”
1:15 f32h διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν 1 “because they do not want people listening to me, and they want to cause trouble”
1:15 v1sb τινὲς δὲ καὶ δι’ εὐδοκίαν 1 “but other people do it because they are kind and they want to help”
1:16 qf4p οἱ 1 “those who proclaim Christ out of good will”
1:16 ttr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God chose him to defend the gospel. (2) Paul is in prison because he defended the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:16 st7k εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 “to teach everyone that the message of Jesus is true”
1:17 eq7s οἱ δὲ 1 “but the others” or “but the ones who proclaim Christ out of envy and strife”
1:17 z8ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 Here, **chains** is a metonym for imprisonment. Alternate translation: “while I am imprisoned” or “while I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:18 z5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί γάρ? 1 Paul uses this question to introduce how he feels about the situation he wrote about in [Philippians 1:15-17](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “This is what I think about this.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1:18 gcfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί γάρ? 1 This may be an idiom that means “It does not matter.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:18 wnn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τί γάρ? 1 The words “shall I think about this” are understood as part of the question. Alternate translation: “What then shall I think about this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:18 ah9v πλὴν ὅτι παντὶ τρόπῳ, εἴτε προφάσει εἴτε ἀληθείᾳ, Χριστὸς καταγγέλλεται 1 “As long as people preach about Christ, it does not matter if they do it for good reasons or for bad reasons”
1:18 c8tr ἐν τούτῳ χαίρω 1 “I am happy because people are preaching about Jesus”
1:18 cf58 χαρήσομαι 1 “I will celebrate” or “I will be glad”
1:19 qp81 τοῦτό μοι ἀποβήσεται εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 “because people proclaim Christ, God will deliver me”
1:19 h9hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μοι & εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 The word **deliverance** is an abstract noun that refers to one person bringing another person to a safe place. You may have to specify that it is God whom Paul expects to deliver him. Alternate translation: “in my being brought to a safe place” or “in God bringing me to a safe place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 x3fs διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν δεήσεως, καὶ ἐπιχορηγίας τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 “because you are praying and the Spirit of Jesus Christ is helping me”
1:19 c48j τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 “of the Holy Spirit”
1:20 fh48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου 1 Here the words **eager expectation** and **hope** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how strong his expectation is. Alternate translation: “I eagerly and confidently hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:20 tk7l ἀλλ’ ἐν πάσῃ παρρησίᾳ 1 This is part of Paul’s expectation and hope. Alternate translation: “but that I will be very bold”
1:20 jz1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μεγαλυνθήσεται Χριστὸς ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 The phrase **my body** is a metonym for what Paul does with his body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:20 t8z9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεγαλυνθήσεται Χριστὸς ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) Paul will honor Christ by what he does” (2) People will praise Christ because of what Paul does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:20 y78k εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου 1 “whether I live or die” or “if I go on living or if I die”
1:21 p9b7 ἐμοὶ γὰρ 1 These words are emphatic. They indicate that this is Paul’s personal experience.
1:21 sxt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ζῆν Χριστὸς 1 Here pleasing and serving **Christ** is spoken of as Paul’s only purpose for living. Alternate translation: “to go on living is an opportunity to please Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:21 n3jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ἀποθανεῖν κέρδος 1 Here death is spoken of as **gain**. Here, **gain** could mean: (1) Paul’s death will help spread the message of the gospel. (2) Paul will be in a better situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:22 a21c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί 1 The word **flesh** here is a metonym for the body, and “living in the flesh” is a metonym for being alive. Alternate translation: “But if I am to remain alive in my body” or “But if I continue to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:22 mwl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου 1 The word **fruitful** here refers to the good results of Paul’s work. Alternate translation: “that means I will be able to work and my work will produce good results” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:23 tq29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνέχομαι δὲ ἐκ τῶν δύο 1 Paul speaks of how hard it is for him to choose between living and dying as if two heavy objects, like rocks or logs, were pushing on him from opposite sides at the same time. Your language might prefer the objects to pull rather than push. Alternate translation: “I am under tension. I do not know if I should choose to live or to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:23 f7qg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχων εἰς τὸ ἀναλῦσαι καὶ σὺν Χριστῷ εἶναι 1 Paul here uses **to depart** as a euphemism to show that he is not afraid of dying. Alternate translation: “I would like to die because I will go to be with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:25 bu8d τοῦτο πεποιθὼς 1 “being sure that it is better for you that I stay alive”
1:25 kmp4 οἶδα ὅτι μενῶ 1 “I know that I will continue to live” or “I know that I will keep on living”
1:26 i9cl ἵνα & ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 “so that because of me” or “so that because of what I do”
1:27 cd3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὅτι στήκετε ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ συναθλοῦντες τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 The phrases **stand firm in one spirit** and **with one soul striving together** share similar meanings and emphasize the importance of unity. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
1:27 jey6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μιᾷ ψυχῇ συναθλοῦντες 1 Agreeing with one another is spoken of as having **one soul**. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another and striving together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:27 ej2s συναθλοῦντες 1 “working hard together”
1:27 ya3h τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to spreading **the faith** that is based on **the gospel**. (2) This refers to believing and living as the gospel teaches us.
1:28 i9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 This is a command to the Philippian believers. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1:28 l495 ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 “Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you”
1:28 nb4b καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 “and this is from God.” Here, **this** could mean: (1) This refers to the believers’ courage. (2) This refers to the sign. (3) This refers to destruction and salvation.
1:30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 “suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you now hear that I am still suffering”
1:14 a1kh ἀδελφῶν 1 See how you translated **brothers** in verse 12. Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1:14 gy47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλείονας τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου, περισσοτέρως τολμᾶν ἀφόβως τὸν λόγον λαλεῖν 1 The phrase **most of the brothers have been encouraged in the Lord by my chains, to dare more fearlessly to speak the word** means that most of the Christians who became aware of Paul’s imprisonment were emboldened by it to share the gospel with more courage. If it would be clearer in your language consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of my imprisonment most of our fellow believers have been emboldened to share the gospel more boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 sz29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 The phrase **encouraged in the Lord** means that the Philippian Christians had become more confident in Christ by Paul’s imprisonment. If this would be unclear in your language consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of my imprisonment, have increased confidence in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 ecy8 δεσμοῖς μου 1 See how you translated the phrase **my chains** in [1:7](../01/7.md) and [1:13](../01/13.md).
1:14 v2wo τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** refers to the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel” or “the good news”
1:15 vw1s τινὲς μὲν καὶ & τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν 1 Alternate translation: “Some people are preaching the good news about Jesus”
1:15 z9y9 διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **envy** and **strife** by using them in verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they are envious and seek their own evil purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:15 yh1c εὐδοκίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodwill** by using it in a verbal phrase. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:16 ttr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι 1 You can state the phrase **I am appointed for the defense of the gospel** in active form if it would be clearer in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:16 w0b8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ἀγάπης 1 Here, the object of the word **love** is not specified. You can leave the object of **love** unspecified or if it is needed in your language you may specify the object of **love**. Here, the word **love** could refer to: (1) love for Paul. See UST. (2) love for Christ. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because they love Christ” (3) love for multiple objects, such as Paul and Christ and those who have not yet heard or believed in the gospel. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because of their love for me, and Jesus, and those who do not believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:16 st7k εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Alternate translation: “to prove that the message about Jesus is true”
1:16 ia9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι 1 The phrase **I am appointed** could refer to: (1) God appointing Paul’s current situation of being in prison. Alternate translation: “I am appointed to be here for the defense of the gospel” (2) God appointing Paul to the ministry of defending the gospel. Alternate translation: “God has appointed me to the ministry of publicly defending the truth of the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:17 z8ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς 1 See how you translated the word **chains** in [1:7](../01/7.md), [1:13](../01/13.md), and [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:17 tc1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐξ ἐριθείας τὸν Χριστὸν καταγγέλλουσιν, οὐχ ἁγνῶς οἰόμενοι θλῖψιν ἐγείρειν τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 Alternate translation: “But the people preaching the gospel from selfish ambition have wrong motives. They hope to cause me trouble in my imprisonment by their preaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:18 dc7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί γάρ 1 The phrase **What then** is a rhetorical question. If using a rhetorical question would be confusing in your language consider expressing the meaning of this rhetorical question by changing it into a statement. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1:18 z5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τί γάρ 1 The phrase **What then** is a rhetorical question in which Paul leaves out some words that might be necessary to fully understand this question in some languages. If the phrase **What then** would be unclear in your language, you may add the words which are implied but not stated. This phrase could mean: (1) This phrase could be a rhetorical question which expects a negative answer. Alternate translation: “What does it matter what their motives are?” or “So what difference does it make?” (2) This phrase could be focusing on the result. Alternate translation: “What then is the result of this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:18 sw24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταγγέλλεται 1 The phrase **is proclaimed** is in the passive tense. If using a passive verb form would be unclear in your language you may translate this phrase using an active verb form such as “are proclaiming”. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:18 cf58 χαρήσομαι 1 Alternate translation: “I will celebrate” or “I will be glad”
1:19 saze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτό 1 Here, the word **this** refers to Paul’s current situation of being in prison and the things that accompanied it. If this would not be clear in your language you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n
1:19 h9hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι τοῦτό μοι ἀποβήσεται εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 The word **deliverance** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you can express the meaning behind this word by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “for I know that this will result in God delivering me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:19 c48j τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **the Spirit of Jesus Christ** is referring to the Holy Spirit.
1:20 fh48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea. Both **eager expectation** and **hope** have similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the strength of his expectation. If you have a single word or phrase in your language which expresses the meaning of these two words, consider expressing their meaning together as one word or phrase if it would be clearer in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:20 tk7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου 1 Both **expectation** and **hope** are abstract nouns. If it would be clearer in your language you may express them together in a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “but I fully believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:20 jz1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 Here, the phrase **in my body** is used figuratively to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22-24](../01/22-24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:20 y78k εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου 1 Alternate translation: “whether I live or die”
1:21 n3jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κέρδος 1 The word **gain** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:22 a21c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκί 1 Here, the phrase **in the flesh** means “in the body”. Paul is using the word **flesh** figuratively to refer to his entire body. Paul’s audience would have understood that he was referring to his body. If this would be confusing in your language consider using a different word or phrase to avoid misunderstanding. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:22 mwl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου 1 Here, the word **fruitful** refers to Paul’s work producing good results. This is a metaphor in which Paul’s anticipated productive work is compared to a plant or tree which produces good fruit. Alternate translation: “this will mean effectively serving God” or “this will mean productively working for the advancement of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:22 kxuu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔργου 1 The word **labor** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:23 tq29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνέχομαι δὲ ἐκ τῶν δύο 1 The phrase **hard pressed** is a metaphor. Paul speaks as if he is experiencing literal pressure from two opposite sides at the same time. Paul uses this figurative expression to show his difficulty in deciding which is best, if given the option between living or dying. If this would be confusing in your language, you can translate this phrase using a metaphor that would make sense in your language or you can choose to use plain language to express it. Alternate translation: “Both options have their advantages, so the decision is not an easy one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:23 j1sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive συνέχομαι 1 The phrase **I am hard pressed** is in passive form. If this would be confusing in your language you can express the meaning behind this phrase by using a verb phrase that is in the active voice. Alternate translation: “It is not easy for me to decide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:23 q0n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν δύο 1 Here, the phrase **the two** refers to the two options regarding what decision is best. The choice of continuing to live on earth and serve Christ or its alternative, the choice of leaving earth to be with Christ. If the phrase **the two** would be confusing in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these two options” or “these two choices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:23 u1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιθυμίαν 1 The word **desire** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you can express the meaning of this word by using it in a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:23 hhjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἀναλῦσαι 1 Here, Paul is referring to his death with the phrase **to depart**. This is a delicate way of referring to something unpleasant. Here, instead of focusing on the unpleasantness of death, Paul is instead using the word **depart** to focus on the positive result of his death, namely that his physical death will result in his being with Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “to leave this body” or “to depart from this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1:24 etly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δὲ ἐπιμένειν ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ 1 The phrase **remain in the flesh** means to remain alive in one’s body on earth. If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this plainly. Alternate translation: “but to remain in the body” or “but to remain on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:24 k2j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀναγκαιότερον 1 In the phrase **is more necessary** Paul leaves out the implied words “than departing” because he knows that his readers will understand them from the context. If this would be unclear in your language, consider supplying these omitted words in your translation. Alternative translation: “is more necessary than departing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:24 o4fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche σαρκὶ 1 See how you translated the phrase **flesh** in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:24 hnl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμᾶς 1 In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be most appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:25 bu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τοῦτο πεποιθὼς 1 The word **this** refers back to [1:24](../01/24.md) where Paul said that he believed it was more necessary that he remain alive on earth so that he could continue helping the Philippian Christians mature in their faith. If this would be unclear in your language consider further explaining the word **this** in your translation. Alternate translation: “And being sure that it is better for you that I remain” or “And having been convinced that I should remain here, on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:25 kmp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo μενῶ 1 Here, the word **remain** refers to remaining alive on earth in one’s body in contrast to dying and leaving the earth to be with Christ. Paul explained this in [1:23-24](../01/23-24.md) so it is not necessary to explain it here. See how you translated the word **remain** in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1:25 rruy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:25 u0ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ὑμῶν προκοπὴν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **progress** by using it as a verb in a verbal phrase or by expressing it in some other way that will make the meaning clear in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you progress in knowing Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:25 xvx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν τῆς πίστεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **faith** by using them in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be clear in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:26 viwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** indicates purpose. In this verse, what follows **so that** is the reason Paul gives for what he said in [1:25](../01/25.md). In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:26 d906 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καύχημα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boasting** by expressing its meaning in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:26 an70 καύχημα & ἐν 1 Here, the word **boasting** means to “glory in” Jesus or to “take joy in” him. Alternate translation: “glorying in” or “rejoicing in”
1:26 j1d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go παρουσίας 1 Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **coming** here. Here, the word **coming** refers to Paul going to where the Philippians live, and visiting them. If your language has a different way of expressing the motion described here by the word **coming**, use the word or phrase that will best help your readers understand which direction Paul is speaking of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1:26 ay37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν περισσεύῃ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ, διὰ τῆς ἐμῆς παρουσίας πάλιν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the word **through** could refer to: (1) the reason the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “because”. Alternate translation: See UST. (2) the means by which the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “by”. Alternate translation: “by my coming to you again, your boasting in Christ Jesus will increase” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:27 bwmq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθὼν 1 Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **come**. Here, the word **come** refers to Paul going to where the Philippians live, and visiting them. See how you translated the form of this word in the previous verse, [1:26](../01/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1:27 yddq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀξίως τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τοῦ Χριστοῦ πολιτεύεσθε 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:27 u09z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used figuratively to mean not changing one’s beliefs but rather remaining steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language consider using an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you be unmoved” or “you remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:27 kmn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ 1 Here, the phrases **in one spirit** and **with one soul** mean essentially the same thing and are used together to emphasize the importance of unity. Both of these phrases are used figuratively to mean “to have unity in ones primary purposes and beliefs”. Both phrases refer to being in agreement about what matters. If these expressions would be confusing in your language you may use plain language or use a similar expression from your language. Because these two phrases mean essentially the same thing, you may translate them together as one expression, if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “with unity” or “with singleness of purpose” or “in full agreement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1:27 ej2s συναθλοῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “working hard together” or “cooperating together in the work”
1:27 ya3h τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 The phrase **the faith of the gospel** is speaking of the Christian religion as a whole and refers to the Christian belief system which centers around the gospel. See UST.
1:28 i9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:28 u9an rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀντικειμένων 1 The phrase **those opposing you** refers to the people who were opposing the Philippian Christians and causing them trouble. If this would be unclear in your language consider stating this plainly. Alternate translation: “the people opposing you” or “the people opposing you because you believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:28 l495 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **sign** by expressing it in a verbal phrase or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:28 t225 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπωλείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** by using a verb form or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will destroy them” or see UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:28 ypn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** by using a verb form of this word or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:28 nb4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 The word **this** in the phrase **this is from God** could refer to: (1) what comes before it in this verse, both the courage God gives the Philippian Christians and the sign that their courage gives to those opposing them. Alternate translation: “your lack of fear and the evidence it gives is all from God” (2) the sign given to those who oppose the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “this sign is from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
1:29 qous rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ 1 The phrase**it has been freely given to you** is in the passive voice. If using the passive voice would be confusing in your language you may express this using an active verbal clause. Alternate translation: “God has graciously granted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **struggle** by using a verb phrase, as the UST does, or by expressing the idea behind this word in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “You are engaged in the same conflict” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:30 cewf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγῶνα 1 Here, the word **struggle** refers to the conflict between good and evil and speaks of it as if it were a military battle or an athletic competition. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “You are engaged in the same battle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:30 hnec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** refers to what Paul is experiencing. If this would be unclear in your language you can express this in a way that is understandable in your language. Alternate translation: “you saw me experience and now hear that I am experiencing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:30 xkob rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** leaves out some words that might be necessary for a clear understanding in some languages. The missing words are left out because they are implied from earlier in this verse. If this phrase would be unclear as it is you may supply the missing words in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am engaged in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Practical instructions\n\nIn this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “If there is any”\n\nThis appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.”
2:1 xye5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ’s example.
2:1 b1q7 εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged because of Christ”
2:1 xye5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIf it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **encouragement** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: “if Christ encourages you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:1 v4ns rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is the natural consequence or conclusion to what preceded it. Use a word or phrase from your language that would show that what follows the word **Therefore** is intended to be the consequence of what preceded it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
2:1 b1q7 εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Alternate translation: “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged by being in Christ” or “if you are encouraged because of your union with Christ”
2:1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 Here, **love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way”
2:1 m84k εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος 1 “if you have fellowship with the Spirit”
2:1 l2px εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί 1 “if you have experienced any of God’s acts of tender mercy and compassion”
2:2 jxq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πληρώσατέ μου τὴν χαρὰν 1 Paul speaks here of **joy** as if it were a task that can be completed. Alternate translation: “cause me to rejoice greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:3 y1le μηδὲν κατ’ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν 1 “Do not serve yourselves or think of yourselves as better than others”
2:4 ezk6 μὴ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος σκοποῦντες, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἑτέρων ἕκαστοι 1 “not caring only about what you need, but also about what others need”
2:5 rh98 τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 “Have the same attitude that Christ Jesus had” or “Think about one another the way Christ Jesus thought of people”
2:6 hs4q ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων 1 “even though everything that is true of God was true of him”
2:6 els2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐχ ἁρπαγμὸν ἡγήσατο τὸ εἶναι ἴσα Θεῷ 1 Here to be **equal** refers to “equal status” or “equal honor.” Grasping onto equality with God represents demanding that he continue to be honored as God is honored. Christ did not do that. Though he did not cease to be God, he ceased to act as God. Alternate translation: “did not think that he had to have the same status as God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:7 yu25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Paul speaks of Christ as if he were a container in order to say that Christ refused to act with his divine powers during his ministry on earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:7 tc8n ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων 1 “as a human being”
2:8 t8a6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 Paul speaks of death here in a figurative way. The translator can understand **to the point of death** either as a metaphor of location (Christ went all the way to death) or as a metaphor of time (Christ was obedient even until the time that he died). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 hi57 θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 “even to dying on a cross”
2:9 mvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 Here, **name** is a metonym that refers to rank or honor. Alternate translation: “the rank that is above any other rank” or “the honor that is above any other honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:9 qsy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 His **name** is more important, more to be praised than any other name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 tk45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here, **knee** is a synecdoche for the whole person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:10 xz1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here bending the knee to kneel on the ground is a metonym for worship. **In the name of** here is a metonym for the person, telling who it is they will worship. Alternate translation: “every person will worship Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 kfb4 καταχθονίων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the place where people go when they die. (2) This refers to the place where demons dwell.
2:1 del5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἴ τι 2 In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:1 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **comfort** and **love** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if being loved by Christ has comforted you” or “if Christ loving you has comforted you” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:1 m84k εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος 1 The phrase **fellowship of the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other. Alternate translation: “if the Spirit has produced any fellowship among you” or “if the Spirit has given you fellowship with each other” (2) the Philippian Christians fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have fellowship with the Spirit” (3) both the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other and to their having fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have any fellowship with the Spirit and the Spirit has produced in you any fellowship with each other”
2:1 p977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἴ τις 2 In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]
2:1 l2px rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **affections** and **compassions** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if you feel any affection and compassion for one another” or “if you have any affection and compassion for each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:1 a0o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἴ τις 3 In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]
2:2 j5v2 πληρώσατέ μου τὴν χαρὰν 1 Alternate translation: “make me very happy”
2:2 jxq2 τὸ αὐτὸ φρονῆτε 1 Alternate translation: “you think together as one”
2:2 ve0w τὴν αὐτὴν ἀγάπην ἔχοντες 1 Alternate translation: “have love for each other” or “love one another”
2:2 yo7j σύνψυχοι 1 Alternate translation: “be one in spirit” or “be one in heart and will”
2:2 b8gz τὸ ἓν φρονοῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “be concerned about the same things”
2:3 p0v0 μηδὲν κατ’ ἐριθείαν 1 Alternate translation: “Do not be selfishly ambitious” or “Never try to make yourselves more important than others” or “Do not do anything with an attitude of self-importance”
2:3 y1le μηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν 1 Alternate translation: “or with empty pride”
2:4 ezk6 μὴ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος σκοποῦντες, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἑτέρων ἕκαστοι 1 Alternate translation: “each of you caring not only about what you need, but also about what others need”
2:4 nowd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕκαστος 1 The phrase **each one** here means “each person”. If it would be clearer in your language consider saying this explicitly. Alternate translation: “each of you” or “everyone of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:4 ob45 μὴ & σκοποῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “not thinking about”
2:4 l3q0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns ἑαυτῶν 1 Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** is plural in form. If your language has a plural form for this pronoun, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
2:4 qmzl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτῶν 1 Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** refers back to **each one**. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2:5 pqdc τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “Have the same attitude that Christ Jesus had”
2:5 rh98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **attitude** with a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “Think about one another the way Christ Jesus thought of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:5 tdb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 See how you translated **you** in the previous verses. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2:5 kwoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative τοῦτο φρονεῖτε 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians in the plural form. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. Alternate translation: “Everyone of you have this attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
2:5 acmu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **attitude … in Christ Jesus** means the attitude and disposition which existed in Christ Jesus and therefore characterized his behavior. The phrase **this attitude … which also was in Christ Jesus** therefore refers to the attitude or way of thinking that belonged to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “which also belonged to Christ Jesus” or “which Christ Jesus also had” or “which Christ Jesus also displayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:6 hs4q ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων 1 Alternate translation: “though everything that is true of God was true of him”
2:6 xo2l ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων 1 The phrase **existing in the form of God** means that Jesus had the very nature of God. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be God but was not. This phrase is saying that Jesus was fully God. The rest of this verse, and the next two verses, explain that Jesus, while being fully God, humbled himself and acted as a servant in obedience to God. Avoid any translation that would suggest that Jesus was not fully God. Alternate translation: “being fully God”
2:6 els2 ἁρπαγμὸν 1 Alternate translation: “something to be held onto” or “something to be retained”
2:6 kd1l οὐχ & ἡγήσατο 1 Alternate translation: “did not think” or “did not regard”
2:7 x5rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 The word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the preceding clause in [2:6](../02/6.md) and what is expressed about Jesus in this verse and the next two verses. The contrast is made between the choice of hanging onto divine rights and privileges or choosing to surrender them. The rest of this verse, as well as the following two verses, explain how Jesus gave up many of his divine rights and privileges to act as a servant. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “Rather” of “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2:7 kvjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀλλὰ ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Instead, Jesus emptied himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:7 c64i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, the reflexive pronoun **himself** refers to Jesus and is used to emphasize the fact that Jesus freely and intentionally chose to empty himself of divine rights and privileges. Consider the best way, in your language, to express the emphatic element of this pronoun. Alternate translation: “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2:7 yu25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, Paul saying that Christ **emptied himself** is figurative and not literal. By using this phrase, Paul is vividly expressing that Christ chose to give up many of his divine rights and privileges when he became human. The phrase **emptied himself** is a figurative way of saying that Jesus chose to give up divine privileges and honors. Paul expresses this in a metaphorical way in order to more vividly make his point. If this would be unclear in your language consider using a similar expression that would be clear in your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he gave up divine rights and privileges” or “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:7 s95d ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν, μορφὴν δούλου λαβών 1 The phrase **having taken the form of a servant** modifies the phrase **he emptied himself** by explaining just how Jesus emptied himself, namely by acting as a servant. Consider the best way, in your language, to show the connection between these two phrases. Alternate translation: “Jesus emptied himself by acting as a servant” or “he emptied himself by becoming a servant”
2:7 r5dn μορφὴν δούλου λαβών 1 The phrase **having taken the form of a servant** means that Jesus acted as a servant while on earth. It does not mean that Jesus simply appeared to be a servant.
2:7 qetl ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων γενόμενος 1 The phrase **having been born in the likeness of men** means that Jesus became a human being. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be human. Rather, it means that Jesus who always existed as God, chose to take on a human body and therefore he appeared on earth in human form. Alternate translation: “having become a human being” or see UST.
2:7 tc8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the word **men** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. The word **men** is plural in form to emphasize the idea that Jesus resembled humanity in general. If your language has a way of expressing this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity, consider the most clear way to express this. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n
2:7 uizd καὶ σχήματι εὑρεθεὶς ὡς ἄνθρωπος 1 The phrase **having been found in appearance as a man** does not mean that Jesus appeared to be a man but was not. Rather, this phrase continues the thought of the the previous phrase **having been born in the likeness of men** and means that Jesus became a human being and therefore was fully human in appearance. The phrase **in appearance**, points out that Jesus was fully human in appearance but also indicates that while being fully human, Jesus was distinct from the rest of humanity because he retained his full deity while being human; and therefore was both human and divine at the same time. Alternate translation: “and while being found in the form of a human being” or see UST.
2:7 jmr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the word **man** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. If your language has a way of expressing this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity, consider using the term that would most clearly express this. Alternate translation: “a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n
2:8 t8a6 ἐταπείνωσεν ἑαυτὸν, γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 The phrase **having become** could be: (1) introducing the way Jesus **humbled himself**, namely that he humbled himself by becoming **obedient to the point of death**. Alternate translation: “Jesus humbled himself by becoming obedient to the point of dying” or “Jesus humbled himself this way, by obeying to the point of death” (2) explaining what the phrase **he humbled himself** refers to. If this is how this phrase is being used then **having become** is clarifying that **he humbled himself** by **death on a cross**. Alternate translation: “he humbled himself, specifically, by being obeying to the point of death”
2:8 ttys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτὸν 1 The word **himself** is a reflexive pronoun which refers to Jesus. The reflexive pronoun **himself** is used here to emphasize Jesus’ action of humbling himself. Consider the best way, in your language, to express the emphatic element of this pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2:8 r5f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **obey** with a verb such as “obeying”. Alternate translation: “having obeyed to the point of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:8 hi57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** with a verb such as “dying”. Alternate translation: “even to dying on a cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n
2:8 flk2 θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 The word **even** combined with the repetition of the word **death** emphasize that dying on a cross was considered extremely humiliating. Paul’s readers would have been familiar with crucifixion and understood that it was very humiliating. This phrase emphasizes that Jesus’ death on the cross showed the great extent of his humility and obedience. Think about the best way, in your language, to show the emphatic nature of this phrase. Alternate translation: “even to death on a cross” or “even as so far as dying on a cross” or “even to the extent of dying on a cross”
2:9 f3ek rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The word **Therefore** introduces the result of Jesus humbling himself. How Jesus humbled himself is described in [2:6-8](../2/6-8.md). What follows the word **Therefore** is the result of what Jesus did in [2:6-8](../2/6-8.md). The word**Therefore** shows the reason and result relationship between what comes before this word and what follows it. Choose the best way in your language to express the reason and result relationship expressed by the word **Therefore**. Alternate translation: “Because of this” or “Because Jesus acted this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:9 wmvd αὐτὸν ὑπερύψωσεν 1 Alternate translation: “greatly honored him”
2:9 qsy9 καὶ ἐχαρίσατο αὐτῷ τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 Alternate translation: “and gave him the position that was higher than any other position”
2:9 mvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 Here, **name** is a metonym that refers to status or position. Alternate translation: “the position that is above every other position” or “the rank that is above every other rank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 b3ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** connects this verse with the preceding verse,\n[2:9](../02/9.md), and shows that this verse and the next verse are the result of [2:9](../02/9.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2:10 tk45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here, every knee bending is an idiomatic way of saying that Jesus will be worshiped and honored. If this would be clear in your language consider using this expression but if it would not be clear in your language consider using an equivalent expression to communicate the the idea of worship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:10 xz1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here, **at the name of** is a metonym for the person, telling who it is they will worship. Alternate translation: “every person will worship Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 ec1a ὀνόματι 1 See how you translated **name** in [2:9](../02/9.md).
2:10 xn7a ἐπουρανίων καὶ ἐπιγείων καὶ καταχθονίων 1 The phrase **in heaven and on earth and under the earth** literally means “of heavenly things and of earthly things and of things under the earth” or “of heavenly beings and of earthly beings and of beings under the earth”. This phrase refers to all beings, including human beings and angels. This phrase emphasizes that all beings everywhere will bow in reverence to Jesus. Alternate translation: “every being in heaven, and on earth, and under the earth”\n
2:11 xy4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσα γλῶσσα 1 Here, **tongue** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person” or “every being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2:11 mr2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 Here the word **to** expresses result: “with the result that they will praise God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:12 jnp3 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the Philippian believers and shows them how to live the Christian life before others and reminds them of his example.
@ -211,7 +273,7 @@ front:intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians\n\n## Part 1: General Introd
4:1 dz44 οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 “so continue living for the Lord in the way that I have taught you, dear friends”
4:2 x5qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὐοδίαν παρακαλῶ, καὶ Συντύχην παρακαλῶ 1 These are women who were believers and helped Paul in the church at Philippi. Alternate translation: “I beg Euodia, and I beg Syntyche” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:2 iyq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 The phrase **to think the same** means to have the same attitude or opinion. Alternate translation: “to agree with each other because you both believe in the same Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:3 yb3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἐρωτῶ καὶ σέ 1 Here, **you** refers to the “true fellow worker” and is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
4:3 yb3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἐρωτῶ καὶ σέ 1 Here, **you** refers to the **true companion** and is singular. This is the only occurrence of the word **you** in Philippians that is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
4:3 hdz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γνήσιε σύνζυγε 1 This metaphor is from farming, where two animals would be bound to the same yoke, and so they work together. Alternate translation: “fellow worker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:3 cm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names μετὰ καὶ Κλήμεντος 1 **Clement** was a man who was a believer and worker in the church at Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:3 s9h9 ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς 1 “whose names God has written in the Book of Life”

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of the Philippians\n\n1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)\n1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)\n1. Instructions\n - To be steadfast (1:27-30)\n - To be united (2:1-2)\n - To be humble (2:3-11)\n - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)\n - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)\n1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)\n1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)\n1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)\n1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)\n1. Final remarks\n - Values (4:8-9)\n - Contentment (4:10-20)\n - Final Greetings (4:21-23)\n\n### Who wrote the Book Philippians?\n\nPaul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Philippians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Philippi like?\n\nPhilip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?\n\nThe “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).\n\n### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?\n\nSome versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) # Introduction to Philippians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of the Philippians\n\n1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)\n1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)\n1. Instructions\n - To be steadfast (1:27-30)\n - To be united (2:1-2)\n - To be humble (2:3-11)\n - To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)\n - To be innocent and light (2:14-18)\n1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)\n1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)\n1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)\n1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)\n1. Final remarks\n - Values (4:8-9)\n - Contentment (4:10-20)\n - Final Greetings (4:21-23)\n\n### Who wrote the Book Philippians?\n\nPaul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.\n\n### What is the Book of Philippians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Philippi like?\n\nPhilip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?\n\nThe “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).\n\n### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?\n\nSome versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1:intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The day of Christ\n\nThis probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
4 1:1 xk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
5 1:2 uuep rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
6 1:3 1:2 ntp5 pyji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could mean: (1) Paul thanked God each time that he thought about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “each time I think about you” (2) Paul thanked God for the good things that he remembered about the Christians in Philppi. Alternate translation: “because of all that I remember about you” In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
7 1:5 1:3 bca2 ntp5 ἐπὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **because** could mean: (1) It could be introducing the reason for Paul’s joy. See the UST’s translation of this verse. Or (2) It could be introducing the reason that Paul gives thanks to God. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God because of your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now” Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could refer to (1) Paul thanking God each time that he thought about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “each time I think about you” (2) Paul thanking God for the good things that he remembered about the Christians in Philppi. Alternate translation: “because of all that I remember about you”
8 1:5 1:3 yi9l w8dz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate/figs-explicit] rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ὑμῶν 1 Here, **your fellowship in the gospel** refers to the Philippian Christians’ partnering with Paul in the various things involved in spreading the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language you can state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your participation with me in advancing the gospel” or “your partnership with me in working to spread the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) See how you translated the word **you** in [1:2](../01/2.md). In this letter, every use of the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians except for in one use in [4:3](../04/3.md) which has a note will discuss to discuss it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
9 1:5 vi1r bca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν ἐπὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 The phrase **from the first day** could mean: (1) It could mean the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel which Paul preached to them. See UST. (2) It could refer to the time at which Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi. Alternate translation: “from the time I first preached the gospel to you until now” If the phrase **from the first day** would be unclear in your language you could translate this phrase using option 1 or 2 or using a combination of option 1 and 2. Alternate translation: “from the time you first heard and believed the gospel I preached until now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **because** could refer to: (1) the reason for Paul’s joy. See UST. (2) the reason that Paul gives thanks to God. Alternate translation: “I give thanks to God because of your partnership in the gospel from the first day until now”
10 1:5 fdqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **your** is plural and refers to the Philippian Christians. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are always plural and always refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
11 1:5 yi9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ κοινωνίᾳ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here, **your fellowship in the gospel** refers to the Philippian Christians’ partnering with Paul in the various things involved in spreading the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language you can state this more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your participation with me in advancing the gospel” or “your partnership with me in working to spread the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12 1:5 vi1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἄχρι τοῦ νῦν 1 The phrase **from the first day** could refer to: (1) the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel which Paul preached to them. See UST. (2) the time at which Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi. Alternate translation: “from the time I first preached the gospel to you until now” (3) both the time at which the Philippian Christians first believed the gospel and to the time when Paul first preached the gospel in Philippi.\nAlternate translation: “from the time you first heard and believed the gospel I preached until now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
13 1:6 s1l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεποιθὼς αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 The phrase **having been persuaded** indicates the reason that Paul thanks God. If it would be clearer in your language you can state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The reason I thank God is because I am confident of this very thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14 1:6 jf4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἐναρξάμενος 1 Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God having begun” Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God having begun” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15 1:6 u80a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι ὁ ἐναρξάμενος ἐν ὑμῖν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν 1 The phrase **good work in you** refers to both the initial conversion of the Philippian Christians and to God’s ongoing work in their lives, through the work of the Holy Spirit, after they first believed in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that God, having begun his good work in you through your conversion and the ongoing work of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16 1:6 p2a5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιτελέσει 1 Here, **will perfect it** means that God will bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian Christians at their conversion and was currently doing through the Holy Spirit. If it would be clearer in your language you can say this explicitly. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **will perfect it** means that God will bring to completion the work which he began in the lives of the Philippian Christians at their conversion and was currently doing. If it would be clearer in your language you can say this explicitly. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
17 1:6 p5pu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμέρας Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **the day of Jesus Christ** refers to the time in the future when Jesus Christ will return to judge the world and save those who believe in him. If it would be clearer in your language you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time when Jesus Christ returns” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
18 1:7 sowf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς 1 This idiom expresses strong affection. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase, **I have you in my heart** is an idiom which expresses strong affection. If you have an equivalent expression which adequately communicates the meaning you may use it here or you state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
19 1:7 jn2s συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος & ὄντας 1 Alternate translation: “sharing in grace with me”
20 1:7 df00 r3jp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χάριτος ἔχειν με ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, Paul uses the word **grace** to refer to both to His imprisonment and to his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel. Consider saying this in a way which would make the meaning clear in your language. See UST. Paul is figuratively describing his thoughts and feelings of love by associating them with his **heart**. Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to represent the center of Paul’s inner thoughts and feelings. Paul uses the phrase **I have you in my heart** to mean that he loves and cares for the Philippian Christians. If this would be confusing in your language you may use an equivalent expression from your language to express this or state this using plain language. Alternate translation: “I love you deeply” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21 1:7 o7ef df00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου χάριτος 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard. The Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, Paul uses the word **grace** to refer both to His imprisonment and to his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel. If this would be unclear, consider saying this in a way that would make the meaning clear in your language. See UST.
22 1:7 o7ef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard and the Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
23 1:7 dv6x ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At the time Paul wrote this letter the word translated **defense** was often used with a legal meaning to refer to the defense given in a court of law against a charge that was made. Here, Paul uses the word **defense** to speak of his defending the truth of the gospel. If your language has a word or phrase which expresses the legal sense of this word, considering using it if it would be natural to use in the context of defending the gospel.
24 1:7 cp9o βεβαιώσει 1 At the time Paul wrote this letter the word **confirmation** could be used with a legal meaning to refer to legally defending and confirming the truth of something. If your language has a word or phrase which expresses the legal sense of this word, considering using it if it would be natural to use in the context of defending and confirming the truth of the gospel.
25 1:8 xun1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 The word **bowels** is a term which refers to body organs and particularly to the liver, lungs, and heart. Here, Paul uses **bowels** figuratively. The figurative use of **bowels** could mean: (1) **Bowels** could figuratively refer to the center and source of emotion. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” (2) **Bowels** could figuratively refer to emotion itself. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The word **bowels** is a term which refers to body organs and particularly to the liver, lungs, and heart. Here, Paul uses **bowels** figuratively. The figurative use of **bowels** could refer to: (1) the center and source of emotion. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” (2) emotion itself. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
26 1:9 w910 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει 1 The word **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “see.” Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) The word **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “see”. Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
27 1:9 tbtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ αἰσθήσει 1 The word **understanding** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** by using a verb phrase such as “and teach you to love wisely.” Alternate translation: “and that God will enable you to see the truth about Him and teach you to love wisely” See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28 1:10 e17g εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν ὑμᾶς τὰ διαφέροντα 1 Alternate translation: “so that you may approve and choose what pleases God”
29 1:10 ybw6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς 1 Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine and is the desired result. Consider using a word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows the phrase **so that** is the reason for what Paul prays in verse 9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine and is the desired result of his prayer. Consider using a word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows the phrase **so that** is the reason for what Paul prays in verse nine. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
30 1:10 s4ec τὰ διαφέροντα 1 Alternate translation: “what is most pleasing to God”
31 1:10 siv8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ ἀπρόσκοποι 1 The words **pure** and **blameless** have very similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the idea of moral purity. If it would be clearer in your language you could combine these two words and translate them as one idea. Alternate translation: “completely blameless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
32 1:11 lu5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **being filled** figuratively refers to what characterizes a person. The comparison is between a good tree which produces good fruit and a person who discerns and acts on what is good with the result that their life produces good works. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “habitually doing the good works which Jesus the Messiah produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, the phrase **fruit of** is a metaphor which figuratively refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. The phrase **fruit of righteousness** is a comparison between a good tree which produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “habitually doing the good works which Jesus the Messiah produces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33 1:11 t3w4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπληρωμένοι 1 The phrase **being filled with** is in the passive tense. If using a passive verb form would be confusing in your language you may translate this phrase using an active verb form. Alternate translation: “God has enabled you to produce” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
34 1:12 tu2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
35 1:12 zy4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ, μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 The phrase **the things concerning me** refers to Paul’s imprisonment. If this would be unclear in your language you may state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things I have suffered because I was put into prison for preaching about Jesus have happened for the greater progress of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
36 1:12 q288 μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel” Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel”
37 1:13 wi6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **As a result** introduces the result of Paul’s circumstances which he began discussing in verse 12. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
38 1:13 h1ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δεσμούς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment by using the phrase **my chains**. This is because Paul was chained to a guard. The Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated this phrase in [1:7](../01/7.md).
39 1:13 f8az rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς δεσμούς μου & ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here, the preposition **in** used in the phrase **chains in Christ** could mean: (1) It could mean that Paul’s chains are because of his work for the cause of Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (2) It could mean that Paul is in chains because of his close connection with Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains because of my connection with Christ” or “my chains because I am in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, the preposition **in** used in the phrase **chains in Christ** could refer to: (1) that Paul’s chains are because of his work for the cause of Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (2) the fact that Paul is in chains because of his close connection with Christ. Alternate translation: “my chains because of my connection with Christ” or “my chains because I am in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
40 1:13 dm1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown πραιτωρίῳ 1 The phrase **palace guard** refers to a special group of soldiers that helped protect the Roman emperor. Consider translating this phrase in a way that is easily understood in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
41 1:14 gy47 a1kh ἀφόβως τὸν λόγον λαλεῖν ἀδελφῶν 1 “to fearlessly speak God’s message” See how you translated **brothers** in verse 12. Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
42 1:15 1:14 vw1s gy47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τινὲς μὲν καὶ & τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν πλείονας τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου, περισσοτέρως τολμᾶν ἀφόβως τὸν λόγον λαλεῖν 1 “Some people preach the good news about Christ” The phrase **most of the brothers have been encouraged in the Lord by my chains, to dare more fearlessly to speak the word** means that most of the Christians who became aware of Paul’s imprisonment were emboldened by it to share the gospel with more courage. If it would be clearer in your language consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of my imprisonment most of our fellow believers have been emboldened to share the gospel more boldly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
43 1:15 1:14 f32h sz29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 “because they do not want people listening to me, and they want to cause trouble” The phrase **encouraged in the Lord** means that the Philippian Christians had become more confident in Christ by Paul’s imprisonment. If this would be unclear in your language consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as a result of my imprisonment, have increased confidence in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
44 1:15 1:14 v1sb ecy8 τινὲς δὲ καὶ δι’ εὐδοκίαν δεσμοῖς μου 1 “but other people do it because they are kind and they want to help” See how you translated the phrase **my chains** in [1:7](../01/7.md) and [1:13](../01/13.md).
45 1:16 1:14 qf4p v2wo οἱ τὸν λόγον 1 “those who proclaim Christ out of good will” Here, **the word** refers to the gospel. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel” or “the good news”
46 1:16 1:15 ttr2 vw1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι τινὲς μὲν καὶ & τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God chose him to defend the gospel. (2) Paul is in prison because he defended the gospel. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) Alternate translation: “Some people are preaching the good news about Jesus”
47 1:16 1:15 st7k z9y9 εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν 1 “to teach everyone that the message of Jesus is true” If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **envy** and **strife** by using them in verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they are envious and seek their own evil purposes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
48 1:17 1:15 eq7s yh1c οἱ δὲ εὐδοκίαν 1 “but the others” or “but the ones who proclaim Christ out of envy and strife” If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodwill** by using it in a verbal phrase. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
49 1:17 1:16 z8ty ttr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι 1 Here, **chains** is a metonym for imprisonment. Alternate translation: “while I am imprisoned” or “while I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) You can state the phrase **I am appointed for the defense of the gospel** in active form if it would be clearer in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
50 1:18 1:16 z5ia w0b8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί γάρ? ἐξ ἀγάπης 1 Paul uses this question to introduce how he feels about the situation he wrote about in [Philippians 1:15-17](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “This is what I think about this.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) Here, the object of the word **love** is not specified. You can leave the object of **love** unspecified or if it is needed in your language you may specify the object of **love**. Here, the word **love** could refer to: (1) love for Paul. See UST. (2) love for Christ. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because they love Christ” (3) love for multiple objects, such as Paul and Christ and those who have not yet heard or believed in the gospel. Alternate translation: “The ones who proclaim the good news because of their love for me, and Jesus, and those who do not believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
51 1:18 1:16 gcfh st7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τί γάρ? εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 This may be an idiom that means “It does not matter.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) Alternate translation: “to prove that the message about Jesus is true”
52 1:18 1:16 wnn0 ia9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τί γάρ? εἰς ἀπολογίαν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου κεῖμαι 1 The words “shall I think about this” are understood as part of the question. Alternate translation: “What then shall I think about this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) The phrase **I am appointed** could refer to: (1) God appointing Paul’s current situation of being in prison. Alternate translation: “I am appointed to be here for the defense of the gospel” (2) God appointing Paul to the ministry of defending the gospel. Alternate translation: “God has appointed me to the ministry of publicly defending the truth of the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
53 1:18 1:17 ah9v z8ty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλὴν ὅτι παντὶ τρόπῳ, εἴτε προφάσει εἴτε ἀληθείᾳ, Χριστὸς καταγγέλλεται δεσμοῖς 1 “As long as people preach about Christ, it does not matter if they do it for good reasons or for bad reasons” See how you translated the word **chains** in [1:7](../01/7.md), [1:13](../01/13.md), and [1:14](../01/14.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
54 1:18 1:17 c8tr tc1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τούτῳ χαίρω οἱ δὲ ἐξ ἐριθείας τὸν Χριστὸν καταγγέλλουσιν, οὐχ ἁγνῶς οἰόμενοι θλῖψιν ἐγείρειν τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 “I am happy because people are preaching about Jesus” Alternate translation: “But the people preaching the gospel from selfish ambition have wrong motives. They hope to cause me trouble in my imprisonment by their preaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
55 1:18 cf58 dc7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion χαρήσομαι τί γάρ 1 “I will celebrate” or “I will be glad” The phrase **What then** is a rhetorical question. If using a rhetorical question would be confusing in your language consider expressing the meaning of this rhetorical question by changing it into a statement. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
56 1:19 1:18 qp81 z5ia rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τοῦτό μοι ἀποβήσεται εἰς σωτηρίαν τί γάρ 1 “because people proclaim Christ, God will deliver me” The phrase **What then** is a rhetorical question in which Paul leaves out some words that might be necessary to fully understand this question in some languages. If the phrase **What then** would be unclear in your language, you may add the words which are implied but not stated. This phrase could mean: (1) This phrase could be a rhetorical question which expects a negative answer. Alternate translation: “What does it matter what their motives are?” or “So what difference does it make?” (2) This phrase could be focusing on the result. Alternate translation: “What then is the result of this?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
57 1:19 1:18 h9hf sw24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μοι & εἰς σωτηρίαν καταγγέλλεται 1 The word **deliverance** is an abstract noun that refers to one person bringing another person to a safe place. You may have to specify that it is God whom Paul expects to deliver him. Alternate translation: “in my being brought to a safe place” or “in God bringing me to a safe place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) The phrase **is proclaimed** is in the passive tense. If using a passive verb form would be unclear in your language you may translate this phrase using an active verb form such as “are proclaiming”. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
58 1:19 1:18 x3fs cf58 διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν δεήσεως, καὶ ἐπιχορηγίας τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ χαρήσομαι 1 “because you are praying and the Spirit of Jesus Christ is helping me” Alternate translation: “I will celebrate” or “I will be glad”
59 1:19 c48j saze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦτό 1 “of the Holy Spirit” Here, the word **this** refers to Paul’s current situation of being in prison and the things that accompanied it. If this would not be clear in your language you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this situation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n
60 1:20 1:19 fh48 h9hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι τοῦτό μοι ἀποβήσεται εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here the words **eager expectation** and **hope** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them together to emphasize how strong his expectation is. Alternate translation: “I eagerly and confidently hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) The word **deliverance** is an abstract noun. If it would be clearer in your language you can express the meaning behind this word by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “for I know that this will result in God delivering me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
61 1:20 1:19 tk7l c48j ἀλλ’ ἐν πάσῃ παρρησίᾳ τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This is part of Paul’s expectation and hope. Alternate translation: “but that I will be very bold” The phrase **the Spirit of Jesus Christ** is referring to the Holy Spirit.
62 1:20 jz1z fh48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys μεγαλυνθήσεται Χριστὸς ἐν τῷ σώματί μου ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα 1 The phrase **my body** is a metonym for what Paul does with his body. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) This phrase expresses a single idea. Both **eager expectation** and **hope** have similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the strength of his expectation. If you have a single word or phrase in your language which expresses the meaning of these two words, consider expressing their meaning together as one word or phrase if it would be clearer in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
63 1:20 t8z9 tk7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μεγαλυνθήσεται Χριστὸς ἐν τῷ σώματί μου κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου 1 You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) Paul will honor Christ by what he does” (2) People will praise Christ because of what Paul does. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) Both **expectation** and **hope** are abstract nouns. If it would be clearer in your language you may express them together in a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “but I fully believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
64 1:20 y78k jz1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 “whether I live or die” or “if I go on living or if I die” Here, the phrase **in my body** is used figuratively to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22-24](../01/22-24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
65 1:21 1:20 p9b7 y78k ἐμοὶ γὰρ εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου 1 These words are emphatic. They indicate that this is Paul’s personal experience. Alternate translation: “whether I live or die”
66 1:21 sxt5 n3jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ ζῆν Χριστὸς κέρδος 1 Here pleasing and serving **Christ** is spoken of as Paul’s only purpose for living. Alternate translation: “to go on living is an opportunity to please Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) The word **gain** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
67 1:21 1:22 n3jd a21c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὸ ἀποθανεῖν κέρδος ἐν σαρκί 1 Here death is spoken of as **gain**. Here, **gain** could mean: (1) Paul’s death will help spread the message of the gospel. (2) Paul will be in a better situation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here, the phrase **in the flesh** means “in the body”. Paul is using the word **flesh** figuratively to refer to his entire body. Paul’s audience would have understood that he was referring to his body. If this would be confusing in your language consider using a different word or phrase to avoid misunderstanding. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
68 1:22 a21c mwl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου 1 The word **flesh** here is a metonym for the body, and “living in the flesh” is a metonym for being alive. Alternate translation: “But if I am to remain alive in my body” or “But if I continue to live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, the word **fruitful** refers to Paul’s work producing good results. This is a metaphor in which Paul’s anticipated productive work is compared to a plant or tree which produces good fruit. Alternate translation: “this will mean effectively serving God” or “this will mean productively working for the advancement of the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
69 1:22 mwl6 kxuu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου ἔργου 1 The word **fruitful** here refers to the good results of Paul’s work. Alternate translation: “that means I will be able to work and my work will produce good results” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) The word **labor** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
70 1:23 tq29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συνέχομαι δὲ ἐκ τῶν δύο 1 Paul speaks of how hard it is for him to choose between living and dying as if two heavy objects, like rocks or logs, were pushing on him from opposite sides at the same time. Your language might prefer the objects to pull rather than push. Alternate translation: “I am under tension. I do not know if I should choose to live or to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) The phrase **hard pressed** is a metaphor. Paul speaks as if he is experiencing literal pressure from two opposite sides at the same time. Paul uses this figurative expression to show his difficulty in deciding which is best, if given the option between living or dying. If this would be confusing in your language, you can translate this phrase using a metaphor that would make sense in your language or you can choose to use plain language to express it. Alternate translation: “Both options have their advantages, so the decision is not an easy one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
71 1:23 f7qg j1sv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔχων εἰς τὸ ἀναλῦσαι καὶ σὺν Χριστῷ εἶναι συνέχομαι 1 Paul here uses **to depart** as a euphemism to show that he is not afraid of dying. Alternate translation: “I would like to die because I will go to be with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) The phrase **I am hard pressed** is in passive form. If this would be confusing in your language you can express the meaning behind this phrase by using a verb phrase that is in the active voice. Alternate translation: “It is not easy for me to decide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
72 1:25 1:23 bu8d q0n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦτο πεποιθὼς τῶν δύο 1 “being sure that it is better for you that I stay alive” Here, the phrase **the two** refers to the two options regarding what decision is best. The choice of continuing to live on earth and serve Christ or its alternative, the choice of leaving earth to be with Christ. If the phrase **the two** would be confusing in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these two options” or “these two choices” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
73 1:25 1:23 kmp4 u1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδα ὅτι μενῶ ἐπιθυμίαν 1 “I know that I will continue to live” or “I know that I will keep on living” The word **desire** is an abstract noun. If this would be unclear in your language you can express the meaning of this word by using it in a verb phrase. See UST. See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
74 1:26 1:23 i9cl hhjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ἵνα & ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀναλῦσαι 1 “so that because of me” or “so that because of what I do” Here, Paul is referring to his death with the phrase **to depart**. This is a delicate way of referring to something unpleasant. Here, instead of focusing on the unpleasantness of death, Paul is instead using the word **depart** to focus on the positive result of his death, namely that his physical death will result in his being with Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “to leave this body” or “to depart from this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
75 1:27 1:24 cd3b etly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι στήκετε ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ συναθλοῦντες τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τὸ δὲ ἐπιμένειν ἐν τῇ σαρκὶ 1 The phrases **stand firm in one spirit** and **with one soul striving together** share similar meanings and emphasize the importance of unity. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) The phrase **remain in the flesh** means to remain alive in one’s body on earth. If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this plainly. Alternate translation: “but to remain in the body” or “but to remain on this earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
76 1:27 1:24 jey6 k2j7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μιᾷ ψυχῇ συναθλοῦντες ἀναγκαιότερον 1 Agreeing with one another is spoken of as having **one soul**. Alternate translation: “agreeing with one another and striving together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) In the phrase **is more necessary** Paul leaves out the implied words “than departing” because he knows that his readers will understand them from the context. If this would be unclear in your language, consider supplying these omitted words in your translation. Alternative translation: “is more necessary than departing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
77 1:27 1:24 ej2s o4fk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche συναθλοῦντες σαρκὶ 1 “working hard together” See how you translated the phrase **flesh** in [1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
78 1:27 1:24 ya3h hnl7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to spreading **the faith** that is based on **the gospel**. (2) This refers to believing and living as the gospel teaches us. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be most appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
79 1:28 1:25 i9yt bu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ καὶ τοῦτο πεποιθὼς 1 This is a command to the Philippian believers. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) The word **this** refers back to [1:24](../01/24.md) where Paul said that he believed it was more necessary that he remain alive on earth so that he could continue helping the Philippian Christians mature in their faith. If this would be unclear in your language consider further explaining the word **this** in your translation. Alternate translation: “And being sure that it is better for you that I remain” or “And having been convinced that I should remain here, on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
80 1:28 1:25 l495 kmp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ μενῶ 1 “Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you” Here, the word **remain** refers to remaining alive on earth in one’s body in contrast to dying and leaving the earth to be with Christ. Paul explained this in [1:23-24](../01/23-24.md) so it is not necessary to explain it here. See how you translated the word **remain** in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
81 1:28 1:25 nb4b rruy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 “and this is from God.” Here, **this** could mean: (1) This refers to the believers’ courage. (2) This refers to the sign. (3) This refers to destruction and salvation. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
82 1:30 1:25 x4z3 u0ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί εἰς τὴν ὑμῶν προκοπὴν 1 “suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you now hear that I am still suffering” If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **progress** by using it as a verb in a verbal phrase or by expressing it in some other way that will make the meaning clear in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you progress in knowing Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
83 1:25 xvx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν τῆς πίστεως 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **faith** by using them in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be clear in your language. See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
84 1:26 viwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** indicates purpose. In this verse, what follows **so that** is the reason Paul gives for what he said in [1:25](../01/25.md). In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
85 1:26 d906 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καύχημα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boasting** by expressing its meaning in a verb phrase or in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
86 1:26 an70 καύχημα & ἐν 1 Here, the word **boasting** means to “glory in” Jesus or to “take joy in” him. Alternate translation: “glorying in” or “rejoicing in”
87 1:26 j1d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go παρουσίας 1 Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **coming** here. Here, the word **coming** refers to Paul going to where the Philippians live, and visiting them. If your language has a different way of expressing the motion described here by the word **coming**, use the word or phrase that will best help your readers understand which direction Paul is speaking of. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
88 1:26 ay37 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν περισσεύῃ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ, διὰ τῆς ἐμῆς παρουσίας πάλιν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the word **through** could refer to: (1) the reason the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “because”. Alternate translation: See UST. (2) the means by which the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “by”. Alternate translation: “by my coming to you again, your boasting in Christ Jesus will increase” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
89 1:27 bwmq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθὼν 1 Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **come**. Here, the word **come** refers to Paul going to where the Philippians live, and visiting them. See how you translated the form of this word in the previous verse, [1:26](../01/26.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
90 1:27 yddq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἀξίως τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τοῦ Χριστοῦ πολιτεύεσθε 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
91 1:27 u09z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used figuratively to mean not changing one’s beliefs but rather remaining steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language consider using an equivalent expression from your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you be unmoved” or “you remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92 1:27 kmn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ 1 Here, the phrases **in one spirit** and **with one soul** mean essentially the same thing and are used together to emphasize the importance of unity. Both of these phrases are used figuratively to mean “to have unity in ones primary purposes and beliefs”. Both phrases refer to being in agreement about what matters. If these expressions would be confusing in your language you may use plain language or use a similar expression from your language. Because these two phrases mean essentially the same thing, you may translate them together as one expression, if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “with unity” or “with singleness of purpose” or “in full agreement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
93 1:27 ej2s συναθλοῦντες 1 Alternate translation: “working hard together” or “cooperating together in the work”
94 1:27 ya3h τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 The phrase **the faith of the gospel** is speaking of the Christian religion as a whole and refers to the Christian belief system which centers around the gospel. See UST.
95 1:28 i9yt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
96 1:28 u9an rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν ἀντικειμένων 1 The phrase **those opposing you** refers to the people who were opposing the Philippian Christians and causing them trouble. If this would be unclear in your language consider stating this plainly. Alternate translation: “the people opposing you” or “the people opposing you because you believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
97 1:28 l495 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **sign** by expressing it in a verbal phrase or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
98 1:28 t225 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπωλείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** by using a verb form or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will destroy them” or see UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
99 1:28 ypn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** by using a verb form of this word or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: See UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
100 1:28 nb4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 The word **this** in the phrase **this is from God** could refer to: (1) what comes before it in this verse, both the courage God gives the Philippian Christians and the sign that their courage gives to those opposing them. Alternate translation: “your lack of fear and the evidence it gives is all from God” (2) the sign given to those who oppose the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “this sign is from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
101 1:29 qous rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ 1 The phrase**it has been freely given to you** is in the passive voice. If using the passive voice would be confusing in your language you may express this using an active verbal clause. Alternate translation: “God has graciously granted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
102 1:30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **struggle** by using a verb phrase, as the UST does, or by expressing the idea behind this word in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “You are engaged in the same conflict” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
103 1:30 cewf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγῶνα 1 Here, the word **struggle** refers to the conflict between good and evil and speaks of it as if it were a military battle or an athletic competition. If this would be unclear in your language you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “You are engaged in the same battle” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
104 1:30 hnec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** refers to what Paul is experiencing. If this would be unclear in your language you can express this in a way that is understandable in your language. Alternate translation: “you saw me experience and now hear that I am experiencing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
105 1:30 xkob rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** leaves out some words that might be necessary for a clear understanding in some languages. The missing words are left out because they are implied from earlier in this verse. If this phrase would be unclear as it is you may supply the missing words in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am engaged in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
106 2:intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Practical instructions\n\nIn this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “If there is any”\n\nThis appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.”
107 2:1 xye5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 0 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ’s example. # Connecting Statement:\n\nIf it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **encouragement** by using a verbal form of this word. Alternate translation: “if Christ encourages you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
108 2:1 b1q7 v4ns rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ οὖν 1 “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged because of Christ” The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is the natural consequence or conclusion to what preceded it. Use a word or phrase from your language that would show that what follows the word **Therefore** is intended to be the consequence of what preceded it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
109 2:1 b1q7 εἴ τις & παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Alternate translation: “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged by being in Christ” or “if you are encouraged because of your union with Christ”
110 2:1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 Here, **love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way”
111 2:1 m84k del5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος εἴ τι 1 2 “if you have fellowship with the Spirit” In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
112 2:1 l2px d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 “if you have experienced any of God’s acts of tender mercy and compassion” If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **comfort** and **love** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if being loved by Christ has comforted you” or “if Christ loving you has comforted you” or “if Christ’s love comforts you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
113 2:2 2:1 jxq2 m84k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πληρώσατέ μου τὴν χαρὰν εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος 1 Paul speaks here of **joy** as if it were a task that can be completed. Alternate translation: “cause me to rejoice greatly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) The phrase **fellowship of the Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other. Alternate translation: “if the Spirit has produced any fellowship among you” or “if the Spirit has given you fellowship with each other” (2) the Philippian Christians fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have fellowship with the Spirit” (3) both the Holy Spirit giving the Philippian Christians fellowship with each other and to their having fellowship with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “if you have any fellowship with the Spirit and the Spirit has produced in you any fellowship with each other”
114 2:3 2:1 y1le p977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μηδὲν κατ’ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν εἴ τις 1 2 “Do not serve yourselves or think of yourselves as better than others” In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]
115 2:4 2:1 ezk6 l2px rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος σκοποῦντες, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἑτέρων ἕκαστοι εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί 1 “not caring only about what you need, but also about what others need” If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **affections** and **compassions** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “if you feel any affection and compassion for one another” or “if you have any affection and compassion for each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
116 2:5 2:1 rh98 a0o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἴ τις 1 3 “Have the same attitude that Christ Jesus had” or “Think about one another the way Christ Jesus thought of people” In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the words “there is” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would be unclear. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]
117 2:6 2:2 hs4q j5v2 ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων πληρώσατέ μου τὴν χαρὰν 1 “even though everything that is true of God was true of him” Alternate translation: “make me very happy”
118 2:6 2:2 els2 jxq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐχ ἁρπαγμὸν ἡγήσατο τὸ εἶναι ἴσα Θεῷ τὸ αὐτὸ φρονῆτε 1 Here to be **equal** refers to “equal status” or “equal honor.” Grasping onto equality with God represents demanding that he continue to be honored as God is honored. Christ did not do that. Though he did not cease to be God, he ceased to act as God. Alternate translation: “did not think that he had to have the same status as God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “you think together as one”
119 2:7 2:2 yu25 ve0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν τὴν αὐτὴν ἀγάπην ἔχοντες 1 Paul speaks of Christ as if he were a container in order to say that Christ refused to act with his divine powers during his ministry on earth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “have love for each other” or “love one another”
120 2:7 2:2 tc8n yo7j ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων σύνψυχοι 1 “as a human being” Alternate translation: “be one in spirit” or “be one in heart and will”
121 2:8 2:2 t8a6 b8gz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου τὸ ἓν φρονοῦντες 1 Paul speaks of death here in a figurative way. The translator can understand **to the point of death** either as a metaphor of location (Christ went all the way to death) or as a metaphor of time (Christ was obedient even until the time that he died). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “be concerned about the same things”
122 2:8 2:3 hi57 p0v0 θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ μηδὲν κατ’ ἐριθείαν 1 “even to dying on a cross” Alternate translation: “Do not be selfishly ambitious” or “Never try to make yourselves more important than others” or “Do not do anything with an attitude of self-importance”
123 2:9 2:3 mvb7 y1le rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα μηδὲ κατὰ κενοδοξίαν 1 Here, **name** is a metonym that refers to rank or honor. Alternate translation: “the rank that is above any other rank” or “the honor that is above any other honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Alternate translation: “or with empty pride”
124 2:9 2:4 qsy9 ezk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα μὴ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος σκοποῦντες, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἑτέρων ἕκαστοι 1 His **name** is more important, more to be praised than any other name. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “each of you caring not only about what you need, but also about what others need”
125 2:10 2:4 tk45 nowd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ ἕκαστος 1 Here, **knee** is a synecdoche for the whole person. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **each one** here means “each person”. If it would be clearer in your language consider saying this explicitly. Alternate translation: “each of you” or “everyone of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
126 2:10 2:4 xz1u ob45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ μὴ & σκοποῦντες 1 Here bending the knee to kneel on the ground is a metonym for worship. **In the name of** here is a metonym for the person, telling who it is they will worship. Alternate translation: “every person will worship Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Alternate translation: “not thinking about”
127 2:10 2:4 kfb4 l3q0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns καταχθονίων ἑαυτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the place where people go when they die. (2) This refers to the place where demons dwell. Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** is plural in form. If your language has a plural form for this pronoun, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
128 2:4 qmzl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτῶν 1 Here, the reflexive pronoun **themselves** refers back to **each one**. Alternate translation: “of yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
129 2:5 pqdc τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “Have the same attitude that Christ Jesus had”
130 2:5 rh98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο φρονεῖτε ἐν ὑμῖν, ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **attitude** with a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “Think about one another the way Christ Jesus thought of people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
131 2:5 tdb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 See how you translated **you** in the previous verses. In this letter, with one exception, the words **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the Philippian Christians. If your language uses different forms to show when “you” and “your” refer to one person and when they refer to more than one person, use the plural form that would be appropriate in your language in this occurrence and all other occurrences of “you” and “your” in this letter, except for in [4:3](../04/3.md). A note will discuss the one exception in [4:3](../04/3.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
132 2:5 kwoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative τοῦτο φρονεῖτε 1 This is a command to the Philippian Christians in the plural form. If your language has a plural command form, use it here. Alternate translation: “Everyone of you have this attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
133 2:5 acmu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ καὶ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **attitude … in Christ Jesus** means the attitude and disposition which existed in Christ Jesus and therefore characterized his behavior. The phrase **this attitude … which also was in Christ Jesus** therefore refers to the attitude or way of thinking that belonged to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “which also belonged to Christ Jesus” or “which Christ Jesus also had” or “which Christ Jesus also displayed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
134 2:6 hs4q ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων 1 Alternate translation: “though everything that is true of God was true of him”
135 2:6 xo2l ἐν μορφῇ Θεοῦ ὑπάρχων 1 The phrase **existing in the form of God** means that Jesus had the very nature of God. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be God but was not. This phrase is saying that Jesus was fully God. The rest of this verse, and the next two verses, explain that Jesus, while being fully God, humbled himself and acted as a servant in obedience to God. Avoid any translation that would suggest that Jesus was not fully God. Alternate translation: “being fully God”
136 2:6 els2 ἁρπαγμὸν 1 Alternate translation: “something to be held onto” or “something to be retained”
137 2:6 kd1l οὐχ & ἡγήσατο 1 Alternate translation: “did not think” or “did not regard”
138 2:7 x5rt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 The word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the preceding clause in [2:6](../02/6.md) and what is expressed about Jesus in this verse and the next two verses. The contrast is made between the choice of hanging onto divine rights and privileges or choosing to surrender them. The rest of this verse, as well as the following two verses, explain how Jesus gave up many of his divine rights and privileges to act as a servant. Alternate translation: “On the contrary” or “Rather” of “But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
139 2:7 kvjd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀλλὰ ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, the pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Instead, Jesus emptied himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
140 2:7 c64i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, the reflexive pronoun **himself** refers to Jesus and is used to emphasize the fact that Jesus freely and intentionally chose to empty himself of divine rights and privileges. Consider the best way, in your language, to express the emphatic element of this pronoun. Alternate translation: “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
141 2:7 yu25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν 1 Here, Paul saying that Christ **emptied himself** is figurative and not literal. By using this phrase, Paul is vividly expressing that Christ chose to give up many of his divine rights and privileges when he became human. The phrase **emptied himself** is a figurative way of saying that Jesus chose to give up divine privileges and honors. Paul expresses this in a metaphorical way in order to more vividly make his point. If this would be unclear in your language consider using a similar expression that would be clear in your language or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he gave up divine rights and privileges” or “he willingly set aside divine privileges” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
142 2:7 s95d ἑαυτὸν ἐκένωσεν, μορφὴν δούλου λαβών 1 The phrase **having taken the form of a servant** modifies the phrase **he emptied himself** by explaining just how Jesus emptied himself, namely by acting as a servant. Consider the best way, in your language, to show the connection between these two phrases. Alternate translation: “Jesus emptied himself by acting as a servant” or “he emptied himself by becoming a servant”
143 2:7 r5dn μορφὴν δούλου λαβών 1 The phrase **having taken the form of a servant** means that Jesus acted as a servant while on earth. It does not mean that Jesus simply appeared to be a servant.
144 2:7 qetl ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων γενόμενος 1 The phrase **having been born in the likeness of men** means that Jesus became a human being. It does not mean that Jesus only appeared to be human. Rather, it means that Jesus who always existed as God, chose to take on a human body and therefore he appeared on earth in human form. Alternate translation: “having become a human being” or see UST.
145 2:7 tc8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐν ὁμοιώματι ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the word **men** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. The word **men** is plural in form to emphasize the idea that Jesus resembled humanity in general. If your language has a way of expressing this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity, consider the most clear way to express this. Alternate translation: “in the likeness of human beings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n
146 2:7 uizd καὶ σχήματι εὑρεθεὶς ὡς ἄνθρωπος 1 The phrase **having been found in appearance as a man** does not mean that Jesus appeared to be a man but was not. Rather, this phrase continues the thought of the the previous phrase **having been born in the likeness of men** and means that Jesus became a human being and therefore was fully human in appearance. The phrase **in appearance**, points out that Jesus was fully human in appearance but also indicates that while being fully human, Jesus was distinct from the rest of humanity because he retained his full deity while being human; and therefore was both human and divine at the same time. Alternate translation: “and while being found in the form of a human being” or see UST.
147 2:7 jmr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the word **man** is emphasizing the idea of Jesus’ humanity rather than his gender. If your language has a way of expressing this emphasis on Jesus’ humanity, consider using the term that would most clearly express this. Alternate translation: “a human being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n
148 2:8 t8a6 ἐταπείνωσεν ἑαυτὸν, γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 The phrase **having become** could be: (1) introducing the way Jesus **humbled himself**, namely that he humbled himself by becoming **obedient to the point of death**. Alternate translation: “Jesus humbled himself by becoming obedient to the point of dying” or “Jesus humbled himself this way, by obeying to the point of death” (2) explaining what the phrase **he humbled himself** refers to. If this is how this phrase is being used then **having become** is clarifying that **he humbled himself** by **death on a cross**. Alternate translation: “he humbled himself, specifically, by being obeying to the point of death”
149 2:8 ttys rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτὸν 1 The word **himself** is a reflexive pronoun which refers to Jesus. The reflexive pronoun **himself** is used here to emphasize Jesus’ action of humbling himself. Consider the best way, in your language, to express the emphatic element of this pronoun. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
150 2:8 r5f0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **obey** with a verb such as “obeying”. Alternate translation: “having obeyed to the point of death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
151 2:8 hi57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** with a verb such as “dying”. Alternate translation: “even to dying on a cross” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n
152 2:8 flk2 θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 The word **even** combined with the repetition of the word **death** emphasize that dying on a cross was considered extremely humiliating. Paul’s readers would have been familiar with crucifixion and understood that it was very humiliating. This phrase emphasizes that Jesus’ death on the cross showed the great extent of his humility and obedience. Think about the best way, in your language, to show the emphatic nature of this phrase. Alternate translation: “even to death on a cross” or “even as so far as dying on a cross” or “even to the extent of dying on a cross”
153 2:9 f3ek rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The word **Therefore** introduces the result of Jesus humbling himself. How Jesus humbled himself is described in [2:6-8](../2/6-8.md). What follows the word **Therefore** is the result of what Jesus did in [2:6-8](../2/6-8.md). The word**Therefore** shows the reason and result relationship between what comes before this word and what follows it. Choose the best way in your language to express the reason and result relationship expressed by the word **Therefore**. Alternate translation: “Because of this” or “Because Jesus acted this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
154 2:9 wmvd αὐτὸν ὑπερύψωσεν 1 Alternate translation: “greatly honored him”
155 2:9 qsy9 καὶ ἐχαρίσατο αὐτῷ τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 Alternate translation: “and gave him the position that was higher than any other position”
156 2:9 mvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 Here, **name** is a metonym that refers to status or position. Alternate translation: “the position that is above every other position” or “the rank that is above every other rank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
157 2:10 b3ai rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** connects this verse with the preceding verse,\n[2:9](../02/9.md), and shows that this verse and the next verse are the result of [2:9](../02/9.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
158 2:10 tk45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here, every knee bending is an idiomatic way of saying that Jesus will be worshiped and honored. If this would be clear in your language consider using this expression but if it would not be clear in your language consider using an equivalent expression to communicate the the idea of worship. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
159 2:10 xz1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 Here, **at the name of** is a metonym for the person, telling who it is they will worship. Alternate translation: “every person will worship Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
160 2:10 ec1a ὀνόματι 1 See how you translated **name** in [2:9](../02/9.md).
161 2:10 xn7a ἐπουρανίων καὶ ἐπιγείων καὶ καταχθονίων 1 The phrase **in heaven and on earth and under the earth** literally means “of heavenly things and of earthly things and of things under the earth” or “of heavenly beings and of earthly beings and of beings under the earth”. This phrase refers to all beings, including human beings and angels. This phrase emphasizes that all beings everywhere will bow in reverence to Jesus. Alternate translation: “every being in heaven, and on earth, and under the earth”\n
162 2:11 xy4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche πᾶσα γλῶσσα 1 Here, **tongue** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “every person” or “every being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
163 2:11 mr2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 Here the word **to** expresses result: “with the result that they will praise God the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
164 2:12 jnp3 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the Philippian believers and shows them how to live the Christian life before others and reminds them of his example.
273 4:1 dz44 οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 “so continue living for the Lord in the way that I have taught you, dear friends”
274 4:2 x5qf rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὐοδίαν παρακαλῶ, καὶ Συντύχην παρακαλῶ 1 These are women who were believers and helped Paul in the church at Philippi. Alternate translation: “I beg Euodia, and I beg Syntyche” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
275 4:2 iyq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 The phrase **to think the same** means to have the same attitude or opinion. Alternate translation: “to agree with each other because you both believe in the same Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
276 4:3 yb3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ἐρωτῶ καὶ σέ 1 Here, **you** refers to the “true fellow worker” and is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) Here, **you** refers to the **true companion** and is singular. This is the only occurrence of the word **you** in Philippians that is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
277 4:3 hdz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γνήσιε σύνζυγε 1 This metaphor is from farming, where two animals would be bound to the same yoke, and so they work together. Alternate translation: “fellow worker” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
278 4:3 cm3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names μετὰ καὶ Κλήμεντος 1 **Clement** was a man who was a believer and worker in the church at Philippi. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
279 4:3 s9h9 ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς 1 “whose names God has written in the Book of Life”

98
tn_REV.tsv
View File

@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
1:1 kez4 ἐσήμανεν 1 “communicated it”
1:1 pb4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τῷ δούλῳ αὐτοῦ, Ἰωάννῃ 1 John wrote this book and was referring to himself here. Alternate translation: “to me, John, his servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1:2 va4c τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “the message that God spoke”
1:2 b5se τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the testimony that John has given about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “he has also given testimony about Jesus Christ” (2) This refers to the testimony that Jesus Christ has given about himself.
1:2 b5se τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the testimony that John has given about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “he has also given testimony about Jesus Christ” (2) the testimony that Jesus Christ has given about himself.
1:3 le65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναγινώσκων 1 This does not refer to a specific person. It refers to anyone who reads it aloud. Alternate translation: “anyone who reads aloud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
1:3 h37b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τηροῦντες τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ γεγραμμένα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “obey what John has written in it” or “obey what they read in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:3 dwt8 ὁ & καιρὸς ἐγγύς 1 “the things that must happen will soon happen”
@ -64,11 +64,11 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
1:19 u49x 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe Son of Man continues to speak.
1:20 d6ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ἀστέρων 1 These stars are symbols that represent the seven angels of the seven churches. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1:20 fl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1:20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **angels** could mean: (1) This refers to heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) This refers to human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches.
1:20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **angels** could refer to: (1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches.
1:20 e25n ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 This refers to seven churches that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md).
2:intro zps2 0 # Revelation 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Poverty and wealth\n\nThe Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### “The devil is about to”\n\nPeople were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel\n\nBalaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”\n\nThe writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “The angel of the church”\n\nThe word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n### “The words of the one who”\n\nThe verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
2:1 mn8x 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus.
2:1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angels who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:1 i92a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ἀστέρας 1 These stars are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
2:1 ugs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage λυχνιῶν 1 The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
2:2 jg1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδα & τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου 1 “Labor” and “endurance” are abstract nouns and can be translated with verbs “work” and “endure.” Alternate translation: “I know … that you work very hard and that you endure patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
2:7 wzg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῷ νικῶντι 1 This refers anyone who conquers. Alternate translation: “anyone who resists evil” or “those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:7 rmf5 τῷ Παραδείσῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “God’s garden.” This is a symbol for heaven.
2:8 is3w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Smyrna.
2:8 ie9x τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:8 ie9x τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:8 key2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σμύρνῃ 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:8 k7qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος 1 This refers to the eternal nature of Jesus. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2:9 p6hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδά σου τὴν θλῖψιν καὶ τὴν πτωχείαν 1 “Sufferings” and “poverty” can be translated as verbs. Alternate translation: “I know how you have suffered and how poor you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -97,21 +97,21 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
2:10 agx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν 1 The words **the Devil** here are a metonym for the people who obey the devil. Alternate translation: “The devil will soon cause others to put some of you in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 f5t1 γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου 1 “Be faithful to me even if they kill you.” The use os the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death.
2:10 sp8z τὸν στέφανον 1 “the winner’s crown.” This was a wreath, originally of olive branches or laurel leaves, that was put on the head of a victorious athlete.
2:10 zhj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to a crown that shows that Christ has given the believers eternal life. (2) This refers to true life as a prize like a winner’s crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:10 zhj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 This could refer to: (1) a crown that shows that Christ has given the believers eternal life. (2) true life as a prize like a winner’s crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 g7zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:11 dc3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:11 s9d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ νικῶν 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Anyone who resists evil” or “Those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:11 q6w2 οὐ μὴ ἀδικηθῇ ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ δευτέρου 1 “will not experience the second death” or “will not die a second time”
2:12 ll17 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Pergamum.
2:12 y864 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:12 y864 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:12 il7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Περγάμῳ 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:12 f6s5 τὴν ῥομφαίαν τὴν δίστομον τὴν ὀξεῖαν 1 This refers to a double-edged sword, which is sharpened on both sides to cut both directions. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md)
2:13 ryn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 This could mean: (1) Satan’s power and evil influence on people. (2) The place where Satan rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 ryn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 This could mean: (1) Satan’s power and evil influence on people. (2) the place where Satan rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 tf7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖς τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 **Name** here is a metonym for the person. Firmly believing is spoken of as holding on tightly. Alternate translation: “you firmly believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 x6j6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἠρνήσω τὴν πίστιν μου 1 “Faith” can be translated with the verb “believe.” AT “you continued to tell people that you believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:13 lu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀντιπᾶς 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:14 wu6n ἀλλ’ ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ ὀλίγα 1 “I disapprove of you because of a few things you have done” or “I am angry with you because of a few things you did.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 2:4](../02/04.md).
2:14 rd44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατοῦντας τὴν διδαχὴν Βαλαάμ, ὃς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to people who teach what Balaam taught. (2) This refers to people who do what Balaam taught. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 rd44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατοῦντας τὴν διδαχὴν Βαλαάμ, ὃς 1 This could refer to: (1) people who teach what Balaam taught. (2) people who do what Balaam taught. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 j3nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῷ Βαλὰκ 1 This is the name of a king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:14 hg4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἐδίδασκεν τῷ Βαλὰκ βαλεῖν σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιον τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 Something that leads people to sin is spoken of as a stone in the road that people stumble on. Alternate translation: “who showed Balak how to cause the people of Israel to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 u19f πορνεῦσαι 1 “sin sexually” or “commit sexual sin”
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
2:17 m867 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2:17 i61b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῷ νικῶντι 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “anyone who resists evil” or “those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:18 b83m 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Thyatira.
2:18 nd4m τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:18 nd4m τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
2:18 kd5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θυατείροις 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:18 q3w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2:18 zbx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ ἔχων τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ ὡς φλόγα πυρός 1 His eyes are describes as being full of light like a flame of fire. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “whose eyes glow like a flame of fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@ -148,8 +148,8 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
2:26 z5xi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ νικῶν 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Anyone who resists evil” or “The person who does not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
2:27 c9gu ποιμανεῖ & συντρίβεται 1 This is a prophecy from the Old Testament about a king of Israel, but Jesus applied it here to those to whom he gives authority over the nations.
2:27 w8pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποιμανεῖ αὐτοὺς ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ 1 Ruling harshly is spoken of as ruling with an iron rod. Alternate translation: “He will rule them harshly as if striking them with an iron stick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:27 ksl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τὰ σκεύη τὰ κεραμικὰ συντρίβεται 1 Breaking them to pieces is an image that represents either: (1) It refer to destroying evildoers. (2) It refer to defeating enemies. Alternate translation: “He will defeat his enemies completely as if breaking clay jars into pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:28 n9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς κἀγὼ εἴληφα παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου 1 Some languages may need to tell what was received. This could mean: (1) This may mean he received authority from his Father. (2) This may mean he received the morning star from his Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:27 ksl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τὰ σκεύη τὰ κεραμικὰ συντρίβεται 1 Breaking them to pieces is an image that represents either: (1) destroying evildoers. (2) defeating enemies. Alternate translation: “He will defeat his enemies completely as if breaking clay jars into pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:28 n9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς κἀγὼ εἴληφα παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου 1 Some languages may need to tell what was received. This could mean: (1) he received authority from his Father. (2) he received the morning star from his Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:28 hr39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ πατρός μου 1 This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2:28 c1zc καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to the one who conquers.
2:28 g5iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τὸν ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν 1 This is a bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
2:29 ikm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Seven spirits of God\n\nThese spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).\n\n### Seven stars\n\nThese stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n## Important metaphors in this chapter\n\n### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking\n\nJesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”\n\nThe speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “The angel of the church”\n\nThe word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n### “The words of the one who”\n\nThe verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
3:1 k6b7 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Sardis.
3:1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
3:1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
3:1 q7n9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σάρδεσιν 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:1 un3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ὁ ἔχων τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα 1 The number seven is a symbol of completeness and perfection. The “seven spirits” refers either to the Spirit of God or to seven spirits who serve God. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
3:1 t8wv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἀστέρας 1 These stars are symbols that represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@ -179,13 +179,13 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
3:6 zxc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:6 k2k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:7 rf9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Philadelphia.
3:7 ksg4 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
3:7 ksg4 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
3:7 mm6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:7 ih6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage κλεῖν Δαυείδ 1 Jesus speaks of his authority to decide who may go into his kingdom as if it were King David’s key. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
3:7 aam6 ὁ ἀνοίγων καὶ οὐδεὶς κλείσει 1 “he opens the door to the kingdom and no one can close it”
3:7 pzy2 κλείων καὶ οὐδεὶς ἀνοίγει 1 “he closes the door and no one can open it”
3:8 j1x7 δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἠνεῳγμένην 1 “I have opened a door for you”
3:8 xyw6 ἐτήρησάς μου τὸν λόγον 1 This could mean: (1) They have followed his teachings. (2) They have obeyed his commands.
3:8 xyw6 ἐτήρησάς μου τὸν λόγον 1 This could mean: (1) they have followed his teachings. (2) they have obeyed his commands.
3:8 b3kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 The word **name** here is a metonym for the person who has that name. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:9 x78m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 People who gather to obey or honor Satan are spoken of as if they were in a synagogue, a place of worship and teaching for the Jews. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 q496 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσκυνήσουσιν 1 This is a sign of submission, not worship. Alternate translation: “bow down in submission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@ -201,11 +201,11 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
3:13 u5jk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:13 ug5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
3:14 r6bz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Laodicea.
3:14 jg3b τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
3:14 jg3b τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
3:14 wzg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λαοδικίᾳ 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:14 f65v ὁ Ἀμήν 1 Here, **the Amen** is a name for Jesus Christ. He guarantees God’s promises by saying amen to them.
3:14 btv1 ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κτίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who rules over everything that God created. (2) This refers to the one through whom God created everything.
3:15 pf9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὔτε ψυχρὸς εἶ οὔτε ζεστός 1 The writer speaks of the Laodiceans as if they were water. This could mean: (1) Here, **cold and hot** represent two extremes of spiritual interest or love for God, where “cold” is to be completely against God, and to be “hot” is to be zealous to serve him. (2) Here, **cold and hot** both refer to water that is useful for drinking or for cooking or healing, respectively. Alternate translation: “you are like water that is neither cold nor hot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:14 btv1 ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κτίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the one who rules over everything that God created. (2) the one through whom God created everything.
3:15 pf9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὔτε ψυχρὸς εἶ οὔτε ζεστός 1 The writer speaks of the Laodiceans as if they were water. Here, **cold and hot** could: (1) represent two extremes of spiritual interest or love for God, where “cold” is to be completely against God, and to be “hot” is to be zealous to serve him. (2) both refer to water that is useful for drinking or for cooking or healing, respectively. Alternate translation: “you are like water that is neither cold nor hot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:16 y9vt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέλλω σε ἐμέσαι ἐκ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 Rejecting them is spoken of as vomiting them out of the mouth. Alternate translation: “I will reject you as I would spit out lukewarm water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:17 v1pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ εἶ ὁ ταλαίπωρος, καὶ ἐλεεινὸς, καὶ πτωχὸς, καὶ τυφλὸς, καὶ γυμνός 1 Jesus speaks of their spiritual condition as if he were speaking about their physical condition. Alternate translation: “You are like people who are most miserable, pitiable, poor, blind, and naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:18 tmm7 ἀγοράσαι παρ’ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς, ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ, ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ ἡ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου, ἵνα βλέπῃς 1 Here to **buy** represents receiving things from Jesus that have true spiritual value. The “gold refined by fire” represents spiritual wealth. The “brilliant white garments” represents rightousness. And the “salve to anoint your eyes” represents the ability to understand spiritual things. Alternate translation: “Come to me and receive spiritual wealth, which is more valuable than gold that is refined by fire. Receive from me righteousness, which is like brilliant white garments, so that you will not be ashamed. And receive from me wisdom, which is like salve for the eyes, so that you may understand spiritual things” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
4:5 ryb1 ἀστραπαὶ 1 Use your language’s way of describing what lightning looks like each time it appears.
4:5 u1da φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταί 1 These are the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder.
4:5 e1jm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The number seven is a symbol of completeness and perfection. The “seven spirits” refers either to the Spirit of God or to seven spirits who serve God. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
4:6 ja33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσα ὑαλίνη 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) A sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) Glass is spoken of as if it were a sea. Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:6 ja33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσα ὑαλίνη 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) a sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) glass is spoken of as if it were a sea. Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:6 cv9p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁμοία κρυστάλλῳ 1 You can state clearly how it was like crystal. Alternate translation: “clear as crystal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
4:6 fr7x ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ θρόνου καὶ κύκλῳ τοῦ θρόνου 1 “Immediately around the throne” or “Close to the throne and around it”
4:6 b66k τέσσαρα ζῷα 1 “four living beings” or “four living things”
@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
4:10 cmj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers εἴκοσι τέσσαρες πρεσβύτεροι 1 “24 elders.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
4:10 c2vg πεσοῦνται 1 They purposely lie down facing the ground to show that they are worshiping.
4:10 sly8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους αὐτῶν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου 1 These crowns looked like wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. The elders were respectfully placing the crowns on the ground, showing that they were submitting to God’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “they lay their crowns before the throne to show that they were submitting to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
4:10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to placing something. (2) This refers to throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
4:10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 This could refers to: (1) placing something. (2) throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
4:11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 “our Lord and God.” This is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne.
4:11 q91l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 These are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
5:intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sealed scroll\n\nKings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])\n\n### Twenty-four elders\n\nElders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### Christian prayers\n\nThe prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.\n\n### Seven spirits of God\n\nThese spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphors\n\nThe “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
5:8 e3fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 This is a young male sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
5:8 cgs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers οἱ εἴκοσι τέσσαρες πρεσβύτεροι 1 “24 elders.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
5:8 ff8y ἔπεσαν 1 “lay down on the ground.” Their faces were toward the ground to show that they were worshiping the Lamb. They did this on purpose; they did not fall accidentally.
5:8 uv6w ἕκαστος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to each of the elders and living creatures. (2) This refers to each of the elders.
5:8 uv6w ἕκαστος 1 This could refers to: (1) each of the elders and living creatures. (2) each of the elders.
5:8 qak6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage φιάλας χρυσᾶς γεμούσας θυμιαμάτων, αἵ εἰσιν αἱ προσευχαὶ τῶν ἁγίων 1 The incense here is a symbol for the believers’ prayers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
5:9 yu7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐσφάγης 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they slaughtered you” or “For people killed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
5:9 j1jn ἐσφάγης 1 If your language has a word for killing an animal for a sacrifice, consider using it here.
@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
6:9 bv8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα 1 “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
6:9 n3mi ὑποκάτω τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 This may have been “at the base of the altar.”
6:9 b2kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῶν ἐσφαγμένων 1 You can translate this with an active verb. AT “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
6:9 y8c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 Here, **Word of God** is a metonym for the message from God and “held” is a metaphor. This could mean: (1) Holding the testimony refers to believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) Holding the testimony refers to testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:9 y8c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 Here, **Word of God** is a metonym for the message from God and “held” is a metaphor. Here, holding the testimony could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:10 qz1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκδικεῖς τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν 1 The word **blood** here represents their deaths. Alternate translation: “punish those who killed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
6:11 bq1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί 1 This implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should be killed by their enemies. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants … sisters whom God had decided people would kill, just as people had killed their fellow servants … sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
6:11 q9xh οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν 1 This is one group of people described in two ways: as servants and as brothers. Alternate translation: “their brothers who serve God with them” or “their fellow believers who serve God with them”
@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
8:intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Seven seals and seven trumpets\n\nThis chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Passive voice\n\nJohn uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n\n### Similes\n\nIn verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
8:1 d652 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe Lamb opens the seventh seal.
8:1 mh2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:2 fri9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 They were each given one trumpet. You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) The Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:2 fri9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 They were each given one trumpet. You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) the Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:3 f9g9 δώσει 1 “he would offer the incense to God by burning it”
8:4 lq1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χειρὸς τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 This refers to the bowl in the angel’s hand. Alternate translation: “the bowl in the angel’s hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
8:5 l79w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγέμισεν αὐτὸν ἐκ τοῦ πυρὸς 1 The word **fire** here probably refers to burning coals. Alternate translation: “filled it with burning coals” or “filled it with coals of fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
8:8 rnh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος ἄγγελος 1 “The next angel” or “Angel number two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
8:8 uw2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ὄρος μέγα πυρὶ καιόμενον, ἐβλήθη 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the angel threw something like a great mountain burning with fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:8 ev7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction ἐγένετο τὸ τρίτον τῆς θαλάσσης αἷμα 1 The fraction “A third” can be explained in translation. Alternate translation: “It was like the sea was divided into three parts, and one of those parts became blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
8:8 k43y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγένετο & αἷμα 1 This could mean: (1) It became red like blood. (2) It really became blood. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
8:8 k43y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγένετο & αἷμα 1 This could mean: (1) it became red like blood. (2) it really became blood. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
8:9 vgf4 τῶν κτισμάτων τῶν ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ τὰ ἔχοντα ψυχάς 1 “the things living in the sea” or “the fish and other animals that lived in the sea”
8:10 n8ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἔπεσεν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἀστὴρ μέγας, καιόμενος ὡς λαμπάς 1 “a huge star that was blazing like a torch fell from the sky.” The fire of the huge star looked similar to the fire of a torch. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
8:10 int4 λαμπάς 1 a stick with one end lit on fire to provide light
@ -387,15 +387,15 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
8:11 gei4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγένετο & ἄψινθον 1 The bitter taste of the water is spoken of as if it were wormwood. Alternate translation: “became bitter like wormwood” or “became bitter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8:11 g4q5 ἀπέθανον ἐκ τῶν ὑδάτων, ὅτι ἐπικράνθησαν 1 “died when they drank the bitter water”
8:12 z936 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου 1 Causing something bad to happen to the sun is spoken of as striking, or hitting, it. You can state this with an active verb. Alternate translation: “a third of the sun changed” or “God changed a third of the sun” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
8:12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) One third of the time, they were dark. (2) One third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark.
8:12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) one third of the time, they were dark. (2) one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark.
8:12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night”
8:13 x375 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος & σαλπίζειν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
9:intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### Woe\n\nJohn describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Animal imagery\n\nThis chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.\n\n### Bottomless pit\n\nThis image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])\n\n### Abaddon and Apollyon\n\n“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### Repentance\n\nDespite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Simile\n\nJohn uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
9:1 d26c 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
9:1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall.
9:1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”
9:1 cjr9 τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **shaft** is another way of referring to the pit and describes it as long and narrow. (2) Here, **shaft** refers to the opening of the pit.
9:1 p886 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom.
9:1 cjr9 τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 Here, **shaft** could be: (1) another way of referring to the pit and describes it as long and narrow. (2) the opening of the pit.
9:1 p886 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom.
9:2 tp79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς καπνὸς καμίνου μεγάλης 1 A huge furnace gives off a great amount of thick, dark smoke. Alternate translation: “like the great amount of smoke that comes from a huge furnace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
9:2 nd4n ἐσκοτώθη 1 “became dark”
9:3 mb9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀκρίδες 1 insects that fly together in large groups. People fear them because they can eat up all the leaves in gardens and on trees. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@ -418,8 +418,8 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
9:7 s9gl στέφανοι ὅμοιοι χρυσῷ 1 These were likenesses of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads.
9:10 mac3 ἔχουσιν οὐρὰς 1 The word **They** refers to the locusts.
9:10 qdc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁμοίας σκορπίοις καὶ κέντρα 1 A scorpion is a small insect with a poisonous stinger at the end of its long tail. The sting can cause severe pain or even death. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 9:6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “with stingers like scorpion stingers” or “with stingers that could cause terrible pain as scorpion stingers can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
9:10 lim1 ἐν ταῖς οὐραῖς αὐτῶν ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτῶν ἀδικῆσαι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους μῆνας πέντε 1 This could mean: (1) They had power for five months to harm people. (2) They could sting people and the people would be in pain for five months.
9:11 fiu6 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
9:10 lim1 ἐν ταῖς οὐραῖς αὐτῶν ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτῶν ἀδικῆσαι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους μῆνας πέντε 1 This could mean: (1) they had power for five months to harm people. (2) they could sting people and the people would be in pain for five months.
9:11 fiu6 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
9:11 bkg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀβαδδών & Ἀπολλύων 1 Both names mean “Destroyer.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
9:12 ts26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ἔτι δύο οὐαὶ 1 Existing in the future is spoken of as coming. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
9:13 cyb6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe sixth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
11:6 cac1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κλεῖσαι τὸν οὐρανόν, ἵνα μὴ ὑετὸς βρέχῃ 1 John speaks of the sky as if it had a door that can be opened to let rain fall or closed to stop the rain. Alternate translation: “to keep rain from falling from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:6 a7ed στρέφειν 1 “to change”
11:6 kth7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατάξαι τὴν γῆν ἐν πάσῃ πληγῇ 1 John speaks of the plagues as if they were a stick that someone could hit the earth with. Alternate translation: “to cause all kinds of trouble to occur on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:7 i679 Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
11:7 i679 Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
11:8 r45p τὰ πτώματα αὐτῶν 1 This refers to the bodies of the two witnesses.
11:8 p9fu ἐπὶ τῆς πλατείας τῆς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης 1 The city had more than one street. This was a public place where people could see them. Alternate translation: “in one of the streets of the great city” or “in the main street of the great city”
11:8 iea1 ὁ Κύριος αὐτῶν 1 They served the Lord, and like him would die in that city.
@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
11:11 x3gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers τὰς τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ ἥμισυ 1 “3 full days and one half day” or “3.5 days” or “3 1/2 days.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 11:9](../11/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
11:11 al5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πνεῦμα ζωῆς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτούς 1 The ability to breathe is spoken of as if it were something that can go into people. Alternate translation: “God will cause the two witnesses to breathe again and live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:11 u265 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φόβος μέγας ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ τοὺς θεωροῦντας αὐτούς 1 Fear is spoken of as if it is a object that can fall on people. Alternate translation: “Those who see them will be extremely afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
11:12 f8ze καὶ ἤκουσαν 1 This could mean: (1) The two witnesses will hear. (2) The people will hear what is said to the two witnesses.
11:12 f8ze καὶ ἤκουσαν 1 This could mean: (1) the two witnesses will hear. (2) the people will hear what is said to the two witnesses.
11:12 mkq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φωνῆς μεγάλης ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 The word **voice** refers to the one who speaks. Alternate translation: “someone speak loudly to them from heaven and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
11:12 l1x7 λεγούσης αὐτοῖς 1 “say to the two witnesses”
11:13 p56r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων χιλιάδες ἑπτά 1 “7,000 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
@ -616,7 +616,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
13:18 uk74 ὧδε ἡ σοφία ἐστίν 1 “Wisdom is needed” or “You need to be wise about this”
13:18 z8tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἔχων νοῦν ψηφισάτω 1 The word **insight** can be translated with the verb “understand.” Alternate translation: “If anyone is able to understand things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
13:18 ri1y ψηφισάτω τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦ θηρίου 1 “he should discern what the number of the beast means” or “he should figure out what the number of the beast means”
13:18 bbn2 ἀριθμὸς & ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν 1 This could mean: (1) The number represents one person. (2) The number represents all of humanity.
13:18 bbn2 ἀριθμὸς & ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν 1 The **number** could represent: (1) one person. (2) all of humanity.
14:intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Harvest\n\nHarvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
14:1 e7u7 0 # General Information:\n\nThe word **I** refers to John.
14:1 ck6y 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJohn begins to describe the next part of his vision. There are 144,000 believers standing before the Lamb.
@ -629,8 +629,8 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
14:3 ii11 τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων 1 “living being” or “living thing.” See how you translated “living creature” in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md)
14:3 m75y τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 This refers to the twenty-four elders around the throne. See how you translated “elders” in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md).
14:3 q6fc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες 1 “one hundred forty-four thousand.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 7:4](../07/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
14:4 jet6 μετὰ γυναικῶν οὐκ ἐμολύνθησαν 1 This could mean: (1) They have never had immoral sexual relations with a woman. (2) They have never had sexual relations with a woman. Defiling oneself with women may be a symbol of worshiping idols.
14:4 a7ir παρθένοι 1 This could mean: (1) They did not have sexual relations with a woman who was not their wife. (2) They are virgins.
14:4 jet6 μετὰ γυναικῶν οὐκ ἐμολύνθησαν 1 This could mean: (1) they have never had immoral sexual relations with a woman. (2) they have never had sexual relations with a woman. Defiling oneself with women may be a symbol of worshiping idols.
14:4 a7ir παρθένοι 1 This could mean: (1) they did not have sexual relations with a woman who was not their wife. (2) they are virgins.
14:4 q3hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες τῷ Ἀρνίῳ ὅπου ἂν ὑπάγει 1 Doing what the Lamb does is spoken of as following him. Alternate translation: “they do whatever the Lamb does” or “they obey the Lamb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:4 mlw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἠγοράσθησαν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπαρχὴ 1 **Firstfruits** here is a metaphor for the first offering to be made to God in celebration of harvest. Alternate translation: “purchased out of the midst of the rest of mankind as a special celebration of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
14:5 ga8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτῶν οὐχ εὑρέθη ψεῦδος 1 Their “mouth” refers to what they said.” Alternate translation: “They never lied when they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
14:13 x62q οἱ νεκροὶ οἱ & ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 “those who die”
14:13 hy1a οἱ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 “who are united to the Lord and die.” This may refer to people who are killed by their enemies. Alternate translation: “who die because they are united to the Lord”
14:13 vd4m τῶν κόπων 1 difficulties and sufferings
14:13 v4xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ & ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 These deeds are spoken of as if they were alive and able to follow those who did them. This could mean: (1) Others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
14:13 v4xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ & ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 These deeds are spoken of as if they were alive and able to follow those who did them. This could mean: (1) others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
14:14 ft6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJohn begins to describe the next part of his vision. This part is about the Son of Man harvesting the earth. Harvesting the grain is a symbol of God’s judging people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
14:14 gvw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου 1 This expression describes a human figure, someone who looks human. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
14:14 i8se στέφανον χρυσοῦν 1 This was the likeness of a wreath of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads.
@ -675,9 +675,9 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
15:1 w6lf ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ 1 “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth”
15:1 mw7g τὰς ἐσχάτας 1 “and after them, there will not be any more plagues”
15:1 ij3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐν αὐταῖς ἐτελέσθη ὁ θυμὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for these plagues will complete the wrath of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
15:1 gdt5 ὅτι ἐν αὐταῖς ἐτελέσθη ὁ θυμὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) These plagues will show all of God’s anger. (2) After these plagues, God will no longer be angry.
15:1 gdt5 ὅτι ἐν αὐταῖς ἐτελέσθη ὁ θυμὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) these plagues will show all of God’s anger. (2) after these plagues, God will no longer be angry.
15:2 ytq6 0 # General Information:\n\nHere John begins to describe his vision of the people who had been victorious over the beast and who are praising God.
15:2 n9yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσαν ὑαλίνην 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) A sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) Glass if spoken of as if it were a sea. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 n9yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσαν ὑαλίνην 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) a sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) glass if spoken of as if it were a sea. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
15:2 pt8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς νικῶντας ἐκ τοῦ θηρίου, καὶ ἐκ τῆς εἰκόνος αὐτοῦ 1 You can state clearly how they were victorious. Alternate translation: “who had been victorious over the beast and his image by not worshiping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:2 dbz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 You can state clearly how they were victorious over the number. Alternate translation: “over the number representing his name by not being marked with that number” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15:2 lra7 τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 This refers to the number described in [Revelation 13:18](../13/18.md).
@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
16:3 sx66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὴν θάλασσαν 1 This refers to all the salt water lakes and oceans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16:4 p4ae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξέχεεν τὴν φιάλην αὐτοῦ 1 The word **bowl** refers to what is in it. See how you translated this in [Revelation 16:2](../16/02.md). Alternate translation: “poured out the wine from his bowl” or “poured out God’s wrath from his bowl” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
16:4 xu1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοὺς ποταμοὺς καὶ τὰς πηγὰς τῶν ὑδάτων 1 This refers to all bodies of fresh water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
16:5 f35a τοῦ ἀγγέλου τῶν ὑδάτων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the third angel who was in charge of pouring out God’s wrath on the rivers and springs of water. (2) This was another angel who was in charge of all the waters.
16:5 f35a τοῦ ἀγγέλου τῶν ὑδάτων 1 This could refers to: (1) the third angel who was in charge of pouring out God’s wrath on the rivers and springs of water. (2) another angel who was in charge of all the waters.
16:5 e45u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you δίκαιος εἶ 1 “You” refers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
16:5 itg7 ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν 1 “God who is and who was.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md).
16:6 b6wa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy αἷμα ἁγίων καὶ προφητῶν ἐξέχεαν 1 Here, **poured out the blood** means killed. Alternate translation: “they murdered God’s holy people and the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
17:6 yqi7 τῶν μαρτύρων Ἰησοῦ 1 “the believers who have died because they told others about Jesus”
17:6 ydi9 ἐθαύμασα 1 amazed, surprised
17:7 j412 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐθαύμασας 1 The angel used this question to gently scold John. Alternate translation: “You should not be astonished!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
17:8 upm7 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
17:8 upm7 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
17:8 usl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The noun “destruction” can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “Then he will be destroyed” or “Then God will destroy him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:8 glf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The certainty of what will happen in the future is spoken of as if the beast were going to it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:8 r6h4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὧν οὐ γέγραπται τὰ ὀνόματα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whose names God did not write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@ -772,7 +772,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
17:10 d2wx ὁ εἷς ἔστιν 1 “one is king now” or “one king is alive now”
17:10 kw95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ εἷς ἔστιν, ὁ ἄλλος οὔπω ἦλθεν 1 Not having existed yet is spoken of as not yet having come. Alternate translation: “the other has not yet become king; when he becomes king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:10 v8vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλθῃ, ὀλίγον αὐτὸν δεῖ μεῖναι 1 The angel speaks of someone continuing to be king as if he were remaining in a place. Alternate translation: “he can be king only for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17:11 b1ct ἐκ τῶν ἑπτά ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) The beast rules twice: first as one of the seven kings, and then as the eighth king. (2) The beast belongs to that group of seven kings because he is like them.
17:11 b1ct ἐκ τῶν ἑπτά ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) the beast rules twice: first as one of the seven kings, and then as the eighth king. (2) the beast belongs to that group of seven kings because he is like them.
17:11 w7sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The certainty of what will happen in the future is spoken of as if the beast were going to it. Alternate translation: “it will certainly be destroyed” or “God will surely destroy it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
17:12 gq2m 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe angel continues speaking to John. Here he explains the meaning of the ten horns of the beast.
17:12 n2rd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μίαν ὥραν 1 If your language does not divide the day into 24 hours, you may need to use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “for a very short time” or “for a very small part of a day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
18:6 ec42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπόδοτε αὐτῇ ὡς καὶ αὐτὴ ἀπέδωκεν 1 The voice speaks of punishment as if it were payment. Alternate translation: “Punish her as she has punished others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:6 pa62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διπλώσατε 1 The voice speaks of punishment as if it were payment. Alternate translation: “punish her twice as much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:6 xba5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ ἐκέρασεν, κεράσατε αὐτῇ διπλοῦν 1 The voice speaks of causing others to suffer as preparing strong wine for them to drink. Alternate translation: “prepare for her the wine of suffering that is twice as strong as what she made for others” or “make her suffer twice as much as she made others suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
18:6 l3n5 κεράσατε & διπλοῦν 1 This could mean: (1) They should prepare twice the amount. (2) They should make it twice as strong.
18:6 l3n5 κεράσατε & διπλοῦν 1 This could mean: (1) they should prepare twice the amount. (2) they should make it twice as strong.
18:7 i9bm 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe same voice from heaven continues speaking about Babylon as if it were a woman.
18:7 we2t ἐδόξασεν αὑτὴν 1 “the people of Babylon glorified themselves”
18:7 yt32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅτι ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς λέγει 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “For she says to herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
20:intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The thousand-year reign of Christ\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Final rebellion\n\nThis chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God’s ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])\n\n### Great white throne\n\nThis chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Book of Life\n\nThis is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Hades and the lake of fire\n\nThese appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
20:1 rkv7 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn begins to describe a vision of an angel throwing the devil into the bottomless pit.
20:1 n8b8 καὶ εἶδον 1 Here, **I** refers to John.
20:1 c18c Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
20:1 c18c Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
20:2 r6es rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage δράκοντα 1 This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
20:3 xj22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐσφράγισεν ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ 1 The angel sealed the pit to keep anyone from opening it. Alternate translation: “sealed it to prevent anyone from opening it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
20:3 el4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλανήσῃ & τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **nations** is a metonym for the people of the earth. Alternate translation: “deceive the people-groups” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@ -973,8 +973,8 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
21:4 w39g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 **Tears** here represent sadness. See how you translated this in [Revelation 7:17](../07/17.md). Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:5 rq2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι πιστοὶ καὶ ἀληθινοί εἰσιν 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. Alternate translation: “this message is trustworthy and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21:6 dq8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ, ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize God’s eternal nature. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
21:6 li7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) This refers to the one who has always lived and who always will live. If these are unclear to readers, you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
21:6 bf1p ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) This refers to the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things.
21:6 li7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) the one who has always lived and who always will live. If these are unclear to readers, you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
21:6 bf1p ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things.
21:6 wk2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ διψῶντι & τοῦ ὕδατος τῆς ζωῆς 1 God speaks of a person’s desire for eternal life as if it were thirst and of that person receiving eternal life as if he were drinking life-giving water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
21:7 vms6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe one seated on the throne continues to speak to John.
21:8 hma7 τοῖς & δειλοῖς 1 “those who are too afraid to do what is right”
@ -1017,12 +1017,12 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
22:1 yn2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποταμὸν ὕδατος ζωῆς 1 Eternal life is spoken of as if it were provided by life-giving water. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:1 mxp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 This is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
22:2 l2aq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Here, **nations** refers to the people who live in every nation. Alternate translation: “the people of all nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:3 d5fq πᾶν κατάθεμα οὐκ ἔσται ἔτι 1 This could mean: (1) There will never be anyone there that God will curse. (2) There will not be anyone there who is under God’s curse.
22:3 by36 οἱ δοῦλοι αὐτοῦ λατρεύσουσιν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **his** and **him** could mean: (1) This refers to God the Father. (2) This refers to both God and the Lamb, who rule together as one.
22:3 d5fq πᾶν κατάθεμα οὐκ ἔσται ἔτι 1 This could mean: (1) there will never be anyone there that God will curse. (2) there will not be anyone there who is under God’s curse.
22:3 by36 οἱ δοῦλοι αὐτοῦ λατρεύσουσιν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **his** and **him** could refer to: (1) God the Father. (2) both God and the Lamb, who rule together as one.
22:4 zy4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὄψονται τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 This is an idiom, meaning to be in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “They will be in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
22:6 j51i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the end of John’s vision. In verse 6 the angel is speaking to John. In verse 7, Jesus is speaking. This can be shown clearly as is in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:6 xaw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι πιστοὶ καὶ ἀληθινοί 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:5](../21/05.md). Alternate translation: “This message is trustworthy and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:6 cr31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν προφητῶν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **spirits** refers to the inward disposition of the prophets and indicates that God inspires them. Alternate translation: “God who inspires the prophets” (2) The word **spirits** refers to the Holy Spirit who inspires the prophets. Alternate translation: “God who gives his Spirit to the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:6 cr31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν προφητῶν 1 The word **spirits** refers to: (1) the inward disposition of the prophets and indicates that God inspires them. Alternate translation: “God who inspires the prophets” (2) the Holy Spirit who inspires the prophets. Alternate translation: “God who gives his Spirit to the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:7 p72h ἰδοὺ 1 Here Jesus begins to speak. The word **Look** adds emphasis to what follows.
22:7 afr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχομαι ταχύ 1 It is understood that he is coming in order to judge. See how you translated this in [Revelation 3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “I am coming to judge soon!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:8 xr17 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn tells his readers about how he responded to the angel.
@ -1032,9 +1032,9 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
22:10 xc15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τῆς προφητείας τοῦ βιβλίου τούτου 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. See how you translated this in [Revelation 22:7](../22/07.md). Alternate translation: “This prophetic message of this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22:12 idc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nAs the book of Revelation is ending, Jesus gives a closing greeting. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
22:13 f5jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ, ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 These three phrases share similar meanings and emphasize that Jesus has and will exist for all time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
22:13 uup6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) This refers to the one who has always lived and who always will live. If unclear to readers you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
22:13 uup6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) the one who has always lived and who always will live. If unclear to readers you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
22:13 cpl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος 1 This refers to the eternal nature of Jesus. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
22:13 nnm2 ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) This refers to the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md).
22:13 nnm2 ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md).
22:14 r16s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues giving his closing greeting.
22:14 i54w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ πλύνοντες τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν 1 Becoming righteous is spoken of as if it were washing one’s clothing. See how you translated as similar phrase in [Revelation 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “those who have become righteous, as if they have washed their robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:15 aw1h ἔξω 1 This means they are outside the city and not allowed to enter.
@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ front:intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation\n\n## Part 1: General Introdu
22:16 g9uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἀστὴρ ὁ λαμπρός, ὁ πρωϊνός 1 Jesus speaks of himself as if he were the bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning and indicates that a new day is about to begin. See how you translated “morning star” in [Revelation 2:28](../02/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:17 gig5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is a response to what Jesus said.
22:17 lt8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ νύμφη 1 Believers are spoken of as if they were a bride about to be married to her groom, Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:17 m9at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχου 1 This could mean: (1) This is an invitation for people to come and drink the water of life. Alternate translation: “Come and drink!” (2) This is a polite request for Jesus to return. Alternate translation: “Please come!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:17 m9at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχου 1 This could mean: (1) this is an invitation for people to come and drink the water of life. Alternate translation: “Come and drink!” (2) this is a polite request for Jesus to return. Alternate translation: “Please come!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
22:17 e2m5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ διψῶν ἐρχέσθω & ὕδωρ ζωῆς 1 A person’s desire for eternal life is spoken of as if it were thirst and of that person receiving eternal life as if he were drinking life-giving water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:17 dwb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὕδωρ ζωῆς 1 Eternal life is spoken of as if it were provided by life-giving water. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22:18 fd5l 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn gives his final remarks about the book of Revelation.

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
7 1:1 kez4 ἐσήμανεν 1 “communicated it”
8 1:1 pb4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person τῷ δούλῳ αὐτοῦ, Ἰωάννῃ 1 John wrote this book and was referring to himself here. Alternate translation: “to me, John, his servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
9 1:2 va4c τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “the message that God spoke”
10 1:2 b5se τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the testimony that John has given about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “he has also given testimony about Jesus Christ” (2) This refers to the testimony that Jesus Christ has given about himself. This could refer to: (1) the testimony that John has given about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “he has also given testimony about Jesus Christ” (2) the testimony that Jesus Christ has given about himself.
11 1:3 le65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀναγινώσκων 1 This does not refer to a specific person. It refers to anyone who reads it aloud. Alternate translation: “anyone who reads aloud” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
12 1:3 h37b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τηροῦντες τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ γεγραμμένα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “obey what John has written in it” or “obey what they read in it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
13 1:3 dwt8 ὁ & καιρὸς ἐγγύς 1 “the things that must happen will soon happen”
64 1:19 u49x 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe Son of Man continues to speak.
65 1:20 d6ez rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ἀστέρων 1 These stars are symbols that represent the seven angels of the seven churches. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
66 1:20 fl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
67 1:20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **angels** could mean: (1) This refers to heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) This refers to human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches. Here, **angels** could refer to: (1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches.
68 1:20 e25n ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 This refers to seven churches that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md).
69 2:intro zps2 0 # Revelation 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Poverty and wealth\n\nThe Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n### “The devil is about to”\n\nPeople were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel\n\nBalaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”\n\nThe writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “The angel of the church”\n\nThe word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n### “The words of the one who”\n\nThe verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
70 2:1 mn8x 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus.
71 2:1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angels who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
72 2:1 i92a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ἀστέρας 1 These stars are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
73 2:1 ugs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage λυχνιῶν 1 The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
74 2:2 jg1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδα & τὸν κόπον καὶ τὴν ὑπομονήν σου 1 “Labor” and “endurance” are abstract nouns and can be translated with verbs “work” and “endure.” Alternate translation: “I know … that you work very hard and that you endure patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
87 2:7 wzg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῷ νικῶντι 1 This refers anyone who conquers. Alternate translation: “anyone who resists evil” or “those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
88 2:7 rmf5 τῷ Παραδείσῳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 “God’s garden.” This is a symbol for heaven.
89 2:8 is3w 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Smyrna.
90 2:8 ie9x τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
91 2:8 key2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σμύρνῃ 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
92 2:8 k7qk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος 1 This refers to the eternal nature of Jesus. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
93 2:9 p6hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἶδά σου τὴν θλῖψιν καὶ τὴν πτωχείαν 1 “Sufferings” and “poverty” can be translated as verbs. Alternate translation: “I know how you have suffered and how poor you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
97 2:10 agx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν 1 The words **the Devil** here are a metonym for the people who obey the devil. Alternate translation: “The devil will soon cause others to put some of you in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
98 2:10 f5t1 γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου 1 “Be faithful to me even if they kill you.” The use os the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death.
99 2:10 sp8z τὸν στέφανον 1 “the winner’s crown.” This was a wreath, originally of olive branches or laurel leaves, that was put on the head of a victorious athlete.
100 2:10 zhj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to a crown that shows that Christ has given the believers eternal life. (2) This refers to true life as a prize like a winner’s crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could refer to: (1) a crown that shows that Christ has given the believers eternal life. (2) true life as a prize like a winner’s crown. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
101 2:11 g7zq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
102 2:11 dc3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
103 2:11 s9d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ νικῶν 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Anyone who resists evil” or “Those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
104 2:11 q6w2 οὐ μὴ ἀδικηθῇ ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου τοῦ δευτέρου 1 “will not experience the second death” or “will not die a second time”
105 2:12 ll17 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Pergamum.
106 2:12 y864 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
107 2:12 il7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Περγάμῳ 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
108 2:12 f6s5 τὴν ῥομφαίαν τὴν δίστομον τὴν ὀξεῖαν 1 This refers to a double-edged sword, which is sharpened on both sides to cut both directions. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md)
109 2:13 ryn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 This could mean: (1) Satan’s power and evil influence on people. (2) The place where Satan rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) This could mean: (1) Satan’s power and evil influence on people. (2) the place where Satan rules. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
110 2:13 tf7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖς τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 **Name** here is a metonym for the person. Firmly believing is spoken of as holding on tightly. Alternate translation: “you firmly believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
111 2:13 x6j6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἠρνήσω τὴν πίστιν μου 1 “Faith” can be translated with the verb “believe.” AT “you continued to tell people that you believe in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
112 2:13 lu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀντιπᾶς 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
113 2:14 wu6n ἀλλ’ ἔχω κατὰ σοῦ ὀλίγα 1 “I disapprove of you because of a few things you have done” or “I am angry with you because of a few things you did.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 2:4](../02/04.md).
114 2:14 rd44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατοῦντας τὴν διδαχὴν Βαλαάμ, ὃς 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to people who teach what Balaam taught. (2) This refers to people who do what Balaam taught. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) This could refer to: (1) people who teach what Balaam taught. (2) people who do what Balaam taught. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
115 2:14 j3nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names τῷ Βαλὰκ 1 This is the name of a king. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
116 2:14 hg4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἐδίδασκεν τῷ Βαλὰκ βαλεῖν σκάνδαλον ἐνώπιον τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 Something that leads people to sin is spoken of as a stone in the road that people stumble on. Alternate translation: “who showed Balak how to cause the people of Israel to sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
117 2:14 u19f πορνεῦσαι 1 “sin sexually” or “commit sexual sin”
124 2:17 m867 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
125 2:17 i61b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τῷ νικῶντι 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “anyone who resists evil” or “those who do not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
126 2:18 b83m 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Thyatira.
127 2:18 nd4m τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
128 2:18 kd5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Θυατείροις 1 This is the name of a city in a part of western Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
129 2:18 q3w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
130 2:18 zbx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ ἔχων τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ ὡς φλόγα πυρός 1 His eyes are describes as being full of light like a flame of fire. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “whose eyes glow like a flame of fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
148 2:26 z5xi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ νικῶν 1 This refers anyone who conquers. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Anyone who resists evil” or “The person who does not agree to do evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
149 2:27 c9gu ποιμανεῖ & συντρίβεται 1 This is a prophecy from the Old Testament about a king of Israel, but Jesus applied it here to those to whom he gives authority over the nations.
150 2:27 w8pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποιμανεῖ αὐτοὺς ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ 1 Ruling harshly is spoken of as ruling with an iron rod. Alternate translation: “He will rule them harshly as if striking them with an iron stick” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151 2:27 ksl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τὰ σκεύη τὰ κεραμικὰ συντρίβεται 1 Breaking them to pieces is an image that represents either: (1) It refer to destroying evildoers. (2) It refer to defeating enemies. Alternate translation: “He will defeat his enemies completely as if breaking clay jars into pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) Breaking them to pieces is an image that represents either: (1) destroying evildoers. (2) defeating enemies. Alternate translation: “He will defeat his enemies completely as if breaking clay jars into pieces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
152 2:28 n9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς κἀγὼ εἴληφα παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου 1 Some languages may need to tell what was received. This could mean: (1) This may mean he received authority from his Father. (2) This may mean he received the morning star from his Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Some languages may need to tell what was received. This could mean: (1) he received authority from his Father. (2) he received the morning star from his Father. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
153 2:28 hr39 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ πατρός μου 1 This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
154 2:28 c1zc καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to the one who conquers.
155 2:28 g5iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τὸν ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν 1 This is a bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
157 2:29 ikm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
158 3:intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Seven spirits of God\n\nThese spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).\n\n### Seven stars\n\nThese stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n## Important metaphors in this chapter\n\n### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking\n\nJesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”\n\nThe speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “The angel of the church”\n\nThe word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).\n\n### “The words of the one who”\n\nThe verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
159 3:1 k6b7 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Sardis.
160 3:1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md). Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md).
161 3:1 q7n9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σάρδεσιν 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
162 3:1 un3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage ὁ ἔχων τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα 1 The number seven is a symbol of completeness and perfection. The “seven spirits” refers either to the Spirit of God or to seven spirits who serve God. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
163 3:1 t8wv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἀστέρας 1 These stars are symbols that represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
179 3:6 zxc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
180 3:6 k2k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
181 3:7 rf9b 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Philadelphia.
182 3:7 ksg4 τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
183 3:7 mm6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλαδελφίᾳ 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
184 3:7 ih6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage κλεῖν Δαυείδ 1 Jesus speaks of his authority to decide who may go into his kingdom as if it were King David’s key. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
185 3:7 aam6 ὁ ἀνοίγων καὶ οὐδεὶς κλείσει 1 “he opens the door to the kingdom and no one can close it”
186 3:7 pzy2 κλείων καὶ οὐδεὶς ἀνοίγει 1 “he closes the door and no one can open it”
187 3:8 j1x7 δέδωκα ἐνώπιόν σου θύραν ἠνεῳγμένην 1 “I have opened a door for you”
188 3:8 xyw6 ἐτήρησάς μου τὸν λόγον 1 This could mean: (1) They have followed his teachings. (2) They have obeyed his commands. This could mean: (1) they have followed his teachings. (2) they have obeyed his commands.
189 3:8 b3kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 The word **name** here is a metonym for the person who has that name. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
190 3:9 x78m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 People who gather to obey or honor Satan are spoken of as if they were in a synagogue, a place of worship and teaching for the Jews. See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
191 3:9 q496 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction προσκυνήσουσιν 1 This is a sign of submission, not worship. Alternate translation: “bow down in submission” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
201 3:13 u5jk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
202 3:13 ug5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὁ & ἀκουσάτω 1 Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
203 3:14 r6bz 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Laodicea.
204 3:14 jg3b τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) Here, **angel** could refer to: (1) a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md)
205 3:14 wzg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λαοδικίᾳ 1 This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
206 3:14 f65v ὁ Ἀμήν 1 Here, **the Amen** is a name for Jesus Christ. He guarantees God’s promises by saying amen to them.
207 3:14 btv1 ἡ ἀρχὴ τῆς κτίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who rules over everything that God created. (2) This refers to the one through whom God created everything. This could refer to: (1) the one who rules over everything that God created. (2) the one through whom God created everything.
208 3:15 pf9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὔτε ψυχρὸς εἶ οὔτε ζεστός 1 The writer speaks of the Laodiceans as if they were water. This could mean: (1) Here, **cold and hot** represent two extremes of spiritual interest or love for God, where “cold” is to be completely against God, and to be “hot” is to be zealous to serve him. (2) Here, **cold and hot** both refer to water that is useful for drinking or for cooking or healing, respectively. Alternate translation: “you are like water that is neither cold nor hot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) The writer speaks of the Laodiceans as if they were water. Here, **cold and hot** could: (1) represent two extremes of spiritual interest or love for God, where “cold” is to be completely against God, and to be “hot” is to be zealous to serve him. (2) both refer to water that is useful for drinking or for cooking or healing, respectively. Alternate translation: “you are like water that is neither cold nor hot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
209 3:16 y9vt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέλλω σε ἐμέσαι ἐκ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 Rejecting them is spoken of as vomiting them out of the mouth. Alternate translation: “I will reject you as I would spit out lukewarm water” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
210 3:17 v1pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ εἶ ὁ ταλαίπωρος, καὶ ἐλεεινὸς, καὶ πτωχὸς, καὶ τυφλὸς, καὶ γυμνός 1 Jesus speaks of their spiritual condition as if he were speaking about their physical condition. Alternate translation: “You are like people who are most miserable, pitiable, poor, blind, and naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
211 3:18 tmm7 ἀγοράσαι παρ’ ἐμοῦ χρυσίον πεπυρωμένον ἐκ πυρὸς, ἵνα πλουτήσῃς, καὶ ἱμάτια λευκὰ, ἵνα περιβάλῃ, καὶ μὴ φανερωθῇ ἡ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητός σου, καὶ κολλούριον ἐγχρῖσαι τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου, ἵνα βλέπῃς 1 Here to **buy** represents receiving things from Jesus that have true spiritual value. The “gold refined by fire” represents spiritual wealth. The “brilliant white garments” represents rightousness. And the “salve to anoint your eyes” represents the ability to understand spiritual things. Alternate translation: “Come to me and receive spiritual wealth, which is more valuable than gold that is refined by fire. Receive from me righteousness, which is like brilliant white garments, so that you will not be ashamed. And receive from me wisdom, which is like salve for the eyes, so that you may understand spiritual things” (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor)
235 4:5 ryb1 ἀστραπαὶ 1 Use your language’s way of describing what lightning looks like each time it appears.
236 4:5 u1da φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταί 1 These are the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder.
237 4:5 e1jm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τὰ ἑπτὰ πνεύματα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The number seven is a symbol of completeness and perfection. The “seven spirits” refers either to the Spirit of God or to seven spirits who serve God. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
238 4:6 ja33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσα ὑαλίνη 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) A sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) Glass is spoken of as if it were a sea. Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) a sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) glass is spoken of as if it were a sea. Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
239 4:6 cv9p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁμοία κρυστάλλῳ 1 You can state clearly how it was like crystal. Alternate translation: “clear as crystal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
240 4:6 fr7x ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ θρόνου καὶ κύκλῳ τοῦ θρόνου 1 “Immediately around the throne” or “Close to the throne and around it”
241 4:6 b66k τέσσαρα ζῷα 1 “four living beings” or “four living things”
248 4:10 cmj9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers εἴκοσι τέσσαρες πρεσβύτεροι 1 “24 elders.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
249 4:10 c2vg πεσοῦνται 1 They purposely lie down facing the ground to show that they are worshiping.
250 4:10 sly8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους αὐτῶν ἐνώπιον τοῦ θρόνου 1 These crowns looked like wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. The elders were respectfully placing the crowns on the ground, showing that they were submitting to God’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “they lay their crowns before the throne to show that they were submitting to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
251 4:10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to placing something. (2) This refers to throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully. This could refers to: (1) placing something. (2) throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
252 4:11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 “our Lord and God.” This is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne.
253 4:11 q91l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 These are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
254 5:intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Sealed scroll\n\nKings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])\n\n### Twenty-four elders\n\nElders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### Christian prayers\n\nThe prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.\n\n### Seven spirits of God\n\nThese spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphors\n\nThe “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
273 5:8 e3fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 This is a young male sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
274 5:8 cgs1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers οἱ εἴκοσι τέσσαρες πρεσβύτεροι 1 “24 elders.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
275 5:8 ff8y ἔπεσαν 1 “lay down on the ground.” Their faces were toward the ground to show that they were worshiping the Lamb. They did this on purpose; they did not fall accidentally.
276 5:8 uv6w ἕκαστος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to each of the elders and living creatures. (2) This refers to each of the elders. This could refers to: (1) each of the elders and living creatures. (2) each of the elders.
277 5:8 qak6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage φιάλας χρυσᾶς γεμούσας θυμιαμάτων, αἵ εἰσιν αἱ προσευχαὶ τῶν ἁγίων 1 The incense here is a symbol for the believers’ prayers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
278 5:9 yu7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐσφάγης 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they slaughtered you” or “For people killed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
279 5:9 j1jn ἐσφάγης 1 If your language has a word for killing an animal for a sacrifice, consider using it here.
313 6:9 bv8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα 1 “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
314 6:9 n3mi ὑποκάτω τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 This may have been “at the base of the altar.”
315 6:9 b2kp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῶν ἐσφαγμένων 1 You can translate this with an active verb. AT “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
316 6:9 y8c6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 Here, **Word of God** is a metonym for the message from God and “held” is a metaphor. This could mean: (1) Holding the testimony refers to believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) Holding the testimony refers to testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **Word of God** is a metonym for the message from God and “held” is a metaphor. Here, holding the testimony could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
317 6:10 qz1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκδικεῖς τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν 1 The word **blood** here represents their deaths. Alternate translation: “punish those who killed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
318 6:11 bq1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί 1 This implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should be killed by their enemies. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants … sisters whom God had decided people would kill, just as people had killed their fellow servants … sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
319 6:11 q9xh οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν 1 This is one group of people described in two ways: as servants and as brothers. Alternate translation: “their brothers who serve God with them” or “their fellow believers who serve God with them”
369 8:intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 8 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Seven seals and seven trumpets\n\nThis chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Passive voice\n\nJohn uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n\n### Similes\n\nIn verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
370 8:1 d652 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe Lamb opens the seventh seal.
371 8:1 mh2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
372 8:2 fri9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 They were each given one trumpet. You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) The Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) They were each given one trumpet. You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) the Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
373 8:3 f9g9 δώσει 1 “he would offer the incense to God by burning it”
374 8:4 lq1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy χειρὸς τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 This refers to the bowl in the angel’s hand. Alternate translation: “the bowl in the angel’s hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
375 8:5 l79w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγέμισεν αὐτὸν ἐκ τοῦ πυρὸς 1 The word **fire** here probably refers to burning coals. Alternate translation: “filled it with burning coals” or “filled it with coals of fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
379 8:8 rnh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος ἄγγελος 1 “The next angel” or “Angel number two” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
380 8:8 uw2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ὄρος μέγα πυρὶ καιόμενον, ἐβλήθη 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the angel threw something like a great mountain burning with fire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
381 8:8 ev7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction ἐγένετο τὸ τρίτον τῆς θαλάσσης αἷμα 1 The fraction “A third” can be explained in translation. Alternate translation: “It was like the sea was divided into three parts, and one of those parts became blood” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
382 8:8 k43y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἐγένετο & αἷμα 1 This could mean: (1) It became red like blood. (2) It really became blood. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) This could mean: (1) it became red like blood. (2) it really became blood. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
383 8:9 vgf4 τῶν κτισμάτων τῶν ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ τὰ ἔχοντα ψυχάς 1 “the things living in the sea” or “the fish and other animals that lived in the sea”
384 8:10 n8ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἔπεσεν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἀστὴρ μέγας, καιόμενος ὡς λαμπάς 1 “a huge star that was blazing like a torch fell from the sky.” The fire of the huge star looked similar to the fire of a torch. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
385 8:10 int4 λαμπάς 1 a stick with one end lit on fire to provide light
387 8:11 gei4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγένετο & ἄψινθον 1 The bitter taste of the water is spoken of as if it were wormwood. Alternate translation: “became bitter like wormwood” or “became bitter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
388 8:11 g4q5 ἀπέθανον ἐκ τῶν ὑδάτων, ὅτι ἐπικράνθησαν 1 “died when they drank the bitter water”
389 8:12 z936 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου 1 Causing something bad to happen to the sun is spoken of as striking, or hitting, it. You can state this with an active verb. Alternate translation: “a third of the sun changed” or “God changed a third of the sun” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
390 8:12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) One third of the time, they were dark. (2) One third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark. This could mean: (1) one third of the time, they were dark. (2) one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark.
391 8:12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night”
392 8:13 x375 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος & σαλπίζειν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
393 9:intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])\n\n### Woe\n\nJohn describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Animal imagery\n\nThis chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.\n\n### Bottomless pit\n\nThis image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])\n\n### Abaddon and Apollyon\n\n“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])\n\n### Repentance\n\nDespite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Simile\n\nJohn uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
394 9:1 d26c 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
395 9:1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall.
396 9:1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”
397 9:1 cjr9 τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This could mean: (1) Here, **shaft** is another way of referring to the pit and describes it as long and narrow. (2) Here, **shaft** refers to the opening of the pit. Here, **shaft** could be: (1) another way of referring to the pit and describes it as long and narrow. (2) the opening of the pit.
398 9:1 p886 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom.
399 9:2 tp79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς καπνὸς καμίνου μεγάλης 1 A huge furnace gives off a great amount of thick, dark smoke. Alternate translation: “like the great amount of smoke that comes from a huge furnace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
400 9:2 nd4n ἐσκοτώθη 1 “became dark”
401 9:3 mb9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀκρίδες 1 insects that fly together in large groups. People fear them because they can eat up all the leaves in gardens and on trees. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
418 9:7 s9gl στέφανοι ὅμοιοι χρυσῷ 1 These were likenesses of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads.
419 9:10 mac3 ἔχουσιν οὐρὰς 1 The word **They** refers to the locusts.
420 9:10 qdc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁμοίας σκορπίοις καὶ κέντρα 1 A scorpion is a small insect with a poisonous stinger at the end of its long tail. The sting can cause severe pain or even death. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 9:6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “with stingers like scorpion stingers” or “with stingers that could cause terrible pain as scorpion stingers can” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
421 9:10 lim1 ἐν ταῖς οὐραῖς αὐτῶν ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτῶν ἀδικῆσαι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους μῆνας πέντε 1 This could mean: (1) They had power for five months to harm people. (2) They could sting people and the people would be in pain for five months. This could mean: (1) they had power for five months to harm people. (2) they could sting people and the people would be in pain for five months.
422 9:11 fiu6 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md). This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
423 9:11 bkg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀβαδδών & Ἀπολλύων 1 Both names mean “Destroyer.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
424 9:12 ts26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ἔτι δύο οὐαὶ 1 Existing in the future is spoken of as coming. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
425 9:13 cyb6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe sixth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
477 11:6 cac1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κλεῖσαι τὸν οὐρανόν, ἵνα μὴ ὑετὸς βρέχῃ 1 John speaks of the sky as if it had a door that can be opened to let rain fall or closed to stop the rain. Alternate translation: “to keep rain from falling from the sky” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
478 11:6 a7ed στρέφειν 1 “to change”
479 11:6 kth7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πατάξαι τὴν γῆν ἐν πάσῃ πληγῇ 1 John speaks of the plagues as if they were a stick that someone could hit the earth with. Alternate translation: “to cause all kinds of trouble to occur on earth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
480 11:7 i679 Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md). This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
481 11:8 r45p τὰ πτώματα αὐτῶν 1 This refers to the bodies of the two witnesses.
482 11:8 p9fu ἐπὶ τῆς πλατείας τῆς πόλεως τῆς μεγάλης 1 The city had more than one street. This was a public place where people could see them. Alternate translation: “in one of the streets of the great city” or “in the main street of the great city”
483 11:8 iea1 ὁ Κύριος αὐτῶν 1 They served the Lord, and like him would die in that city.
489 11:11 x3gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers τὰς τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ ἥμισυ 1 “3 full days and one half day” or “3.5 days” or “3 1/2 days.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 11:9](../11/09.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
490 11:11 al5w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πνεῦμα ζωῆς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτούς 1 The ability to breathe is spoken of as if it were something that can go into people. Alternate translation: “God will cause the two witnesses to breathe again and live” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
491 11:11 u265 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φόβος μέγας ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ τοὺς θεωροῦντας αὐτούς 1 Fear is spoken of as if it is a object that can fall on people. Alternate translation: “Those who see them will be extremely afraid” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
492 11:12 f8ze καὶ ἤκουσαν 1 This could mean: (1) The two witnesses will hear. (2) The people will hear what is said to the two witnesses. This could mean: (1) the two witnesses will hear. (2) the people will hear what is said to the two witnesses.
493 11:12 mkq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy φωνῆς μεγάλης ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 The word **voice** refers to the one who speaks. Alternate translation: “someone speak loudly to them from heaven and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
494 11:12 l1x7 λεγούσης αὐτοῖς 1 “say to the two witnesses”
495 11:13 p56r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων χιλιάδες ἑπτά 1 “7,000 people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
616 13:18 uk74 ὧδε ἡ σοφία ἐστίν 1 “Wisdom is needed” or “You need to be wise about this”
617 13:18 z8tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἔχων νοῦν ψηφισάτω 1 The word **insight** can be translated with the verb “understand.” Alternate translation: “If anyone is able to understand things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
618 13:18 ri1y ψηφισάτω τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦ θηρίου 1 “he should discern what the number of the beast means” or “he should figure out what the number of the beast means”
619 13:18 bbn2 ἀριθμὸς & ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν 1 This could mean: (1) The number represents one person. (2) The number represents all of humanity. The **number** could represent: (1) one person. (2) all of humanity.
620 14:intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Harvest\n\nHarvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
621 14:1 e7u7 0 # General Information:\n\nThe word **I** refers to John.
622 14:1 ck6y 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJohn begins to describe the next part of his vision. There are 144,000 believers standing before the Lamb.
629 14:3 ii11 τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων 1 “living being” or “living thing.” See how you translated “living creature” in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md)
630 14:3 m75y τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 This refers to the twenty-four elders around the throne. See how you translated “elders” in [Revelation 4:4](../04/04.md).
631 14:3 q6fc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες 1 “one hundred forty-four thousand.” See how you translated this in [Revelation 7:4](../07/04.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
632 14:4 jet6 μετὰ γυναικῶν οὐκ ἐμολύνθησαν 1 This could mean: (1) They have never had immoral sexual relations with a woman. (2) They have never had sexual relations with a woman. Defiling oneself with women may be a symbol of worshiping idols. This could mean: (1) they have never had immoral sexual relations with a woman. (2) they have never had sexual relations with a woman. Defiling oneself with women may be a symbol of worshiping idols.
633 14:4 a7ir παρθένοι 1 This could mean: (1) They did not have sexual relations with a woman who was not their wife. (2) They are virgins. This could mean: (1) they did not have sexual relations with a woman who was not their wife. (2) they are virgins.
634 14:4 q3hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀκολουθοῦντες τῷ Ἀρνίῳ ὅπου ἂν ὑπάγει 1 Doing what the Lamb does is spoken of as following him. Alternate translation: “they do whatever the Lamb does” or “they obey the Lamb” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
635 14:4 mlw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἠγοράσθησαν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπαρχὴ 1 **Firstfruits** here is a metaphor for the first offering to be made to God in celebration of harvest. Alternate translation: “purchased out of the midst of the rest of mankind as a special celebration of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
636 14:5 ga8p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτῶν οὐχ εὑρέθη ψεῦδος 1 Their “mouth” refers to what they said.” Alternate translation: “They never lied when they spoke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
654 14:13 x62q οἱ νεκροὶ οἱ & ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 “those who die”
655 14:13 hy1a οἱ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 “who are united to the Lord and die.” This may refer to people who are killed by their enemies. Alternate translation: “who die because they are united to the Lord”
656 14:13 vd4m τῶν κόπων 1 difficulties and sufferings
657 14:13 v4xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ & ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 These deeds are spoken of as if they were alive and able to follow those who did them. This could mean: (1) Others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) These deeds are spoken of as if they were alive and able to follow those who did them. This could mean: (1) others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
658 14:14 ft6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJohn begins to describe the next part of his vision. This part is about the Son of Man harvesting the earth. Harvesting the grain is a symbol of God’s judging people. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
659 14:14 gvw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου 1 This expression describes a human figure, someone who looks human. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
660 14:14 i8se στέφανον χρυσοῦν 1 This was the likeness of a wreath of olive branches or laurel leaves, hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads.
675 15:1 w6lf ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ 1 “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth”
676 15:1 mw7g τὰς ἐσχάτας 1 “and after them, there will not be any more plagues”
677 15:1 ij3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐν αὐταῖς ἐτελέσθη ὁ θυμὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for these plagues will complete the wrath of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
678 15:1 gdt5 ὅτι ἐν αὐταῖς ἐτελέσθη ὁ θυμὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) These plagues will show all of God’s anger. (2) After these plagues, God will no longer be angry. This could mean: (1) these plagues will show all of God’s anger. (2) after these plagues, God will no longer be angry.
679 15:2 ytq6 0 # General Information:\n\nHere John begins to describe his vision of the people who had been victorious over the beast and who are praising God.
680 15:2 n9yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θάλασσαν ὑαλίνην 1 You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) A sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) Glass if spoken of as if it were a sea. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) You can state clearly how it was like glass or a sea. This could mean: (1) a sea is spoken of as if it were glass. Alternate translation: “a sea that was as smooth as glass” (2) glass if spoken of as if it were a sea. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md). Alternate translation: “glass that was spread out like a sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
681 15:2 pt8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς νικῶντας ἐκ τοῦ θηρίου, καὶ ἐκ τῆς εἰκόνος αὐτοῦ 1 You can state clearly how they were victorious. Alternate translation: “who had been victorious over the beast and his image by not worshiping them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
682 15:2 dbz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 You can state clearly how they were victorious over the number. Alternate translation: “over the number representing his name by not being marked with that number” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
683 15:2 lra7 τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 This refers to the number described in [Revelation 13:18](../13/18.md).
704 16:3 sx66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τὴν θάλασσαν 1 This refers to all the salt water lakes and oceans. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
705 16:4 p4ae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξέχεεν τὴν φιάλην αὐτοῦ 1 The word **bowl** refers to what is in it. See how you translated this in [Revelation 16:2](../16/02.md). Alternate translation: “poured out the wine from his bowl” or “poured out God’s wrath from his bowl” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
706 16:4 xu1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τοὺς ποταμοὺς καὶ τὰς πηγὰς τῶν ὑδάτων 1 This refers to all bodies of fresh water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
707 16:5 f35a τοῦ ἀγγέλου τῶν ὑδάτων 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the third angel who was in charge of pouring out God’s wrath on the rivers and springs of water. (2) This was another angel who was in charge of all the waters. This could refers to: (1) the third angel who was in charge of pouring out God’s wrath on the rivers and springs of water. (2) another angel who was in charge of all the waters.
708 16:5 e45u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you δίκαιος εἶ 1 “You” refers to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
709 16:5 itg7 ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν 1 “God who is and who was.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 1:4](../01/04.md).
710 16:6 b6wa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy αἷμα ἁγίων καὶ προφητῶν ἐξέχεαν 1 Here, **poured out the blood** means killed. Alternate translation: “they murdered God’s holy people and the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
761 17:6 yqi7 τῶν μαρτύρων Ἰησοῦ 1 “the believers who have died because they told others about Jesus”
762 17:6 ydi9 ἐθαύμασα 1 amazed, surprised
763 17:7 j412 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐθαύμασας 1 The angel used this question to gently scold John. Alternate translation: “You should not be astonished!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
764 17:8 upm7 τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md). This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
765 17:8 usl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The noun “destruction” can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “Then he will be destroyed” or “Then God will destroy him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
766 17:8 glf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The certainty of what will happen in the future is spoken of as if the beast were going to it. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
767 17:8 r6h4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὧν οὐ γέγραπται τὰ ὀνόματα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whose names God did not write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
772 17:10 d2wx ὁ εἷς ἔστιν 1 “one is king now” or “one king is alive now”
773 17:10 kw95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ εἷς ἔστιν, ὁ ἄλλος οὔπω ἦλθεν 1 Not having existed yet is spoken of as not yet having come. Alternate translation: “the other has not yet become king; when he becomes king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
774 17:10 v8vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλθῃ, ὀλίγον αὐτὸν δεῖ μεῖναι 1 The angel speaks of someone continuing to be king as if he were remaining in a place. Alternate translation: “he can be king only for a little while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
775 17:11 b1ct ἐκ τῶν ἑπτά ἐστιν 1 This could mean: (1) The beast rules twice: first as one of the seven kings, and then as the eighth king. (2) The beast belongs to that group of seven kings because he is like them. This could mean: (1) the beast rules twice: first as one of the seven kings, and then as the eighth king. (2) the beast belongs to that group of seven kings because he is like them.
776 17:11 w7sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς ἀπώλειαν ὑπάγει 1 The certainty of what will happen in the future is spoken of as if the beast were going to it. Alternate translation: “it will certainly be destroyed” or “God will surely destroy it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
777 17:12 gq2m 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe angel continues speaking to John. Here he explains the meaning of the ten horns of the beast.
778 17:12 n2rd rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μίαν ὥραν 1 If your language does not divide the day into 24 hours, you may need to use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “for a very short time” or “for a very small part of a day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
810 18:6 ec42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπόδοτε αὐτῇ ὡς καὶ αὐτὴ ἀπέδωκεν 1 The voice speaks of punishment as if it were payment. Alternate translation: “Punish her as she has punished others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
811 18:6 pa62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διπλώσατε 1 The voice speaks of punishment as if it were payment. Alternate translation: “punish her twice as much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
812 18:6 xba5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ ἐκέρασεν, κεράσατε αὐτῇ διπλοῦν 1 The voice speaks of causing others to suffer as preparing strong wine for them to drink. Alternate translation: “prepare for her the wine of suffering that is twice as strong as what she made for others” or “make her suffer twice as much as she made others suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
813 18:6 l3n5 κεράσατε & διπλοῦν 1 This could mean: (1) They should prepare twice the amount. (2) They should make it twice as strong. This could mean: (1) they should prepare twice the amount. (2) they should make it twice as strong.
814 18:7 i9bm 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe same voice from heaven continues speaking about Babylon as if it were a woman.
815 18:7 we2t ἐδόξασεν αὑτὴν 1 “the people of Babylon glorified themselves”
816 18:7 yt32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὅτι ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς λέγει 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: “For she says to herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
926 20:intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The thousand-year reign of Christ\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])\n\n### Final rebellion\n\nThis chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God’s ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])\n\n### Great white throne\n\nThis chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Book of Life\n\nThis is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Hades and the lake of fire\n\nThese appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
927 20:1 rkv7 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn begins to describe a vision of an angel throwing the devil into the bottomless pit.
928 20:1 n8b8 καὶ εἶδον 1 Here, **I** refers to John.
929 20:1 c18c Ἀβύσσου 1 This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) The pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) The pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md). This is an extremely deep narrow hole. This could mean: (1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever. (2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md).
930 20:2 r6es rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage δράκοντα 1 This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
931 20:3 xj22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐσφράγισεν ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ 1 The angel sealed the pit to keep anyone from opening it. Alternate translation: “sealed it to prevent anyone from opening it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
932 20:3 el4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πλανήσῃ & τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **nations** is a metonym for the people of the earth. Alternate translation: “deceive the people-groups” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
973 21:4 w39g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 **Tears** here represent sadness. See how you translated this in [Revelation 7:17](../07/17.md). Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
974 21:5 rq2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι πιστοὶ καὶ ἀληθινοί εἰσιν 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. Alternate translation: “this message is trustworthy and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
975 21:6 dq8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ, ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize God’s eternal nature. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
976 21:6 li7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) This refers to the one who has always lived and who always will live. If these are unclear to readers, you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) the one who has always lived and who always will live. If these are unclear to readers, you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
977 21:6 bf1p ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) This refers to the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things. This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things.
978 21:6 wk2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ διψῶντι & τοῦ ὕδατος τῆς ζωῆς 1 God speaks of a person’s desire for eternal life as if it were thirst and of that person receiving eternal life as if he were drinking life-giving water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
979 21:7 vms6 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThe one seated on the throne continues to speak to John.
980 21:8 hma7 τοῖς & δειλοῖς 1 “those who are too afraid to do what is right”
1017 22:1 yn2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ποταμὸν ὕδατος ζωῆς 1 Eternal life is spoken of as if it were provided by life-giving water. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1018 22:1 mxp4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 This is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1019 22:2 l2aq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Here, **nations** refers to the people who live in every nation. Alternate translation: “the people of all nations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1020 22:3 d5fq πᾶν κατάθεμα οὐκ ἔσται ἔτι 1 This could mean: (1) There will never be anyone there that God will curse. (2) There will not be anyone there who is under God’s curse. This could mean: (1) there will never be anyone there that God will curse. (2) there will not be anyone there who is under God’s curse.
1021 22:3 by36 οἱ δοῦλοι αὐτοῦ λατρεύσουσιν αὐτῷ 1 Here, **his** and **him** could mean: (1) This refers to God the Father. (2) This refers to both God and the Lamb, who rule together as one. Here, **his** and **him** could refer to: (1) God the Father. (2) both God and the Lamb, who rule together as one.
1022 22:4 zy4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὄψονται τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 This is an idiom, meaning to be in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “They will be in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1023 22:6 j51i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit 0 # General Information:\n\nThis is the beginning of the end of John’s vision. In verse 6 the angel is speaking to John. In verse 7, Jesus is speaking. This can be shown clearly as is in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1024 22:6 xaw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι πιστοὶ καὶ ἀληθινοί 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:5](../21/05.md). Alternate translation: “This message is trustworthy and true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1025 22:6 cr31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν προφητῶν 1 This could mean: (1) The word **spirits** refers to the inward disposition of the prophets and indicates that God inspires them. Alternate translation: “God who inspires the prophets” (2) The word **spirits** refers to the Holy Spirit who inspires the prophets. Alternate translation: “God who gives his Spirit to the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) The word **spirits** refers to: (1) the inward disposition of the prophets and indicates that God inspires them. Alternate translation: “God who inspires the prophets” (2) the Holy Spirit who inspires the prophets. Alternate translation: “God who gives his Spirit to the prophets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1026 22:7 p72h ἰδοὺ 1 Here Jesus begins to speak. The word **Look** adds emphasis to what follows.
1027 22:7 afr9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχομαι ταχύ 1 It is understood that he is coming in order to judge. See how you translated this in [Revelation 3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “I am coming to judge soon!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1028 22:8 xr17 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn tells his readers about how he responded to the angel.
1032 22:10 xc15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τῆς προφητείας τοῦ βιβλίου τούτου 1 Here, **words** refers to the message that they formed. See how you translated this in [Revelation 22:7](../22/07.md). Alternate translation: “This prophetic message of this book” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1033 22:12 idc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory 0 # General Information:\n\nAs the book of Revelation is ending, Jesus gives a closing greeting. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1034 22:13 f5jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ, ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 These three phrases share similar meanings and emphasize that Jesus has and will exist for all time. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1035 22:13 uup6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Ἄλφα καὶ τὸ Ὦ 1 These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) This refers to the one who has always lived and who always will live. If unclear to readers you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) These are first and last letters of the Greek alphabet. This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and who ends all things. (2) the one who has always lived and who always will live. If unclear to readers you may consider using the first and last letters of your alphabet. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “the A and the Z” or “the first and the last” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1036 22:13 cpl9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος 1 This refers to the eternal nature of Jesus. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1037 22:13 nnm2 ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ τὸ τέλος 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) This refers to the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md). This could refer to: (1) the one who began all things and the one who will cause all things to end. (2) the one who existed before all things and who will exist after all things. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md).
1038 22:14 r16s 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nJesus continues giving his closing greeting.
1039 22:14 i54w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ πλύνοντες τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν 1 Becoming righteous is spoken of as if it were washing one’s clothing. See how you translated as similar phrase in [Revelation 7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “those who have become righteous, as if they have washed their robes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1040 22:15 aw1h ἔξω 1 This means they are outside the city and not allowed to enter.
1044 22:16 g9uj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ ἀστὴρ ὁ λαμπρός, ὁ πρωϊνός 1 Jesus speaks of himself as if he were the bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning and indicates that a new day is about to begin. See how you translated “morning star” in [Revelation 2:28](../02/28.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1045 22:17 gig5 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nThis verse is a response to what Jesus said.
1046 22:17 lt8j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ νύμφη 1 Believers are spoken of as if they were a bride about to be married to her groom, Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1047 22:17 m9at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔρχου 1 This could mean: (1) This is an invitation for people to come and drink the water of life. Alternate translation: “Come and drink!” (2) This is a polite request for Jesus to return. Alternate translation: “Please come!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This could mean: (1) this is an invitation for people to come and drink the water of life. Alternate translation: “Come and drink!” (2) this is a polite request for Jesus to return. Alternate translation: “Please come!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1048 22:17 e2m5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ διψῶν ἐρχέσθω & ὕδωρ ζωῆς 1 A person’s desire for eternal life is spoken of as if it were thirst and of that person receiving eternal life as if he were drinking life-giving water. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1049 22:17 dwb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὕδωρ ζωῆς 1 Eternal life is spoken of as if it were provided by life-giving water. See how you translated this in [Revelation 21:6](../21/06.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1050 22:18 fd5l 0 # General Information:\n\nJohn gives his final remarks about the book of Revelation.

1368
tn_ROM.tsv
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

46
tn_TIT.tsv
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Titus\n\n1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)\n2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)\n3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Titus?\n\nPaul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\n### What is the Book of Titus about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### In what roles can people serve within the church?\n\nThere are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural **you**\n\nIn this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?\n\nThis is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Titus\n\n1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)\n2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)\n3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)\n\n### Who wrote the book of Titus?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\n### What is the book of Titus about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### In what roles can people serve within the church?\n\nThere are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural **you**\n\nIn this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?\n\nThis is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
1:intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\nIn verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Elders\n\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Should, may, must\n\nThe ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
1:1 rtc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:1 xyz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@ -8,13 +8,13 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:2 xyz9 ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου 1 “that gives us the certain hope of everlasting life” or “based on our certain hope for everlasting life”
1:2 r2gj πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 “before time began”
1:3 b22h καιροῖς ἰδίοις 1 “at the proper time”
1:3 swi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐφανέρωσεν & τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “He caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 swi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐφανέρωσεν & τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “he caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 abc9 ἐν κηρύγματι 1 “through the proclamation of the message”
1:3 m41u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:3 dpn4 τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 “of God, who saves us”
1:3 xy18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:4 gu55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γνησίῳ τέκνῳ 1 Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “because we both believe in Christ”
1:4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “our belief in Christ”
1:4 h93t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1:4 s3yr Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 “Christ Jesus who is our Savior”
1:4 xy17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@ -22,13 +22,13 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:5 lh9b ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ 1 “I told you to stay in Crete”
1:5 ga62 ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 1 “so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done”
1:5 b52u καταστήσῃς & πρεσβυτέρους 1 “appoint elders” or “designate elders”
1:5 p56w πρεσβυτέρους 1 In the early Christian churches, Christian elders gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
1:5 p56w πρεσβυτέρους 1 In the early Christian churches, Christian **elders** gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
1:6 wja4 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders.
1:6 jen8 εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος 1 This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “an elder must be without blame” or “an elder must not have a bad reputation”
1:6 ab70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀνέγκλητος 1 To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” You can state this positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1:6 q6uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ 1 This means that he has only one wife, that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 wd6q τέκνα & πιστά 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to children who believe in Jesus. (2) This refers to children who are trustworthy.
1:7 lz7x τὸν ἐπίσκοπον 1 This is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church.
1:6 q6uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ 1 This means that he has only one wife; that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:6 wd6q τέκνα & πιστά 1 This could refer to: (1) children who believe in Jesus. (2) children who are trustworthy.
1:7 lz7x τὸν ἐπίσκοπον 1 The word **overseer** is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church.
1:7 g2zf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον 1 Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s household, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:7 d6l1 μὴ πάροινον 1 “not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine”
1:7 j1qq μὴ πλήκτην 1 “not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight”
@ -47,16 +47,16 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:10 pu74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς 1 This refers to the Jewish Christians who taught that men must be circumcised in order to follow Christ. This teaching is false. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:11 f4iy οὓς δεῖ ἐπιστομίζειν 1 “You must prevent them from spreading their teachings” or “Someone must stop them from influencing others by their words”
1:11 aqi5 ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν 1 “are ruining entire families.” The issue was that they were leading families away from the truth and destroying their faith.
1:11 tw4e διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ 1 These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the Law because they are not true.
1:11 tw4e διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ 1 These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the law because they are not true.
1:11 at7c αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν 1 This refers to profit that people make by doing things that are not honorable.
1:12 tr1j τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης 1 “A Cretan that they themselves consider to be a prophet”
1:12 y3zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 “Cretans lie all the time”. This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:12 y3zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 “Cretans lie all the time.” This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:12 h3jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κακὰ θηρία 1 This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 xyz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche γαστέρες ἀργαί 1 The part of the body that stores food is used to represent the person who eats all the time. Alternate translation: “lazy gluttons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1:13 fif8 δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως 1 “For that reason, you must use strong language that the Cretans will understand when you correct them”
1:13 abck rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 The connecting words **For this reason** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is that what the Cretan prophet said about his people is true (they are liars, evil, and lazy), and the result is that Titus should rebuke them severely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:13 je3r ἵνα ὑγιαίνωσιν ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 See note on **sound** in [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “so they will have a healthy faith” or “so their faith may be true” or “so that they believe only what is true about God”
1:13 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the result is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:13 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce an action-purpose relationship. The action is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the purpose is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
1:13 xyz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Here the abstract noun **faith** represents the things that the people believe about God. Alternate translation: “in what they believe about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:14 abcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ 1 The connecting word **not** introduces a contrast to being “sound in the faith” in the previous verse. In order to be sound in the faith, the people must not pay any attention to the Jewish myths or the commands of people who do not follow the truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1:14 p28i Ἰουδαϊκοῖς μύθοις 1 This refers to the false teaching of the Jews.
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
1:16 ja47 βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες 1 “They are disgusting”
2:intro h3il 0 # Titus 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Gender roles\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.\n\n### Slavery\n\nPaul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
2:1 lfu1 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers.
2:1 tpi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ δὲ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here as in the UST ([[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 tpi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ δὲ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here, as in the UST. ([[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 See the note on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings”
2:2 xyz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτας & εἶναι 1 The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We need to supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:2 xy13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet νηφαλίους & σεμνούς, σώφρονας 1 These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@ -80,20 +80,20 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:2 m14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει 1 You can state the abstract noun **faith** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “firmly believe the true teachings about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:2 z14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 You can state the abstract noun **love** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “truly love others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:2 a14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 You can state the abstract noun **perseverance** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “and continually serve God even when things are difficult” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:3 gl8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως 1 The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women” or “Also teach older women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:3 gl8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως 1 The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women to be” or “Also teach older women to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:3 v9cp διαβόλους 1 This word refers to people who say bad things about other people whether they are true or not.
2:3 g9re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 People who cannot control themselves and drink too much wine are spoken of as if they were a slave to the wine. Alternate translation: “controlled by their desire for wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:3 xyz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “drinking too much wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:3 abc4 καλοδιδασκάλους 1 The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good”. The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities.
2:3 abc4 καλοδιδασκάλους 1 The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good.” The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities.
2:4 abc5 φιλάνδρους 1 “lovers of their own husbands”
2:4 abca φιλοτέκνους 1 “and lovers of their own children”
2:5 abcb ὑποτασσομένας τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 “and to obey their own husbands”
2:5 t5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται 1 Here, **word** is a metonym for “message”, which in turn is a metonym for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 t5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται 1 Here, **word** is a metonym for “message.” which in turn is a metonym for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:5 abcq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that no one insults the word of God” or “so that no one insults God by saying bad things about his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:6 i3hv ὡσαύτως 1 Titus was to train the younger men just as he was to train the older people.
2:7 x73u σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος 1 “show yourself to be” or “you yourself must be”
2:7 x73u σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος 1 “show yourself to be” or “you yourself must serve”
2:7 ym6x τύπον καλῶν ἔργων 1 “as an example of one who does right and proper things”
2:8 xy14 ὑγιῆ 1 This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’s teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms.
2:8 xy14 ὑγιῆ 1 This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’ teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms.
2:8 xt6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ 1 This presents a hypothetical situation in which someone opposes Titus and then becomes ashamed for having done so. Alternate translation: “so that if anyone opposes you, he may be ashamed” or “so that when people oppose you, they may be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2:8 xy15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:9 xyz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 The Greek does not have **are**, but only “slaves to be subject to their masters.” We need to apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is “urge” or “exhort.” Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:10 h2n6 ἐν πᾶσιν 1 “in everything they do”
2:10 f8jy τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ, κοσμῶσιν 1 “they may make the teaching about God our Savior attractive” or “they may cause people to understand that the teaching about God our Savior is good”
2:10 pn93 Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 “our God who saves us”
2:10 xy16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:10 xy16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2:11 y44u 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus.
2:11 gp2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐπεφάνη & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the grace of God as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2:12 qy8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
2:12 xy19 ἀσέβειαν & εὐσεβῶς 1 These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively.
2:12 fk8j ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 “while we live in this world” or “during this time”
2:13 rz93 προσδεχόμενοι 1 **while we wait to welcome**
2:13 xyz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα 1 Here what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 xyz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα 1 Here, what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 pss7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **glory** represents Jesus himself who will appear gloriously. Alternate translation: “that is, the glorious appearance of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:13 abcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης 1 Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2:13 xyz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@ -134,9 +134,9 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:1 y9tr 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete.
3:1 j2sa ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς & ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit”
3:1 w3fy ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 “to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them”
3:1 wa9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:1 xy25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:1 in7u πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι 1 “be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity”
3:1 wa9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:1 xy25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
3:1 in7u πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι 1 “to be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity”
3:2 lug7 βλασφημεῖν 1 “to speak evil of”
3:2 abcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀμάχους εἶναι 1 You can state this positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:3 m9zd ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 “This is because we ourselves were once”
@ -191,9 +191,9 @@ front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introducti
3:14 mji4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:14 xy32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 You can state this positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3:15 j3y2 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul ends his letter to Titus.
3:15 abci ἀσπάζονταί σε 1 Here, **you** is singular–this is a personal greeting to Titus.
3:15 abci ἀσπάζονταί σε 1 Here, **you** is singular. This is a personal greeting to Titus.
3:15 k1sa οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες 1 “All the people who are with me” or “All of the believers who are here with me”
3:15 f4vc τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “the believers who love us” (2) “the believers who love us because we share the same belief”.
3:15 f4vc τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει 1 This could refer to: (1) the believers who love us. (2) the believers who love us because we share the same belief.
3:15 xy35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** is probably exclusive and refers to Paul and the group of Christians with him. Paul is sending greetings from this group to the group of Christians that is with Titus on Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3:15 kx83 ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 This was a common Christian greeting. Alternate translation: “May God’s grace be with you” or “I ask that God will be gracious to all of you”
3:15 xy34 ὑμῶν 1 Here, **you** is plural. This blessing is for Titus and all of the believers there in Crete.

1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Titus\n\n1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)\n2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)\n3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Titus?\n\nPaul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\n### What is the Book of Titus about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### In what roles can people serve within the church?\n\nThere are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural **you**\n\nIn this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?\n\nThis is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. # Introduction to Titus\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Titus\n\n1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)\n2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)\n3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)\n\n### Who wrote the book of Titus?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\n### What is the book of Titus about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### In what roles can people serve within the church?\n\nThere are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural **you**\n\nIn this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?\n\nThis is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**.
3 1:intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\nIn verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Elders\n\nThe church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Should, may, must\n\nThe ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
4 1:1 rtc9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
5 1:1 xyz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
8 1:2 xyz9 ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι ζωῆς αἰωνίου 1 “that gives us the certain hope of everlasting life” or “based on our certain hope for everlasting life”
9 1:2 r2gj πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 “before time began”
10 1:3 b22h καιροῖς ἰδίοις 1 “at the proper time”
11 1:3 swi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐφανέρωσεν & τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “He caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Paul speaks of God’s word as if it were an object that could be visibly shown to people. Alternate translation: “he caused me to understand his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
12 1:3 abc9 ἐν κηρύγματι 1 “through the proclamation of the message”
13 1:3 m41u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14 1:3 dpn4 τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 “of God, who saves us”
15 1:3 xy18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
16 1:4 gu55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γνησίῳ τέκνῳ 1 Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17 1:4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “because we both believe in Christ” Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “our belief in Christ”
18 1:4 h93t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
19 1:4 s3yr Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 “Christ Jesus who is our Savior”
20 1:4 xy17 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
22 1:5 lh9b ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ 1 “I told you to stay in Crete”
23 1:5 ga62 ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 1 “so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done”
24 1:5 b52u καταστήσῃς & πρεσβυτέρους 1 “appoint elders” or “designate elders”
25 1:5 p56w πρεσβυτέρους 1 In the early Christian churches, Christian elders gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith. In the early Christian churches, Christian **elders** gave spiritual leadership to the assemblies of believers. This word refers to people who are mature in faith.
26 1:6 wja4 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders.
27 1:6 jen8 εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος 1 This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “an elder must be without blame” or “an elder must not have a bad reputation”
28 1:6 ab70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀνέγκλητος 1 To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” You can state this positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
29 1:6 q6uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ 1 This means that he has only one wife, that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) This means that he has only one wife; that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
30 1:6 wd6q τέκνα & πιστά 1 This could mean: (1) This refers to children who believe in Jesus. (2) This refers to children who are trustworthy. This could refer to: (1) children who believe in Jesus. (2) children who are trustworthy.
31 1:7 lz7x τὸν ἐπίσκοπον 1 This is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church. The word **overseer** is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church.
32 1:7 g2zf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον 1 Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s household, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
33 1:7 d6l1 μὴ πάροινον 1 “not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine”
34 1:7 j1qq μὴ πλήκτην 1 “not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight”
47 1:10 pu74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς 1 This refers to the Jewish Christians who taught that men must be circumcised in order to follow Christ. This teaching is false. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
48 1:11 f4iy οὓς δεῖ ἐπιστομίζειν 1 “You must prevent them from spreading their teachings” or “Someone must stop them from influencing others by their words”
49 1:11 aqi5 ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν 1 “are ruining entire families.” The issue was that they were leading families away from the truth and destroying their faith.
50 1:11 tw4e διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ 1 These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the Law because they are not true. These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the law because they are not true.
51 1:11 at7c αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν 1 This refers to profit that people make by doing things that are not honorable.
52 1:12 tr1j τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης 1 “A Cretan that they themselves consider to be a prophet”
53 1:12 y3zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 “Cretans lie all the time”. This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) “Cretans lie all the time.” This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
54 1:12 h3jb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κακὰ θηρία 1 This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
55 1:12 xyz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche γαστέρες ἀργαί 1 The part of the body that stores food is used to represent the person who eats all the time. Alternate translation: “lazy gluttons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
56 1:13 fif8 δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως 1 “For that reason, you must use strong language that the Cretans will understand when you correct them”
57 1:13 abck rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 The connecting words **For this reason** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is that what the Cretan prophet said about his people is true (they are liars, evil, and lazy), and the result is that Titus should rebuke them severely. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
58 1:13 je3r ἵνα ὑγιαίνωσιν ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 See note on **sound** in [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “so they will have a healthy faith” or “so their faith may be true” or “so that they believe only what is true about God”
59 1:13 abcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce a reason-result relationship. The reason is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the result is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) The connecting words **so that** introduce an action-purpose relationship. The action is the elder rebukes the Cretans severely, and the purpose is the Cretans become sound in the faith. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
60 1:13 xyz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Here the abstract noun **faith** represents the things that the people believe about God. Alternate translation: “in what they believe about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
61 1:14 abcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ 1 The connecting word **not** introduces a contrast to being “sound in the faith” in the previous verse. In order to be sound in the faith, the people must not pay any attention to the Jewish myths or the commands of people who do not follow the truth. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
62 1:14 p28i Ἰουδαϊκοῖς μύθοις 1 This refers to the false teaching of the Jews.
70 1:16 ja47 βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες 1 “They are disgusting”
71 2:intro h3il 0 # Titus 2 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Gender roles\n\nScholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.\n\n### Slavery\n\nPaul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
72 2:1 lfu1 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers.
73 2:1 tpi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺ δὲ 1 Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here as in the UST ([[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here, as in the UST. ([[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
74 2:1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 See the note on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings”
75 2:2 xyz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτας & εἶναι 1 The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We need to supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
76 2:2 xy13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet νηφαλίους & σεμνούς, σώφρονας 1 These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
80 2:2 m14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει 1 You can state the abstract noun **faith** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “firmly believe the true teachings about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
81 2:2 z14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 You can state the abstract noun **love** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “truly love others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
82 2:2 a14y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 You can state the abstract noun **perseverance** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “and continually serve God even when things are difficult” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
83 2:3 gl8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως 1 The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women” or “Also teach older women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women to be” or “Also teach older women to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
84 2:3 v9cp διαβόλους 1 This word refers to people who say bad things about other people whether they are true or not.
85 2:3 g9re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 People who cannot control themselves and drink too much wine are spoken of as if they were a slave to the wine. Alternate translation: “controlled by their desire for wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
86 2:3 xyz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “drinking too much wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
87 2:3 abc4 καλοδιδασκάλους 1 The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good”. The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities. The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good.” The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities.
88 2:4 abc5 φιλάνδρους 1 “lovers of their own husbands”
89 2:4 abca φιλοτέκνους 1 “and lovers of their own children”
90 2:5 abcb ὑποτασσομένας τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 “and to obey their own husbands”
91 2:5 t5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται 1 Here, **word** is a metonym for “message”, which in turn is a metonym for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, **word** is a metonym for “message.” which in turn is a metonym for God himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
92 2:5 abcq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ βλασφημῆται 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that no one insults the word of God” or “so that no one insults God by saying bad things about his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
93 2:6 i3hv ὡσαύτως 1 Titus was to train the younger men just as he was to train the older people.
94 2:7 x73u σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος 1 “show yourself to be” or “you yourself must be” “show yourself to be” or “you yourself must serve”
95 2:7 ym6x τύπον καλῶν ἔργων 1 “as an example of one who does right and proper things”
96 2:8 xy14 ὑγιῆ 1 This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’s teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms. This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’ teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms.
97 2:8 xt6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ 1 This presents a hypothetical situation in which someone opposes Titus and then becomes ashamed for having done so. Alternate translation: “so that if anyone opposes you, he may be ashamed” or “so that when people oppose you, they may be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
98 2:8 xy15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
99 2:9 xyz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 The Greek does not have **are**, but only “slaves to be subject to their masters.” We need to apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is “urge” or “exhort.” Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
105 2:10 h2n6 ἐν πᾶσιν 1 “in everything they do”
106 2:10 f8jy τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ, κοσμῶσιν 1 “they may make the teaching about God our Savior attractive” or “they may cause people to understand that the teaching about God our Savior is good”
107 2:10 pn93 Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 “our God who saves us”
108 2:10 xy16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
109 2:11 y44u 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus.
110 2:11 gp2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐπεφάνη & ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the grace of God as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
111 2:12 qy8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
115 2:12 xy19 ἀσέβειαν & εὐσεβῶς 1 These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively.
116 2:12 fk8j ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 “while we live in this world” or “during this time”
117 2:13 rz93 προσδεχόμενοι 1 **while we wait to welcome**
118 2:13 xyz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα 1 Here what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Here, what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
119 2:13 pss7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **glory** represents Jesus himself who will appear gloriously. Alternate translation: “that is, the glorious appearance of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
120 2:13 abcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης 1 Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
121 2:13 xyz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
134 3:1 y9tr 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete.
135 3:1 j2sa ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς & ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit”
136 3:1 w3fy ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 “to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them”
137 3:1 wa9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
138 3:1 xy25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
139 3:1 in7u πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι 1 “be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity” “to be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity”
140 3:2 lug7 βλασφημεῖν 1 “to speak evil of”
141 3:2 abcx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀμάχους εἶναι 1 You can state this positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
142 3:3 m9zd ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 “This is because we ourselves were once”
191 3:14 mji4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
192 3:14 xy32 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 You can state this positively: “in this way they will be fruitful” or “in this way they will be productive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
193 3:15 j3y2 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul ends his letter to Titus.
194 3:15 abci ἀσπάζονταί σε 1 Here, **you** is singular–this is a personal greeting to Titus. Here, **you** is singular. This is a personal greeting to Titus.
195 3:15 k1sa οἱ μετ’ ἐμοῦ πάντες 1 “All the people who are with me” or “All of the believers who are here with me”
196 3:15 f4vc τοὺς φιλοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἐν πίστει 1 Possible meanings are: (1) “the believers who love us” (2) “the believers who love us because we share the same belief”. This could refer to: (1) the believers who love us. (2) the believers who love us because we share the same belief.
197 3:15 xy35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** is probably exclusive and refers to Paul and the group of Christians with him. Paul is sending greetings from this group to the group of Christians that is with Titus on Crete. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
198 3:15 kx83 ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 This was a common Christian greeting. Alternate translation: “May God’s grace be with you” or “I ask that God will be gracious to all of you”
199 3:15 xy34 ὑμῶν 1 Here, **you** is plural. This blessing is for Titus and all of the believers there in Crete.